b.a. part-i english semester-i session 2014-15 · b.a. part-i english semester-i session 2014-15...

10-A(423)

B.A. Part-I English Semester-I

Session 2014-15 Text Prescribed – Literature and Language I Edited by: Loveleen Mohan Randeep Rana Jaibir Singh Hooda Publishers: Orient Blackswan Workload: 8 periods of 45 minutes per week for Text; 2 periods of 45 minutes per week for composition for a group of 20 students per group Scheme of Examination

Total 100 marks Theory : 80 Int. Assessment : 20 Time : 3 hrs

Instructions to the Paper Setter and the Students: Note: All questions are compulsory. Marks have been indicated after each question. Q 1. This question will be based on phonetic transcription given in the chapters in the text book. The students shall transcribe eight words out of the given twelve. (08) Q 2. This question will be short answer type based on the chapters in the text book. The students shall answer any four out of the given six short questions(in about 30 words each).

(08) Q 3. This question will be designed to assess the understanding of the text by the students. The students shall answer any five out of the given eight questions based on the chapters (in about 75-100 words each). (20) Q.4. This question will be based on a comprehension passage from the text followed by four questions. (04) Q 5. This question will be based on vocabulary from the exercises following the chapters. The students shall attempt questions on vocabulary as directed. (e.g. framing sentences of their own or giving various forms of the given words, synonyms, antonyms, one word substitutes). The students shall answer any eight out of the given twelve words. (08) Q 6 This question will be based on grammar from the text book. It will consist of two parts:

a) This part will be based on the use of tenses. The students shall attempt 12 out of 15 questions.

(12) b) This part will be based on parts of the speech. The students shall attempt 12 out of

15 questions. (12)

Note: Questions will be based on the exercises but not from the exercises as such. Q 7. The students shall write one paragraph (in about 200 words) on any one of the four

topics given. (08)

10-A(424)

SCHEME OF EXAMINATION AND SYLLABUS THE POST-GRADUATE COURSE IN OF

M.A. - SOUTH ASIAN STUDIES (SEMESTER SYSTEM) (W.E.F. the Session 2014-15) in phased manner.

M.A.-South Asian Studies Course shall be a two years Degree Course consisting of four Semesters of 2000 marks. The candidate shall take Five Papers in each Semester, i.e., 20 Papers in the full Course. Each Paper will carry 100 marks out of which 20 marks shall be earmarked for Internal Assessment. M.A. (Previous) South Asian Studies 1st, Semester: There shall be one Core Paper and Six Optional Papers. The candidate shall take any four optional Papers out of the given list of Six Optional Papers. M.A. (Previous) South Asian Studies 2nd, Semester: There shall be one Core Paper and Six Optional Papers. The candidate shall take any four optional Papers out of the given list of Six Optional Papers.

Note:- The choice of the Optional Papers in M.A. Course shall be determined on the basis of merit. Moreover, the Department shall decide the specific optional papers to be offered to the students in each Semester in a particular year.

M.A. (Previous) South Asian Studies, Semester-1st SCHEME OF EXAMINATION W.E.F. The Session 2014-2015

Paper No. Nomenclature

Internal Assessment

Theory Paper Marks

Total Marks

Time

Core Papers Paper- I Research Methodology 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Optional Papers Paper-II Colonialism in South Asia 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-III Nationalism in South Asia 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-IV Gandhi and Gandhism 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-V Islam in South Asia 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-VI The South Asia Region 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-VII India in South Asia 20 80 100 3 Hrs.

SEMESTER - 2nd

Paper No. Nomenclature Internal Assessment

Theory Paper Marks

Total Marks

Time

Core Papers Paper-VIII Imperialist Historiography on South Asia 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Optional Papers Paper- IX Modern Islam in South Asia 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-X Contemporary India (1947-1971) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-XI Contemporary Pakistan (1947-1977) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-XII Contemporary Bangladesh Upto 20th Century 20 80 100 3 Hrs.

Paper-XIII Contemporary Sri Lanka Upto 20th Century 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-XIV Contemporary Nepal Upto 20th Century 20 80 100 3 Hrs.

(Amarjit Singh)

(Professor &Chairman)

10-A(425)

Paper – I (Core Paper): Research Methodology

Marks: 80 Internal Assessment: 20

Time: 3 Hours Note: - The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall attempt five questions

in all. Question No. 1 will be compulsory, which will consist of four short conceptual / thematic questions of equal marks (i.e. 4 marks each) spread over the whole syllabus. The candidate shall attempt four more questions, selecting at least one from each Unit. Each question will carry equal marks ( i.e. 16 marks).

Unit – I Nature of Research in Social Sciences: Concept and Nature of Research; Significance of Research; Types of Research in Social Sciences; Facts, Causation and objectivity in Research

Unit – II Sources for the Study of South Asia : Archival Sources, Government Records, Private Papers, Journals and Newspapers; Literary Sources; Myth and Folklores and Oral Evidences

Unit – III Formulation of Research Design : Selection of theme; synopsis; Rational; Review of Literature; Field Work and interviews; Statistical Methods

Unit – IV Social Sciences and the Study of South Asia : History and Psycho-Analysis; History and Sociology; History and Anthropology; History and Literature; History and ethnicity.

Suggested Readings :

Ali, B. Sheikh History : Its Theory and Method Barns H.D. A History of Historical Writings Bentley, Michael (ed.) A Companion to Historiography Bloch, Marc The Historian’s Craft Bradburn, N.M. and Sudman S. Improving Interview Method and Questionnaire Design Buddha Prakash Itihas Darshan (Hindi) Burtens, Hans The Idea of Post Modern : A History Carr, E.H. What is History ? Clark Stuart The Annals Historians Collingwood, R.G. The Idea of History Comte Auguse The Course of Positivsit Philosophy Croce Benedito Philosophy of Spirit Dray Artur On History and Philosophy of History Elton, G.R. Practice of History Gardener Patrick Theories of History Gardener, Patrick Theories of History Hafferbitt, R.I and Clubb J.M. (ed.) Social Science Data Archives : Applications and Potential Helt Robert T and Turne E. Jhon The Methodology of Comparative Method Hughes Warrington Fifty Key Thinkers on History Jenkins Keith Post Modern History Reader Johnson, Allen Historian and Historical Evidence Knors K Chitina Advances in Social Theory and Methodlogy Ladurie, L. R. Territory of the Historian

10-A(426)

Leonard, M.M. The Nature of Historical Inquiry Majumdar, R.K. & A.N. Srivastava Historiography Marwick, Aurther The Nature of History Marwick, Aurther What History Is and Why It is Important ? Rath Sharda Methods in Political and Social Research Renier, G.T. History : Its Purpose and Method Singh R.A.P Methods in Social Research. Sridharan E. A Text Book of Historiography Sridharan, E. Itihas Lekh (Hindi) Topoloski Jarzy Methodology of History Topolski, Jarzy Methodology of History Upadhyaya H.C Social Survey Research and Statistics Walsh, W.H. Philosophy of History Wiggery, G.A. The Meaning of History William H.S. The Miodern Historians William, S.H. The Modern Historian Young P.V. Scientific Social Survey and Research

Paper – II (Optional Paper) : Colonialism in South Asia




Unit – I Colonialism: Features and Theories of Imperialism; Meaning and Nature of Colonialism; Some basic aspects of Colonialism; Stages of Colonialism and Colonial State

Unit – II Imperial Powers in South Asia: The Importance of South Asia for Europe and their Advent in the Region; The Portuguese, The Dutch; The English and the French; Imperialist Competition among The European Powers; The English East India Company and India.

Unit – III Expansion and Consolidation of British Power: Establishment of the British Power; Policies and Programmes of Expansion in South and West India; Instruments of Expansions: Wars and Diplomacy; Expansion Towards Burma and Afghanistan

Unit – IV Economic Impacts : Land Revenue Policies of the British; Flow of Foreign Capital and its Impacts; Commercialization of Agriculture; Decline of Handicraft industries; Drain of Wealth and Impacts. Suggested Readings :

Bayly, C.A. Indian Society and the Making of the British Empire Bose, Sugata and Ayesha Jalal Modern South Asia Chandhuri , K.N. The Trading Worldof Asia and the English East India Company

1660-1760 Chandra, Bipan Essay on Colonialism Chandra, Bipan Colonialsim and Nationalism in India Chandra, Bipan India’s Struggle for Independence

10-A(427)

Chandra, Bipan Rise and Growth of Economic Nationalism in India Chatterjee, Partha The Nation and its Fragments Desai ,A.R. (ed.) Peasant Struggle in India Dodwell, H.L. Cambridge History of India, Vol. V, VI Dutt ,R.C. Economic History of India, Vol.-I& Vol. II Dutt, R.P. India Today Guha ,Ranjit Elementary Aspects of Peasants insurgency in Colonial India Hardiman , David (ed.) Peasant Resistance in India 1858-1914 Heehs , Peter India’s Freedom Struggle 1858-1947 Kumar, Dharma The Cambridge Economis History of India, Vol. II Majumdar, R.C. British Paramouncy and the Indian Renaissance, Part I & II Metcalf, Charles Idelogy of the Raj Metcalf, D.Barbara and Thomas Metcalf

A Concise History of India.

Mill, James History of British India Naroji ,Dada Bhai Poverty and Un British Rule in India Pannikkar ,K.M. Asia and Western Dominance Roy Tirthonker Economic History of India 1856-1947 Sarkar, Sumit Modern India Tara Chand History of Freedom Movement in India, Vol. I and II Tomilision, B.R. Economy of Modern India

Paper – III (Optional Paper) : Nationalism in South Asia




Unit – I Emergence of Nationalism: Evangelicals, Utilitarians and Social Changes;; Socio- Religious Reform Movements; Modern Education and Nationalism

Unit – II Resistance to the Colonialism : Peasant and Tribal Uprisings before 1857; Causes, Nature and Impact of the Uprising of 1857; Beginning of the Organized Nationalism in South Asia

Unit – III Making of Indian Nation : Gandhi’s Nationalism in 1920s; Peasant Movements of 1920s; Working Class Movement of 1930s; Communal Politics of 1940s; Emergence of India and Pakistan

Unit – IV Emergence of New Nation States : Awami League and War of Liberation for Bangladesh; Mukti Bahni and Foundation of Bangladesh; Constitutional Process and Establishment of Parliamentary System in Nepal 1951-60; Ceylon National Congress and Sri Lanka National Movement; Independence of Sri Lanka


10-A(428)

A Shagar H. Bilgrani Afghanistan and British India : A Study in Foreign Relations Brown Judith Gandhi’s Rise to Power ; Indian Politics 1915-22 Brown Judith Gandhi : The Prisoner of Hope Chakraverty, S.R. and Virendra Narain (eds.)

Bangladesh Domestic Policies, Vol,. II

Chakraverty, S.R. and Virendra Narain (eds.)

Bangladesh Global Politics, Vol., III

Chand Tara History of the Freedom Movement in India Vols I-IV Chandra Bipan Rise and Growth of Economic Nationalism in India Chandra Bipan Colonialism and Nationalism in India Chandra Bipan Essays onNationalism Chandra Bipan India Since Independence Chandra, Bipan Essay on Colonialism Chandra, Bipan Colonialsim and Nationalism in India Chandra, Bipan Indira Struggle for Independence Chandra, Bipan Rise and Growth of Economic Nationalism in India Dodwell, H.L. Cambridge History of India, Vol. V, VI Dodwell, H.L. Cambridge History of India, Vol. V & VI Dutt, R.P. India Today Hasan Mushirul India’s Partition : Process, Strategy and Mobilization Hasan Mushirul Nationalism and Communal Politics in India 1916-1928 Hasan Zoya Politics and State in India Jayaswal, K.P. Chronology and History of Nepal Kodikara Sheltou U Foreign Policy of Sri Lanka Kumar, Dharma The Cambridge Economis History of India, Vol. II Majumdar R. C British Paramountcy and Indian Renaissance Vols IX-X Majumdar R. C. History of the Freedom Movement in India, Vol.I-IV Majumdar, R.C. British Paramountcy and the Indian Resassence Menon.V.P. Indian Foreign Policy Metcalf, Charles Idelogy of the Raj Mill, James History of British India Mohammed, Ayoob Bangladesh. Roy Tirthonker Economic History of India 1856-1947 Sarkar, Sumit Modern India Singh Amarjit Punjab Divided : Politis of Muslim League and Partition 1935-

1947 Stein Burton Thomas Munro : The Origins of the Colonial State and his

Visim of the Empire Sugata Bose and Ayesha Jalal Modern South Asia Tomilision, B.R. Cambridge and Economic History of India Wilson, A.J. Politicsl in Sri Lanka 1947-1979 Wright, D. History of Nepal

10-A(429)

Paper – IV (Optional Paper) : Gandhi and Gandhism


Time: 3 Hours

Note: - The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall attempt five questions in all. Question No. 1 will be compulsory, which will consist of four short conceptual / thematic questions of equal marks (i.e. 4 marks each) spread over the whole syllabus. The candidate shall attempt four more questions, selecting at least one from each Unit. Each question will carry equal marks ( i.e. 16 marks).

Unit – I Mahatma Gandhi : Early Life and Formative Influences; Gandhi in South Africa; Gandhi in India; Struggle for Peasants and Workers

Unit – II Gandhian Ideology : Satyagraha; Ahimsa; Swedeshi; Non-Cooperation; Gandhi and the Religion; Gandhi and the Women

Unit – III Towards Understanding Gandhi : Khilafat Movement; Non Cooperation; Gandhi and the Swarajist; Civil Disobedience; Constructive Work

Unit – IV Non-Violence on Trial : Gandhi, War and Cripps; Quit India Movement; Gandhi, Islam and Jinnah; Gandhi and The Raj; Partition and Independence.

Suggested Readings:

Amin, Shahid Gandhi as Mahatma Bean, Susan Cloth and Human Experience Bengloo, Jahan Gandhian Moment Bhattacharya, Sabyasachi The Mahatma and the Poet Bhattachaya, Bhabani Gandhi : The Writer Bondurant, Joan Conquest of Violence Bose, N.K. My Days with Gandhi Brown, Judith Gandhi’s Rise to Power: Indian Politics 1915-22 Brown, Judith Gandhi : Prisoner of Hope Brown, Judith Gandhi and the Civil Disobedience Movement Gandhi, M.K. An Autobiography Gandhi, M.K. Hindi Swaraj and other Writings Malhotra, S.L. Gandhi: An Experiment with Communal Politics Malhotra, S.L. Gandhi and the Indian National Congress Nanda, B.R. Mahatma Gandhi : A Biography Nanda, B.R. In Search of Gandhi Nanda, B.R. Gandhi and His Critics Paul F. Power Gandhi on World Affairs Philips, C.H.(ed.) The Partitions of India : Politics and Perspectives 1935-1947 Prabhu, R.K> The Mind of Mahatma Gandhi Roy Walker The Wisdom of Gandhi S. Radha Krishnan (ed.) Mahatma Gandhi: Essays and Reflections

10-A(430)

Singh, Amarjit Punjab Divided : Politis of Muslim League and Partition 1935-1947 Smith ,Donald E. Gandhi Hinduism andMass Politics Tendulkar D.G. Mahatma: Life of Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi, Volume-I to VIII Uppal, J.N. Gandhi : Ordained in South Asia Vincent John We Must Not Feel Guilty Over Gandhi Paper – V (Optional Paper) Islam in South Asia


Time: 3 Hours


Unit – I Early Islam: Rise of Islam; Evolution of Islamic State under the Caliphate to Abbasides; Society and Economy under the Caliphate to Abbasides; Advancement of Education and Learning

Unit – II Islamic Invasions and South Asia: Early Invasions of Arabs in South Asia; Arabs Rule in Forbeayand Valley; Socio-Religious Cultural Transformation under the Arabs; The Gaznavid and its Invasions on South Asia; Mangols Invasions and its Impacts on South Asia.

Unit – III Sufism and South Asia: Rise of Sufism : Origins, Principle and Teachings; Emergance of Sufi Silsilahs in South Asia : Chisti, Suhravardi, Qadri Naqashbandi; Chistis and Suhravardis in India during the 13th and 14th Centuries; Qadris and Naqashbandis in India during the 15th and 16th Centuries.

Unit-IV Delhi Sultanate and Mughals: Nature of State under the Delhi Sultanate; The Nobility under the Delhi Sultanate; Nature of State under Mughals;; The Nobility under the Mughals and Manasabdari System.

Suggested Readings:

Abdul, Aziz The Mansardari System and the Mughal Army Amir Ali, Syed The Spirit of Islam Amir Ali, Syed The History of the Saracens Arnold Sir, Thomas Legacy of Islam Arther, Ali Mughal State Aslam, M Muslim Conduct of State Auqil Razziddin Sufi and Sufism in India Day. U.N. The Mughal Government (1556-1707) Eaton, Richards,M. India’s Islamic Traditions Hafiz Ghulam Sarwar The Holy Prophet Hasan, Ibn The Central Structure of the Mughal Empire. Hitti, P.K The History of Arabs Holt, P.M Cambridge History of Islam Hourani, Albert A History of Arab People Hussaini, S.A.Q Arab Administration Imamuddin, S.M. A Political History of the Muslim Jackson, Pitter The Delhi Sultanate Levy, R. Social Structure of Islam

10-A(431)

Mahmud, S.F. A Short History of Islam Nazimi, K.A. Religion and Politics in 13th Century Nicholson, R. The Literary History of the Arabs Qurishi, I.H Administration of Sultanate of Delhi Razvi, S.A.A History of Sufim Vol. I, II Razvi, S.A.A. Religious and Intellectual History of Muslims in Akbarisreign Richards, A.F The Mughal Empire Rostenthal, Franz The Classical Heritage in Islam Shrivastve, A.L Medinal Indian Culture Siddiqui, Amir Hasan Cultural Centres of Islam Sushma Yadav and R.A Sharma

Indian State : Origin and Development

Syed Hussain Narr Science and Civilization in Islam Topan Ray Chaudhary The Cambridge Economic History of India, Vol. I Watt, Montgomery The Majesty That Was Islam Watts, M Muhammad at Madina Watts, M. Muhammad at Mecca Well Hausan The Arab Kingdom and its Role Wellhausen, J Arab Empire and its Fall

Paper VI (Optional Paper) : The South Asia Region


Time: 3 Hours


Unit – I The Concept, Approaches and Profile : Background and Significance of Regional Studies;

General Characteristics of South Asia as a Region; Location and natural division; Geo-Political Significance of the Region.

Unit – II Social and Cultural Profile of South Asia : General Population and Migration Patterns; Caste and Class Groupings; Religious and linguistic Groupings; Tribal Settlements; Forces of Social Change in South Asia.

Unit – III Historical Profile of the South Asia : Imperialist domination of the Region; Modes of Exploitation and Economic Drain; Emergence and Growth of National Movements; IInd World War and the Beginning of Decolonization.

Unit – IV Government and Politics in South Asia : Emergence of The Nation States; Problems of Nation Building; Constitutional Development in South Asia; Political Parties and Electoral Politics.


Ahmad, Emajuddin Military Rule and the Myth of Democracy Almond, G and Coleman Politics of the Developing Area

10-A(432)

Almond, Gabriel A & Verba Sydney (eds)

The Civic Culture Revisited

Bhargava, K.K.ed. al.(ed.) South Asia : Towards Dynamism and Cooperation Chandra, Bipan Indian Since Independence Chandra, Bipan India’s Struggle for Independence Forner, B.H. An Introduction to South Asia Geortz Cliffered (ed.) Old Societies and New States Gough, Katylen Sharma, H.P. (eds.)

Imperialism and Revolution in South Asia

Immanual Walterstein Social Change : The Colonial Situation Jannuzl, F. Thomson The Agrarian Structure of Bangladesh Kohli, Atul India’s Democracy : An Analysis of Changing State-Society

Relations Kothari Rajani (ed.) State and Nation Building : A Third World Perspective Laska, George Alliances and the Third World War Leach, E.R.(ed.) Aspects of Caste in South India, Ceylon and North West

Pakistan Pandey, B.N.(ed.) Leadersip in South Asia Prasad, Bimal Regional Cooperation in South Asia

Symonds Richard Making of Pakistan Talbot Ian Punjab and The Raj Talbot Ian Partition of India Talbot Ian Pakistan : A New History India and Pakistan

Paper – VII (Optional Paper) : India in South Asia




Unit – I Profile : Geographical and Physical Characteristics of India; Geopolitical Significance of India in South Asia; Historical Heritage of India; Socio-Economic Heritage of India; Legacy of Indian National Movement on South Asia

Unit – II Socio Cultural Profile : General Population and Migration Patterns; Caste and Class Groupings and impacts on South Asia; Religious and Linguistic Groupings; Forces of Social Changes and Impacts on South Asia

Unit – III Political System : Nature of Political System of India; Role of Indian Democracy in South Asia; Political Institutions in India and its impacts on South Asia; Electoral Politics in India and its impacts on South Asia

10-A(433)

Unit – IV Relation with South Asia : Development of India’s Regional policy since 1947; Politico-Diplomatic Relation with Pakistan, Bangladesh and Bhutan; Socio-Economic Relation with Pakistan, Bangladesh and Bhutan; Formation of SAARC and the Role of India.


Bhargav, K.K. South Asia : Towards and Dynamism and Cooperation Bose, N.K. Culture and Society in India Chandra, Bipan India’s Struggle for Independence Desai, A.R. The Social Backperiod of Indian Nationalism Emersan, Rupert From Empire to Nation Former, B.H. An Introduction to South Asia Kohli, Atul India’s Democracy M.N.Shrinivas Social Change in Modern India. Mohammad, Ayoob India, Pakistan and Bangladesh Search for a New

Relationship Nagesh, Nasir, A. SAARC Challenges and Opportunities Pavlov, V.N. India Economic Freedom Versus Imperalism Pye, Lucian W and Pye Mary W Asian Power and Politics : The Cultural Dimensions of

Authority Rajan, M.S. and Ganguly, Shivaji

Great Power Relations

Rana, Manis and Khan, Ali Polity, Political Process and Social Control in South Asia Romakant Regionalism in South Asia Rose, Saul Politics in South Asai Seal, Anil The Emergence of Indian Nationalism: Competition and

Collaboration in the Late 19th Century Smith, Dorld E Religion and Political Development Smith, Dorld, E. India as a Secular State T.N.Madan Muslim Society in South Asia Tinker, Hugh India and Pakistan : A Political Analysis Weiner, E. Myron Political Changes in South Asia Wilson, A.J. and Dalton, Dennis The States of South Asia : Problems of National

Integration.

10-A(434)

SEMESTER - 2nd

Paper No. Nomenclature Internal Assessment

Theory Paper Marks

Total Marks

Time

Core Papers Paper-VIII Imperialist Historiography on South Asia 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Optional Papers Paper- IX Modern Islam in South Asia 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-X Contemporary India (1947-1971) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-XI Contemporary Pakistan (1947-1977) 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-XII Contemporary Bangladesh Upto 20th

Century 20 80 100 3 Hrs.

Paper-XIII Contemporary Sri Lanka Upto 20th Century 20 80 100 3 Hrs. Paper-XIV Contemporary Nepal Upto 20th Century 20 80 100 3 Hrs.

Paper VIII – (Core Paper): Imperialist Historiography on South Asia




Unit – I Evangelical Interpretations: Religion; Society; Trade and Commerce; Polity and State.

Unit – II Utilitarian Perspectives : Society and Social Reforms; Economy; State and Polity; Formation of Regional Identity

Unit-III Imperialist Administrators Understanding: Polity; Challenges to the State; Economic Policies and Peasantry; National and Communal Trends.

Unit- IV Imperialist Historiography during the early 20th Century : Military and Foreign Affairs; Constitunal Developments; Nationalist and Communal Trends; British Raj and Paramountcy.


Butterfield, Herbert The Whig Interpretation of History , London , 1873 Chirol , Valentine Indian Unrest , London, 1910 Chirol, Valentine India, London, 1926 Chirol, Valentine India: Old and new , London, 1927 Colbrollke , T.E. Life of the Honourable Mountstuart Elphinstone , 2 Vols. London,

1889 Collingwood, R.G. The Idea of History , Oxford , 1946 Cunningham, J.D,. A History of the Sikhs from the Origin of the Nation to the Battle fo

10-A(435)

the Satluj, Reprint, Delhi , 1972 Dodwell, H.H. A Sketch of the History of India from 1858-1918, London, 1925 Dodwell. H.H. The Cambridge History of India , Vols V & VI, Cambridge, 1932 Duff.J.C. Grand History of the Marathas , 3 Vols.,Reprint, Bombay, 1963 Elphinstone Mountstuart Report on the Peshwa’s Territores , London , 1822 Elphinstone, Mountstuart Rise of the British Power in the East , London , 1841 Fisher, Thomas Memoirs of the Late Charles Grant. London, 1833 Gooch, G.P. History and Historians of the Nineteenth Century , London , 1913 Grant, Charles Observations on the State of Society Among the Asiatic Subjects of

Great Britain , London. Gupta.K.P.S The Christian Missionaries in Bengal 1793-1833, Calcutta, 1971 Hunter, W.W The Indian Mussalmans , London, 1871 Hunter, W.W A Brief History of the Indian Peoples, London, 1883 Hunter, W.W History of British India , 2 Vols. London, 1900 Kaye, J.W. Christianity in India : An Historical Narration , London , 1859 Kaye. J.W. The Administration of the East India Company , London, 1866 Kaye.J.W. A History of the Sepoy War in India 1857-1858, 3 Vols., London,

d.d.1861-1874 Marshman, J.C. Memoirs of Sir Henry Havelock, London, 1860 Marshman, J.C. The History of India, 2 Vol. London 1871 Mill, James The History of British India, 6 Vol. London 1840 Mittal , S.C. India Distorted : A Study of British Historians on India , 3 Vols.

New Delhi, 1998 Sen,S.P. (ed.) Historians and Historiography in Modern India , Calcutta, 1963 Stokes, Eric The English Utilitarinas and India, Oxford, 1959

10-A(436)

Paper – IX (Optional Paper) Modern Islam in South Asia Marks: 80

Internal Assessment: 20 Time: 3 Hours

Note: - The question paper will consist of nine questions. The candidate shall attempt five questions


Unit – I Islam in South Asia : A Historical Perspective; Islam and Muslim Society in South Asia; Islam and Impact of Print in South Asia; Madrasa Education in South Asia

Unit – II The Sufi Intervention : Sufism in the Deccan during the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries : Sufis and Islam in Eighteenth Century Awadh; Sufism and State in the Sindh during the Nineteenth Century; Sufism in Eighteenth and Nineteenth Century Punjab; Political and Religious Authority of the Major Sufi Shrines of Punjab.

Unit – III Muslim Revivalism: Wahabis and South Asia; Shah Wali-Ullah and his Legacy; Syyaid Ahmad Khan and Aligarh Movement; Deoband School; Syyaid Amir Ali and Intellectual Islam in Early 20th Century.

Unit-IV Islam in Modern Times: Muslim Revivalists and the Uprising of 1857; Nadwat-ul-Ulama and Muslim Modernist in 20th Century; Emergence of a Muslims Political Organization; The Young Party of Indian Islam.


Alam, Muzaffar The Languages of Political Islam in India C.1200-1800 Eaton, Richard M. Essays on Islam and Indian History Edwards, M. The Last Days of British India Gilmartin, David Empire and Islam ; Partition and the Making of Pakistan Hasan, Mushirhul Muslim Politics in Modern India Hasan, Mushirhul India’s Partitions : Problem, Startegy and Mobilization Husain, S.M.Azzizuddin Madrasa Education in India Ikram, S.M. Modern Muslim India and The Birth of Pakistan Jalal, Ayesha The sole Spokesman : Jinnah Muslim League and the Demand for

Pakistan Joshi, P.C. (ed.) Rebellion, 1857 Judith, Brown Modern India : The Orign of an Asia Democracy Madan T.N. Muslim Societies in South Asia. Metcalf, Barbara D. Islam in South in Practice Metcalf, Barbara D. Islamic Contestation : Essays on Muslim in India and Pakistan Metcalf, Barbara D. Islamic Revival in British India Nanda, B.R. Gandhi : Pan Islamism, Imperialism and Nationalism in India Peter, Hardy Muslims of British India Robinson, Francis New Cambridge History of Islam Robinson, Francis Islam South Asia and West

10-A(437)

Robinson, Francis Islam and Muslim History in South Asia Robinson, Francis The Ulama of Farangi Mahall and Islam in Culture in South Asia Robinson, Francis Islam and Muslim History in South Asia Robinson, Francis Separatism, Among Indian Muslims : The Politics of the United

Provinces Muslims 1860-21923 Singh, Amarjit Punjab Divided : Politics of Muslim Leage and Partition 1935-1947 Smith, W.C. Modern Islam in India

Paper – X (Optional Paper) : Contemporary India (1947-1971)




Unit – I Building of Nation: Making of the Constitution and its Characteristics; Problem of Kashmir; Integration of the Princely States; Linguistic reorganization of States

Unit – II Socio-Economic Reconstruction: Economic Planning; Five Years Plans; Socio-Economic Changing in Urban and Rural India; Social Legislations

Unit – III Foreign Policy : India’s Relations with Pakistan, Nepal, Sri Lanka; India and Non-Alignment Movement; India’s relation with USA and USSR and its impact on the South Asia Region Affairs

Unit – IV Growth of the Parliamentary Democracy : National Political Party; Electoral Politics on the National Level; Central - State Relations; Democratic De-Centralization.


Basu, D.D. Shorter Indian Constitution Bethlehem Charles India Independent Bose, Sumandra The Kashmir Problem Brass, Paul R. The Politics of India Since Independence Desai, A.R. India’s Path of Development Gaur, Madan India : 40 Years After Independent Gopal, S. Jawaharlal Nehru : A Biography Jaisingh, Hari India and Non-Aligned World Search for a new Order Kothari, Rajni Democratic Policy and Socialist Change in India Mathew, H. India : State and Society Menon, V.P. Foreign Policy of India Menon, V.P. Transfer of Power in India Mira, A.B. Foreign Policy of India Morries Jones, W.H. Government and Politics in India Mukhopadhyay, A.P.(ed.) Society and Politics in Contempory India Nanda, B.R. The Nehru : Motilal and Jawaharlal Nehru, Jawaharlal India’s Foreign Policy

10-A(438)

Pande, B.N. A Contemnory History of the Indian National Congress Vol.-IV Rana, A.P. Imperatives of Non-Alignment Rao, U. Bhaskar The Story of Rehabilitation Santhanam, K. Union-State Relations in India Srinivas, M.N. Social Change in India Tandon, B.B.& Tandon, K.K. Indian Economy Willet, Peter The Non-Aligned Movement : Origins of the Third World

Alliance

Paper – XI (Optional Paper ) : Contemporary Pakistan (1947-1977)


Time: 3 Hours


Unit – I Constitutional Political System : Constitutional Development from 1947-1977; Resurgence of Islamic Movements and their impacts; The issue of Regional Autonomy and Ethnicity; Religious Sectarianism and Emergence of Bangladesh

Unit – II Government and Politics : The Executive, The Legislature, The Judiciary and their inter-relationship; Parliamentary and Presidential Forms of Government; Electoral Politics; The Role of Political Parties

Unit – III Economic Development : Patterns of Industrial Growth and Problems; Patterns of Agricultural Growth and Problems; Land Tenure System; Changes in Agriculture Technology; Problems of Un-employment

Unit – IV Foreign Policy : Objectives of the Foreign Policy; Foreign and Military Pacts with China and USA; Relationship with India; Issue of Kashmir and POK; Policy Towards West Asia and Central Asia.


Agarkar V.V.N Genesis of Pakistan Akhtar Aman Pakistan and the Challenge of History Ambedkar B.R. Pakistan or the Partition of India Ayoob Mohammad & K.Subramayam

The Liberation War

Baluch Muhammad Sardar Khan History of BaluchRace and Baluchistan Bolitho H. Jinnah : Creator of Pakistan Burk S.M. Pakistan Foreign Policy : A Historical Analysis Burki Shahid Javed Pakistan : A Nation in The Making Collard Keith Pakistan : A Political Study Durrani F.K.Khan The Meaning of Pakistan

10-A(439)

Hunter W.W. The Indian Musalmans Ikram S.M. Muslim Civilisation in India Jahan Ronaq Pakistan : Failure in Nation Integration Martin Davidgil Empire and Islam : Punjab and the Making of Pakistan Mushtaq Ahmed Government and Politics in Pakistan Nain C.M. Iqbal, Jinnah and Pakistan Singh Amarjit Punjab Divided : Politics of Muslim Leage and Partition 1935-

1947 Symonds Richard Making of Pakistan Talbot Ian Punjab and The Raj Talbot Ian Pakistan : A New History India and Pakistan Tariq Ali Pakistan : Military Ruler People’s Power Tariq Ali Can Pakistan Survive? The Death of a State Harmandsword Y.V.R. Gorden & T.R. Gankorsky A History of Pakistan Paper – XII (Optional Paper) : Contemporary Bangladesh Upto 20th Century




Unit – I Emergence of Bangladesh : Political Process 1947-1965; Awami League and War of Liberation; Emergence of Mujibur-Rahman; Role of Mukti Bahni and Foundation of Bangladesh.

Unit – II Constitutional Development : Framing of 1972 Constitution and its main Features; One Party System; Adoption and Practice of Presidential and Parliamentary Forms of Government; Military Regimes and Their Political Consequences.

Unit – III Political Development : Political Parties and Presure Groups; State and Regional Politics; Unrest in Chhitagaon Hill Region; Communalization in Politics; Trends and Patterns of Electoral Politices during the Last Century.

Unit – IV Foreign Policy : Making of Foreign Policy and its problems; Objectives and Basic Principles of Foreign Policy; Relations with Major Powers; Relations with South Asian Countries particularly with India.


Ali, Tariq Pakistan Military Rule of People’s Power Chakraverty, S.R. Society, Polity and Economy of Bangladesh Chakraverty, S.R. Foreign Policy of Bangladesh Chakraverty, S.R. and Virendra Narain (eds.)

Bangladesh Domestic Policies, Vol,. II

Chakraverty, S.R. and Virendra Narain (eds.)

Bangladesh Global Politics, Vol., III

10-A(440)

Chandrika, J. Gulati Bangladesh Liberation to Fundamentalism Choudhary, GW. Constitutional Development in Pakistan Feldman, Hebert From Crisis to Crisis Pakistan 1962 Franda ,Marcus Communism and Regional Politics in East Pakistan Hakim ,Abdul Begum Khalida Zia of Bangladesh Kabir ,Md. Gulam Minority Politics Manruzzaman, T. Group Interests in Pakistan Politics Manruzzaman, T. The Politics of Development : The Case of Pakistan Manruzzaman, T. Radical Politics and the Emergence of Bangladesh Mohammed, Ayoob Bangladesh. Paper – XIII (Optional Paper) : Contemporary Sri Lanka Upto 20th Century


Time: 3 Hours


Unit – I Nationalism : Rise of Sindhalese Nationalism; Elite Conflict and the Ceylone National Congress; Donougamora Commission and its Recommendations; The Politics of Transform of Power; Independence of Sri Lanka.

Unit – II Constitutional Developments : The Soulbury Constitution; Constitutional Problems and Issues 1948-1971; Republic Constitution of 1972; Major Features of 1978 Constitution

Unit – III Government and Politics : Political Parties; Pressure Groups; Major Trends of Electoral Polices; Problems of Nation Building; Language, Religion and Politics.

Unit – IV Foreign Policy: Objectives and Issues of Foreign Policy; Major Problem Area’s of Foreign Policy; Relation with China and England; Relation with South Asian Nations particularly with India.


Coomaraswamy, Radhika Sri Lanka : The Crisis of the Anglo-American Constituional Traditions in a Developing Society

De Silva, C.R. Srilanka, Problems of Governance De Silva, K.K.(ed.) Sri Lanka : A Survey De Silva, K.M. (ed.) Sri Lanka: A History Jennings, W.I. The Constituion of Ceylon Jupp, James Sri Lanka-Third World Democracy Kodikara S.U. Indo-Ceylon Relations Since Independence Kodikara Shelton U Foreign Policy of Sri Lanka Monden, Fred R. Vow Der :Politics of the Developing Nations Phandnis, Urmila Ethnicity and Nation Building in South Asia

10-A(441)

Warnpala W.A. Wiswa & Hewagama, L.Dias

RecentPolitics in Sri Lanka : The Presidential Election and Refered of 1982

Wilson A.J. The Gaulist System in Asia : The Constition of Sri Lanka 1978 Wilson A.J. Politics in Sri Lanka 1947-1979 Wilson A.J. The Break up of Sri Lanka, The Simnalese Tamil Conflict Wriggins, W.B. Ceylon : Dilemmas of a New National. Paper – XIV (Optional Paper) : Contemporary Nepal Upto 20th Century




Unit – I Experiment in Democratic Institutions : Interim Constitution of 1951; Rise of Royal Autocracy; The Constitution of 1959; General Elections and Establishment of Parliamentary System

Unit – II The Panchayat System : 1962 Panchayat Constitution; Basic Characteristics of the Panchayat System; Changing Character of the Panchayat System; 1990 Movement and Collapse of the Panchayat System; 1990 Parliamentary Constitution

Unit – III Political Institutions : Parliament, Cabinet and Monarchy; Judiciary and Bureaucracy; Political Parties and Pressure Groups; Regional Issues and Challenging to Democracy

Unit – IV Foreign Policy : Consideration and Objectives of the Foreign Policy; Basic Principles of the Foreign Policy; Relations with Major Powers; Relation with India and China; Role in South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC).


Burchaman, Hamilton F. An Account of the Kingdom of Nepal Chaudhuri, K.C. Anglo Nepalese Relations Guiseppe Tucci Nepal – The Discovery of Mallas Gyali, Surya Bikram Prithimarayan Shah Hasat Bikram Jit History of Nepal Husain Asad British India Relations with the Kingdom of Nepal Jain, M.S. Emergency of a New Aristocracy in Nepal Jayaswal, K.P. Chronology and History of Nepal Kripatrick W An Account of the Kindgom of Nepal Levy, Sykvauts Le Nepal : Etude Hitorique Royaume Hindu Majumdar K Political Relations between India and Nepal Nepal, Chitranjan Bhimsen Thapaer Tatkaleen Nepal Kathmandu Oldfield H.A Aketchis from Nepal, Vol. 2

10-A(442)

Pitech Luciano Medieval History of Nepal Stillers, L.F. The Rise of the Gorkha House Ranchi Wright, D History of Nepal

SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS AND COURSE OF READING

MASTER OF PHILOSPHY (HISTORY) , ANNUAL SYSTEM w.e.f. The Session 2014- 2015

Note:- The M.Phil (History) Course shall consist of Two Theory Papers and one

Dissertation. In the theory papers, Paper-I shall be a core paper of Research Methodology

carrying 80 marks whereas Paper-II shall be Specialized Optional paper carrying 80 marks.

There shall be internal assessment (Sessional tests) of 20 marks each in both of the Theory

Papers. Paper-II shall also include two Seminars of 50 marks each, i.e., of total 100 marks.

(I) Theory Papers:

Core Paper:

Paper –I Historical Research Methodology

Specialization Paper:

Paper-II Paper-II is optional paper with internal choice. The candidates shall be

required to choose any one Group out of the following two Groups of Specialization and

then to select any one Optional Paper out of the two Optional Papers given in the concerned

Group:

Group –A : Medieval India

Paper II (Option - i) : Historiography on Medieval India

OR

Paper II (Option-ii): Medieval Indian Historiography

Group – B: Modern India

Paper II (Option –i) : Historiography on Modern India

OR

Paper II (Option –ii): British Historiography on Modern India

(II) Dissertation

The candidate shall also write and submit a Dissertation in his/her concerned Area/Group of Specialization and appear in viva-voce on the Dissertation.

(Amarjit Singh) Professor & Chairman

10-A(443)

Core Paper Paper-I : Historical Research Methodology Part-A : Theory Exam

Maximum Marks: 100 Internal Marks : 20 External Marks :80

Time : 3 Hours

Note:- The question paper will consist of ten question, i.e., two questions from each unit. The

candidate shall attempt five questions in all selecting one question from each unit.

Unit-I

Evolution of Historical Method : Islamic Method : Ibn Khaldoun; Empiricist Tradition : Leopold Von Ranke; Materialistic, Approach; Annals Tradition and Post-Modernist Approach

Unit –II

Historical Evidence : Sources, Nature and Transmission; Nature of Historical Facts; Bias and

Objectivity in History; Requisites of a Researcher of History

Unit –III

Preliminary Operations : Selection of Theme; Preparation of Reading Lists/Tentative

Bibliography; Survey of Literature- How to Review A Book; Preparation of Synopsis;

Collection of Data : Different Techniques.

Unit –IV

Analytical Operations : Scrutiny of Data – External and Internal Criticism; Synthetic Operations : Determing and Grouping of Facts, Causation and Reasoning

Unit-V

Concluding Operations : Generalizations; Presentation-Organization of Material, Chapterization, Writing Style and Strategies; Documentation

Part –B Internal Assessment Maximum Marks :20

Sessional Test


Ali, B. Sheikh History: its Theory and Method , Madras, 1978 Atkinson, R.F. Knowledge and Explanation in History , London , 1978 Bajaj, Satish, K. Recent Trends in Historiography, New Delhi, 1988

10-A(444)

Barnes, H.E. A History of Historical Writing , Oklahama Norman , 1937 Bentley, Michael (ed) Companion to Historiography , London, 1997 Berterns, Hans The Idea of Post Modern : A History, London, 1995 Block, Marc The Historian’s Craft, Manchester, 1954 Buddha Prakash Itihas Darshan ( Hindi) , Varanasi , 1962 Butterfield, H. The Whig Interpretation of History , London, 1951 Cannon , John ( ed.) The Historian at Work, London 1980 Carr , E.H. What is History, Reprint , London , 1983. (First Publication: 1964)

Clark, K. Guide for Rese arch Students Working on Historical Subjects.

Cambridge , 1969.

Clark, Stuart The Annals Historians : Critical Assessment, Vol. I, London , 1999

Collingwood, R. G. The Idea of History, oxford , 1946 Delanlez, Jean (ed.) A Guide to Historical Method , New York, 1946 Dictionary of History of Ideas, Vols 1 & 2 , New York, d.d. Dray, Arthur On History and philosophers of History, New York, 1989 Durant, Will and Ariel Durant

The Story of Civilization, Vols. I-IX, d.d.

Elton, Geoffrey The Practice of History, London, 1967 Elton, Geoffrey Returns to Essentials : Some Reflections on the Present State of

Historical Study , Cambridge, 1991

Encyclopedia of Islam , New Edition , Vols. 3 & 4 , 1979 Evans, j. Richard In Defense of History, London, 1997 Foucault , Michel Power /knowledge : Selected Interviews and Others Writings,

Brithton, 1980.

Geyl , Peter Debates with Historians , New York, 1958 Gooch, G. P. History and Historians of the Nineteenth Century , London 1952

(First Publication : 1913) Hegel , G.P. The Philosophy of History , New York, 1958 Hockett, H.C. The Critical method in Historical Research and Writing , New

York, 1955

Hughes , Warrington Fifty Key Thinkers on History, London , 2000 Hasan, Mohibbul (ed.) Historians of Medieval India , Meerut , 1968 Jenkins , Keith (ed.) Post-Modern History Reader, London 1997 Jenkins , Keith (ed.) Why History ? Reflections on the Possible End of History and

Ethics Under the Impact of the Postmodern , London , 1999 Marwick, Arthur The Nature of History , Reprint , London , 1970 (First Publication :

1984) Marwick , Aurthur What History Is and Why It Is Important ? Buckinghamshire, 1970 Marx, Karl and Fredrich Angles

The Communist Manifesto ( edited by A. P. J . Taylor) , London 1974

Munslow , Alun Deconstructing History, London , 1997 Renier , G.T. History : Its Purpose and Method , London, 1961 Russel , Bertrand History of Western Philosophy , London , 1947 Shefer, R. J . A Guide to Historical Method , Homewood, 1974 Sridharan , E. A Textbook of Historiography 500 B.C. to A. D. 2000 , New Delhi,

2004 Thompson, J. W. & Holm Bernard

A History of Historical Writing , Vols. 1 & 2, New York, 1942

10-A(445)

Specialization Paper

Group – A : Medieval India

Paper –II (Option –i) : Historiography on Medieval India

Part –A : Theory Exam Maximum Marks: 100

Internal Marks : 20 External Marks :80

Time : 3 Hours Note :- The question paper will consist of ten questions , i.e. , two questions from each unit. The


Unit-I

Contemporary Historiography of the Sultanate Period : Salient Features of the Indo-

Persian Writings with special reference to Mihaj Sirai and Ziyanddin Brani

Unit-II

Contemporary Historiography of the Mughal Period : Salient Features with special reference to Abul Fazl and Badaoni

Unit-III

British Imperialist Historiography: Salient Features with special reference to Mountstuart Elphinstone and W.H. Moreland

Unit – IV

Nationalist Historiography : Salient Features with special reference to Judunath Sarkar and Mohammed Habib

Unit –V

Marxist and Cambridge Historiography : Salient Features with special reference to

Irfan Habib and J.F. Richards

Part –B : Internal Assessment Maximum Marks : 20

Sessional Test

Part-C : Two Seminars of 50 marks each, i.e., of total 100 marks.

10-A(446)

Suggested Reading:

Ashraf , K.M,. Life and Conditions of the People of Hindustan 1200-1550 A.D., Delhi , 1959

Burn , Richard (ed.) The Cambridge History of India , Vol . IV, Cambridge, 1937 Dodwell, H.H. (ed.) Cambridge History of India , Vol . V, Delhi , 1963 Duff, James Grant A History of the Maratha , 3 Vols., Reprint , Bombay, 1963 Elphinstone , Mountstuart

The History of India , 2.vols., London , 1841

Grewal , J.S. Muslim Rule in India : The assessments of British Historians , Calcutta, 1970

Grewal , J. S. James tod and Rajput History : Proceedings of the International Congress of Orienlists , New Delhi , 1964

Grewal , J. S. The Medieval Indian State and Some British Historians , Chandigarh , 1967

Habib, Muhammad Sultan Mahmud of Ghazni , Aligarh , 2nd ED , 1927, Delhi Habib, Muhammad (ed.) Politics and Society during the Early medieval Period, K. A. Nizami

(ed.), Delhi 1974 Lal, K.S. Historical Essays : History and Historiography , New Delhi , 2001 Mittal, S,C. India DisItorted , Vol . I, Delhi , 2002 Moreland , W. H. The Agrarian System of Muslem India , Reprint , Delhi , 1960 Moreland , W.H. From Akbar to Aurangzeb –A Study in Indian Economic History ,

London, 1924 Moreland , W.H. India at the Death of Akbar : An Economic Study , Reprint, Delhi, 1972 Philips , C. H. Historians of India , Pakistan and Celylon , Oxford , 1975 Richards , J. F. Mughal Administration in Golconda , Oxford , 1975 Richards , J. F. (ed.) Kingship and Authority in South India , Madison, 1978 Richards , J, F, (ed.) Imperial Monetary System of the Mughals , Bombay , 1992 Richards, J.F. The Mughal Empire , Cambridge , 1993 Saran , Parmatma The Provincial Government of the Mughals 1526-1658, Bombay 2nd

Ed., 1973, d.d. Sardesai, G.S. New History of the Maratha People , 2 Vols.,Bombay 1946-1948 Sardesai, G.S. The Main Currents of Maratha History, 1700-1750, Bombay 1949 Sarkar, Jadunath Fall of the Mughal Empire, Vol. I-IV, Calcutta, 1964 Sarkar, Jadunath Mughal Administration , Calcutta, 1952 Sarkar, Jadunath History of Aurangzeb’s 5 Vols., Calcutta, 1974 Sen, S.P. (ed.) Historians and Historiography in Modern India , Calcutta, 1973 Sharma , G.N. Social Life in Medieval Rajasthan (1500-1800), Agra , 1965 Sharma, G.N. Mewar and the Mughal Emperor, Agra , 1951 Stein, Burton Peasants, State and Society in Medieval South India, Delhi, 1980 Stein, Burton Vijayanagara : The New Cambridge History of India , Vol. XII,

Cambridge , 1989 Stein, Burton A History of India, Delhi 1988

Subodh, Sanjay Historiography on Medieval India : A Study of Prof. Muhammad

Habib , Delhi , 2004 Tod, Col, James Annals and Antiquities of Rajasthan , 2 Vol., London , d.d., 1826-

1832 Tripathi , R.P. Rise and Fall of the Mughal Empire, Allahabad, 1958 Tripathi, R.P. Some Aspects of Muslim Administration in India , Allahabad, 1936 Babar Tuzuk-i-Babari, Eng. Tr. By A. S. Beveridge, Delhi, 1970, Also Hindi

Tr. By S.A.A. Rizvi

10-A(447)

Badaoni,Abdul Qadir Muntahab-ul-Tawarikh, Vol. I Eng. Tr.by Ranking , Vol. II eng. Tr. By W.H. Lowe, Vol. III, Eng. Tr. By W. Haig, Rprint., Delhi, 1973

Barani, Ziya Tarikh-i-Firjozshahi ( Persian), Calcutta, 1862 Elliot & Dowson(ed.) History of India as Told by its Own Historians , Vols. I-VIII,

Allahabad , 1964 Fazl , Abul Ain-i-Akbari, Eng. Tr. Vol. I by H. Bloachmann, Vol II & III, by H.S.

Jarrett and J.N. Sarkar, Calcutta, 1948-49 Fazl,Abul Akbarnama , 3Vols, Eng Tr. By H. Beveridge, Reprint, Delhi 1972 Habib, Irfan (ed.) Medieval India, Vol. IV and VI, d.d. Habib, Muhammad Pootics and Society during the Early Medieval Period , K.A. Nizami

(ed.) , Delhi, 1974 Hardy, Peter Historians of Medieval India , London, 1960 Hardy, Peter Studies in Indo- Muslim Historical Writings , London , 1983 Hasan, Muhibbul(ed.) Historians of Medieval India , Meerut , 1968 Husain , Mehdi A Critical Study of the Sources of Medieval India, Islamic Culture,

Hyderabad, 1957 Isami Futuh-us-Salatin, Eng. Tr. By A. Mehdi Hussain , Bombay, 1963 Khan , Khafi Muntakhub-ul-Lubab, Eng. Tr by Anees Ahmad Luniya, B.N. Historians of Medieval India , Agra, 1971 Minhajsiraj Tabaqat-i-Nasari, Eng. Tr. By Major Reverti Mirza, M.Wahid Life and Works of amir Khusaro , Calcutta , 1935 Mukhia, Harbans Historians and Historiography during the Reign of Akbur, Nuw

Delhi, 1976 Mushtaqi, Sheikh Rizqullah

Waquat-i-Mushtaqi, Eng. Tr. And Ed. By I.H. Siddiqui, Also Hindi. Tr. By S.A.A. Rizvi

Nizami, Azra Sheikh Abul Fazl, Delhi, 1978

Nizami , K.A. On History and Historians of Medieval India , Delhi , 1983 Phillips, C. H. (ed.) Historians of India , Pakistan , and Ceylon , London , 1961 Rasul , M. G. The Origin and Development of Muslim historiography , Delhi , 1976 Rizvi, S.A.A. Religious and Intellectual History of the Muslims in Akbar’s Reign ,

Delhi , 1985 Sankar , Jagdish Narain History of History Writing in Medieval India , Calcutta, 1977 Sridharan , E. A Textbook of Historiography 500 B. C. to A. D. 2000, New Delhi,

2004

10-A(448)

Specialization Paper Group –A : Medieval India Paper –II ( Option –ii) : Medieval Indian Historiography

Part – A : Theory Exam

Maximum Marks: 100


Time : 3 Hours

Note :- The question paper will consist of ten question , i.e., two questions from each unit. The candidate shall attempt five questions in all selecting one question from each unit.

Unit-I

Historiography during the Sultanate Period : Main Features of Indo-Persian Historiography (13th-14th Century); Taj-ul-Maasir of Hasan Nizami; Tarikh–i-Firozshahi of Ziyauddin Barani

Unit-II

Metrical Historiography : Historical Masnavis of Amir Khusro ; Isami’s Futuh-us-Salatin

Unit-III

Afghan Historiography : Shaikh Rizqullah Mushtaqu’s Waqiyat-i-Mushtaqi; Abbas Khan Sherwani’s Tarikh-i-Shershahi

Unit-IV

Historiography of the Mughal India: Baburnama; Abul Fazl’s Akbarnama, Badaoni’s

Muntakhab-ut-Tawarikh

Unit-V

18th Century Mughal Historiography: Khafi Khan’s Muntakhab-ul-Lubab; Muhammad

Qasim’s Ahwal-ul-Khawanin

Part –B: Internal Assessment Maximum Marks: 20

Sessional Test


10-A(449)

Suggested Reading:

Babar Tuzuk-i-Babari, Eng. Tr. By A. S. Beveridge, Delhi, 1970, Also Hindi Tr. By S.A.A. Rizvi

Badaoni,Abdul Qadir Muntahab-ul-Tawarikh, Vol. I Eng. Tr.by Ranking , Vol. II eng. Tr. By W.H. Lowe, Vol. III, Eng. Tr. By W. Haig, Rprint., Delhi, 1973

Barani, Ziya Tarikh-i-Firjozshahi ( Persian), Calcutta, 1862 Elliot & Dowson(ed.) History of India as Told by its Own Historians , Vols. I-VIII,

Allahabad , 1964 Fazl , Abul Ain-i-Akbari, Eng. Tr. Vol. I by H. Bloachmann, Vol II & III, by H.S.

Jarrett and J.N. Sarkar, Calcutta, 1948-49 Fazl,Abul Akbarnama , 3Vols, Eng Tr. By H. Beveridge, Reprint, Delhi 1972 Habib, Irfan (ed.) Medieval India, Vol. IV and VI, d.d. Habib, Muhammad Pootics and Society during the Early Medieval Period , K.A. Nizami

(ed.) , Delhi, 1974 Hardy, Peter Historians of Medieval India , London, 1960 Hardy, Peter Studies in Indo- Muslim Historical Writings , London , 1983 Hasan, Muhibbul(ed.) Historians of Medieval India , Meerut , 1968 Husain , Mehdi A Critical Study of the Sources of Medieval India, Islamic Culture,

Hyderabad, 1957 Isami Futuh-us-Salatin, Eng. Tr. By A. Mehdi Hussain , Bombay, 1963 Khan , Khafi Muntakhub-ul-Lubab, Eng. Tr by Anees Ahmad Luniya, B.N. Historians of Medieval India , Agra, 1971 Minhajsiraj Tabaqat-i-Nasari, Eng. Tr. By Major Reverti Mirza, M.Wahid Life and Works of amir Khusaro , Calcutta , 1935 Mukhia, Harbans Historians and Historiography during the Reign of Akbur, Nuw Delhi,

1976 Mushtaqi, Sheikh Rizqullah

Waquat-i-Mushtaqi, Eng. Tr. And Ed. By I.H. Siddiqui, Also Hindi. Tr. By S.A.A. Rizvi

Nizami, Azra Sheikh Abul Fazl, Delhi, 1978

Nizami , K.A. On History and Historians of Medieval India , Delhi , 1983 Phillips, C. H. (ed.) Historians of India , Pakistan , and Ceylon , London , 1961 Rasul , M. G. The Origin and Development of Muslim historiography , Delhi , 1976 Rizvi, S.A.A. Religious and Intellectual History of the Muslims in Akbar’s Reign ,

Delhi , 1985 Sankar , Jagdish Narain History of History Writing in Medieval India , Calcutta, 1977 Sridharan , E. A Textbook of Historiography 500 B. C. to A. D. 2000, New Delhi,

2004

10-A(450)


Group-B : Modern India

Paper –II ( Option –i) : Historiography on Modern India

Part –A : Theory Exam

Maximum Marks: 100 Internal Marks : 20 External Marks :80

Time : 3 Hours Note:- The question paper will consist of ten questions, i.e., two questions from each unit. The


Unit-I Evangelicals and Utilitarians Interpretations: Sources, Objectives and Approaches;

Interpretations on Religion and Society, State, Politics and Economy

Unit-II Imperialist Perspectives During Late 19th and Early 20th Century : Objectives, Sources

and Approaches; Interpretations on State; Economy; Uprising of 1857, National and

Communal Politics

Unit-III Nationalist Perspectives: Approaches, Methods and Historical Contributions,

Interpretations on State and Politics, Society, Colonial Economy and National Movement

Unit-IV Cambridge School: Approaches and Methods, Major Historical Contributions,

Interpretations on State and Society, Economy, National and Communal Politics

Unit-V Marxist and Subaltern Schools : Approaches and Methods; Interpretations on Colonial

Economy; National Movement; Peasant and Worker Movements; Historiography on Lower

Caste Movements


Sessional Test


Suggested Reading :

Bajaj, S.K. Recent Trends in Historiography , New Delhi, 1988

10-A(451)

Brown , Judith Gandhi’s Rise To Power : India Politics 1915-1922, Cambridge, 1972

Brown, Judith Gandhi and Civil disobedience : The Mahatma in Indian Poitics 1928-1934, Cambridge ,1977

Brown, Judith Gandhi : Prisoner of Hope , Delhi , 1992 Butterfield, Herbert The Whig Interpretation of History , London , 1873 Chandra, Bipan (ed.) The Indian Left : Critical Appraisals , new Delhi , 1984 Chirol , Valentine Indian Unrest , London, 1910 Chirol, Valentine India, London, 1926 Chirol, Valentine India: Old and new , London, 1927 Colbrollke , T.E. Life of the Honourable Mountstuart Elphinstone , 2 Vols. London,

1889 Collingwood , R.G. The Idea of History , Oxford , 1946 Collingwood, R.G. The Idea of History , Oxford , 1946 Cunningham, J.D,. A History of the Sikhs from the Origin of the Nation to the Battle fo

the Satluj, Reprint, Delhi , 1972 Desai, A.R. Social Background of Indian Nationalism , Bombay, 1959 Desai,A.R. (ed.) Peasant Struggle in India , Delhi, 1979 Dodwell, H.H. A Sketch of the History of India from 1858-1918, London, 1925 Dodwell. H.H. The Cambridge History of India , Vols V & VI, Cambridge, 1932 Duff.J.C. Grand History of the Marathas , 3 Vols.,Reprint, Bombay, 1963 Dutt, R. Palme Prolems of Contemporary History, London, 1963 Dutt, R.C. The peasantry of Bengal , London, 1874 Dutt, R.C. The Economic History of India, 2 Vols., London, d.d., 1901, 1903 Dutt, R.C. Speeches and Papers on Indian Question , 2 Vols., Calcutta, 1904 Dutt, R.Palme India today, Bombay, 1949 Elphinstone Mountstuart Report on the Peshwa’s Territores , London , 1822 Elphinstone, Mountstuart Rise of the British Power in the East , London , 1841 Fisher, Thomas Memoirs of the Late Charles Grant. London, 1833 Gadgil, D.R. The Industrial Evolution of India in Recent Time , Calcutta, 1948 Gallaghar, J and Anil Seal (ed.)

Locality , Province and Nation , Cambridge, 1973

Gooch, G.P. History and Historians of the Nineteenth Century , London , 1913 Grant, Charles Observations on the State of Society Among the Asiatic Subjects of

Great Britain , London.

Guha, Ranjit Elementary aspects of Peasant Insurgency in Colonial India, Delhi, 1983

Guha, Ranjit (ed.) Subaltern Studies : Essay on South Asian History and Society , Vols. I-IV, New Delhi, d.d. 1982-1988

Gupta.K.P.S The Christian Missionaries in Bengal 1793-1833, Calcutta, 1971 Hunter, W.W The Indian Mussalmans , London, 1871 Hunter, W.W A Brief History of the Indian Peoples, London, 1883 Hunter, W.W History of British India , 2 Vols. London, 1900 Kaye, J.W. Christianity in India : An Historical Narration , London , 1859 Kaye. J.W. The Administration of the East India Company , London, 1866 Kaye.J.W. A History of the Sepoy War in India 1857-1858, 3 Vols., London,

d.d.1861-1874 Marshman, J.C. Memoirs of Sir Henry Havelock, London, 1860 Marshman, J.C. The History of India, 2 Vol. London 1871 Mittal , S.C. India Distorted : A Study of British Historians on India , 3 Vols.

New Delhi, 1998 Moll, James The History of British India, 6 Vol. London 1840 Omvedt, Gail Cultural revolt in a Colonial Society : The Non-Brahmin Movement

10-A(452)

in Western India , Bombay, 1976 Omvedt, Gail Dalits and the Democratic Revolution : Dr.Ambedkar and the Dalit

Movement in Colonial India , New Delhi, 1994 Philips, C.H. The East India Company , 1784-1834, London, 1961 Philips, C.H. Evolution of India and Pakistan 1857-1947 : Select Documents ,

London, 1962 Philips, C.H. (ed.) The Partition of India : Policies and Perspectives1935-1947,

London, 1970 Philips, C.H.(ed.) Historians of India , Pakistan and Ceylon, London , 1967 Seal, Anil The Emergence of Indian Nationalism : Competition and

Collaboration in the Late 19th Century , Cambridge, 1968 Sen,S.P. (ed.) Historians and Historiography in Modern India , Calcutta, 1963 Smith, W.C. Modern Islam in India , Lahore, 1963 Smith, W.C. The Muslim League, Lahore, 1947 Stokes, Eric The English Utilitarinas and India, Oxford, 1959 Tara Chand History and the Freedom Movement in India, 4 Vols.,Delhi,

d.d.,1961-1972 Tara Chand Influence of Islam on Indian Culture , Allahabad , 1963s

10-A(453)


Group-B: Modern India

Paper –II (Option –ii): British Historiography on Modern India

Part –A : Theory Exam

Maximum Marks: 100


Time : 3 Hours

Note :- The question paper will consist of ten questions , i.e., two questions from each unit .The candidate shall attempt five question in all selecting one question from each unit.

Unit –I

Evangelical Interpretation of Indian Society, Religion, Polity, Trade and Commerce : Charles Grant and J.C. Marshman

Unit – II

The Utilitarians and their Understanding of Indian State, Politics, Economy and Society : James Mill and Mountstuart Elphinstone

Unit-III

British Administrator Historians and their Interpretation of Indian State, Politics, Society and Economy : John William Kaye and W.W. Hunter

Unit-IV

Imperialist Historiography on India during the Early 20th Century and its Interpretation of Indian State, Society, Politics and National Movement: Valentine Chirol and H.H. Dodwell

Unit-V Imperialist Writings on Regional History: Sources and Objectives; James C. Grand Duff

and J. D. Cunningham


Sessional Test


10-A(454)

Suggested Readings:

Butterfield, Herbert The Whig Interpretation of History , London , 1873 Chirol , Valentine Indian Unrest , London, 1910 Chirol, Valentine India, London, 1926 Chirol, Valentine India: Old and new , London, 1927 Colbrollke , T.E. Life of the Honourable Mountstuart Elphinstone , 2

Vols. London, 1889 Collingwood, R.G. The Idea of History , Oxford , 1946 Cunningham, J.D,. A History of the Sikhs from the Origin of the Nation to

the Battle fo the Satluj, Reprint, Delhi , 1972 Dodwell. H.H. The Cambridge History of India , Vols V & VI,

Cambridge, 1932 Dodwell, H.H. A Sketch of the History of India from 1858-1918,

London, 1925 Duff.J.C. Grand History of the Marathas , 3 Vols.,Reprint, Bombay,

1963 Elphinstone, Mountstuart

Rise of the British Power in the East , London , 1841

Elphinstone Mountstuart

Report on the Peshwa’s Territores , London , 1822

Fisher, Thomas Memoirs of the Late Charles Grant. London, 1833 Gooch, G.P. History and Historians of the Nineteenth Century ,

London , 1913 Grant, Charles Observations on the State of Society Among the Asiatic

Subjects of Great Britain , London. Gupta.K.P.S The Christian Missionaries in Bengal 1793-1833,

Calcutta, 1971 Hunter, W.W The Indian Mussalmans , London, 1871 Hunter, W.W A Brief History of the Indian Peoples, London, 1883 Hunter, W.W History of British India , 2 Vols. London, 1900 Kaye, J.W. Christianity in India : An Historical Narration , London ,

1859 Kaye. J.W. The Administration of the East India Company , London,

1866 Kaye.J.W. A History of the Sepoy War in India 1857-1858, 3 Vols.,

London, d.d.1861-1874 Marshman, J.C. Memoirs of Sir Henry Havelock, London, 1860 Marshman, J.C. The History of India, 2 Vol. London 1871 Moll, James The History of British India, 6 Vol. London 1840 Mittal , S.C. India Distorted : A Study of British Historians on India ,

3 Vols. New Delhi, 1998 Sen,S.P. (ed.) Historians and Historiography in Modern India ,

Calcutta, 1963 Stokes, Eric The English Utilitarinas and India, Oxford, 1959

10-A(455)

10-A(456)

10-A(457)

Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra

10-A(458)

M. A. Economics Course Structure

w.e.f 2014-15

M.A. Economics (Semester I) Total Marks External Internal Time

Paper-101 Micro Economic Analysis-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-102 Macro Economic Analysis-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-103 Quantitative Methods-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-104 Public Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-105 Option (i) Financial Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (ii) Demography-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (iii) Economics of Infrastructure-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (iv) Economics of Insurance-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (v) Economics of Labour-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (vi) Computer Applications in 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Economic Analysis-I Option (vii) Mathematical Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (viii) Economics of Regionalism-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs.

Note: Students are required to select any one option from Paper-105. The students will select the same optional stream in Semester II.

10-A(459)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper- 101(Compulsory)

Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100 External : 80 Internal : 20

MICRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-I

Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks).

(iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the four units (16 marks each).

Unit-I

Theory of Demand and Consumer Behaviour: Indifference curve approach; Price, Income and Substitution effects (Hicks and Slutsky); Revealed preference theory; Applications of Indifference Curve Analysis; The Consumer’s surplus (Marshall and Hicks).Elasticity (Price, cross, income) of demand and Supply and their applications; Revision of Demand theory by Hicks; Linear expenditure system; Indirect utility function.

Unit-II

Production function (properties of Cobb Douglas, CES, Translog); Laws of production(variable proportions and returns to scale with the help of isoquants); Technical Progress and production function; Equilibrium of the firm-single and multi-product firm; Derivation of cost function from production function (using Cobb-Douglas function); Theories of costs – traditional and modern; Analysis of economies of scale.

Unit-III

Perfect competition – Short and long term equilibrium of the firm and industry; Dynamic changes and industry equilibrium. Monopoly – short run and long run equilibrium; Price discrimination; Monopolistic competition - Chamberlin’s approach to equilibrium of the firm.

Unit-IV

Oligopoly – non-collusive models- Cournot, Bertrand, Chamberlin, Kinked-demand curve and Stackleberg solution. Collusive models- Market sharing cartels; Price leadership models.

10-A(460)

Basic Reading List Koutsoyiannis, A. (1979), Modern Microeconomics, (2nd Edition), Macmillan

Press, London. Salvatore D(2006), Microeconomics-Theory and Applications, Oxford University

Press Varian, H. (2003), Intermediate Microeconomics, East-West Press.

Additional Reading List

Archibald, G.C. (Ed.) (1971), Theory of the Firm, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Baumol, W.J. (1982), Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall of

India, New Delhi. Boyes.W and Melvin. M , Micro economics, Houghton Mifflin Company Boston

Newyork. Collel A.,Whinston and Green (2012), MicroEconomic Theory, Oxford University

Press. Da Costa, G. C. (1980), Production, Prices and Distribution, Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi. Goodwin, Nelson,Ackerman and WeissKopf(2009), Micro Economics in context,

PHI Learning Private Limited. Gravelle,H.and Rees,R.(2008), Micro Economics, Dorling Kindersley. Green H.A.G. (1971), Consumer Theory, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Gupta K.R.(2009), Advanced MicroEconomics, Atlantic Publishers and

Distributors LTD Healthfields and Wibe (1987), An Introduction to Cost and Production Functions,

Macmillan, London. Henderson, J.M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A Mathematical

Approach, McGraw Hill, New Delhi. Hirshleifer, J. and A. Glazer (1997), Price Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall

of India, New Delhi. Jehle Geoffrey A.and Reny Philip J (2008), Advanced Micro Economic Theory,

Dorling Kindersley (India) Kreps, David M. (1990), A Course in Microeconomic Theory, Princeton

University Press, Princeton. Layard, P.R.G. and A.W. Walters (1978), Microeconomic Theory, McGraw Hill,

New York. Lipsey and Chrystal(2014), Economics, Oxford University Press Mankiw(2006),Principles of Microeconomics,Cengage Learning Mansfield Edwin, Applied MicroEconomics, W.W.Norton ,New York London. Sen, A. (1999), Microeconomics: Theory and Applications, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi. Sen,A.(2007), Micro Economics: Theory and applications. Oxford University

Press. Varian, H. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W. Norton, New York.

10-A(461)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper-102 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.

Max. Marks : 100 External : 80 Internal : 20

MACRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-I

Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks).


PREAMBLE

Macroeconomics analyses and establishes the functional relationships between large aggregates. The aggregate analysis has assumed such a great significance in recent times that a prior understanding of macroeconomics theoretical structure is considered essential for the proper comprehension of the different issues and policies. Macroeconomics now is not only a scientific method of analysis; but also a body of empirical economic knowledge. The paper equips the students at the postgraduate level to understand systematic facts and latest theoretical developments for empirical analysis at economy level.

Unit-I

National Income and Accounts

National income accounting – social accounting, input-output accounting, flow of funds accounting; Balance of payments accounting; Classical and Keynesian Models of income determination.

Consumption function

Keynes’ Psychological law of consumption – implications of the law; Empirical evidence on consumption function; Reconciliation of short run and long run consumption function – absolute income, relative income, permanent income and life cycle hypotheses.

Unit-II

Investment Theories

Investment Function; The Marginal Efficiency of Capital Approach; Accelerator- Simple & Flexible; Profits Theory; Financial Theory; The Neoclassical Model.

10-A(462)

Unit-III

Demand for Money

Classical and Keynesian approach (The Regressive Expectations model); Post Keynesian approaches to demand for money-Tobin (Portfolio balance approach), Baumol (Inventory theoretic approaches) and Friedman (Restatement of quantity theory of money).Patinkin’s real balance effect.

Unit-IV

Supply of Money

Measures of money supply; RBI’s approach to money supply; Mechanism of Monetary expansion and contraction (deterministic and behavioural models); Determinants of money supply; Instruments of Monetary control.

Neo-classical and Keynesian Synthesis

The Basic IS-LM model, extension of IS-LM model with government sector, labour market and variable price level.

Basic Reading List

Ackley, G. (1978), Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, Macmillan, New York. Blackhouse, R. and A. Salansi (Eds.) (2000), Macroeconomics and the Real World

(2 Vols.), Oxford University Press, London. Branson, W.A. (1989), Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, (3rd Edition), Harper

and Row, New York. Dornbusch, R. and F. Stanley (1999), Macroeconomics, Irwrin McGraw Hill, Inc.

New York, 7th Edition. Heijdra, B.J. and V.P. Fredericck (2001), Foundations of Modern

Macroeconomics, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Jha, R. (1991), Contemporary Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, Wiley Eastern

Ltd., New Delhi. Romer, D.L. (1996), Advanced Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill Company Ltd.,

New York. Shapiro, E. (1996), Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications, New Delhi.


Mankiw, N.G. and D. Romer (Eds.) (1991), New Keynesian Economics, (2Vols.), MIT Press, Cambridge.

Mankiw, N. Greogory (2000), Macroeconomics Macmillan Worth Publishers 4th Edition

Frisch, H. (1983), Theories of Inflation, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

10-A(463)

Sheffirin, S.M. (1996), Rational Expectations, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Lucas, R. (1981), Studies in Business Cycle Theory, MIT Press, Cambridge, Masscechusetts.

Taylor, L. (1983), Structuralist Macroeconomics, Basic Books, New Longman. Turnovsky, S.J. (1977), Macroeconomic Analysis and Stabilization Policy,

Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. Ruggles R. and N. Ruggles (1956), National Income Accounts and Income

Analysis Mc Graw Hill, Newyork. Veniers, Y.P. and F.D.Sebold, (1977) Macroeconomics; Models and Policy John

Wiley and Inc, USA. Dernburg, T.F.and D. M.Mc Dougall, Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill

International Book Company.

10-A(464)

M.A. 1st Semester

Paper-103 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.

Max. Marks : 100

External : 80 Internal : 20

QUANTITATIVE METHODS-I

Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the four units (16 marks each). PREAMBLE

The main objective of this paper is to train the students to use the techniques of mathematical and statistical analysis, which are commonly applied to understand and analyze economic problems. The emphasis of this paper is on understanding economic concepts with the help of mathematical methods rather than learning mathematics itself. Hence in this paper a student will be initiated into various economic concepts, which are amenable to mathematical treatment. The paper also deals with simple tools and techniques, which will help a student in data collection, presentation, analysis and drawing inferences about various statistical hypotheses.

Unit-I

Concept of Matrix and Determinant – their types, simple operations on matrices, matrix inversion and rank of matrix; Solution of simultaneous equations through Cramer’s rule and Matrix inverse method. Introduction to input-output analysis.

Unit - II

Rules of differentiation; Elasticity and their types; Rules of Partial differentiation and interpretation of partial derivatives; Problems of maxima and minima in single and multivariable functions; Unconstrained and constrained optimization in simple economic problems.

Unit - III

Concept and simple rules of integration; Application to consumer’s and producer’s surplus. Difference equations – Solution of first order and second order difference equations; Applications in trade cycle models; Growth models and lagged market equilibrium models.

10-A(465)

Unit - IV

Linear programming – Basic concept, Nature of feasible, basic and optimal solution; Solution of linear programming problem through graphical and simplex method.

Concept of a game; Two-person Zero-sum game; value of a game; strategies- simple and mixed; Dominance rule; Solution of a game by linear programming.

Basic Reading List

Mathematics for Economics by Michael Hoy etal, PHI, New Delhi, 2004.

Quantitative Methods for Business and Economics by Adil H. Mouhammed, PHI, New Delhi, 2003.

Quantitative Methods by D.R. Aggarwal Basic Mathematics for Economists by R.C. Joshi, New Academic Publishing Leontief, W. (1936) Quantitative input-output relations in the economic systems of

the United States. Review of Economics and Statistics, Vol 18, pp.105-125. Miller, R.E. and P.D. Blair (1985) Input-Output Analysis: Foundations and

Extensions. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. Proops, J., Faber, M. and Wagenhals, G. (1993) Reducing CO2 Emissions: A

Comparative Input-Output Study for Germany and the UK, Springer-Verlag, Heidelberg.

Aggarwal, H.S. : Modren Micro -Economics, Konark, New Delhi, 1998. Taro Yamane, Mathematics for Economists, PHI, 1973. Quantitative Techniques in Management by N.D. Vohra, TMH. Operations Research by R. Wagnor Operations Research by Hamdy A. Taha Allen R.G.D. (1974), Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan Press,

London. Black, J. and J.F. Bradley (1973), Essential Mathematics for Economists, John

Wiley and Sons. Chiang, A.C. (1986), Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics (3rd

Edition), McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

10-A(466)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper-104 (Compulsory)

Time : 3 Hrs. Max. Marks : 100


PUBLIC ECONOMICS –I

Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks

spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the four

units (16 marks each). PREAMBLE

Role and functions of the Government in an economy have been changing with the passage of time. The term ‘Public Finance’ has traditionally been applied to the package of those policies and operations which involve the use of tax and expenditure measures while budgetary policy is an important part to understand the basic problems of use of resources, distribution of income, etc.

Unit - I

Economic Rationale of Mixed Economy; The Efficient Markets; Natural Monopolies and Market Failure; Non-Existence of Futures Markets and Market Failure; Asymmetric Information and market Failure; The Problem of Externalities and their Internalisation; The Coase Theorem; Rent Seeking Costs and Political process.

Unit - II

Concept, Characteristics, Types and Efficient Provision of Public Goods; Private provision of Pure Public Goods; Bowen Model, Samuelson Model; Wagner Hypothesis, Thompson Mechanism, Clarke Mechanism, Lindahl- Wicksell Mechanism; Theory of Club Goods.

Unit - III

Efficiency and Equity Principles of Taxation; Incentive Effects of Taxation on Labour Supply; Supply of Savings and Risk Taking; Taxation and Investment; Other Distorting Effects of the Tax System; Tax Incidence – Partial and General equilibrium Analysis; Mieszkowski Analysis of Tax Incidence; Keynesian Short Run Model of Tax Incidence; Dynamic Tax Incidence.

10-A(467)

Unit - IV

Normative Analysis of Taxation – Income v/s Excise Tax; Optimal Commodity Tax- The Ramsey Rule, The Corlett and Hague Rule; Optimal Income Tax; Excess Burden of Tax and its Measurement; Normative Principles for Redistribution; Corporation tax and its Effects on Corporate Decisions; Tax Evasion and the Black Economy

Base Text Book

Boadway, Robin, “Public Sector Economics”, Cambridge, Winthrop Publishers

Basic Reading List

Bruce, Neil, “Public Finance”, Addison- Wesley Educational Publishers, Inc. Jones. Philip and Cullis, Jones, “Public Finance and Public Choice- Analytical

Perspectives”, Oxford University press Stiglitz, Joseph, “Economics of the Public Sector”, W.W.Norton and

Company, new York/London Rosen, H.S., “Public finance”, Tata McGraw Hill McNutt, P.A., “The economics of Public Choice”, Edward Elgar Publishing

Inc. Mueller, D.C., “Public Choice- I,II,III” Cambridge university Press,

Cambridge Downs, A., “An Economic Theory of Democracy”, Harper and Row, New

York Musgrave R.A and Peacock A.T., “ Classics in the Theory of Public Finance”,

Mcmillan

10-A(468)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper-105 (Option-I)



FINANCIAL ECONOMICS-I

Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions.

(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks).


PREAMBLE

Financial economics is the branch of economics studying the interrelation of financial variables, such as prices, interest rates and shares, as opposed to those concerning the real economy. Financial economics concentrates on influences of real economic variables on financial ones, in contrast to pure finance. Financial economics is primarily concerned with building models to derive testable or policy implications from acceptable assumptions. The theory component centers on decision making under uncertainty in the context of the financial markets, and the resultant economic and financial models. The application of the economic principles include the valuation and determination of the fair value of an asset; the riskiness of the asset, generation of cash flows and their discounting; relative valuations; derivatives and other financial instruments. The aim here is twofold: firstly, to complement the theory; secondly, providing students with practical market knowledge.

Unit-I

Nature and Scope of Financial Economics; Goals of Finance; Economics of capital Budgeting- Investment Criteria, Estimation of project Cash Flows, Risk Analysis in Capital Budgeting, Computation of Cost of Capital.

Unit-II

10-A(469)

Economics of Capital Structure and Firm Value- Net Income Approach, Net Operating income Approach, Modigliani and Miller Approach; Analysis of Optimal Capital structure – EBIT & EPS Analysis, ROI & ROE Analysis, Operating and Financial Leverage; Ratio Analysis.

Unit-III

Economics of Dividends- Walter Model, Gordon Model, Modigliani and Miller Model; Economics of Working Capital- Estimation of Working Capital, Financing of working Capital. Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis.

Unit-IV

Economics of Cash – Cash Budgeting and its Simulation, Optimal Cash balance, Baumol Model, Miller and Orr Model; Economics of Receivables; Economics of Inventory – EOQ Model, Pricing of Raw materials, Monitoring and Control of Inventories.

Reading List

A.C.Shapiro, “Modern Corporate Finance”, Macmillan Publishing Co., New York,1991

Brealey, Myers and Allen, “Principles of Corporate Finance”, McGraw Hill, Inc., New York, 8th Edition.

D.R.Mehta, “Working Capital Management”, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,1974

Deryl Northcott, “Capital Investment Decision-Making”, Thomson Learning, 1992. ISBN10: 1861524587

E.I.Altman and M.G.Subrahmanyam (ed.), “Recent Advances in Corporate Finance”, Richard D.Irwin, Inc., Homewood, Ill., 1985

H.Bierman,Jr. and S. Smidt, “The Capital Budgeting Decision”, The Macmillan Company, New York, 1988.

J. Harold Mulherin, “Mergers and Corporate Governance”, Edward Elgar Publishing, 2004. ISBN10: 1843764210

J.A.Brittain, “Corporate Dividend Policy”, Brookings Institution, Washington D.C., 1966

J.C.Van Horne, “Financial Management and Policy”, Prentice hall, New Delhi, 1995

Jean Tirole, “The Theory of Corporate Finance”, Princeton University Press, 2006. ISBN10: 0691125562

Joel M. Stern, “Revolution in Corporate Finance”, Blackwell Publishing, 1997. ISBN10: 1577180445

Prasana Chandra, “Financial Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi

10-A(470)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper-105 (Option-II)



DEMOGRAPHY-I




PREAMBLE

The main objective of this paper is to make the students aware of the importance of population in economic development and the various theories that explain the growth of population in a country. The paper also enlightens the student on the quantitative and the qualitative aspects and characteristics of the population through various demographic techniques. In recent times, gender characteristics of the population have acquired importance and these have also been included in the framework of study of population policy.

Unit - I

Population and Development: Meaning and scope of demography, components of population growth and their interdependence; Sources of population data; Theories of population –Malthus, Optimum theory of population; Theories of demographic transition; Models of Meadows, Enke, Becker and Easterlin; Population and Development.

Unit -II

Structure of Population: Population trends since the twentieth century; International aspects of population growth and distribution; Age and Sex structure in more developed and less developed countries; determinants of age and sex structure; Population pyramids- individual aging and population aging; Population projection

Unit - III

Fertility: Importance of the study of fertility-Total fertility rate, Gross reproduction rate and Net reproduction rate. Levels and trends in developed and developing countries; Factors affecting fertility.

10-A(471)

Nuptiality: Concept and analysis of marital status; Trends in age at marriage, widowhood and divorce.

Unit - IV

Mortality: Levels and trends in mortality in developed and developing countries; Mortality differences by age & sex, residence, occupation etc. ; Foetal and Infant mortality; Factors leading to decline in mortality in recent past; Life Tables:- construction and uses.

Basic Reading List

Agarwal S.N. (1972), India,s Population Problem, Tata McGraw- Hill Co., Bombay.

Bose, A. (1996), India’s Basic Demographic Statistics, B.R. Publishing Corporation, New Delhi.

Bogue, D.J. (1971), Principle of Demography, John Wiley, New York. Chenery H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.)(1989), Hand Book of Development

Economics, Vol. 1 & 2 Elsevier, Amsterdam. Choubey, P.K. (2000), Population Policy in India, Kanishka Publications,

New Delhi. Coals, A.J. and E.M. Hoover (1958), Population Growth and Economic

Development in Low income Countries: A Case Study of India’s Prospectus, Princeton University Press, Princeton.

Gulati, S.C (1988), Fertility in India: An Econometric Study of a Metropolis, Sage, New Delhi. Additional Reading List

Agnihotri, S. B. (2000), Sex ration in Indian Population: A fresh Exploration, Sage New Delhi.

Amsden, A. H. (Ed.) (1992), Form of Production and Women’s Labour, Gender Aspects of Industrialization in India and Mexico, Sage, New Delhi.

Boserup,E. (1970), Women’s role in Economics Development, George Allen and Unwin, London.

Chiang, C.L. (1974), Life Tables and Mortailty Analysis, W.H.O., Geneva. Gupta, Jj.A. (2000), New Reproductive Technogies, Women’s Health and

Autonomy, Indo Dutch Studies on Development Alternatives, Sage, New Delhi.

Jhabwala,R. and R.K. Subramanya (2000) (Eds.), The Unorganized Sector: Work Security and Social Protection, sage, New Delhi.

Krshnaji M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and development, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

King M. and M.A. Hill (Eds.)(1993), Women’s Education in Developing Countries: Barriers, Benefits and Politics, John Hopkins, Baltimore.

Lewis (Ed.)(1989), Strengthening the poor: What Have We Learnt, OECD, Paris.

Mishra S. (2000), Voluntary Action in Health and Population: The Dynamics of Social Transition, Sage, New Delhi.

Mitra, A. (1979), Implications of Declining Sex Ration in India’s Population, Allied, New Delhi.

10-A(472)

Novell, C. (1988), Methods and Models in Demography, Belhaven Press, London.

Seth M. (2000), Women and Development: The Indian Experience, Sage, and New Delhi.

Simon, J.L. (1992), Population and Development in Poor Countries, Princeton University Press.

Srinivasan, K. (1998), Basic Demographic Techniques and Applications, Sage, New Delhi.

Srinivasan, K and A. Shariff (1998), India: Towards Population and Demographic Goals, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Sryrock, H. et.al. (1973), The Methods and Materials of Demography, US Department of Commerce,Washington,D.C.

Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and Development, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

United Nations (1973), The determinants and consequences of Population Trends, Vol. 1 UNO Publications, New York.

10-A(473)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper- 105 (Option-III)



ECONOMICS OF INFRASTRUCTURE-I




PREAMBLE

The important role infrastructure plays in a country’s development need not be reiterated. In case of developing countries, lack of adequate infrastructure has been held as a major obstacle to growth. The main purpose of this paper is to introduce a course on infrastructure, as it would help the students to understand the strength of infrastructure - physical and social in the process of economic development.

Unit - I

Infrastructure – Physical & Social Infrastructure; Infrastructure as a public good; the peak load, off - load problem; Role of infrastructure in economic development; Issues & policies in financing of infrastructure; Theory of natural monopoly.

Unit-II

Economic analysis of transport: Transport as an economic activity, cost of transport, pricing of transport services, law of diminishing returns and economies of scale, transport policy and development in a changing environment, assessment of present and proposed transport policy and legislation, environment cost of transport, transport regulation.

Unit-III

Rail transport: Analysis of the market, legal requirements and policy, railway characteristics and ownership, containerization, regional rail cooperation, international railway trends, railway pricing, pipelines. Air transport :Development of the Indian air transport industry, overview of current air transport policies, the roles and responsibilities of national and international control bodies, cost and pricing of air transport services, airline management and control .Airport planning and management.

10-A(474)

Unit-IV

Concept, scope and relevance of Human Resource Development (HRD); Domain of HRD; Educational infrastructure and Economic Growth; Approaches to Educational Planning- Social Demand, Rate of Return and Manpower Balance Approaches; The case for Universal, Free, Primary Education; The issues & challenges in Indian higher education.

Basic Reading List

O’ Sullivan, A. (2003) : Urban economics, Boston, MA, Irwin McGraw-Hill Timothy J. B. et al (1987) :Saturn and state economic development, forum for

applied research and public policy, 2 (1), 29- 40 Glaeser, Edward L.(1998) Are cities dying? Journal of economic perspectives,

12(1), 139-160. Ellen, I. G. and Schwartz, A. E. (2000): No easy answers: cautionary notes for

competitive cities, The Brookings, review, 18(3), 43–45 McLean, M. L., and Voytek K.P. (1992) :Understanding your economy, using

analysis to guide local strategic planning, 2nd ed, Chicago, Planners Press Mieszkowski, P., and Mills, E.S. (1993): The causes of metropolitan

suburbanization, Journal of economic perspectives, 7(1), 135-147. Kenneth A. S. (1993) Urban traffic congestion, a new approach to the gordian

knot, the Brookings review, 11(2), 6-11. Peter G. and Richardson H. (1989): Notes from the underground: the failure of

urban mass transit, The public interest, 94, 77-86 Timothy J. B. (1994): Jobs, productivity, and local economic development:

what implications does economic research have for the role of government? national tax Journal , 47(4), 847- 862.

Andrew C. K. (1993) :Why regions grow: a review of research on the economic base model, Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta economic review, 16-29.

Porter M.E. (1998): Clusters and the new economic competition, Harvard business review, 76 (6), 77-90.

Peiser R.B. (1989): Density and urban sprawl, Land economics , 65(3), 193-204.

Coulson, N.E. (1991): Really useful tests of the monocentric model land economics, Land economics, 67(3), 299-307.

Berube A. and Forman B. (2002) :Living on the Edge, decentralization within cities in the 1990s, the living cities census series, The Brookings Institution (October 2002)

Molly O’Meara S. (2002): What will it take to halt sprawl, world watch, 15(1), 12-23.

Sivaramakrishnan, K.C., Kundu A. and Singh B.N. (2005): Handbook of urbanization in India. New Delhi: Oxford University Press

Naik N.T.K and Mansoor S. R. (2007): Urbanisation of India. New Delhi, Eastern Book Corporation.

Jose G.-I., Tye W.B., Winston C. (1999): Essays in transportation economics and policy, a handbook in honor of John R. Meyer, Washington D.C, The Brookings Institution Press

Button K.J.(1993) :Transport Economics, UK, Edward Elgar

10-A(475)

Singh S. K. (2000): Technical characteristics and efficiency of the Indian state road transport undertakings?, Indian journal of transport management, 24(8): 533-543.

Singh S. K. (2005): Review of urban transportation in India? Journal of public transportation, 8(1): 79-97

Button, K.J. and Pearman A. (1985) : Applied transport economics: a practical case study approach, London, Gordon and Breach

Button K.J. (1976) :The use of economics in urban travel demand modeling, a survey, socioeconomic planning sciences, 10(2) : 57- Crew M.A. and Kleindorfer P.R. (1979) : Public utility economics, London, Macmillan

Mody A.(1997): Infrastructure strategies in east Asia, the untold story, Washington, D.C: economic development institute, world bank

Goodman J.B. and Loveman G.W. (1991): Does privatization serve the public interest, Harvard business review, 69(6): 26-38

Sherman R. (1983): is public utility regulation beyond hope? in A.L.Danielsen and D.R.Kamarschen (ed.), current issues in public utility economics, Lexington, MA.

The economist (1996): The Hidden cost of red tape, 27th July 1996 Chaudhuri M.D. (1990): Market failure and government failure, Journal of

Economic Perspectives, 4(3), 25-39 National Council of Applied Economic Research (1996): India infrastructure

report: policy implications for growth and welfare, New Delhi , NCAER Navarro, P. (1996): Electric utilities, the argument for radical deregulation,

Harvardbusiness review, 73(1): 112-25 Parikh, K.S. (Ed.) (1999): India development report - 1999-2000, New Delhi:

Oxford Athreya M.B. (1996): India’s telecommunication policy, telecommunication

policy, 20(1): 11-22 Sinha N. (1996): The political economy of India’s telecom reforms,

telecommunication policy, 20(1) : 23-38 Anandalingam G. (1996) :Technological progress, industry dynamics and

telecommunications policy: the need for further reforms in India, working paper No.83, IIM, Bangalore,.

Smith P.L. and Staple G (1994): Telecommunication sector reforms in Asia: towards a new paradigm, World Bank discussion paper 232, World Bank,Washington D.C.

Relevant websites of different ministries of the Government of India, summary of consultants reports in UP, Haryana, and Karnataka electricity board restructuring

Smil, V. (2000): Energy in the twentieth century, resources conversions, costs, uses and consequences annual review of energy and the Environment 25: 21-51.

Hausman, J. (1979 :) Individual discount rates and the purchase and utilization of energyusing durables, the bell journal of economics 10, no. 1: 33-54.

Slade, M., C. Kolstad, and R. Weiner.(1993): Buying energy and nonfuel minerals ch 20 in handbook of natural resource and energy economics. Vol. 3.edited by A. Kneese and J. Sweeney. San Diego, CA, Elsevier Science Publishers

Hughes, J., C. Knittel, and D. Sperling. (2006): Evidence of a shift in the short-run price elasticity of gasoline demand, center for the study of energy markets, working paper 159.

10-A(476)

Krautkraemer J., and M. Toman. (2003):Fundamental economics of depletable energy supply, resources for the future, discussion Paper 03-01.

Flynn, E. (2000):Impact of technological change and productivity on the coal market, energy information administration, issues in midterm analysis and forecasting.

Heal, G. (1993):The optimal use of exhaustible resources, ch 18 in handbook of natural resource and energy economics. Vol. 3. Edited by A. Kneese and J. Sweeney. San Diego, CA: Elsevier Science Publishers.

Smith, J. (2005): Inscrutable OPEC? behavioral tests of the cartel hypothesis, The energy journal 25, no. 1: 51-82.

Barsky, R., and L. Killian,. (2004):Oil and the macroeconomy since the 1970 journal of economic perspectives 18, no. 4: 115-134.

Deffeyes, K. ,Hubbert's Peak, (2001):: The impending world of oil shortage. Princeton, NJ, Princeton University Press, chapter 1.

Pindyck, R. (1978):Gains to producers from cartelization of an exhaustible resource., review of economics and statistics 60, no. 2: 238-251.

Considine, T. (2006): Is the strategic petroleum reserve our ace in the hole?" the energyjournal 27, no. 3: 91-112.

Leitzinger, J., and M. Collette. (2002): A retrospective look at wholesale gas, industry restructuring, journal of regulatory economics 21, no. 1: 79-101.

MacAvoy, P., and R. Pindyck. (1973):Alternative regulatory policies for dealing with the natural gas shortage., the bell journal of economics and management science 4, no. 2: 454- 498.

Cuddington, J., and Z. Wang. (2006): Assessing the degree of spot market integration for u.s. natural gas, evidence from daily price data., journal of regulatory economics 29: 195-210

Borenstein, S. (2005): The long run efficiency of real-time electricity pricing, the energy journal 26, no. 3: 93-116.

Energy Information Administration. (2002):Derivatives in risk management for petroleum,gas and electricity).

Herce, M., J. Parsons, and R. Ready. (2006): Using futures prices to filter short-term volatility and recover a latent, long-term price series for oil, MIT center for energy and environmental policy research working paper 06-005 (April).

Intergovernmental Panel on climate change (IPCC. ,Climate change (2007): The physical science basis, summary for policymakers .

Nordhaus, W. D. (2006): The stern review on the economics of climate change mimeo.

Pizer, M. (2006): The evolution of a global climate change agreement, American economics association papers and proceedings 96, no. 2: 26-30.

Nordhaus, W. (2006): After Kyoto alternative mechanisms to control global warming American economics association papers and proceedings 96, no. 2: 31-34.

Massachusetts institute of technology, (2003):The future of nuclear power,an interdisciplinary MIT study

Hassett, K. and G. Metcal , (1993):Energy conservation investment, do consumers discount the future correctly? Energy policy (June): 710-716.

Portney, P., and I. Parry, (2003): Policy watch, the economics of fuel economy standards, journal of economic perspectives 17, no. 4: 203-217.

McGowan, J., and S. Conners. (2000:)Windpower, A turn of the century review ,annual review of energy and the environment 25: 147-197.

10-A(477)

Palmer, K., and D. Bullaw., (2005):Cost-effectiveness of renewable electricity policies, energy economics 27: 873-894.

McDonlad, S., S. Robinson, and K. Thierfelder.(2006:)Impact of switching production to bioenergy crops, the switchgrass example, energy economics 28: 243-265.

10-A(478)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper- 105 (Option-IV)



ECONOMICS OF INSURANCE-I


(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions

of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus 2*8=16 marks).


PREAMBLE

The vital role of insurance in the task of risk-bearing and risk-elimination in the economic affairs has not been appreciated adequately in our country. Given that the element of risk or uncertainty is a universal and fundamental phenomenon in our economic life, the importance of insurance as a means of reducing uncertainty and risk in regard to personal and business activities cannot be overemphasized. The role of insurance sector in mobilizing a country’s saving for channeling them into capital formation and thus contribute to a country’s economic development is also documented. There is a wide spread recognition that insurance, particularly life insurance, is a prominent segment of applied economics. Insurance industry is an important constituent of financial services industry in India and is a major investment institution and prominent player in the capital market. However, in our country, study of the subject of insurance has largely remained neglected. With the opening of the insurance sector for private Indians and foreign players, the interest in the subject has been kindled. This course on Insurance Economics attempts to give a fairly comprehensive view of the subject to the postgraduate students in Economics and pave the way for possible future expansion of the teaching of an important branch of economics.

Unit-I

Insurance- Meaning, scope and limitations; Role and significance of insurance; Basic principles of insurance; insurance as a social security tool; Risk pooling and risk transfer, Social Vs private insurance; Double insurance and Re-insurance.

Unit-II

10-A(479)

Fundamentals of life & health insurance; Functions of life & health insurance; Mathematical basis of life insurance; Plans of life insurance; Legal aspects of life insurance; Provisions of policies; Individual health insurance; Uses and types of evaluation; Principles of underwriting of life & health insurance; Group insurance and superannuation (pension) schemes.

Unit-III

Fundamentals of uncertainty & risk; Pure risk & speculative risk; Expected utility and decision-making under uncertainty; Expected utility & demand for the insurance; Moral hazard and insurance demand; Essentials of risk management; Elements of risk assessment; Risk control & risk financing. Worldwide risk sharing- concept of reinsurance, types of re-insurers; Reinsurance distribution systems; reinsurance markets in developing countries.

Unit-IV

Definition, types and importance of general insurance; Concept of short term risk; Basics of the following concepts - Common law, equity, proposal/accidence, indemnity, insurable interest, contribution subrogation; representation; utmost good faith, material fact, physical hazard, moral hazard, policy endorsements conditions/warranties; selection and inspection of risks; rating and calculation of premiums; tariffs and non-tariffs; technology development and general insurance.

Basic Reading List

Black. K. Jr. and H.D. Skipper Jr.(2000), Life & Health Insurance, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jerssey.

Dionne, G. and S.E. Harrington (eds.) (1997), Foundations of Insurance Economics, Kluwer academic Publishers, Boston.

Pteffer, I. And D.R. Klock (1974), Perspectives on Insurance, Prentice Hall Inc., Engleword Cliffs.

Williams Jr., C.A. M.L. Smith and P.C.Young (1995), Risk Management and Insurance, McGraw Hill, New York.

Skipper Jr., H.D.(ed.) (1998), International Risk & Insurance : An Environmental Managerial Approach, Irwin McGraw Hill, Boston.

United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (1987), The Promotion of Risk Management in Developing Countries, UNCTAD, Geneva.

Insurance Institute of India, Life Assurance Underwriting, (IC-22), Mumbai. Insurance Institute of India, General Insurance Underwriting, (IC-22), Mumbai. Government of India (1998), Old Age and Income Security (OASIS) Report (Dave

Committee Report), New Delhi. Ivers, J.I. III and E.T. Johnson (eds) (1991), Readings in Wealth Accumulation

Planning, The American College, Bryn Mawr, Pa. Insurance Regulation and Development Authority (2001), IRDA Regulations, New

Delhi. Meier. K.J. (1998), The Political Economy of Regulation : The Case of Insurance, The

State University of New York Press, Albany, N.Y.

10-A(480)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper- 105 (Option-V)



ECONOMICS OF LABOUR-I

Note: (i) Nine Questions will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions.



PREAMBLE

Issues pertaining to the labour market, wage theories, employment policies, trade unions and collective bargaining in the globalized economy have become vitally important for developing countries. In a country like India where the bulk of the labour force is in the unorganized sector and the organized sector is witnessing “jobless” growth, the importance of issues such as employment and unemployment as well as livelihood and social security for the growing millions continues to assume significance. This Paper exposes students to theoretical as well as empirical issues relating to the labour market with special reference to India.

Unit-I

Nature and characteristics of labour markets in developing countries like India; Paradigms of labour market analysis – Classical and neo-classical; Demand for labour in relation to size and pattern of investment.

Unit-II

Supply of labour in relation to growth of labour force; Labour market policies; Mobility and productivity of labour; Rationalization; Methods of recruitment and placement; Employment service organization in India; Poverty and unemployment in developing countries; Unemployment – Concept, Types, and Measurement; particularly in India.

Unit-III

Impact of rationalization, technological change and modernization on employment in organized private industry; Public sector and employment in agricultural sector; Employment policy under Five Year Plans and its evaluation.

10-A(481)

Unit-IV

Classical, neo-classical and bargaining theories of wage determination; Concepts of minimum wage, living wage and fair wage in theory and practice; Wage determination in various sectors – rural, urban, organized, unorganized and in informal sectors.

Basic Reading List

Hajela, P.D. (1998), Labour Restructuring in India: A Critique of the New Economic Policies, Commonwealth Publisher, New Delhi.

Lester, R.A. (1964), Economics of Labour, (2nd Edition), Macmillan, New York.

McConnell, C.R. and S.L. Brue (1986), Contemporary Labour Economics, McGraw-Hill, New York.

Papola, T.S., P.P. Ghosh and A.N. Sharma (Eds.) (1993), Labour, employment and industrial Relations in India, B.R. Publishing Corporation, New Delhi.

Venkata Ratnam, C.S. (2001), Globalization and Labour-Management Relations: Dynamics of Change, Sage Publications/Response Books, New Delhi.


McCormickm B. and Smith (Eds.)(1968), The Labour Market, Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Das, N. (1960), Unemployment, Full Employment and India, Asia Publishing House, Bombay.

Deshpande L.K. and J.C. Sandesara, (Eds.)(1970), Wage Policy and Wages Determination in India, Bombay University Press, Bombay.

Hicks J.R. (1932), The Theory of Wages, Clarendon Press, Oxford. Mazumdar, D. (1989), Micro-economic Issues of Labour Markets in

Developing Countries, EDI Services Paper No. 40, World Bank, Washington D.C. Memoria, C.B. (1966), Labour Problems and Social Welfare in India, Kitab

Mahal, Allahbad. Punekar, S.D. (1978), Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial

Relations, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay Singh V.B. (Ed.) (1970), Industrial Labour in India, Popular Parakashan,

Bombay. Misra, L. (2000), Child Labour in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Riveros, L. (1990), Labour Market Policies and Labour Market Reforms in

Socialist Economies, World Bank, Washington D.C.

10-A(482)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper- 105 (Option-VI)



COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-I


(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2

marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks).

(iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the

four units (16 marks each).

PREAMBLE

The direction towards the knowledge society shall be resting on a healthy economics and proper use of Information Technology. Economics being an empirical science, computers have emerged as the pivotal instruments of economic analysis, research and forecasting. Therefore, the future economists must be equipped with skills and tools based on computers, which this course shall provide to them. This will not only enhance their employability but also prepare them for the challenges of the future.

Unit-I

Introduction to Computer Fundamentals: History and Evolution of Computers; Components of a Personal Computer System; Classification of Computers and their applications; System – Meaning and Concept; Hardware, Software and Types of Software; Operating System- Meaning and Functions; Types of memory; Input-Output Devices. Computer Languages - Machine, Assembly and High-Level Languages;

Unit-II

Data and Information: Meaning, Types, Data Storage Hierarchy; Data base Concepts; Data base Management System, Data Base Structuring Techniques, Table, Form, Query Report; Advantages and Limitations of Database System; Information Technology in Business : Internet, Intranet, Extranet, LAN, MAN, WAN, WWW, E-Mail, Search Engines, EDI and ATM. Social Media.

Unit-III

10-A(483)

Application Softwares: Windows based operating system; Word Processing – Document Management and Formatting; Main Features of MS Access and Presentation software.

Unit-IV

Problem Solving with Spreadsheets; Spreadsheet as DBMS; Arithmetic & Geometric Progressions; Solution of Simultaneous Equation with Matrices; Mathematical, Statistical & Financial Functions; Graphical Analysis in Economics; Time-path of economic variables.

Basic Reading List

Sinha, P.K. , Computer Fundamental, BPB Publications, New Delhi. Rajaraman, V. Fundamentals of Computers, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. Parameswaranm R. Computer Applications in Business, S. Chand and

Company, New Delhi. Sudalaimuthu, S. and Anthony Raj S, Computer Applications in Business,

Himalays Publishing House, New Delhi. Goel, Sushil, Computer Application to Business & E-Commerce, Natraj

Publishing House, Karanl. Madan, Sushila, Information Technology, Taxman Allied Services, New Delhi. P.T. Joseph, S.J. , E- Commerce : An Indian Perspective, PHI Learning , New

Delhi. Lipschultz, M.M. and S. Lipschultz , Theory and Problems of Data Processing,

Schaum's Outline Series, McGraw Hill, New York. David Whiteley, E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies and Applications, Tata

McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

10-A(484)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper-105 (Option – VII)



MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS-I




(iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from

each of the four units (16 marks each). PREAMBLE This course is designed to equip students to understand the economic concepts and theories which use mathematical tools and techniques to refine the verbal logic. The use of calculus has permitted formulation of economic problems in multivariable mode and yield valuable insight about optimizing human behaviour. Modern algebraic tools allow convenient handling of simultaneous equations in the context of linear programming, game theory and input-output analysis. Mathematical economics deals with various applications of mathematical tools and techniques in defining and developing economic relationships. This course has been accordingly designed to include various mathematical techniques/methods/models related to the different parts of economic theory like consumer theory, theory of production, pricing, trade cycles, growth models, etc. The paper covers important aspects of microeconomics, macroeconomics and development theory and the various modules have been accordingly designed.

Unit- I Types of utility functions; Ordinal utility maximization; Demand functions- ordinary and compensated; Slutsky equation- income, substitution, and price effects; Consumer surplus; Elasticity of demand; Linear expenditure systems; Indirect utility function.

Unit - II Production functions and their properties (CD, CES, Translog); Elasticity of factor substitution and curvature of iso-quants; Producers equilibrium; Duality in cost and production functions; Growth Accounting Equation; Methods for measuring productivity and efficiency.

Unit- III

Product and factor market equilibrium; Existence, uniqueness and stability of equilibrium; Static stability, dynamic stability-lagged adjustment, dynamic

10-A(485)

stability-continuous adjustment; Dynamic equilibrium with lagged adjustment; monopoly, monopsony and monopolistic competition.

Unit -IV

Duopoly, oligopoly and bi-lateral monopoly; Cournot, Stackleberg’s models; Joint profit maximization; Price leadership model; Baumol, Willamsons, Marris models of firm;

Basic Reading List

Henderson, J. M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A Mathematical Approach, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Koutsoyiannis, A. (1979), Modern Microeconomics, (2nd Edition), Macmillan Press, London.

Allen, R.G.D. (1976), Mathematical Economics, Macmillan, London. Arrow, K. J. and M. Intrilligator (Eds.)(1982), Handbook of

Mathematical Economics, Volumes I, II and III, North Holland, Amsterdam.


Chung, J.W. (1993), Utility and Production: Theory and Applications, Basil Blackwell, London.

Ferguson, C.E. (1976), New-classical Theory of Production and Distribution.

Allen R.G.D. (1974), Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan Press and ELBS, London.

Chiang, A.C. (1986), Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, McGraw Hill, New York.

Jha, R. (1991), Contemporary Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.

Jones, H.G. (1976), An Introduction to the Modern Theory of Economic Growth, McGraw Hill-Kogakusha, Tokyo.

Handley, G. (1962), Linear Programming, Addison Wesley Publishing Co., Massachusetts.

Hiller, F.S. and G.J. Lieberman (1985), Operations Research, C.B.S., New Delhi.

Kothari, C.R. (1992), An Introduction to Operations Research, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.

Mustafi, C. K. (1992), Operations Research: Methods and Practice, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.

10-A(486)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper-105 (Option – VIII) Time : 3 Hrs.


ECONOMICS OF REGIONALISM -I


(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the four units (16 marks each).

Unit - I

The rationale and motivation behind Regionalism; Multinational Trade Liberalization and RIAs; Regional v/s Global Liberalization; RIAs and Domestic Policy Integration.

Unit – II

The Economics of Custom Unions (Viner), Economies of Scale and Custom Union. The GATT’s Article XXIV, Preferential Trading Areas and Multilaterarlism; Domino Theory of Regionalism; Hub and Spoke theory of Regional intearation.

Unit – III

East Asian Regionalism; Asia’s New role in Global Economy; Relevance of Broader Regional Economic Integration in Asia; A Strategic Perspective on Asian Economic Integration.

Unit – IV

Building Blocs of Broader Regional Cooperation; ASEAN’s Role in Asian Economic Integration; Japan in Asian Economic Community; China’s Role in the Asian Economic Integration Process; India and the Asian Economic Integration.


Jacob Viner (1950) “The Economics of Customs Unions” in the Custom Union Issue Chapter 4, NY: Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, 41-81.

W.M. Corden (1972)”Economies of Scale and Customs Union Theory” Journal of Political Economy, 80, January/February/November/December 465-75.

10-A(487)

Murray C. Kemp & Henry Y. Wan Jr. 91976) An Elementary Proposition Encouraging the Formation of Customs Unions, Journal of International Economics, 6 Feb. 95-7.

Paul Wonnacott and Ronald Wonnacott (1981) “Is Unilateral Tariff Reduction Preferable to a Customs Union? The Curios Case of the Missing Foreign Tariffs’ American Economic Review 719(4) Sep. 704-14

Richard H. Snape 91993) “History and Economics of GATTS Article XXTV in My Anderson and Richard Blackhurs (Eds) Regional Integration and Global Trading System, New York: Havesfer Wheatsheaf, 273-91.

J. Bhagwati & A. Panagariya (1998) “Preferential Trading Areas and Multilateralism: Strangers, Friends and Foes? In Regionalism in Trade Policy: Essays on Preferential Trading, Singapore, River Edge, NJ & London.

Arvind Panagariya (2000) “Preferential Trade Liberalisation: The Traditional Theory and New Developments” Journal Economc Literature, XXXVIII 2 June, 287-331.

Martin Richardson (1993) “Endogenous Protection and Trade Diversion” Journal of International Economics, 34 (3-4) May 309-24.

Richard E. Baldwin 91995) “A Domino Theory of Regionalism” in Richard Baldwin, Perth Haaparonta and Jarakko Kiander (eds), Expanding Membership of the European Union, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press 25-48.

Arvind Panagariya and Ronald Fividlay (1996) “A Political Economy Analysis of Free Trade Areas and Customs Unions” in Robert C Feensba, Gene M. Grossman and Dongla A. Irwin (eds) The Political Economy of Trade Policy: Papers in Honor of Jagdish Bhagwati. Cambridge, MA:MIT Press (265-87)

Kyle Bawell and Robert W. Staiger (1997) “Multilateral Tariff Cooperation During the Formation of Customs Unions” Journal of International Economics, 42,91-123.

Philip I. Lecy (1997) “ A Political Economics Analysis of Free Trade Agreements” American Economic Review 87 (4) Sept. 506-19.

Pravin Krishna (1996) “Regionalism and Multilateralism “ A Political Economy Approach” Quarterly Journal of Economics XIII (I) Feb, 227-51.

Wilfred J. Ethier (1958) “Regionalism in a Multilateral World” Journal of Political Economy 106 (6) Dec. 1214-45.

Caroline Freiend (2000) “ Multilateralism and the Endogenous Formation of Preferential Trade Agreements” Journal of International Economics 52, 359-76

Paul Wonnacott and Mark Lutz (1089) “Is there a case for Free Trade Areas?” in Jeftrey J. Schott (eds) Free Trade Areas and US Trade Policy Washington DC Institute of International Economics, 59-84.

Lawrence H. Summers (1991) “Is there a case for Free Trade Areas?” in Institute of International Economics, 59-84.

Paul Krugman (1993) “Regionalism Versus Multilateralism: Analytical Notes; in Jaime De Melo and Arvind panagariya (eds) New Dimensions in Regional Intergration Cambridge: Cambridge University Press 58-84.

Jeffrey Frankel Ernesto Stein iand Shang Jin Wei (1995) “Trading Blocs and the Americas: The aNatural the Unnatural and the Super Natural” Journal of Development Economics, 47 (E), June, 61-95.

“Asia’s New Regionalism and Global Role: Agenda for the East Asia Summit” edited by Nagesh Kumar, K. Kesavpny and Yao Cheocheng published by RIS & ISERS, 2008.

10-A(488)


M. A. Economics w.e.f. 2014-2015 Course Structure

M.A. Economics (Semester II)

Total Marks External Internal Time

Paper-201 Micro Economic Analysis-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-202 Macro Economic Analysis-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-203 Quantitative Methods-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-204 Public Economics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-205 Option (i) Financial Economics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (ii) Demography-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (iii) Economics of Infrastructure-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (iv) Economics of Insurance-II 100 80 20 3Hrs. Option (v) Economics of Labour-II 100 80 20 3Hrs. Option (vi) Computer Applications in 100 80(60+20) 20 3Hrs.

Economic Analysis-II (60 Theory + 20 Practical) Option (vii) Mathematical Economics-II 100 80 20 3Hrs. Option (viii) Economics of Regionalism-II 100 80 20 3Hrs. Note: Students are required to select an option from Paper-205 from the same stream which they selected in Semester I.

10-A(489)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-201 (Compulsory)



MICRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-II


(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the four units (16 marks each).

Unit-I

Critical evaluation of marginal analysis; Average cost pricing model; Bain’s limit pricing theory; Baumal’s sales revenue maximization model(all four static models); Marris model of managerial enterprise; Williamson’s model of managerial discretion.

Unit-II

Pricing of factors of production (perfect and imperfect market); Elasticity of technical substitution and factor shares, technical progress and factor shares; Factor pricing and income distribution. Macro theories of distribution – Ricardo, Marx, Kalecki and Kaldor.

Unit-III

The Walrasian approach to general equilibrium; Existence, stability and uniqueness of the partial equilibrium; Maximization of social welfare; Market failure; Externalities, Public goods, asymmetric information.

Unit-IV Inter-temporal choice in consumption; Economics of Uncertainty - Decision rules under uncertainty; Individual behaviour towards risk: Risk, gambling, insurance decisions. Economics of information – search costs, market signaling.

10-A(490)

Basic Reading List


Salvatore D(2006), Microeconomics-Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press

Varian, H. (2003), Intermediate Microeconomics, East-West Press. Varian, H. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W. Norton, New York.


Archibald, G.C. (Ed.) (1971), Theory of the Firm, Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Baumol, W.J. (1982), Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

Borch, K.H. (1968), The Economics of Uncertainty, Princeton University Press, Princeton.

Boyes.W and Melvin. M , Micro economics, Houghton Mifflin Company Boston Newyork.

Broadway, R.W. and N. Bruce (1984), Welfare Economics, Basil Blackwell, London.

Collel A.,Whinston and Green (2012), MicroEconomic Theory, Oxford University Press.

Diamond and Rothschild (Eds.) (1978), Uncertainty in Economics, Academic Press New York.

Goodwin, Nelson,Ackerman and WeissKopf(2009), Micro Economics in context, PHI Learning Private Limited.

Graff, J. De. V. (1957), Theoretical Welfare Economics, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

Gravelle,H.and Rees,R.(2008), Micro Economics, Dorling Kindersley. Gupta K.R.(2009), Advanced MicroEconomics, Atlantic Publishers and

Distributors LTD Hirshleifer, J. and A. Glazer (1997), Price Theory and Applications,

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. Jehle Geoffrey A.and Reny Philip J (2008), Advanced Micro Economic

Theory, Dorling Kindersley (India) Lipsey and Chrystal(2014), Economics, Oxford University Press Mankiw(2006),Principles of Microeconomics,Cengage Learning Mansfield Edwin, Applied MicroEconomics, W.W.Norton ,New York

London. Quirk, J. and R. Saposnik (1968), Introduction to General Equilibrium

Theory and Welfare Economics, McGraw Hill, New York. Sen, A. (1999), Microeconomics: Theory and Applications, Oxford

University Press, New Delhi. Sen,A.(2007), Micro Economics: Theory and applications. Oxford

University Press.

10-A(491)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-202 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


MACRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-II


(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks

spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions

from each of the four units (16 marks each).

PREAMBLE

Macroeconomics analyses and establishes the functional relationship between large aggregates. The aggregate analysis has assumed such a great significance in recent times that a prior understanding of macroeconomics theoretical structure is considered essential for the proper comprehension of the different issues and policies. Macroeconomics now is not only a scientific method of analysis; but also a body of empirical economic knowledge. The paper entitled “Macro Economics Analysis” equips the students at the postgraduate level to understand systematic facts and latest theoretical developments for empirical analysis at economy level.

Unit-I

Open Macro Economics

International flow of capital and goods; saving and investment in a small open economy; Exchange Rates-real and nominal; Demand and supply of Foreign Exchange; Balance of payments-current and capital account; Mundell-Fleming Model under fixed and flexible exchange rates.

Unit-II

Theory of Inflation

Classical, Keynesian and Monetarist approaches; Structuralist theory of inflation; Philips curve analysis – Short run and long run Philips curve; Natural Rate of Unemployment hypothesis; Tobin’s modified Philips curve. Search Theory – DMP (Diamond, Mortenson, Pissarides) Model.

Unit-III

10-A(492)

Theory of Business Cycles

Business Cycle Theories of Schumpeter, Kaldor, Samuelson and Hicks; Control of business cycles – relative efficacy of monetary and fiscal policies.

Unit-IV

Macro Economic Policy

Monetary and Fiscal Policy- Targets and instruments; Conflicting objectives and coordination of objectives; Elasticities and effectiveness of monetary and fiscal policy. The Great Depression; Lags in the effects of policies; Expectations and Reactions; Uncertainty and Economic Policy; Economic Policy - Rules vs Discretion .Recent Developments

The Concept of Rational Expectations; New Classical Macro Economics – basic approach and policy implications; New Keynesian Economics - Sticky Nominal prices (Mankiw Model).

Basic Reading List

Ackley, G. (1978), Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, Macmillan, New York.

Blackhouse, R. and A. Salansi (Eds.) (2000), Macroeconomics and the Real World (2 Vols.), Oxford University Press, London.

Branson, W.A. (1989), Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, (3rd Edition), Harper and Row, New York.

Dornbusch, R. and F. Stanley (1999), Macroeconomics, Irwrin McGraw Hill, Inc. New York, 7th Edition.

Heijdra, B.J. and V.P. Fredericck (2001), Foundations of Modern Macroeconomics, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.


Romer, D.L. (1996), Advanced Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New York.

Shapiro, E. (1996), Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications, New Delhi.




Frisch, H. (1983), Theories of Inflation, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.



Taylor, L. (1983), Structuralist Macroeconomics, Basic Books, New Longman.

Turnovsky, S.J. (1977), Macroeconomic Analysis and Stabilization Policy, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

10-A(493)

Ruggles R. and N. Ruggles (1956), National Income Accounts and Income Analysis Mc Graw Hill, Newyork.

Veniers, Y.P. and F.D.Sebold, (1977) Macroeconomics; Models and Policy John Wiley and Inc, USA.

Dernburg , T.F.and D. M.Mc Dougall, Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill International Book Company.

10-A(494)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-203 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


QUANTITATIVE METHODS-II




PREAMBLE

The main objective of this paper is to train the students to use the techniques of mathematical and statistical analysis, which are commonly applied to understand and analyze economic problems. The emphasis of this paper is on understanding economic concepts with the help of mathematical methods rather than learning mathematics itself. Hence in this paper a student will be initiated into various economic concepts, which are amenable to mathematical treatment. The paper also deals with simple tools and techniques, which will help a student in data collection, presentation, analysis and drawing inferences about various statistical hypotheses.

Unit - I

Index numbers: uses and types, tests for consistency, Base shifting, splicing and deflating of index numbers. Time series analysis: introduction and components, method of simple averages, moving averages and ratio to moving averages.

Unit - II

Basic concepts and definitions of probability; Laws of addition and multiplication; Conditional probability; Bayes theorem (statement); Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution; Basic concepts of sampling- random and non-random sampling.

Unit - III

Types of data and statistical analysis procedures: Univariate, Bivariate and Multivariate (only overview); Hypothesis Testing procedures based on Z, t, x2 and F-test and one-way ANOVA.

10-A(495)

Unit - IV

Correlation: Karl Pearson and Spearman’s Rank, Meaning and assumptions of simple regression analysis; Single linear equation regression model (by OLS Method), Concept of an estimator and its desirable properties; Coefficient of determination. Estimation of simple and exponential growth rates.

Basic Reading List

Vohra, N. D. Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Speigal, M. R. Theory and Prodblems of Statistics, McGraw Hill Book, London

Croxton, F. E., D. Cowden and S. Kliein, Applied General Statistics, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.

Gupta S.C. and V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, S. Chand and Sons New Delhi.

Yates, Frank, Sampling Methods for Census and Surveys, Charles, Griffin Co., London.

Cocharm, W. G., Sampling Techniques, John Willey, New York. Hansen, hurditz and meadow, Sample Survey Methods and Theory, John

Willey New York. Gupta S. C. Fundamentals of statistics, Himalaya Publishing house, New

Dehlhi. Gupta S.P. and Gupta M. P. Business statistics, Sultan chand and sons, New

Delhi. Kamenta J. Elements of Econometrics, Machmillan Publishing Co., Inc. New

York.

10-A(496)

M.A. 1st Semester Paper-204 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


PUBLIC ECONOMICS –II

Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions

of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks).

(iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of

the four units (16 marks each).

PREAMBLE

Role and functions of the Government in an economy have been changing with the passage of time. The term ‘Public Finance’ has traditionally been applied to the package of those policies and operations which involve the use of tax and expenditure measures while budgetary policy is an important part to understand the basic problems of use of resources, distribution of income, etc.

Unit – I

Public Choice – Rational Voter Hypothesis; Characteristics of Majority Voting Rule; Buchanan and Tullock Model, Bowen-Black Model; Arrow’s Impossibility Theorem; Downs Model on Demand and Supply of Government Policy; Models of Bureaucratic Behaviour- Niskanen, Tullock, Breton- Brennan- Buchanan, Dunleavey’s Bureau Shaping Model; Voting and the Leviathan Hypothesis

Unit – II

International Issues in Public Economics- Global Public Goods; Taxation of International Trade; Trade Taxes and Public Choice; Harmonization of Indirect Taxes; Public Enterprises –Pricing Policy of Public Enterprises; Theory of Second Best; Capacity Constraints and Peak Load Problem; Social Cost Benefit Analysis- Measuring Economic Benefits and Costs, Determining Shadow Prices, Decision Criteria, Problem of Risk and Uncertainty.

Unit – III

10-A(497)

Public Debt – Objectives and Sources of Public Debt; Classification and Effects of Public Debt; Burden Controversy of Public Debt – Classical Theory, Modern Theory, Buchanan Thesis, Secondary Burden of Public Debt; Public Debt and Inflation; Public Debt Management and Redemption of Public Debt.

Unit – IV

Fiscal Federalism – The Decentralisation theorem; Optimum Size of Local Community; Assignment of Functions Among Levels of Government; Tiebout Model; Theory of Intergovernmental Grants; A Public Choice Critique of Intergovernmental Grants; Redistributive Impact of the Budget

Base Text Book

Boadway, Robin, “Public Sector Economics”, Cambridge, Winthrop Publishers

Basic Reading List

Bruce, Neil, “Public Finance”, Addison- Wesley Educational Publishers, Inc. Jones. Philip and Cullis, Jones, “Public Finance and Public Choice-

Analytical Perspectives”, Oxford University press Stiglitz, Joseph, “Economics of the Public Sector”, W.W.Norton and

Company, new York/London Rosen, H.S., “Public finance”, Tata McGraw Hill McNutt, P.A., “The economics of Public Choice”, Edward Elgar Publishing

Inc. Mueller, D.C., “Public Choice- I,II,III” Cambridge university Press,

Cambridge Downs, A., “An Economic Theory of Democracy”, Harper and Row, New

York Musgrave R.A and Peacock A.T., “ Classics in the Theory of Public

Finance”, Mcmillan

10-A(498)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-205 (Option – I)



FINANCIAL ECONOMICS-II Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions.



PREAMBLE

Financial economics is the branch of economics studying the interrelation of financial variables, such as prices, interest rates and shares, as opposed to those concerning the real economy. Financial economics concentrates on influences of real economic variables on financial ones, in contrast to pure finance. Financial economics is primarily concerned with building models to derive testable or policy implications from acceptable assumptions. The theory component centers on decision making under uncertainty in the context of the financial markets, and the resultant economic and financial models. The application of the economic principles include the valuation and determination of the fair value of an asset; the riskiness of the asset, generation of cash flows and their discounting; relative valuations; derivatives and other financial instruments. The aim here is twofold: firstly, to complement the theory; secondly, providing students with practical market knowledge.

Unit-I

The investment environment and asset Classes; Risk- Return Analysis; Risk Aversion and Capital Allocation to Risky Assets; Bond Prices and Yields; Term Structure of interest Rates, Managing Bond Portfolio; Equity valuation Models.

Unit-II

Portfolio Analysis; Markowitz Model, Sharpe Index Model, Capital asset pricing Model, Arbitrage Pricing Theory; Fundamental and Technical Security Analysis; Efficient market Theory.

Unit-III

10-A(499)

Introduction to Option markets; Option Valuation- Binomial Option pricing, Black – Scholes Option Pricing Model; Options Hedging strategies – Delta, Gamma, Theta, Vega and Rho; Futures Markets Trading and valuation

Unit-IV

Economics of Mutual Funds- Sharpe, Treynor and Jensen Performance Index. Economics of Multinational Finance: The Multinational financial system; Current Assets and Capital Budgeting Decisions in MNCs; Designing a Global Financing strategy. Reading List

Bodurtha, J. and Courtadon G., The Pricing of Foreign Currency Options, New York, Salomon Brothers Center, New York University, 1987-4/5.

Bolten, Steven E., “Security Analysis and Portfolio Management: An Analytical Approach to Investments”, N.Y.Holt, Rinehert and Winston, 1972

Bowyer, John, W., “Investment Analysis and Management”, Illinois, Irwin, 1972

Carr, J.L., “Investment Economics”, Sage Pub., California, 1969 Chance D.M., “An Introduction to Options and Futures”, Dryden press,

Orlando,FL,1989 Chance, D., “An Introduction to Derivatives”, New York, Dryden, 1998. Cox, J. and M. Rubinstein, “Options Markets”, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,

Prentice-Hall, 1985,ISBN0136382053. Curley, Anthony J. and Bear Robert M., “Investment Analysis and

management”, N.Y., Harper & Row, 1979 David G. Luenberger, “Investment Science”, Oxford University Press,1997.

ISBN10: 0195108094 David King, “Financial Claims and Derivatives”, Thomson Learning, 1998.

ISBN10: 186152448X Fama, E.F. and Miller, M.H., “Theory of Finance”, N.y.Holt, Rinehert and

Winston, 1972 Figlewski, S., W. Silber and M. Subrahmanyam, “Financial Options, : From

Theory to Practice”, Homewood, Illinois, Business One Irwin, 1990, ISBN 1556232349. Frank Milne, “Finance Theory and Asset Pricing”, Oxford University Press, 2003. ISBN10: 0199261075

Hull, J., “Options, Futures and Other Derivative Securities”, Upper Saddle River, N.J., Prentice Hall, 6th edition,2006, ISBN 013149908-4,

Jarrow, R.A. and A. Rudd, “Option Pricing”, Homewood, Illinois, Dow Jones-Irwin, 1983, ISBN 0870943782.

Jarrow, R.A. and S. Turnbull, “Derivative Securities”, Cincinnati, Ohio, South-Western, 1996.

McDonald, R., “Derivatives Markets”, Boston, MA, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 2002, ISBN: 0201729601

Robert W. Kolb, “Financial Derivatives”, Blackwell Publishing, 1996. ISBN10: 1557869308

Robert W. Kolb, James Overdahl, “Understanding Futures Markets”, Blackwell Publishing, 2006. ISBN10: 1405134038

10-A(500)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-205 (Option – II)

Time : 3 Hrs.


DEMOGRAPHY –II

Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer questions of 2 marks

spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the

four units (16 marks each). PREAMBLE The main objective of this paper is a sequel to Paper 105 (ii) – Demography - I- taught in semester I of the course. As stated earlier is to make the students aware of the importance of population in economic development and the various aspects of growth of population in a country. The focus this paper is to understand. The demographic profile of India alongwith the related issues of migration & urbanization human development issues the evolution of population policy in India.

Unit -I Demographic database in India: Study of Census in India-Methodology and characteristics; Nature of information collected in India with emphasis on 2011 Census ; National Family Health survey 1,2 and 3; Rapid Household Survey; Changing characteristics of population in India; Occupational Structure of Indian Population.

Unit -II Migration and Urbanization: Basic concept and definitions; importance of migration, Types of migration; factor affecting migration. Theories of migration related to internal migration; Urbanization-Growth and distribution of rural-urban population in developed and developing countries with special reference to India.

10-A(501)

Unit –III Population and Development with reference to India: Population, economy and environment linkage; Population, health, nutrition productivity nexus; population and human development issues; Demography and household economic behavior.

Unit -IV Evolution of Population Policy in India: The shift in policy from population control to family welfare, to women empowerment; Family planning strategies and their outcomes; Reproductive health, maternal nutrition and child health policies; Population and strategies for human development of different social groups; Social impact of new reproductive technologies and their regulation; The population policy; Tasks before the National Population Commission. Basic Reading List

Agarwal S.N. (1972), India,s Population Problem, Tata McGraw- Hill Co., Bomby. Bose, A. (1996), India’s Basic Demographic Statistics, B.R. Publishing

Corporation, New Delhi. Bogue, D.J. (1971), Principle of Demography, John Wiley, New York. Chenery H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.)(1989), Hand Book of Development

Economics, Vol. 1 & 2 Elsevier, Amsterdam. Choubey, P.K. (2000), Population Policy in India, Kanishka Publications, New

Delhi. Coals, A.J. and E.M. Hoover (1958), Population Growth and Economic

Development in Low income Countries: A Case Study of India’s Prospectus, Princeton University Press, Princeton.

Gulati, S.C (1988), Fertility in India: An Econometric Study of a Metropolis, Sage, New Delhi. Additional Reading List

Agnihotri, S. B. (2000), Sex ration in Indian Population: A fresh Exploration, Sage New Delhi.

Amsden, A. H. (Ed.) (1992), Form of Production and Women’s Labour, Gender Aspects of Industrialization in India and Mexico, Sage, New Delhi.

Boserup,E. (1970), women’s role in Economics Development, George Allen and Unwin, London.

Chiang, C.L. (1974), Life Tables and Mortailty Analysis, W.H.O., Geneva. Gupta, Jj.A. (2000), New Reproductive Technogies, Women’s Health and

Autonomy, Indo Dutch Studies on Development Alternatives, Sage, New Delhi. Jhabwala,R. and R.K. Subramanya (2000) (Eds.), The Unorganized Sector: Work

Security and Social Protection, sage, New Delhi. Krshnaji M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and

development, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. King M. and M.A. Hill (Eds.)(1993), Women’s Education in Developing

Countries: Barriers, Benefits and Politics, John Hopkins, Baltimore. Lewis (Ed.)(1989), Strengthening the poor: What Have We Learnt, OECD, Paris. Mishra S. (2000), Voluntary Action in Health and Population: The Dynamics of

Social Transition, Sage, New Delhi. Mitra, A. (1979), Implications of Declining Sex Ration in India’s Population,

Allied, New Delhi. Novell, C. (1988), Methods and Models in Demography, Belhaven Press, London.

10-A(502)

Seth M. (2000), Women and Development: The Indian Experience, Sage, and New Delhi.

Simon, J.L. (1992), Population and Development in Poor Countries, Princeton University Press.

Srinivasan, K. (1998), Basic Demographic Techniques and Applications, Sage, New Delhi.

Srinivasan, K and A. Shariff (1998), India: Towards Population and Demographic Goals, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Sryrock, H. et.al. (1973), The Methods and Materials of Demography, US Department of Commerce, Washington,D.C.

Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender Population and Development, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

United Nations (1973), The determinants and consequences of Population Trends, Vol. 1 UNO Publications, New York.

10-A(503)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-205 (Option-III)



ECONOMICS OF INFRASTRUCTURE-II

Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to

attempt 5 questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2


(iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the

four units (16 marks each). PREAMBLE The important role infrastructure plays in a country’s development need not be reiterated. In case of developing countries, lack of adequate infrastructure has been held as a major obstacle to growth. The main purpose of this paper is to introduce a course on infrastructure, as it would help the students to understand the strength of infrastructure - physical and social in the process of economic development. .

Unit - I Water supply: Water utilities, urban and rural water supply; Telecommunication: Telecom reforms in India with a critique of national telecom policy; Relationship between TRAI, Department of telecom, and public and private operators; Role of telecom infrastructure in meeting needs of the economy and the IT sector.

Unit - II Energy demand: short run and long run price and income elasticities; Energy supply and the economics of depletable resources; World oil markets and energy security; Natural gas price and regulation, deregulation and markets; Current Electricity Policies, and programmes.

Unit - III Risk management, futures markets and derivatives; Energy and climate change; Internalizing environmental externalities with a focus on CO2 emissions-cap and trade Mechanisms; Analysis of energy sources: Coal , nuclear power; Energy efficiency policies and programmes; Renewable energy policies and programmes; Trading in energy markets.

Unit - IV

10-A(504)

Health and economic development; Determinants of Health – poverty, malnutrition, illiteracy and lack of information; Economic dimensions of health care – Demand and supply of health care; Financing of health care and resource constraints; Inequalities in health – class and gender perspectives; Institutional issues in health care delivery; Development of health infrastructure in Indian plans. Basic Reading List

O’ Sullivan, A. (2003) : Urban economics, Boston, MA, Irwin McGraw-Hill

Timothy J. B. et al (1987) :Saturn and state economic development, forum for applied research and public policy, 2 (1), 29- 40

Glaeser, Edward L.(1998) Are cities dying? Journal of economic perspectives, 12(1), 139-160.

Ellen, I. G. and Schwartz, A. E. (2000): No easy answers: cautionary notes for competitive cities, The Brookings, review, 18(3), 43–45

McLean, M. L., and Voytek K.P. (1992) :Understanding your economy, using analysis to guide local strategic planning, 2nd ed, Chicago, Planners Press

Mieszkowski, P., and Mills, E.S. (1993): The causes of metropolitan suburbanization, Journal of economic perspectives, 7(1), 135-147.

Kenneth A. S. (1993) Urban traffic congestion, a new approach to the gordian knot, the Brookings review, 11(2), 6-11.

Peter G. and Richardson H. (1989): Notes from the underground: the failure of urban mass transit, The public interest, 94, 77-86

Timothy J. B. (1994): Jobs, productivity, and local economic development: what implications does economic research have for the role of government? national tax Journal , 47(4), 847- 862.

Andrew C. K. (1993) :Why regions grow: a review of research on the economic base model, Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta economic review, 16-29.

Porter M.E. (1998): Clusters and the new economic competition, Harvard business review, 76 (6), 77-90.

Peiser R.B. (1989): Density and urban sprawl, Land economics , 65(3), 193-204.

Coulson, N.E. (1991): Really useful tests of the monocentric model land economics, Land economics, 67(3), 299-307.

Berube A. and Forman B. (2002) :Living on the Edge, decentralization within cities in the 1990s, the living cities census series, The Brookings Institution (October 2002)

Molly O’Meara S. (2002): What will it take to halt sprawl, world watch, 15(1), 12-23.

Sivaramakrishnan, K.C., Kundu A. and Singh B.N. (2005): Handbook of urbanization in India. New Delhi: Oxford University Press

Naik N.T.K and Mansoor S. R. (2007): Urbanisation of India. New Delhi, Eastern Book Corporation.

Jose G.-I., Tye W.B., Winston C. (1999): Essays in transportation economics and policy, a handbook in honor of John R. Meyer, Washington D.C, The Brookings Institution Press

Button K.J.(1993) :Transport Economics, UK, Edward Elgar

10-A(505)

Singh S. K. (2000): Technical characteristics and efficiency of the Indian state road transport undertakings?, Indian journal of transport management, 24(8): 533-543.

Singh S. K. (2005): Review of urban transportation in India? Journal of public transportation, 8(1): 79-97

Button, K.J. and Pearman A. (1985) : Applied transport economics: a practical case study approach, London, Gordon and Breach

Button K.J. (1976) :The use of economics in urban travel demand modeling, a survey, socioeconomic planning sciences, 10(2) : 57- Crew M.A. and Kleindorfer P.R. (1979) : Public utility economics, London, Macmillan

Mody A.(1997): Infrastructure strategies in east Asia, the untold story, Washington, D.C: economic development institute, world bank Goodman J.B. and Loveman G.W. (1991): Does privatization serve

the public interest, Harvard business review, 69(6): 26-38 Sherman R. (1983): is public utility regulation beyond hope? in

A.L.Danielsen and D.R.Kamarschen (ed.), current issues in public utility economics, Lexington, MA.

The economist (1996): The Hidden cost of red tape, 27th July 1996 Chaudhuri M.D. (1990): Market failure and government failure,

Journal of Economic Perspectives, 4(3), 25-39 National Council of Applied Economic Research (1996): India

infrastructure report: policy implications for growth and welfare, New Delhi , NCAER

Navarro, P. (1996): Electric utilities, the argument for radical deregulation, Harvardbusiness review, 73(1): 112-25

Parikh, K.S. (Ed.) (1999): India development report - 1999-2000, New Delhi: Oxford

Athreya M.B. (1996): India’s telecommunication policy, telecommunication policy, 20(1): 11-22

Sinha N. (1996): The political economy of India’s telecom reforms, telecommunication policy, 20(1) : 23-38

Anandalingam G. (1996) :Technological progress, industry dynamics and telecommunications policy: the need for further reforms in India, working paper No.83, IIM, Bangalore,.

Smith P.L. and Staple G (1994): Telecommunication sector reforms in Asia: towards a new paradigm, World Bank discussion paper 232, World Bank,Washington D.C.

Relevant websites of different ministries of the Government of India, summary of consultants reports in UP, Haryana, and Karnataka electricity board restructuring

Smil, V. (2000): Energy in the twentieth century, resources conversions, costs, uses and consequences annual review of energy and the Environment 25: 21-51.

Hausman, J. (1979 :) Individual discount rates and the purchase and utilization of energyusing durables, the bell journal of economics 10, no. 1: 33-54.

Slade, M., C. Kolstad, and R. Weiner.(1993): Buying energy and nonfuel minerals ch 20 in handbook of natural resource and energy economics. Vol. 3.edited by A. Kneese and J. Sweeney. San Diego, CA, Elsevier Science Publishers

10-A(506)

Hughes, J., C. Knittel, and D. Sperling. (2006): Evidence of a shift in the short-run price elasticity of gasoline demand, center for the study of energy markets, working paper 159.

Krautkraemer J., and M. Toman. (2003):Fundamental economics of depletable energy supply, resources for the future, discussion Paper 03-01.

Flynn, E. (2000):Impact of technological change and productivity on the coal market, energy information administration, issues in midterm analysis and forecasting.

Heal, G. (1993):The optimal use of exhaustible resources, ch 18 in handbook of natural resource and energy economics. Vol. 3. Edited by A. Kneese and J. Sweeney. San Diego, CA: Elsevier Science Publishers.

Smith, J. (2005): Inscrutable OPEC? behavioral tests of the cartel hypothesis, The energy journal 25, no. 1: 51-82.

Barsky, R., and L. Killian,. (2004):Oil and the macroeconomy since the 1970 journal of economic perspectives 18, no. 4: 115-134.

Deffeyes, K. ,Hubbert's Peak, (2001):: The impending world of oil shortage. Princeton, NJ, Princeton University Press, chapter 1.

Pindyck, R. (1978):Gains to producers from cartelization of an exhaustible resource., review of economics and statistics 60, no. 2: 238-251.

Considine, T. (2006): Is the strategic petroleum reserve our ace in the hole?" the energyjournal 27, no. 3: 91-112.

Leitzinger, J., and M. Collette. (2002): A retrospective look at wholesale gas, industry restructuring, journal of regulatory economics 21, no. 1: 79-101.

MacAvoy, P., and R. Pindyck. (1973):Alternative regulatory policies for dealing with the natural gas shortage., the bell journal of economics and management science 4, no. 2: 454- 498.

Cuddington, J., and Z. Wang. (2006): Assessing the degree of spot market integration for u.s. natural gas, evidence from daily price data., journal of regulatory economics 29: 195-210

Borenstein, S. (2005): The long run efficiency of real-time electricity pricing, the energy journal 26, no. 3: 93-116.

Energy Information Administration. (2002):Derivatives in risk management for petroleum,gas and electricity).

Herce, M., J. Parsons, and R. Ready. (2006): Using futures prices to filter short-term volatility and recover a latent, long-term price series for oil, MIT center for energy and environmental policy research working paper 06-005 (April).

Intergovernmental Panel on climate change (IPCC. ,Climate change (2007): The physical science basis, summary for policymakers .

Nordhaus, W. D. (2006): The stern review on the economics of climate change mimeo.

Pizer, M. (2006): The evolution of a global climate change agreement, American economics association papers and proceedings 96, no. 2: 26-30.

Nordhaus, W. (2006): After Kyoto alternative mechanisms to control global warming American economics association papers and proceedings 96, no. 2: 31-34.

Massachusetts institute of technology, (2003):The future of nuclear power,an interdisciplinary MIT study

10-A(507)

Hassett, K. and G. Metcal , (1993):Energy conservation investment, do consumers discount the future correctly? Energy policy (June): 710-716.

Portney, P., and I. Parry, (2003): Policy watch, the economics of fuel economy standards, journal of economic perspectives 17, no. 4: 203-217.

McGowan, J., and S. Conners. (2000:)Windpower, A turn of the century review ,annual review of energy and the environment 25: 147-197.

Palmer, K., and D. Bullaw., (2005):Cost-effectiveness of renewable electricity policies, energy economics 27: 873-894.

McDonlad, S., S. Robinson, and K. Thierfelder.(2006:)Impact of switching production to bioenergy crops, the switchgrass example, energy economics 28: 243-265.

10-A(508)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-205 (Option-IV)

Time : 3 Hrs.


ECONOMICS OF INSURANCE-II Note: (i) Nine Question will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5 questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the four units (16 marks each). PREAMBLE The vital role of insurance in the task of risk-bearing and risk-elimination in the economic affairs has not been appreciated adequately in our country. Given that the element of risk or uncertainty is a universal and fundamental phenomenon in our economic life, the importance of insurance as a means of reducing uncertainty and risk in regard to personal and business activities cannot be overemphasized. The role of insurance sector in mobilizing a country’s saving for channeling them into capital formation and thus contribute to a country’s economic development is also documented. There is a wide spread recognition that insurance, particularly life insurance, is a prominent segment of applied economics. Insurance industry is an important constituent of financial services industry in India and is a major investment institution and prominent player in the capital market. However, in our country, study of the subject of insurance has largely remained neglected. With the opening of the insurance sector for private Indians and foreign players, the interest in the subject has been kindled. This course on Insurance Economics attempts to give a fairly comprehensive view of the subject to the postgraduate students in Economics and pave the way for possible future expansion of the teaching of an important branch of economics.

Unit – I

Wealth accumulation planning; Life cycle planning; Planning for accumulation; Micro-insurance products. Weather insurance in Agriculture, Livelihood Risk Management using Crop Insurance; Index Based Insurance; valuation of insurance products.

10-A(509)

Unit - II Essentials of individual retirement planning; Analysis of retirement; Income needs; Retirement planning strategies; Investing for retirement, pension plans; Basic principles of pension plans; Pension plans in India; Estate planning - process and tools; Life insurance for estate liquidity.

Unit - III Role of risk-management and insurance in economic development; Insurance institutions as financial intermediaries and investment institutions; Insurance institutions in Indian capital market.

Unit IV

Regulation of insurance; Purpose of government intervention in markets; Theories of regulation; Insurance regulation in India; Insurance regulation & Development Authority; Set up and management of insurance companies; Marketing of general insurance; Regulation of investments by insurance institutions in India; scope and limitation of Indian Agriculture Insurance. Basic Reading List

Black. K. Jr. and H.D. Skipper Jr.(2000), Life & Health Insurance, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, New Jerssey.

Dionne, G. and S.E. Harrington (eds.) (1997), Foundations of Insurance Economics, Kluwer academic Publishers, Boston.

Pteffer, I. And D.R. Klock (1974), Perspectives on Insurance, Prentice Hall Inc., Engleword Cliffs.

Williams Jr., C.A. M.L. Smith and P.C.Young (1995), Risk Management and Insurance, McGraw Hill, New York.

Skipper Jr., H.D.(ed.) (1998), International Risk & Insurance : An Environmental Managerial Approach, Irwin McGraw Hill, Boston.

United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (1987), The Promotion of Risk Management in Developing Countries, UNCTAD, Geneva.

Insurance Institute of India, Life Assurance Underwriting, (IC-22), Mumbai. Insurance Institute of India, General Insurance Underwriting, (IC-22),

Mumbai. Government of India (1998), Old Age and Income Security (OASIS) Report

(Dave Committee Report), New Delhi. Ivers, J.I. III and E.T. Johnson (eds) (1991), Readings in Wealth

Accumulation Planning, The American College, Bryn Mawr, Pa. Insurance Regulation and Development Authority (2001), IRDA Regulations,

New Delhi. Meier. K.J. (1998), The Political Economy of Regulation : The Case of

Insurance, The State University of New York Press, Albany, N.Y.

10-A(510)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-205(Option-V)



ECONOMICS OF LABOUR-II



Marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the four units (16 marks each).

PREAMBLE Issues pertaining to the labour market, wage theories, employment policies, trade unions and collective bargaining in the globalized economy have become vitally important for developing countries. In a country like India where the bulk of the labour force is in the unorganized sector and the organized sector is witnessing “jobless” growth, the importance of issues such as employment and unemployment as well as livelihood and social security for the growing millions continues to assume significance. This Paper exposes students to theoretical as well as empirical issues relating to the labour market with special reference to India.

Unit -I

Non-wage component of labour remuneration; inflation-wage relationship at micro and macro levels; Productivity and wage relationship; National wage policy; Wages and Wage Boards in India; Bonus system and profit sharing.

Unit -II

Theories of labour movement – Growth, pattern and structure of labour unions in India; Achievements of labour unions; Causes of industrial disputes and their settlement and prevention mechanism; social security and labour welfare in India.

Unit -III

10-A(511)

Role of tripartism; Current trends in collective bargaining; Role of judicial activism; Labour legislation in India with special reference to the Trade Union Act 1923, Industrial Disputes Act 1947 and Factories Act 1948.

Unit -IV

Special problems of labour; Child labour, female labour, discrimination and gender bias in treatment of labour; Labour market reforms – Exit policy, need for safety nets, measures imparting flexibility in labour markets; Second National Commission of Labour; Globalization and labour markets.

Basic Reading List

Hajela, P.D. (1998), Labour Restructuring in India: A Critique of the New Economic Policies, Commonwealth Publisher, New Delhi.

Lester, R.A. (1964), Economics of Labour, (2nd Edition), Macmillan, New York.

McConnell, C.R. and S.L. Brue (1986), Contemporary Labour Economics, McGraw-Hill, New York.

Papola, T.S., P.P. Ghosh and A.N. Sharma (Eds.) (1993), Labour, employment and industrial Relations in India, B.R. Publishing Corporation, New Delhi.

Venkata Ratnam, C.S. (2001), Globalization and Labour-Management Relations: Dynamics of Change, Sage Publications/Response Books, New Delhi. Additional Reading List

McCormickm B. and Smith (Eds.)(1968), The Labour Market, Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Das, N. (1960), Unemployment, Full Employment and India, Asia Publishing House, Bombay.

Deshpande L.K. and J.C. Sandesara, (Eds.)(1970), Wage Policy and Wages Determination in India, Bombay University Press, Bombay.

Hicks J.R. (1932), The Theory of Wages, Clarendon Press, Oxford. Mazumdar, D. (1989), Micro-economic Issues of Labour Markets in

Developing Countries, EDI Services Paper No. 40, World Bank, Washington D.C. Memoria, C.B. (1966), Labour Problems and Social Welfare in India, Kitab

Mahal, Allahbad. Punekar, S.D. (1978), Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial

Relations, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay Singh V.B. (Ed.) (1970), Industrial Labour in India, Popular Parakashan,

Bombay. Misra, L. (2000), Child Labour in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Riveros, L. (1990), Labour Market Policies and Labour Market Reforms in

Socialist Economies, World Bank, Washington D.C.

10-A(512)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper- (Option-VI)

Time : 3 Hrs.

Max. Marks : 100

External : 80 (60 +20) Theory : 60 Practical : 20 Internal : 20

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN ECONOMIC ANALYSIS-II



Marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the four units (16 marks each). PREAMBLE

The direction towards the knowledge society shall be resting on a healthy economics and proper use of Information Technology. Economics being an empirical science, computers have emerged as the pivotal instruments of economic analysis, research and forecasting. Therefore, the future economists must be equipped with skills and tools based on computers, which this course shall provide to them. This will not only enhance their employability but also prepare them for the challenges of the future.

Unit - I

Statistical Processing Techniques and Methods: Summarizing and analysis of data, Descriptive Statistics; Calculation of Mean, Correlation and Regressing analysis, Estimation of Growth Rates, Trends Forecasting; Construction of Index numbers; Moving Averages.

Unit - II

IT Application to Commerce: E-Commerce: Meaning, basis and scope, E-Commerce, E-Business and E- Transaction; E-Commerce Vs. Traditional Commerce; Basis of E-Commerce; Business Models of E-Commerce; Electronic Transactions- Security, Digital Signature, Digital Certificate; Encryption; Electronic Payment System - Debit Cards, Credit Cards, Smart Cards, Electronic Funds Transfer, ATM.

10-A(513)

Unit – III

Project Appraisal & Selection: Estimation of present values; Decision making with benefit Cost, APR, NPV, IRR, Payback Period. Risk analysis – Scenario development; Hillier Model; Monte – Carlo Simulation; Profitability Projection, Break -even analysis; Decision Tree Analysis.

Unit – IV

Information System for a business organization; Information flow and requirements; information system design approaches; Decision Support Systems; Data mining and analytics.

Basic Reading List

David Whiteley, E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Goel, Sushil, Computer Application to Business & E-Commerce, Natraj Publishing House, Karanl.

Lipschultz, M.M. and S. Lipschultz , Theory and Problems of Data Processing, Schum's Outline Series, McGraw Hill, New York.

Madan, Sushila, Information Technology, Taxman Allied Services, New Delhi. P.T. Joseph, S.J. , E- Commerce : An Indian Perspective, PHI Learning , New

Delhi. Parameswaranm R. Computer Applications in Business, S. Chand and

Company, New Delhi. Rajaraman, V. Fundamentals of Computers, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. Sinha, P.K. , Computer Fundamental, BPB Publications, New Delhi. Sudalaimuthu, S. and Anthony Raj S, Computer Applications in Business,

Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.

10-A(514)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-205(Option-VII) Time : 3 Hrs.


MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS-II




PREAMBLE

This course is designed to equip students to understand the economic concepts and theories which use mathematical tools and techniques to refine the verbal logic. The use of calculus has permitted formulation of economic problems in multivariable mode and yield valuable insight about optimizing human behaviour. Modern algebraic tools allow convenient handling of simultaneous equations in the context of linear programming, game theory and input-output analysis. Mathematical economics deals with various applications of mathematical tools and techniques in defining and developing economic relationships. This course has been accordingly designed to include various mathematical techniques/methods/models related to the different parts of economic theory like consumer theory, theory of production, pricing, trade cycles, growth models, etc. The paper covers important aspects of microeconomics, macroeconomics and development theory and the various modules have been accordingly designed.

Unit - I

Pricing of factors of production; Product exhaustion theorems. Multi-market equilibrium- pure exchange; production and exchange; The numeraire and money; existence, stability and uniqueness of general equilibrium.

Unit -II

Pareto Optimality; The efficiency of perfect and imperfect competition; The external effects in consumption and production; Social welfare functions- The Arrow impossibility theorem; The Theory of Second Best.

10-A(515)

Unit - III

Problem of choice in situations of uncertainty and risk; production under uncertainty; futures market and hedging; multi-period consumption; time value of money and project selection criterion. Risk –return trade off.

Unit - IV

Input-output model; National Income models (open & closed); Expected Inflation Augmented Phillips relation; Multiplier-Accelration interaction model; Growth models –Domar, Harrod, John Robinson’s Golden Age Model, Duesenberry’s Optimum Growth Model, Solow, Kaldor.

Basic Reading List

Baldani, Bradfield and Turner (2007), An Introduction to Mathematical Economics, South-Western, Cengage Learning, New Delhi.




Varian, H. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W. Norton, New York. Allen, R.G.D. (1976), Mathematical Economics, Macmillan, London. Arrow, K. J. and M. Intrilligator (Eds.)(1982), Handbook of Mathematical

Economics, Volumes I, II and III, North Holland, Amsterdam. Chiang & Wainright, Fundamental Methods Mathematical Economics, 4th

ed, McGrawHill, Singapore, 2005. Dernburg, and Dernburg, Macroeconomics; A Mathematical approach

McGraw Hill International Book Company. Henderson, J. M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A

Mathematical Approach, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.


Allen R.G.D. (1974), mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan Press and ELBS, London.

Chiang, A.C. (1986), Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, Mc Graw Hill, New York.

Jha, R. (1991), Contemporary Macroeconomics Theory and Policy, Willey Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.

Jones, H.g. (1976), An Introduction to the Modern Theory of Economics Growth, McGraw Hill-Kogakusha, Tokyo.

Handley, G. (1962, Linear programming, Addison Wesley Publishing Co., Massachusetts.

Hiller, F.S. and G.J. Lieberman (1985), Operations Research, C.B.S., New Delhi.

10-A(516)

Kothari, C.R. (1992), An Introduction to Operations Research, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.

Mustafi, C. K. (1992), Operations Research: Methods and Practice, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.

10-A(517)

M.A. 2nd Semester Paper-205(Option-VIII) Time : 3 Hrs.


ECONOMICS OF REGIONALISM-II




Unit - I

Political Economy of Regionalism : An Overview, Regionalism in Asia and The America; the Political Economy of Currency regions; Open regionalism.

The European Case; Systemic Sources of variation in Regional Institutionalization in Europ; East Asia and the Americas Major Power Trade floors.

Unit - II

Theories of New Regionalism; The New Regionalism: Revisited; The World Order Approach; Regionalism and World Order: The Changing Global Setting.

Unit -III

Regional Security Complex; Theory in the Post Cold War World; A regional

Building Approach: Futures for new Regionalism.

Unit- IV

WTO and RTAs; Rules on Regional Trade Agreements; The EU, ASEAN, NAFTA, SAARC; Asian Economics Community.

Reading List

“The Political Economy of Regionalism”, by Edward D Mansfield, Helen V Milner; Columbia University Press, 1997.

“Open Regionalism”, Working Paper 97-3 by C Fred Bergsten, Peterson Institute, Washington D.C. USA.

“Regionalism or Multilateralism” of Giorgia Albertin: IMF Working Paper, 1st March 2008.

“Theories of New Regionalism” A Palgrave Macmillan Publication, Nov 2003 Edited by Fredriek Soderbaurne and Timothy M. Shaw.

10-A(518)

“The Economics of International Integration”, by Peter Robson, Published by

Regional Trade Agreement Section, WTO, Geneva, SWISS. WTO Multilateralising Regionalism; Challenges for the Global Trading

System, Feb. 2009. WTO Discussion Paper No. 12, the Changing Landscape of Regional

Trade Agreement, 2006.

10-A(519)

Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra M. A. Economics w.e.f. 2015-2016

Course Structure M.A. Economics (Semester III) Total Marks External Internal Time

Paper-306 International Trade and Finance-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-307 Economics of Environment and 100 80 20 3 Hrs.

Social Sector-I Paper-308 Indian Economic Policy-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-309 Economics of Growth and 100 80 20 3 Hrs.

Development-I Paper-310 Option (i) Econometrics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (ii) History of Modern Economics 100 80 20 3 Hrs.

(Contribution of Nobel Laureates in Economics)-I Option (iii) Economics of Agriculture-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (iv) Welfare Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (v) Industrial Economics-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (vi) Financial Markets and Institutions-I 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (vii) Economics of Gender and 100 80 20 3 Hrs.

Development-I Option (viii) Economic History of ASEAN 100 80 20 3 Hrs.

Countries, China, South Korea and Japan-I

Note: Students are required to select any one option from Paper-310. The students will select the same optional stream in Semester IV.

10-A(520)

M.A. 3rd Semester Paper-306 Time : 3 Hrs.


INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND FINANCE-1





PREAMBLE

The course provides a deep understanding about the broad principles and theories, which tend to govern the free flow of trade in goods, services and capital — both short-term and long-term — at the global level. Besides, preparing the students about the relevance and limitations of these principles, the contents of the paper spread over different modules, lay stress on the theory and nature of the subject which, in turn, will greatly help them to examine the impact of the trade policies followed both at the national and international levels as also their welfare implications at macro level and the distribution of gains from trade to North and South with particular reference to India. The study of the paper under the present era of globalization will train the students about the likely consequences on income, employment and social standards and possible policy solutions as the world will move into the 21st century.

Unit - I

Theory of International Trade

Classical Theory of International Trade – Theories of absolute advantage, comparative advantage. Neo Classical Theory of international Trade (opportunity costs theory); Modern Theory of International Trade (Heckscher-Ohlin Model ).Empirical Testing of theory of Heckscher-Ohlin.

10-A(521)

Unit - II

AlternativeTheories of International Trade-

Offer Curve Analysis; J.S. Mill’s Theory of Reciprocal Demand; Factor Price equalization theorem; Factor Progress and Rybczynski theorem; Kravis and Linder theory of International trade. Trade Under Imperfectly Competitive Markets conditions.

Unit - III

Gains from International Trade

Measurement of gains from trade and their distribution; Concepts of terms of trade, their

uses and limitations; Hypothesis of secular deterioration of terms of trade, its empirical

effects of relevance and policy implications for less developed countries; Theory of interventions (Tariffs, quotas and Nontariff)-Economic effects of tariffs (Partial and General Eqilibrium analysis ) Tariff and Stopler Samuelson Theoram .Optimum rates of tariffs – their measurement and effective rate of Protection.

Unit - IV

Growth and Trade

Economic Growth and International Trade-Production effect,consumption Effect,The effects of growth on small countries; The Effects of Growth on Large Countries; Technical Progress and International Trade; Import substitution v/s Export Push; Trade Liberalization:Need and Objectives; Liberalization experience of developing countries with special reference to India.

Basic Reading List

Chacholiades, M. (1990), International Trade: Theory and Policy, McGraw Hill, Kogkusha, Japan.

Cherunilam, F. (2008): International Economics, The Tata McGraw-Hill Companies, New Delhi. 5th Ed.

Dunn R.M. and J.H. Mutt (2000), International Economics, Routledge, London.

Kindlberger, C P (1991): International Economics, R D Irwin, Homewood.8th Ed.

Krugman, P.R. and Obstfeld, M. (1994), International Economics: Theory and Policy, Glenview, Foresman.

Mishra, S.K. and Puri, V.K. (2012), Indian Economy- Its Development Experience, Himalaya Publishing House. 30th Revised Ed.

Salvator, D L (2001): International Economics, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle Rover, New York.

Soderston, Bo. (1999), International Economics, The Macmillan Press Ltd. London.

10-A(522)

Yarbough, R.J. (1999), International Economics, International Thompson Publishing, New York.


Bhagwati J. (1988), Protectionism, Cambridge University Press, Mass. Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (1987), The Development

Process of the Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay. Dana, M.S. (2000), International Economics: Study, Guide and Work

Book, (5th Edition), Routledge Publishers, London. Goldsten, M. (1998), The Asian Financial crisis: causes cure and

systematic implications, Institute of International Economics, Washington D.C. Hufbauer G.C. and K.A. Elliott (1994), Measuring the Costs of Protection

in the United States, Institute for International Economics. Jackson, J. (1989),The World Trading System, Cambridge University

Press, Mass. Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1998), India’s Economic Reforms, 1999-2000,

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. King, P.G. (1995), International Economics and International Economic

Policy: A Reader, McGraw Hill International, Singapore. Maggi, G. and A. Rodriguez-Clare (1998), “The Value of Trade

Agreements in the Presence of Political Pressures,” Journal of Political Economy, 106, 574-601.

Mishkin, S.F. (1998), The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, (5th Edition), Harper Colins Publishers, New York.

Panagariya, A. (2000), “Preferential Trade Liberalization: the Traditional Theory and new Developments,” Journal of Economic Literature, 38, 287-331.

Panchamukhi V.R. and R. Tandon (1987), Money and Finance in World Economic Order (RIS), Indus Publishing Co. Delhi.

Panchmukhi, V.R. (1978), Trade Policies of India–A Quantitative Analysis, Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi.

Patel, S. J. (1995), Indian Economy Towards the 21st Century, University Press Ltd., India.

Pomfert, R. (1988), Unequal Trade: The Economics of Discriminatory International Trade Policies, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford.

Satyanarayan, B. (1986), India’s Trade with Asia and the Far East Countries, B.R. Publishing Corp., New Delhi.

Vanderbussche, H. and M. Zanardi (2006), “The Global Chilling Effects of Antidumping Proliferation, “CEPR Discussion paper. 5597.

10-A(523)



ECONOMICS OF ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIAL SECTOR-1

Note: (i) Nine Questions will be set in all and students will be required to attempt

5 questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2



PREAMBLE

This course is meant to provide some insights into the application of economic theory in the design and implementation of public policy related to the management of environment and social sectors. The course finds roots in welfare economics, national income accounting, macroeconomic policies and trade and development. Modules incorporated in this paper are devoted to issues of environmental economics, environmental and social services and the problem of valuation of these services, and designing of instruments and institutions for the management of environment. The models of optimal use of natural resources, macroeconomic issues, sustainable development, environmental resource problems in India and the economics of health and education constitute the other areas of the modules of this paper.

Unit - I

Environment, ecology and economy; Pareto optimality and perfect competition; External effects in production and consumption; Market failure in case of environmental goods - incomplete markets, externalities, non-exclusion; non-rivalry; non-convexities and asymmetric information.

Unit - II Environmental policy framework in India - problems of command & control regime; New Environment Policy. Natural resources: types, classification and scarcity; Elementary capital theory; Economics of natural resources.

10-A(524)

Unit – III Economic instruments for environmental protection; Pollution charges, ambient charges, product charges, subsidies; Liability rules - non-compliance fees, deposit refund system, performance bonds. Marketable pollution permits; Evaluative criteria of and practical conditions for use of the economic incentives; Mixed instruments; Choice among policy instruments. Estimation of marginal cost of pollution abatement for designing the pollution tax.

Unit - IV Coase’s bargaining solution and collective action. Measures of economic value of environment WTP and WTAC; Contingent valuation method; Travel cost method; Hedonic market methods; Averting behaviour approach - household health production function method.

Reading List

Henderson, J.M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A Mathematical Approach, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Hanley, N., J.F. Shogern and B. White (1997), Environmental Economics in Theory and Practice, Macmillan.

Cropper, Maureen (1999), Valuing Environmental Benefits, Edward Elgar. Sankar, U. (Ed.) (2001), Environmental Economics, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi. James, A.J., M. N. Murty and Smita Misra (1999), Economics of Water

Pollution – The Indian Experience, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

10-A(525)

M.A. 3rd Semester Paper-308

Time : 3 Hrs.


INDIAN ECONOMICS POLICY-1





PREAMBLE

The objective of this Paper at the postgraduate level would be to sharpen the analytical faculty of the student, by highlighting an integrated approach to the functioning aspects of the Indian economy, keeping in view the scope for alternative approaches. Such an analysis is essential because the Indian economy is a unique amalgam of alternative competing and often conflicting theories and a proper understanding of its working is imperative if the student is to comprehend the ramifications that underlie most of the observed phenomena in the Indian economic set-up. The emphasis of the paper is on overall social, political and economic environment influencing policy decisions. To develop all these themes, the course is divided into specific modules.

Unit-I

Major features of Indian Economy in present times. Role of State and Market in economic development. Broad demographic features of Indian population; Rural-urban migration; Urbanization ; Poverty and Inequality.

Unit-II

Institutional Structure – land reforms in India; Technological change in agriculture; pricing of agricultural inputs and output; Issues in food security; Policies for sustainable agriculture.

Unit-III

Fiscal federalism – Centre-state financial relations; Finances of Central Government; Finances of State Governments; Parallel economy; Problems relating to fiscal policy.

10-A(526)

Unit-IV

Structure and direction of foreign trade; Balance of payments; Issues in export-import policy; Exchange rate policy and FEMA; Foreign capital and MNCs in India.

Reading List

Ahluwalia, I.J. and I.M.D. Little (Eds.) (1999), India’s Economic Reforms and Development (Essays in honour of Manmohan Singh), Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Bardha, P.K. (9th Edition) (1999), The Political Economy of Development in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (2001), Development Experience in the Indian Economy: Inter-State Perspectives, Bookwell, Delhi.

Datt, R. (Ed.) (2001), Second Generation Economic Reforms in India, Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi.

Government of India, Economic Survey, (Annual), Ministry of Finance, New Delhi.

Government of India, Planning Commission; Five Year Plan Development. Jalan, B. (1992), The Indian Economy – Problems and Prospects, Viking,

New Delhi. Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economic Policy- Preparing for the Twenty First

Century, Viking, New Delhi. .Kapila Uma Indian Economy Academic Foundation New Delhi Latest

Edition. Mishra S.K.and Puri V.K, Indian Economy Himalya Publication House

Latest Edition. Monga G.S.and Goel M.M. (2001) Wage Goods Approach and Development

Deep and Deep New Delhi. Parikh, K.S. (1999), India Development Report – 1999-2000, Oxford

University Press, New Delhi. Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance, (Annual). Rudar Dutt and Sundram; Indian Economy S Chand and Company Latest

Edition Sen, R.K. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for 21st

Century (Essays in honour of Prof. P.R. Brahmananda), Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi.

Goel, MM ( 2011): Economics of Human Resource Development in India,VK Global Publications, New Delhi

Goel, MM ( 2014): Indian Economy Long Term Challenges & Policy Measures, Monograph N.91 , A Guna Gaurav Nyas Publications Think Line

10-A(527)



ECONOMICS Of GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT-1





PREAMBLE

The study of economic development has gained importance because of sustained interest of the developing countries in uplifting their economic conditions by restructuring their economies to acquire greater diversity, efficiency and equity in consonance with their priorities. While few success stories can be counted, many have grappled with chronic problems of narrow economic base, inefficiency and low standard of living. For this and other reasons, there have been many approaches to economic development. In recent times, besides hardcore economic prescriptions to development, concerns hitherto relegated to background like education, health, sanitation and infrastructural development, have found a place of pride in explaining the preference of various economies. Modules incorporated in this paper are devoted to the theories of growth and development, social and institutional aspects of development, importance of agriculture, and the rationale and pattern of industrialization in developing countries. The other important issues in the context of development such as infrastructure-linkages, role of international trade, importance of domestic macroeconomic policies, investment criteria, and relevance of planning have been included in the modules of this paper.

Unit I

Concepts & Measurement of Economic Development

Economic growth, economic development and sustainable development; Historical Perspective of Economic Growth and its relevance; Structural Diversity and common characteristics of developing nations. Measuring Development: Income Measures, Basic Needs Approach, PQLI, HDI and Capabilities Approach; Goulet’s core values of development. Poverty, Inequality and Development: Measurement, Impact and Policy options.

10-A(528)

Unit-II Classical Theories of Growth and Development Contributions of Adam Smith, Ricardo, Karl Marx and Schumpeter, Rostow’s Theory of Stages of Economic Growth.

Unit-III Growth Models

Harrod and Domar: Instability of equilibrium; Neo Classical Growth Models: Solow and Meade; Growth Models of Joan Robinson, Kaldor and Pasinetti.

Unit-IV Technological Progress

Embodied and Disembodied; Neutral and Non-Neutral (Hicks and Harrod); TFP and growth accounting; Endogenous Growth Theory: Role of learning, education and research; Accumulation of Human Capital; Explanation of Cross-Country Differentials in Economic Growth.

Basic Reading List

Adelman, I. (1961), Theories of Economic Growth and Development, Stanford University Press, Stanford.

Barro, R. and X. Salai- Martin, Economic Growth, McGraw Hill, New York.

Behrman, S. and T.N. Srinivasan (1995), Handbook of Development Economics, Vol. 3, Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Brown, M. (1966), On the Theory and Measurement of Technical Change, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, Mass.

Chakravarti, S. (1982), Alternative Approaches to the Theory of Economic Growth, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Chenery, H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.) (1989), Handbook of Development Economics, Vols. 1 & 2, Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Ghatak, S. (1986), An Introduction to Development Economics, Allen and Unwin, London.

Gillis, M., D.H. Perkins, M. Romer and D.R. Snodgrass (1992), Economics of Development, (3rd Edition), W.W. Norton, New York.

Higgins, B. (1959), Economic Development, W.W. Norton, New York.

Jones, HG.(1975), An Introduction to Modern Theories of Economic Growth, Nelson, London.

Kindleberger, C.P. (1977), Economic Development, (3rd Edition), McGraw Hill, New York.

Meier, G.M. and J.E.Rauch (2005), Leading Issues in Economic Development, (8th Edition), Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Sen, A.K. (Ed.) (1990), Growth Economics, Penguin, Harmondsworth.

Todaro, M.P. and S.C. Smith (2003), (8th Edition), Economic Development, Pearson Education, Delhi.

Thirlwal, A.P. (1999), (6th Edition), Growth and Development, Macmillan, U.K.

10-A(529)

M.A. 3rd Semester Paper- 310 (Option- i)



ECONOMETRICS–I





PREAMBLE

Applications of economic theory need a reasonable understanding of economic relationships and relevant statistical methods. The econometric theory thus becomes a very powerful tool for understanding of applied economic relationships and for meaningful research in economics. This paper accordingly is devoted to equip the students with basic theory of econometrics and relevant applications of the methods. The topics covered in the course include various problems faced in estimation of both single equations and simultaneous equations models. The course also covers various econometric methods applicable to different topics in economics and those needed for applied economic research. An introductory module on multivariate methods has also been included in the course which constitutes an important tool for analysis in multivariable data in development-related studies.

Unit – I

Definition, Scope and Methodology of Econometrics, Simple Linear Regression Model; OLS Estimates and Their Properties. Functional forms of Regression Models, Growth Rates.

Unit – II

General Linear regression Model, Maximum Likelihood Estimates and their properties. R2 and adjusted R2; Significance Testing of Parameters in Multiple Regression Analysis.

Unit – III

Nature, Test, Consequences and remedial steps of problem of Heteroscedasticity, Multicollinearity and Autocorrelation; Generalized Least Square.

10-A(530)

Unit – IV

Types of Specification Errors, Errors of Measurement. The Simultaneous Equation bias and Consistency of OLS Estimators; The Identification Problem; Rules of Identification- Order and Rank Conditions.

Basic Reading List:

Amemiya, T. (1985), Advanced Econometrics, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass.

Baltagi, B.H. (1988), Econometrics, Springer, New York. Goldberger, A.S. (1998), Introductory Econometrics, Oxford

University Press, New York. Gujarati, D.N. (1995), Basic Econometrics (2nd Edition) MC Graw

Hill New Delhi. Intrilligator, M.D. (1978), Econometric Methods, Techniques and

Applications, Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. Johnson J. (1991), Econometric Methods, MCGraw Hall Book Co.

London Kmenta J. (1998), Elements of Econometrics, University of

Michigan Press, NewYork Koutsoyiannis, A. (1977), Theory of Econometrics, The Macmillan

Press Ltd. London Maddala G.S.(Ed) (1993), Econometric Methods and application,

Aldershot U.K. Pindyck R.S. and D.L. Rubinfield (1976), Econometric Models and

Economic Forecasts, MCGraw Hill Kogakusha Tokyo Theil H. (1981), Introduction to Econometrics, Prentice Hall of

India, New Delhi

10-A(531)

M.A. 3rd Semester Paper-310 (Option-ii)



HISTORY OF MODERN ECONOMICS

(Contribution of Nobel Laureates in Economics)-I





PREAMBLE

The history of economic thought deals with different thinkers andtheories in the field of economics from ancient medieval world to the presentday. The history of economic thought is as old as human thought itself. Itclearly demonstrates the continuous development of economic ideas from thevery early times of civilization to the present day. Changes in economicthought have always accompanied changes in the economy and economicpolicy. The revised course attempts to cover different phases in the evolutionof economic ideas including the contribution of liberal economic thinkers inthe neo-liberalist phase.

Unit-I

General outline of Mercantilist theories: Physiocracy - Basic principles and policies, natural order, tableau economique; Classical Political Economy: Adam Smith : division of labour, Theory of Value, Economic Development.

Unit-II

David Ricardo : Theory of value, Theory of Distribution, Doctrine of Rent, Views on International Trade, Theory of Economic Development and the Stationary State, Critique by Sraffa; T.R. Malthus: Theory of Population and Theory of Gluts - Critics of Classicism.

10-A(532)

Unit-III

Karl Marx: Materialistic Interpretation of history, Labour Theory of Value and Surplus Value, Neo-Classical School: Marshall: Consumers’ Surplus, Tax bounty analysis, External Economies, Quasi-Rent, Role of time element in value; Pigou: Welfare Economics.

Unit-IV

Nobel Prize Winners in Economics

Tobin, Markowitz, Myrdal (1974), A.K.Sen (1998), Solow, Meade,

References

Blaug, M 1997, Economic Theory in retrospect, Cambridge Universitypress, Cambridge

Da Costa,G.C:Production,Prices and Distribution(1985)TMH,NewDelhi Dasgupta A.K.L1985) Epochs of Economic Theory ,Oxford Univ Press,New

Delhi. Ekelund and Hebert :A History of Economic Theory and

Method(1990)McGraw Hill Publ Co.New York. Eatwell,John, Murray Milgate ,Peter Newman(1998):The New Palgrave _A

Dictionary of Economics, Macmillan Reference Ltd. Ghosh and Ghosh; Concise History of Economic Thought, Himalaya. Gill Richard: (1972)Evolution of Modern Economics,Prentice Hall ofIndia. Hunt E.K : (:1990) History of Economic Thought, Wodsworth. Morgan M. S.(1990), A History of Economic Ideas,Cambridge UnivPress.

U.K. Oser Jacob,and S,.Brue L 1988)The Evolution of

EconomicThought,Harcourt,NY Puttaswamaiah K.(1995) :Nobel Economists-Lives and Contributions,Indus

Publ Co.,New Delhi. Roll, Eric : (1973) A History of Economic Thought, Faber, London. Seligman B.S: (1962),Main Currents In Modern Economics,Quadrangle,

Chicago 32. Serepanti E,and Zamagui Stefano: An Outline of Economic Thought,OUP. Seshadri G.B:( 1997),Economic Doctrines,B.R Publ Corp., New Delhi. Spiegel H.W. (1971) The Growth of Economic Thought, N.C

.DukeUniv,Durham. Vohra P. and R. Mehta: Encyclopaedia of World Great

Economists,Commonwealth.

10-A(533)

M.A. 3rd Semester Paper-310 (Option -iii) Time : 3 Hrs.


ECONOMICS OF AGRICULTURE-I





PREAMBLE

The objective of this course is to provide a detailed treatment of issues in Agricultural Economics to those intending to specialize in this area. Its objective is to familiarize students with policy issues that are relevant to Indian Agricultural Economics and enable them to analyze the issues using basic micro-economic concepts.

Unit - I

Introduction Agricultural Economics: Definition, Nature and Scope; Role of Agriculture in Economic Development; Inter- Sectoral Linkages of Agriculture (Backward and Forward Linkages and Feedback Effects), Role of Agriculture in Haryana and Indian Economy, Farming as a business or way of life, Risks and Uncertainties in Agriculture.

Unit - II

Models of Agricultural Development

Ancient Economic Thought and Agriculture: Hebrew Economic Thought, Greek Economic Thought – Socrates, Plato, Aristotle; Roman Economic Thought; Medieval Economic Thought and Agriculture – St. Augustine; Physiocrats and Agriculture; Classical Economic Thought and Agriculture.

Unit - III

Agricultural Development and Policy in India

Indian Agriculture: Features, Problems and Trends; Agricultural Productivity in India – Causes of Low Productivity and Suggestions to increase Productivity in India; Agricultural Price Policy : origin, objectives, need, instruments, shortcomings and suggestions for Re-orientation of Agricultural Price Policy in

10-A(534)

India, Agriculture Marketing in India, Agricultural Development and Five Year Plans.

Unit - IV Rural Unemployment and Poverty in India

Rural Unemployment : Nature, Magnitude, Causes and Suggestions to solve unemployment problem; Problems and Measures to improve the conditions of Agricultural Labourers, Rural Poverty, Inequalities in income distribution, Concept of Poverty Line and Measures to eradicate Poverty in India.

Basic Reading List

Black, J.D. (1945), Introduction to Economics of Agriculture. MacMillan, New York.

Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol.1A, Agricultural Production, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V.

Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol. 2B, Agricultural and Policy, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V.

Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.),Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol.1B, Marketing, Distribution and Consumption, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V.

Bruce, L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol.2A, Agricultural and Its External Linkages, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V.

Cohen, R.L. (1948), Economics of Agriculture, Nishet, London. Dantwala, M.L. et. al (1991), Indian Agricultural Development Since

Independence, Oxford & IBH, New Delhi. Drummond H. Evan and Goodwin W. John (2006), Agricultural

Economics, Pearson Education, New Delhi. Eicher Carl and Lawrence Witt (Eds.) (1964), Agriculture in Economic

Development, New York, McGraw Hill Co. Forster, G.W. and Leoger, M.C. (1959), Elements of Agricultural

Economics, Prentice Hall. Ghatak Subrata and Ken Ingersent, Agriculture and Economic

Development, Harvestor Press Ltd., London. Goodwin, H.G. (1977), Economics of Agriculture, Reston Publiching Co. Halcrow, H.G.(1981), Economics of Agriculture, McGraw Hill

International Book Agency. Meier, G.M. (1995), Leading Issues in Economic Development, Oxford

University Press, New Delhi. Metcaff, D. (1969), Economics of Agriculture, Harmondsworth, Penguin

Books. Nicholls, W.H. (1964), “The Place of Agriculture in Economics

Development”, in Eicher, C. and Witt, L.(ed) 1964, Agriculture in Economics Development, Vora & Co. Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Bombay.

Ojala, E.M.(1950), Agriculture and Economic Progress, Oxford University Press, London.

Southworth Herman and Bruce Johnston (eds.) (1968), Agricultural Development and Economic Growth, Cornell University Press, New York.

10-A(535)


Bilgrami, S.A.R. (1996), Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing House, Delhi.

Harque, T. and A.S. Sirohi (1986), Agrarian Reforms and Institutional Changes in India, Concept Publishing Company, Delhi.

Lekhi, R.K. and Singh, Joginder (2010), Agricultural Economics, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi.

Sadhu and Singh (1991), Agricultural Problems in India, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.

Sadhu and Singh (2002), Fundamentals of Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.

Singh, Kuldeep (2010), “Agricultural Trajectories and Environment Dilemma : Some Evidence from Haryana”, Agricultural Situation in India, Vol. LXVII, No. 3, June, 2010.

Soni, R.N. (1995), Leading Issues in Agricultural Economics, Arihant Press, Jalandhar.

10-A(536)

M.A. 3rd Semester Paper-310 (Option-iv) Time : 3 Hrs.


WELFARE ECONOMICS – I





PREAMBLE

Evaluation of normative significance of economic events and issues forms the framework of welfare economics. Many applied branches of economics such as public finance, cost-benefit analysis, industrial economics and economics of government policy use welfare economic criteria as their foundation. The paper is divided into three modules — Pre-Paretian Welfare Economics, Paretian Welfare Economics and Later Developments.

Unit-I

Scope and Purpose of Welfare Economics; Benthamite Approach to Aggregate Welfare ; Assumption of Uniform Income – Utility Function of Individuals; Questions of Income Distribution; Issue of Interpersonal Comparisons of Utility.

Unit-II

Fairness, Equity and Distributive Justice; Marshallian Welfare Economics; Consumer’s Surplus- Measurement, Difficulties involved and Criticism.

Unit-III

Hicks’s Surpluses- Concept of Consumer’s Surplus, Principle of Compensating Variation; Consumer’s Surplus and Tax-Bounty Analysis.

10-A(537)

Unit-IV

Optimum Resource Allocation and Welfare Maximization, Pareto optimality – Optimum exchange conditions, The production optimum, The consumption optimum, Concept of contract curve; Top level optimum.

Basic Reading List

Boadway, R.W. and Neil,B. (1984), Welfare Economics, Basil Blackwell, Oxford.

Little, I.M.D. (1958), A critique of Welfare Economics, Oxford University Press.

Scitovsky,T.(1958), Welfare and Competition, GOERGE ALLEN AND UNWIN LTD.

Sen,A.(1982), Choice,Welfare and Measurement, Basil Blackwell. Johansson(1991),An Introduction to Modern Welfare Economics,Cambridge

University Press


Baumol, W.J. (ed.) (2001), Welfare Economics, Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., U.K.

Pigou, A.C. (1962), The Economics of Welfare (4th Edition), Macmillan. Hicks, J.R. (1956), A Revision of Demand Theory, Clarendon Press, Oxford. Little, I.M.D. (1949), The Foundations of Welfare Economics, Oxford

Economic Papers,Vol. 1.

10-A(538)

M.A. 3rd Semester Paper-310 (Option-v)



INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS- I





PREAMBLE

In the contemporary world with globalization and liberalization more and more attention is being given to industry. This course intends to provide knowledge to the students on the basic issues such as productivity, efficiency, capacity utilization and debates involved in the industrial development of India. The objective is to provide a thorough knowledge about the economics of industry in a cogent and analytical manner, particularly in the Indian context.

Unit-I Concept and Organization of a firm – ownership, control and objectives of the firm; Passive and active behaviour of the firm; Growth of the firm –Theory and evidence, constraints on firm’s growth;

Unit-II

Productivity, efficiency and Capacity utilization – concept and measurement; Indian situation. Theories of industrial location – Weber and Sargent theories, Factors affecting location.

Unit-III

Sellers’ concentration; Product differentiation; Entry conditions; Economies of Scale; Market structure and profitability; Market structure and innovation; Product pricing – theories and evidence.

10-A(539)

Unit-IV

Methods of project evaluation; Ranking of Projects – NPV and IRR; Social cost-benefit Analysis; Theories and empirical evidence on Mergers and Acquisitions (M & A’s) and diversification.

Basic Reading List

Ahluwalia, I.J. (1985), Industrial Growth in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Barthwal, R.R. (1985), Industrial Economics, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New Delhi.

Cherunilam, F. (1994), Industrial Economics: Indian Perspective (3rd Edition), Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.

Desai, B. (1999), Industrial Economy in India (3rd Edition), Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai

Divine, P.J. and R.M. Jones et. al. (1976), An Introduction to Industrial Economics, George Allen and Unwin Ltd., London.

Government of India, Economic Survey (Annual). Hay, D. and D.J. Moris (1979), Industrial Economics: Theory and

Evidence, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Kuchhal, S.C. (1980), Industrial Economy of India (5th Edition), Chaitanya

Publishing House, Allahbad. Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance (Annual).


Bains, J.S. (1996), Industrial Organization, Cheltanham, U.K. Harndeen, J.B. (1975), The Economics of Corporate Economy, Dunellen

Publishers, New York. Kemien, M.T. and N.L. Schwartz (1982), Market Structure and Innovation,

Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. Bagchi, A. and M. Banerjee (Eds.) (1979), Change and Choice in Indian

Industry, Bagchi Publications, Calcutta. Kelkar, V.L. and V.V. Bhnoji Rao (Eds.) (1996), India Development Policy

Imperatives, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (1987), The Development

Process of the Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing, Bombay. Chakravarty, S. (1987), Development Planning: The Indian Experience,

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1999), India: Macro Economics and Political

Economy: 1964-1991, Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economy Policy, Viking, New Delhi. Sen, R. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for the 21st

Century (Essays in honour of Professor P.R. Brahmananda), Deep and Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

10-A(540)

M.A. 3rd Semester Paper-310 (Option-vi)



FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTITUTIONS-I





Unit-I

Financial System Meaning and Rationale of studying Financial System; Risk management in Financial Institutions; Risk management in Banks.

Interest Rate Terms structure of Interest rate and Yield curve; Efficient Market Hypothesis.

Unit-II Commercial Banking System Meaning, Functions and Types of Commercial Banks ; Recent NPA Scenario in Indian Banking ; Banking sector reforms over last decade. Central Banking System Central Banking in India; Conduct of monetary policy in India; Role of RBI in Financial Stability and Financial inclusion.

Unit-III

Money Market Introduction, Meaning and main characteristics of Money Market segments- Call Money Market, Treasury bill market, Commercial Papers Market, Certificate of Deposit Market, Gilt- edged Securities Market, Repo Market,

Functions and Importance of money market in India; Recent Developments in Indian Money Market; An introduction about Discounting services by DFHI and STCI.

10-A(541)

Unit-IV

Capital Market Meaning, Objectives, Importance and Functions of Capital Market; Financial instruments in primary capital Market; Characteristics and Functions of Stock Exchange. Hedging with Financial derivatives- Futures, Options and Interest Swaps.

Reading List

Bhasin, N. (2007), Banking and Financial System India 1947-2007, New Century Publications.

Gupta,S.K , Aggarwal,N. and Gupta,N. (2005), Financial Institutions and Markets, Kalyani Publishers.

Khan, M.Y.(2008) Indian Financial System. Tata McGraw Hill Company Ltd Mishkin, F.S and Eakins,S.G.(2009) Financial Markets and Institutions, (5th

Edition) Dorling Kindersley. Bhole, L.M. and Mahakud, J.(2009), Financial Institutions and Markets-

Structure, Growth and Innovations, Tata Mcgraw Hill. Madura, J.(2006) Financial Institutions and Markets (7th Edition), CENGAGE

Learning. Fabozzi, F.J, Modigliani, F. Jones,F.J.and Ferri,M.G.(2009), Foundations of

Financial Markets and Institutions, Dorling Kindesley. Mishkin, (2013) ‘ The economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets’.

7e, Pearson Publications. Cecchetti, S.G. and Schoenholtz, K.L.(2013) , ‘Money , Banking and

Financial Markets’ . 3rd edition. Tata McGraw Hill Company Ltd Bhole, L.M. (1999), Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill

Company Ltd., New Delhi. Bhole, L.M. (2000), Indian Financial System, Chugh Publications, Allahbad. Johnson, H.J. (1993), Financial Institutions and Markets, McGraw Hill, New

York. Machiraju, M.R. (1999), Indian Financial Systems, Vikas Publishing House,

New Delhi. Ohlson, J.A. (1987), The Theory of Financial Markets and Institutions, North

Holland, Amsterdam. Prasad, K.N. (2001), Development of India’s Financial System, Sarup & Sons,

New Delhi. Smith, P.F. (1978), Money and Financial Intermediation: The Theory and

Structure of Financial System, Prentice Hall, Englewood-Cliffs, New Jersey. Chandra, P. (1997), Financial Markets, (4th Edition), Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi. Machiraju, H.R. (1997), International Financial Markets in India, Wheeler

Publishing, Allahbad. Bhatt, R.S. (1996), Unit Trust of India and Mutual Funds: A Study, UTI

Institute of Capital Markets, Mumbai. Sahadevan, K.G. and M.T. Thiripalraju (1997), Mutual Funds, Prentice Hall of

India, New Delhi. Goss, B.A. and B.S. Yamey (1978), The Economics of Futures Trading,

Macmillan, London

10-A(542)

Gupta, L.C. (Ed.) (1999), India’s Financial Markets and Institutions, Society for Capital Research and Development, Delhi.

Crocker, A. (1982), International Money; Issues and Analysis, The English Language Book Society, Nelson, London.

Niehans, J. (1994), International Monetary Economics, John Hopkins University Press, New York.

Official websites of IMF, RBI,SEBI

10-A(543)

M.A. 3rd Semester

Paper- 310 (Option-vii) Time : 3 Hrs.

Max. Marks : 100 External : 80

Internal : 20

ECONOMICS OF GENDER AND DEVELOPMENT- I





PREAMBLE

Gender biases in societal practices and development policies have resulted in persistent gender inequalities. It is increasingly being realized that mitigating such inequalities and enhancing women’s capabilities and entitlements are crucial to the overall development of the country. This course “Economics of Gender and Development” would provide students an understanding of the nature of the economic role of women and their contribution to the national economy on the basis of a scientific and non-sexist analysis. The modules incorporated in this course provide an analysis of issues at the theoretical level and also with regard to specificity of issues prevailing in the Indian context.

Unit-I

Importance and concepts of women studies – women in patriarchal and matriarchal societies and structures, patrilineal and matrilineal systems and relevance to present day society in India; Economic basis and functioning of patriarchy in developed Countries and LDCs, particularly India.

Unit-II Demography of female population: Age structure, mortality rates, and sex ratio – Causes of declining sex ratios and fertility rates in LDCs and particularly India – Theories and measurement of fertility and its control; Women and their access to nutrition, health, education and social and community resources, and its impact on female mortality and fertility, economic status, and work participation rate.

10-A(544)

Unit-III

Factors affecting decision making by women; Property rights; access to and control over economic resources, assets; Power of decision making at household, class community level; Economic status of women and its effect on work-participation rate, income level, health, and education in developing countries and India.

Unit-IV

Concept and analysis of women’s work: valuation of productive and unproductive work; visible and invisible work; paid and unpaid-work; economically productive and socially productive work .Factors affecting female entry in labour market; Supply and demand for female labour in developed and developing countries, particularly India; Studies of female work participation in agriculture, non-agricultural rural activities, informal sector, cottage and small-scale industries, organized industry and services sector.

Basic Reading List

Boserup E. (1970), Women’s Role in Economic Development, George Allen and Unwin, London.

Desai, N. and M.K. Raj (Eds.) (1979), Women and Society in India, Research Center for Women Studies, SNDT Unviersity, Bombay

Government of India (1974), Towards Equality – Report of the Committee on the Status of Women in India, Department of Social Welfare, Ministry of Education and Social Welfare, New Delhi.

Krishnaraj, M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender, Population and Development, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Seth, M. (2000), Women and Development: The Indian Experience, Sage Publications, New Delhi.

Srinivasan K. and A. Shariff (1998), India: Towards Population and Development Goals, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Venkateswaran S. (1995), Environment, Development and the Gender Gap, Sage Publications, New Delhi.

Wazir, R. (2000), The Gender Gap in Basic Education: NGOs as Change Agents, Sage Publications, New Delhi.

10-A(545)

M.A. 3rd Semester Paper- 310 ( Option viii)

Time : 3 Hrs.


ECONOMICS HISTORY OF ASEAN, COUNTRIES, CHINA, SOUTH KOREA AND JAPAN-I


(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2

questions from each of the four units (16 marks each).

Unit – I

Problems of Economic History of ASEAN: China, Japan and South Korea, Different Approaches of Study and Their Limitations, Sources for the study of Modern Economic History of ASEAN: China, Japan and South Korea.

Unit - II

China, Japan and South Korea during the first half of the 20th century: Industrial Development and effects of industrial development, Labour Organization and Labour Problems.The population problems, Foreign Trade, Agrarian Settlements and Changes in the Agrarian Life, Development of credit and Banking System.

Unit – III

Economy of ASEAN during the Second half of the 20th century: Economic and Educational Reforms, The Land Reforms and changes in Agrarian Life, Industrialization.

Unit – IV

Foreign Trade, Development of Roads and Railways, Competition and Collaboration with Global Economy, Internal Aspects of the Economic problem, China, Japan and South Korea.

10-A(546)

Reading List:

‘Reshaping the Asia Pacific Economic Order”, by Hadi Soesastro, Christopher Charles Findley, 2006, 286 P.

“Institutional Balancing in the Asia Pacific: economic” by Kaithe 2009, P. 209.

“China and World Economy” by Zhouggno she hui ke Xue Yawn shi jie juia ji, 2002.

“Strategic consequences of India’s Economic Essays” by Sanjay Baru published in 2006.

“A New look at the US-China-Japan Triangle” Toward Building a Stable Framework” Asian Perspectives, Vol. 27, No3, 2003, PP 177-219 by Yoshihide Soeya, Jianweiwang and David A Weleh.

“The Economic History of Korea” by Myung soo Cha, Yeunguam University. EH. Net Encyclopedia.

“Economic Growth and Democratization in North East Asia, Part I & II.

“The Rise of China and its effectson Taiwan, Japan and South Korea” US Policy choices, Jan. 2006 Dick K Nanto.

“America and Japan Approach a Rising China” by Dan Blumenthal, Dec. 2006.

“Look East: India’s Economic ties with Japan, South Korea, China, 3 Dec. 2009.

“China, Japan and South Korea to consider Free trade Pact” Oct. 11, 2009 MYT.

10-A(547)


M. A. Economics w.e.f. 2015-2016

Course Structure

M.A. Economics (Semester IV)

Total Marks External Internal Time

Paper-406 International Trade and Finance-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-407 Economics of Environment and 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Social Sector-II Paper-408 Indian Economic Policy-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Paper-409 Economics of Growth and 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Development-II Paper-410 Option (i) Econometrics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (ii) History of Modern Economics 100 80 20 3 Hrs.

(Contribution of Nobel Laureates in Economics)-II Option (iii) Economics of Agriculture-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (iv) Welfare Economics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (v) Industrial Economics-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (vi) Financial Markets and Institutions-II 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Option (vii) Economics of Gender and 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Development-II Option (viii) Economic History of ASEAN 100 80 20 3 Hrs. Countries, China, South Korea and Japan-II

Note: Students are required to select an option from Paper-410 from the same stream which they selected in Semester III.

10-A(548)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper-406

Time : 3 Hrs.


INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND FINANCE-II




PREAMBLE

The course provides a deep understanding about the broad principles and theories, which tend to govern the free flow of trade in goods, services and capital — both short-term and long-term — at the global level. Besides, preparing the students about the relevance and limitations of these principles, the contents of the paper spread over different modules, lay stress on the theory and nature of the subject which, in turn, will greatly help them to examine the impact of the trade policies followed both at the national and international levels as also their welfare implications at macro level and the distribution of gains from trade to North and South with particular reference to India. The study of the paper under the present era of globalization will train the students about the likely consequences on income, employment and social standards and possible policy solutions as the world will move into the 21st century.

Unit-I

Balance of Payments Meaning and components of balance of payments; Equilibrium and disequilibrium in the balance of payments; Process of adjustment under gold standard; Automatic adjustment mechanism through fixed exchange rates and flexible exchange rate., Foreign Exchange Market: Expectations (Spot rate, forward exchange rate, Speculative Pressures) and Exchange Rate.

10-A(549)

Unit-II Expenditure changing Polices(Monetary and fiscal policy), Expenditure-Switching Policies and Direct Controls for Balance of payment Equilibrium.; Monetary approach to Balance of Payment Equilibrium.; Foreign trade multiplier( with and without foreign repercussions); and determination of national income in an open Economy.

Unit-III

The International Monetary System International Monetary Fund-Working and conditionality clause of International monetary Fund; Functions and Achievements of GATT/WTO, UNCTAD, World Bank and India. The Theory of Regional Blocs Forms of economic cooperation; Static and Dynamic effects of a customs union and free trade area; SAARC, ASEAN, EU; Asian Economic Integration : Rationale and Economic Progress.

Unit-IV

Trade Policies in India

Trade problems and trade policies in India during the last five decades; Recent changes in the direction and composition of trade and their implications; Rationale and impact of trade reforms since 1991 on balance of payments, employment and Growth; FDI and Sectoral Growth in India. Basic Reading List Chacholiades, M. (1990), International Trade: Theory and Policy, McGraw

Hill, Kogkusha, Japan. Cherunilam, F. (2008): International Economics, The Tata McGraw-Hill

Companies, New Delhi. 5th Ed. Dunn R.M. and J.H. Mutt (2000), International Economics, Routledge,

London. Kindlberger, C P (1991): International Economics, R D Irwin,

Homewood.8th Ed. Krugman, P.R. and Obstfeld, M. (1994), International Economics: Theory

and Policy, Glenview, Foresman. Mishra, S.K. and Puri, V.K. (2012), Indian Economy- Its Development

Experience, Himalaya Publishing House. 30th Revised Ed. Rudar Dutt and Sundram; Indian Economy S Chand and Company Latest

Edition Salvator, D L (2001): International Economics, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle

Rover, New York. Soderston, Bo. (1999), International Economics, The Macmillan Press Ltd.

London.

10-A(550)

Yarbough, R.J. (1999), International Economics, International Thompson Publishing, New York.


Bhagwati J. (1988), Protectionism, Cambridge University Press, Mass. Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (1987), The Development

Process of the Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay. Dana, M.S. (2000), International Economics: Study, Guide and Work

Book, (5th Edition), Routledge Publishers, London. Goldsten, M. (1998), The Asian Financial crisis: causes cure and

systematic implications, Institute of International Economics, Washington D.C. Hufbauer G.C. and K.A. Elliott (1994), Measuring the Costs of Protection

in the United States, Institute for International Economics. Jackson, J. (1989),The World Trading System, Cambridge University

Press, Mass. Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1998), India’s Economic Reforms, 1999-2000,

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. King, P.G. (1995), International Economics and International Economic

Policy: A Reader, McGraw Hill International, Singapore. Maggi, G. and A. Rodriguez-Clare (1998), “The Value of Trade

Agreements in the Presence of Political Pressures,” Journal of Political Economy, 106, 574-601.

Mishkin, S.F. (1998), The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, (5th Edition), Harper Colins Publishers, New York.

Panagariya, A. (2000), “Preferential Trade Liberalization: the Traditional Theory and new Developments,” Journal of Economic Literature, 38, 287-331.

Panchamukhi V.R. and R. Tandon (1987), Money and Finance in World Economic Order (RIS), Indus Publishing Co. Delhi.

Panchmukhi, V.R. (1978), Trade Policies of India–A Quantitative Analysis, Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi.

Patel, S. J. (1995), Indian Economy Towards the 21st Century, University Press Ltd., India.

Pomfert, R. (1988), Unequal Trade: The Economics of Discriminatory International Trade Policies, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford.

Satyanarayan, B. (1986), India’s Trade with Asia and the Far East Countries, B.R. Publishing Corp., New Delhi.

Vanderbussche, H. and M. Zanardi (2006), “The Global Chilling Effects of Antidumping Proliferation, “CEPR Discussion paper. 5597.

10-A(551)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper- 407



ECONOMICS OF ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIAL SECTOR-II





PREAMBLE

This course is meant to provide some insights into the application of economic theory in the design and implementation of public policy related to the management of environment and social sectors. The course finds roots in welfare economics, national income accounting, macroeconomic policies and trade and development. Modules incorporated in this paper are devoted to issues of environmental economics, environmental and social services and the problem of valuation of these services, and designing of instruments and institutions for the management of environment. The models of optimal use of natural resources, macroeconomic issues, sustainable development, environmental resource problems in India and the economics of health and education constitute the other areas of the modules of this paper.

Unit-I Concept and indicators of sustainable development - sustainability rules, Common-Perrings model; The Solow/Hartwick approach to sustainability. System of integrated environmental and economic accounting (SEEA).

Unit-II Management of common property resources; CPRs, LDCs and sustainable development; Subsidies, controls and use of natural capital in India. Political Economy of ecology and equity. Gender perspective in environmental management.

Unit-III Environment and energy; Water resource planning; Water and air pollution - existing pollution control mechanisms; People’s participation in the management

10-A(552)

of common and forest lands; The institutions of joint forest management and the joint protected area management; Social forestry — rationale and benefits. Wetlands. Global environmental issues- problems in managing climate change; International trade and environment; Trade and environment in WTO regime.

Unit-IV Education as an instrument for economic growth; Important issues in basic and higher education; Education and labour market — Effects of education, ability and family background on earnings, poverty and income distribution, education and employment; production function models, growth accounting equations of Schultz and Denison, Manpower requirements approach; Economic dimensions of health care and determinants of health; Role of Government and market in health care; Inequalities in health and education – the class and gender perspective; Financing of education and health in India.

Reading List

Hanley, N., J.F. Shogern and B. White (1997), Environmental Economics in Theory and Practice, Macmillan.

Chary, S.N. and Vyasulu, Vinod (2000), Environmental Management - an Indian Perspective, Macmillan, New Delhi.

Schultz, T.W. (1971), Investment in Human Capital, Free Press, New York. World Bank (1993), The World Development Report, 1993: Investing in

Health, Oxford University Press, New York. Panchmukhi, P.R. (1980), Economics of Health: A Trend Report in ICSSR,

A Survey of Research in Economics, Vol. VI, Infrastructure, Allied, Delhi. Brian G. Dahlin , The Impact of Education on Economic Growth -Theory,

Findings, and Policy Implications, Duke University, pdf from internet. Psacharopoulos, G. 1973. Returns to Education: An International

Comparison. Amsterdam:Elsevier. Barro, Robert. “Economic Growth in a Cross Section of Countries,”

Quarterly Journal of Economics, 1991 Education and economic growth, Jonathan Temple*, Department of

Economics, University of Bristol, 8 Woodland Road, Bristol BS8 1TN, pdf from internet.

Education and Economic Growth, Robert J. Barro, pdf from internet. Painuly, J P, Economic Instruments: Application to Environmental

Problems, Working paper no 3, by UNEP from IGIDR, Bombay, 1995. Value of Life, Value of Time, and Costant Relative, Blaug, M. (1972),

Introduction to Economics of Education, Penguin, London. Hussen, A.M. (1999), Principles of Environmental Economics, Routledge,

London. Jeroen. C.J.M. van den Berg (1999), Handbook of Environmental and

Resource Economics, Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., U.K. Pearce, D.W. and R. Turner (1991), Economics of Natural Resource Use

and Environment, John Hopkins University Press, Baltimore.

10-A(553)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper- 408

Time : 3 Hrs.


INDIAN ECONOMIC POLICY-II




PREAMBLE

The objective of this Paper at the postgraduate level would be to sharpen the analytical faculty of the student, by highlighting an integrated approach to the functioning aspects of the Indian economy, keeping in view the scope for alternative approaches. Such an analysis is essential because the Indian economy is a unique amalgam of alternative competing and often conflicting theories and a proper understanding of its working is imperative if the student is to comprehend the ramifications that underlie most of the observed phenomena in the Indian economic set-up. The emphasis of the paper is on overall social, political and economic environment influencing policy decisions. To develop all these themes, the course is divided into specific modules.

Unit-I

Five year Plans with emphasis on latest plan. Infrastructural development- issues and policies in its financing.

Unit -II Industrial policy; Public Sector enterprises and their performance; Privatization and disinvestment debate; Micro and Small-scale Industries ; Labour sector reforms.

Unit -III

Analysis of price behaviour in India; Review of monetary policy of the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) with emphasis on latest developments; Banking Sector reforms in India.

Unit IV

Globalization of Indian economy; WTO and its impact on the different sectors of the economy; Rationale of and issues in good governance.

10-A(554)

Reading List

Ahluwalia, I.J. and I.M.D. Little (Eds.) (1999), India’s Economic Reforms and Development (Essays in honour of Manmohan Singh), Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Bardha, P.K. (9th Edition) (1999), The Political Economy of Development in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (2001), Development Experience in the Indian Economy: Inter-State Perspectives, Bookwell, Delhi.

Datt, R. (Ed.) (2001), Second Generation Economic Reforms in India, Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi.

Government of India, Economic Survey, (Annual), Ministry of Finance, New Delhi.

Government of India, Planning Commission; Five Year Plan Development. Jalan, B. (1992), The Indian Economy – Problems and Prospects, Viking,

New Delhi. Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economic Policy- Preparing for the Twenty First

Century, Viking, New Delhi. .Kapila Uma Indian Economy Academic Foundation New Delhi Latest

Edition. Mishra S.K.and Puri V.K, Indian Economy Himalya Publication House

Latest Edition. Monga G.S.and Goel M.M. (2001) Wage Goods Approach and Development

Deep and Deep New Delhi. Parikh, K.S. (1999), India Development Report – 1999-2000, Oxford

University Press, New Delhi. Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance, (Annual). Rudar Dutt and Sundram; Indian Economy S Chand and Company Latest

Edition Sen, R.K. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for 21st

Century (Essays in honour of Prof. P.R. Brahmananda), Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi.

Goel, MM ( 2011): Economics of Human Resource Development in India, VK Global Publications, New Delhi.

Goel, MM ( 2014): Indian Economy Long Term Challenges & Policy Measures, Monograph N.91 , A Guna Gaurav Nyas Publications Think

10-A(555)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper- 409 Time : 3 Hrs.


ECONOMICS OF GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT – II





PREAMBLE

The study of economic development has gained importance because of sustained interest of the developing countries in uplifting their economic conditions by restructuring their economies to acquire greater diversity, efficiency and equity in consonance with their priorities. While few success stories can be counted, many have grappled with chronic problems of narrow economic base, inefficiency and low standard of living. For this and other reasons, there have been many approaches

to economic development. In recent times, besides hardcore economic prescriptions to development, concerns hitherto relegated to background like education, health, sanitation and infrastructural development, have found a place of pride in explaining the preference of various economies. Modules incorporated in this paper are devoted to the theories of growth and development, social and institutional aspects of development, importance of agriculture, and the rationale and pattern of industrialization in developing countries. The other important issues in the context of development such as infrastructure-linkages, role of international trade, importance of domestic macroeconomic policies, investment criteria, and relevance of planning have been included in the modules of this paper.

Unit-I Approaches to Development

Balanced and Unbalanced Growth; Critical Minimum Efforts Theory; Low Income Equilibrium Trap; Dual Economy: Models of Lewis, Fei-Ranis, Jorgensen, Basic idea of Dixit and Marglin, Kelly et.al.

10-A(556)

Unit-II Sectoral Aspects of Development

Role of Agriculture in Economic Development; Heterogeneity in Agriculture; Agricultural Transformation: Designing Strategy for Agriculture Transformation; Rationale and Pattern of Industrialization in developing Countries; Choice of Techniques, appropriate technology and employment; Terms of Trade between Agriculture and Industry.

Services Sector in Developing Economies: Role, growth and sustainability, Infrastructure and its importance.

Unit-III Trade and Development Experience

International Trade as an Engine of Growth: Static and Dynamic gains from Trade; Prebisch-Singer Thesis vis-à-vis Free Trade experience of Developing Countries; Trade Policy Debate: Export promotion, Import Substitution and Economic Integration; WTO and Developing Countries, International Organizations IMF and World Bank.

Unit-IV State and Economic Development

Market Failure & Rational of state in Economic development; State Capacity and State Failure; Good Economic Governance.

Development Planning: Financial System & Macroeconomic Stability, Fiscal Policy for inclusive Growth.

Basic Reading List:

Behrman, S. and T.N. Srinivasan (1995), Handbook of Development Economics, Vol. 3, Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Bhagwati, J. and P. Desai (1970), India: Planning for Industrialization, Oxford University Press, London.

Brown, M. (1966), On the Theory and Measurement of Technical Change, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, Mass.

Chakravarti, S. (1982), Alternative Approaches to the Theory of Economic Growth, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Chakravarti, S. (1987), Development Planning: The Indian Experience, Clarendon Press, Oxford.

Chenery, H. and T.N. Srinivasan (Eds.) (1989), Handbook of Development Economics, Vols. 1 & 2, Elsevier, Amsterdam.

Dasgupta, P. (1993), An Enquiry into Well-being and Destitution, Clarendon Press, Oxford.

Ghatak, S. (1986), An Introduction to Development Economics, Allen and Unwin, London.

10-A(557)

Gillis, M., D.H. Perkins, M. Romer and D.R. Snodgrass (1992), Economics of Development, (3rd Edition), W.W. Norton, New York.

Grossman, G. and E. Helpman (1991), Innovation and Growth in the Global Economy, MIT Press, Cambridge, Mass.

Higgins, B. (1959), Economic Development, W.W. Norton, New York.

Hirschman, A.O. (1958), The Strategy of Economic Development, Yale University Press, New York.

Kindleberger, C.P. (1977), Economic Development, (3rd Edition), McGraw Hill, New York.

Lewis, W.A. (1955), The Theory of Economic Growth, George Allen and Unwin, London.

Meier, G.M. and J.E.Rauch (2005), Leading Issues in Economic Development, (8th Edition), Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Nayyar, D. (Ed.) (1994), Industrial Growth and Stagnation: The Debate in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Sen,A. (1983), Poverty and Famines, Oxford University Press, Oxford. Sen, A.K.(Ed.) (1990), Growth Economics, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Sen, A. (1992), Inequality Reexamined, Oxford University Press,

Oxford. Todaro, M.P. and S.C. Smith (2003), (8th Edition), Economic

Development, Pearson Education, Delhi. Thirlwal, A.P. (1999), (6th Edition), Growth and Development,

Macmillan, U.K.

10-A(558)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper- 410 (Option- i)



ECONOMETRICS–II





PREAMBLE

Applications of economic theory need a reasonable understanding of economic relationships and relevant statistical methods. The econometric theory thus becomes a very powerful tool for understanding of applied economic relationships and for meaningful research in economics. This paper accordingly is devoted to equip the students with basic theory of econometrics and relevant applications of the methods. The topics covered in the course include various problems faced in estimation of both single equations and simultaneous equations models. The course also covers various econometric methods applicable to different topics in economics and those needed for applied economic research. An introductory module onmultivariate methods has also been included in the course which constitutes an important tool for analysis in multivariable data in development-related studies.

Unit – I

Auto Regressive and Distributed lag Models- Koyak Model, Partial Adjust Model, Adaptive Expectations; Almon Approach to distributed- lag model; Causality tests; Granger and Sim’s Test.

Unit – II

Dummy Variable Technique- Testing Structural Stability of Regression Models, Comparing two regressions, interaction effects, seasonal analysis, piecewise linear Regression; Regression with dummy dependent variables; The LPM , Logit and Probit Models.

10-A(559)

Unit – III

Methods of Estimating Simultaneous Equation System; Indirect Least Squares (ILS), Instrumental Variables (IV) , 2SLS and 3SLS Methods. Basic idea and outline of Limited Information Maximum Likelihood (LIML), FIML & SURE Methods. Application to theory of firm – Estimation of Cobb Douglas and CES Production Functions.

Unit – IV

Time Series ; Stationarity, Unit Roots, Co-Integration, Dicky Fuller Test, Random Walk Model, Forecasting with ARIMA and VAR Models-Box Jenkins Methodology, Vector Auto Regression (VAR). Introduction to Panel Data Methods: Problems with panel data, Pooled OLS, Random effects and fixed effects models.

Basic Reading List:

Amemiya, T. (1985), Advanced Econometrics, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass.

Baltagi, B.H. (1988), Econometrics, Springer, New York. Goldberger, A.S. (1998), Introductory Econometrics, Oxford University

Press, New York. Gujarati, D.N. (1995), Basic Econometrics (2nd Edition) MC Graw Hill

New Delhi. Intrilligator, M.D. (1978), Econometric Methods, Techniques and

Applications, Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. Johnson J. (1991), Econometric Methods, MCGraw Hall Book Co.

London Kmenta J. (1998), Elements of Econometrics, University of Michigan

Press, NewYork. Koutsoyiannis, A. (1977), Theory of Econometrics, The Macmillan

Press Ltd. London Maddala G.S.(Ed) (1993), Econometric Methods and application,

Aldershot U.K. Pindyck R.S. and D.L. Rubinfield (1976), Econometric Models and

Economic Forecasts, MCGraw Hill Kogakusha Tokyo Theil H. (1981), Introduction to Econometrics, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi. Shyamala S., Navdeep Kaur & T. Arul Pragasam (2009) “ A Text book

on Econometrics Theory and Applications” Vishal Publishing Company Jalandhar.

10-A(560)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper-410 (Option-ii)

Time : 3 Hrs.


HISTORY OF MODERN ECONOMICS

(Contribution of Nobel Laureates in Economics)-II




PREAMBLE

The history of economic thought deals with different thinkers andtheories in the field of economics from ancient medieval world to the presentday. The history of economic thought is as old as human thought itself. Itclearly demonstrates the continuous development of economic ideas from thevery early times of civilization to the present day. Changes in economicthought have always accompanied changes in the economy and economicpolicy. The revised course attempts to cover different phases in the evolutionof economic ideas including the contribution of liberal economic thinkers inthe neo-liberalist phase.

Unit-I

Institutionalism: Veblen - Theory of the leisure class, Commons; Frank Knight : Theory of Profit, Risk and Uncertainty; Schumpeter : Vision of Development and the demise of Capitalism

Unit-II

Keynesianism: Principle of Effective demand, consumption function, multiplier, investment function, liquidity preference theory of interest, role of fiscal policy, uncertainty and role of expectations.

10-A(561)

Unit-III

Post Keynesian Developments :Hayek - Supply side economics : Arthur Laffer, Evans Monetarism : Milton Friedman’ Don Patinkin - An overview of the neo classical economics: Ratex-JF Muth, Robert Lucas, Sargent and Wallace.

Unit-IV

Nobel Prize Winners in Economics

Tobin, Markowitz, Myrdal (1974)

References

Blaug, M 1997, Economic Theory in retrospect, Cambridge Universitypress, Cambridge

Da Costa,G.C:Production,Prices and Distribution(1985)TMH,NewDelhi Dasgupta A.K.L1985) Epochs of Economic Theory ,Oxford Univ Press,New

Delhi. Ekelund and Hebert :A History of Economic Theory and

Method(1990)McGraw Hill Publ Co.New York. Eatwell,John, Murray Milgate ,Peter Newman(1998):The New Palgrave _A

Dictionary of Economics, Macmillan Reference Ltd. Ghosh and Ghosh; Concise History of Economic Thought, Himalaya. Gill Richard: (1972)Evolution of Modern Economics,Prentice Hall ofIndia. Hunt E.K : (:1990) History of Economic Thought, Wodsworth. Morgan M. S.(1990), A History of Economic Ideas,Cambridge UnivPress.

U.K. Oser Jacob,and S,.Brue L 1988)The Evolution of

EconomicThought,Harcourt,NY Puttaswamaiah K.(1995) :Nobel Economists-Lives and Contributions,Indus

Publ Co.,New Delhi. Roll, Eric : (1973) A History of Economic Thought, Faber, London. Seligman B.S: (1962),Main Currents In Modern Economics,Quadrangle,

Chicago 32. Serepanti E,and Zamagui Stefano: An Outline of Economic Thought,OUP. Seshadri G.B:( 1997),Economic Doctrines,B.R Publ Corp., New Delhi. Spiegel H.W. ( 1971) The Growth of Economic Thought, N.C

.DukeUniv,Durham. Vohra P. and R. Mehta: Encyclopaedia of World Great

Economists,Commonwealth.

10-A(562)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper-410 (Option-iii)



ECONOMICS OF AGRICULTURE-II





PREAMBLE

The objective of this course is to provide a detailed treatment of issues in Agricultural Economics to those intending to specialize in this area. Its objective is to familiarize students with policy issues that are relevant to Indian Agricultural Economics and enable them to analyze the issues using basic micro-economic concepts. .Unit I

Agricultural Production and Productivity

Agricultural Production- Stock and Flow Resources, Production Relationships, Resource use and efficiency; Production Functions analyses in agriculture; Factor Relationships – Isoquant and Iso Cost Line, Optimum Combination; Product Relationships – Joint Products, Competitive Products, Supplementary Products and Antagonistic Products; Diversification of Agricultural Production – Horticulture and Floriculture, Mushroom Cultivation and Processing of Agricultural Products.

Unit II Agricultural Credit

Role of capital and rural credit; Organized and unorganized capital market; Rural savings and capital formation; Characteristics and Sources of rural credit- Institutional and non institutional; Reorganization of rural credit- cooperatives, commercial banks, regional rural banks; Role of the NABARD.

10-A(563)

Unit III Development Theory and Agriculture Schultz’s Transformation of Traditional Agriculture, Mellor’s Model of Agricultural Development, Boserup Model of Agriculture Development, Hayami - Ruttan Induced Innovation Hypothesis.

Unit IV

Recent Agricultural Problems in India

Issues in liberalization of domestic and international trade in agriculture, Impact of the World Trade Organization on Indian Agriculture; Agriculture and Environment- Sustainable Development, Food Security and International Trade – Concept, Threat, Indicators and Mechanism to Food Security.

Basic Reading List

Black, J.D. (1945), Introduction to Economics of Agriculture. MacMillan, New York.

Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol.1A, Agricultural Production, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V.

Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol. 2B, Agricultural and Policy, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V.

Bruce L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.),Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol.1B, Marketing, Distribution and Consumption, Amersterdam, Elsevier Science B.V.

Bruce, L., Gardener and Gordon C., Rausser (Eds.), Handbook of Agricultural Economics, Vol.2A, Agricultural and Its External Linkages, Amsterdam, Elsevier Science B.V.

Cohen, R.L. (1948), Economics of Agriculture, Nishet, London. Dantwala, M.L. et. al (1991), Indian Agricultural Development Since

Independence, Oxford & IBH, New Delhi. Drummond H. Evan and Goodwin W. John (2006), Agricultural Economics,

Pearson Education, New Delhi. Eicher Carl and Lawrence Witt (Eds.) (1964), Agriculture in Economic

Development, New York, McGraw Hill Co. Forster, G.W. and Leoger, M.C. (1959), Elements of Agricultural Economics,

Prentice Hall. Ghatak Subrata and Ken Ingersent, Agriculture and Economic Development,

Harvestor Press Ltd., London. Goodwin, H.G. (1977), Economics of Agriculture, Reston Publiching Co. Gulati, A. and T. Kelly (1999), Trade Liberalisation and Indian Agriculture,

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Halcrow, H.G.(1981), Economics of Agriculture, McGraw Hill International

Book Agency. Meier, G.M. (1995), Leading Issues in Economic Development, Oxford

University Press, New Delhi. Metcaff, D. (1969), Economics of Agriculture, Harmondsworth, Penguin

Books.

10-A(564)

Nicholls, W.H. (1964), “The Place of Agriculture in Economics Development”, in Eicher, C. and Witt, L.(ed) 1964, Agriculture in Economics Development, Vora & Co. Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Bombay.

Ojala, E.M.(1950), Agriculture and Economic Progress, Oxford University Press, London.

Rao, C.H. Hanumantha (1994), Agricultural Growth, Rural Poverty and Environmental Degradation in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Rudra, A. (1982), Indian Agricultural Economics: Myths and Reality, Allied Publishers, New Delhi.

Southworth Herman and Bruce Johnston (eds.) (1968), Agricultural Development and Economic Growth, Cornell University Press, New York.

Taylor, H.C.(1949), Outlines of Agriculture Economics, MacMillan, New York. Additional Reading List

Bilgrami, S.A.R. (1996), Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.

Harque, T. and A.S. Sirohi (1986), Agrarian Reforms and Institutional Changes in India, Concept Publishing Company, Delhi.

Kumar, Rajesh (2010), India’s Export in Processed Food Products : Status & Potential, an Unpublished Thesis of the Department of Economics, K.U.K.

Lekhi, R.K. and Singh, Joginder (2010), Agricultural Economics, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi.

Rana, Sarita (2002), Global Marketing in Floricultural Products : Challenges and Prospects for India, an Unpublished Thesis of the Department of Economics, K.U.K.

Rani, Vandna (2004), Economics of Mushroom Cultivation in Haryana, an Unpublished Thesis of the Department of Economics, K.U.K.

Sadhu and Singh (1991), Agricultural Problems in India, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.

Sadhu and Singh (2002), Fundamentals of Agricultural Economics, Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.

Singh, Kuldeep (2006), “Indian Agriculture Trade in Pre and Post WTO Regime : A Comparative Study”, K.U.R.J.( Arts & Humanities), Vol. XL, Jan- Dec., 2006.

Soni, R.N. (1995), Leading Issues in Agricultural Economics, Arihant Press, Jalandhar.

Sundaram I. Satya (2009), Rural Development, Himalaya Publishing House , New Delhi.

10-A(565)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper-410 (Option-iv)



WELFARE ECONOMICS – II





PREAMBLE

Evaluation of normative significance of economic events and issues forms the framework of welfare economics. Many applied branches of economics such as public finance, cost-benefit analysis, industrial economics and economics of government policy use welfare economic criteria as their foundation. The paper is divided into three modules — Pre-Paretian Welfare Economics, Paretian Welfare Economics and Later Developments.

Unit-I

Pigovian welfare economics; Compensation criteria – Contributions of Barone, Kaldor and Hicks. The Scitovsky double criterion; Samuelson’s utility possibility curve; Choice Functions and Revealed Preference.

Unit-II

Value judgements and welfare economics: Bergson’s social welfare function, Arrow’s impossibility theorem; Second-best optima.

Unit-III

Divergence between private and social costs; Problems of non-market interdependence; Externalities of production and consumption; Problem of public goods; The Role of The State.

Unit-IV

Marginal cost pricing; Cost-benefit analysis; Welfare Analysis of Risky Projects; The Value of Information and Irreversible Consequences; Welfare Theory and International Trade.

10-A(566)

Basic Reading List

Boadway, R.W. and Neil,B. (1984), Welfare Economics, Basil Blackwell, Oxford.

Little, I.M.D. (1958), A critique of Welfare Economics, Oxford University Press.

Scitovsky,T.(1958), Welfare and Competition, GOERGE ALLEN AND UNWIN LTD.

Sen,A.(1982), Choice,Welfare and Measurement, Basil Blackwell. Johansson(1991),An Introduction to Modern Welfare Economics,Cambridge

University Press Additional Reading List

Baumol, W.J. (ed.) (2001), Welfare Economics, Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., U.K.

Pigou, A.C. (1962), The Economics of Welfare (4th Edition), Macmillan. Hicks, J.R. (1956), A Revision of Demand Theory, Clarendon Press, Oxford. Little, I.M.D. (1949), The Foundations of Welfare Economics, Oxford

Economic Papers,Vol. 1.

10-A(567)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper-410 (Option-v)



INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS - II





PREAMBLE

In the contemporary world with globalization and liberalization more and more attention is being given to industry. This course intends to provide knowledge to the students on the basic issues such as productivity, efficiency, capacity utilization and debates involved in the industrial development of India. The objective is to provide a thorough knowledge about the economics of industry in a cogent and analytical manner, particularly in the Indian context.

Unit-I

Industrial Policy in India – evolution and paradigm shift; Recent trends in Indian industrial growth; National manufacturing Policy 2011; MNCs, transfer of technology and issues related with TRIMS.

Unit-II Regional industrial growth in India; Industrial economic concentration and remedial measures; MRTP and Competition Act, 2002.

Development of Cottage and Small Scale industries; Recent Policy Measures.

Unit-III Industrial Finance; Sources of short term and long term finance; Industrial Financial Institutions: Role and functioning in India; Corporate securities; Ownership and creditorship securities.

Unit-IV

Structure of Industrial labour; Globalization and labour ; Gender Dimensions of industrial labour; Industrial legislation – Industrial Disputes Act ,1947 and Factories Act, 1948 . Industrial relations – Worker’s participation in management

10-A(568)

and Collective Bargaining; Exit policy and safety nets; Second National Commission on Labour Report.

Basic Reading List

Ahluwalia, I.J. (1985), Industrial Growth in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Arun Monappa- Industrial Relations,Tata Mcgraw Hill,1997. Barthwal, R.R. (2000), Industrial Economics, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New

Delhi. Cherunilam, F. (1994), Industrial Economics: Indian Perspective (3rd

Edition), Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai. C.S. Venkata Ratnam-Industrial Relations ,Oxford University Press,2008. Chadha, V. and G.S. Bhalla (1999), Industrial Development in India: The

Post Reform Scene, Kalyanai Publishers, New Delhi.

Desai, B. (1999), Industrial Economy in India (3rd Edition), Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.

Hajela, F.D. (1998), Labour Restructuring in India : A Critique of the New Economic Policies, Commonwealth Publishers, New Delhi.

Government of India, Economic Survey (Annual). Kuchhal, S.C. (1980), Industrial Economy of India (5th Edition), Chaitanya

Publishing House, Allahbad. Mishra &Puri-Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House ,2008 Reserve Bank of India, Report on Currency and Finance (Annual). Ratna Sen-Industrial Relations in India Shifting Paradigms,Mcmillan,2005 Website of Labour Ministry (Government of India)


Bains, J.S. (1996), Industrial Organization, Cheltanham, U.K. Bagchi, A. and M. Banerjee (Eds.) (1979), Change and Choice in Indian

Industry, Bagchi Publications, Calcutta. Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (1987), The Development

Process of the Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing, Bombay. Chakravarty, S. (1987), Development Planning: The Indian Experience,

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Chandra, Prasanna (1995), Projects: Planning Analysis, Selection,

Implementation and Review, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi

Harndeen, J.B. (1975), The Economics of Corporate Economy, Dunellen Publishers, New York.

Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1999), India: Macro Economics and Political Economy: 1964-1991, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Jalan, B. (1996), India’s Economy Policy, Viking, New Delhi. Kemien, M.T. and N.L. Schwartz (1982), Market Structure and Innovation,

Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

10-A(569)

Kelkar, V.L. and V.V. Bhnoji Rao (Eds.) (1996), India Development Policy Imperatives, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

Mamoria and Mamoria (2000), Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India (15th Edition), Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.

Sen, R. and B. Chatterjee (2001), Indian Economy: Agenda for the 21st Century (Essays in honour of Professor P.R. Brahmananda), Deep and Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

.

10-A(570)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper-410 (Option-vi)



FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTITUTIONS-II





Unit-I Insurance Market Meaning, Types and Principles of Life Insurance and General Insurance; Rationale for opening up of the Insurance to Private Sector, Emerging Scenario in Insurance Sector in India; Main features of Working of LIC.

Unit-II

International Finance Foreign Exchange Rate- Meaning, Types; Foreign Exchange market- Importance, Trading and Participants, International Financial and Monetary System; Working and Functions of IMF.

Unit-III

Financial Institutions Functions and Importance of Merchant Bankers, Functions and Types of Mutual Funds, Main features of Working of UTI. Meaning and Functions of NBFC’s- Credit Unions, Savings and Loan Associations, Pension Funds, Finance Company, Investment Trusts, Common Trusts Fund.

Unit-IV Regulatory Framework of Financial Institutions in India Role, Main Features and Functions of -- Forward Markets Commission (FMC), Securities and Exchange Board of India(SEBI), Pension Fund Regulatory and Development Authority (PFRDA), Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority (IRDA).

Financing and refinancing institutions in India

10-A(571)

Functions and working of Small Industries Development Bank of India (SIDBI), National Bank for Agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD), Export-Import Bank of India (EXIM) National Housing Bank (NHB).

Reading List

Bhasin, N. (2007), Banking and Financial System India 1947-2007, New

Century Publications.

Gupta,S.K , Aggarwal,N. and Gupta,N. (2005), Financial Institutions and

Markets, Kalyani Publishers.

Khan, M.Y. Indian Financial System.

Mishkin, F.S and Eakins,S.G.(2009) Financial Markets and Institutions,

(5th Edition) Dorling Kindersley.

Bhole, L.M. and Mahakud, J.(2009), Financial Institutions and Markets-

Structure, Growth and Innovations, Tata Mcgraw Hill.

Madura, J.(2006) Financial Institutions and Markets (7th Edition),

CENGAGE Learning.

Fabozzi, F.J, Modigliani, F. Jones,F.J.and Ferri,M.G.(2009), Foundations

of Financial Markets and Institutions, Dorling Kindesley.

Mishkin, (2013) ‘ The economics of Money, Banking and Financial

Markets’. 7e, Pearson Publications.

Cecchetti, S.G. and Schoenholtz, K.L.(2013) , ‘Money , Banking and

Financial Markets’ . 3rd edition. Tata McGraw Hill Company Ltd

Bhole, L.M. (1999), Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill

Company Ltd., New Delhi.

Karampal, Bodla,B.S. and Garg,M.C.(2007), ‘Insurance Management :

Principles and Practices’ Deep and Deep

Bhole, L.M. (2000), Indian Financial System, Chugh Publications,

Allahbad.

Johnson, H.J. (1993), Financial Institutions and Markets, McGraw Hill,

New York.

Machiraju, M.R. (1999), Indian Financial Systems, Vikas Publishing

House, New Delhi.

Ohlson, J.A. (1987), The Theory of Financial Markets and Institutions,

North Holland, Amsterdam.

10-A(572)

Prasad, K.N. (2001), Development of India’s Financial System, Sarup &

Sons, New Delhi.

Smith, P.F. (1978), Money and Financial Intermediation: The Theory and

Structure of Financial System, Prentice Hall, Englewood-Cliffs, New

Jersey.

Chandra, P. (1997), Financial Markets, (4th Edition), Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi.

Machiraju, H.R. (1997), International Financial Markets in India, Wheeler

Publishing, Allahbad.

Bhatt, R.S. (1996), Unit Trust of India and Mutual Funds: A Study, UTI

Institute of Capital Markets, Mumbai.

Sahadevan, K.G. and M.T. Thiripalraju (1997), Mutual Funds, Prentice

Hall of India, New Delhi.

Goss, B.A. and B.S. Yamey (1978), The Economics of Futures Trading,

Macmillan, London

Gupta, L.C. (Ed.) (1999), India’s Financial Markets and Institutions,

Society for Capital Research and Development, Delhi.

Crocker, A. (1982), International Money; Issues and Analysis, The English

Language Book Society, Nelson, London.

Niehans, J. (1994), International Monetary Economics, John Hopkins

University Press, New York.

Official websites of IMF, RBI,UTI, LIC, FMC, SEBI, PFRDA, IRDA,

SIDBI, NABARD, EXIM, NHB

10-A(573)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper- 410 (Option-vii) Time : 3 Hrs.


ECONOMICS OF GENDER AND DEVELOPMENT - II





PREAMBLE

Gender biases in societal practices and development policies have resulted in persistent gender inequalities. It is increasingly being realized that mitigating such inequalities and enhancing women’s capabilities and entitlements are crucial to the overall development of the country. This course “Economics of Gender and Development” would provide students an understanding of the nature of the economic role of women and their contribution to the national economy on the basis of a scientific and non-sexist analysis. The modules incorporated in this course provide an analysis of issues at the theoretical level and also with regard to specificity of issues prevailing in the Indian context.

Unit-I

Wage differential in female activities; Determinants of wage differentials: Gender, education, skill, productivity, efficiency, opportunity; Structure of wages across regions and economic sectors.

Unit-II Impact of technological development and modernization on women’s work participation in general and in various sectors such as agriculture, non-agriculture rural activities, small and cottage industries and organized industry.

10-A(574)

Unit-III Female activities, ecological and environmental concern: the two way relationship - Role of new technologies for helping women – Provision of information and training for simple harvesting of economic services.

Unit-IV

Review of legislation for women’s entitlements, protection of property rights, social security. Gender and development indices; Mainstreaming gender into development policies; Gender-planning techniques; Gender sensitive governance.

Basic Reading List

Boserup E. (1970), Women’s Role in Economic Development, George Allen and Unwin, London.

Desai, N. and M.K. Raj (Eds.) (1979), Women and Society in India, Research Center for Women Studies, SNDT University, Bombay

Government of India (1974), Towards Equality – Report of the Committee on the Status of Women in India, Department of Social Welfare, Ministry of Education and Social Welfare, New Delhi.

Krishnaraj, M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender, Population and Development, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Seth, M. (2000), Women and Development: The Indian Experience, Sage Publications, New Delhi.

Srinivasan K. and A. Shariff (1998), India: Towards Population and Development Goals, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

Venkateswaran S. (1995), Environment, Development and the Gender Gap, Sage Publications, New Delhi.

Wazir, R. (2000), The Gender Gap in Basic Education: NGOs as Change Agents, Sage Publications, New Delhi.

10-A(575)

M.A. 4th Semester Paper- 410 (Option viii)



ECONOMIC HISTORY OF ASEAN, COUNTRIES, CHINA, SOUTH KOREA

AND JAPAN- II





Unit – I

Contemporary Economic History: East ASEAN Economic Development, Globalization and Economic Development in East Asia; Dictatorship and Democratizations in South East Asia, South East Asia globalization and Social Change.

Unit – II

Economic Reforms and Their impact on: Agriculture, Industry and Service Sector in ASEAN, China, South Korea and Japan.Trade Development Strategies: Export Promotion versus Import Substitution in ASEAN, China, South Korea and Japan.

Unit – III

Trade, Investment and Monetary Cooperation: Forging an integrated Asia-Pacific Region. Welfare Gains from Regional Economic Integration in Asia: ASEAN and China, South Korea and Japan. Monetary and Financial Cooperation in Asia; Reducing Global Imbalances.

Unit – IV

Regional Cooperation for Energy Security: Asian Energy outlook to 2020: Trends; Regional Cooperation for Asian Energy Security; Climate change and Asian Economic Development; India’s role in Asian Economic Community; East Asia Summit, European Union, NAFTA, APEC, and their impact on Asian Economic Integration.

10-A(576)

Reading List:

‘Reshaping the Asia Pacific Economic Order”, by Hadi Soesastro, Christopher Charles Findley, 2006, 286 P.

“Institutional Balancing in the Asia Pacific: economic” by Kaithe 2009, P. 209.

“China and World Economy” by Zhouggno she hui ke Xue Yawn shi jie juia ji, 2002.

“Strategic consequences of India’s Economic Essays” by Sanjay Baru published in 2006.

“A New look at the US-China-Japan Triangle” Toward Building a Stable Framework” Asian Perspectives, Vol. 27, No3, 2003, PP 177-219 by Yoshihide Soeya, Jianweiwang and David A Weleh.

“The Economic History of Korea” by Myung soo Cha, Yeunguam University. EH. Net Encyclopedia.

“Economic Growth and Democratization in North East Asia, Part I & II.

“The Rise of China and its effectson Taiwan, Japan and South Korea” US Policy choices, Jan. 2006 Dick K Nanto.

“America and Japan Approach a Rising China” by Dan Blumenthal, Dec. 2006.

“Look East: India’s Economic ties with Japan, South Korea, China, 3 Dec. 2009.

“China, Japan and South Korea to consider Free trade Pact” Oct. 11, 2009 MYT.

10-A(577)

M.A. Business Economics

w.e.f 2014-15

SEMESTER-I

PAPER CODE

NOMENCLATURE (Compulsory)

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

MABE 101 MICROECONOMIC ANALYSIS 80 20

MABE 102 MATHEMATICAL AND STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES

80 20

MABE 103 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS ECONOMICS

60+20 20

MABE 104 MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION BEHAVIOUR

80 20

MABE 105 MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS 80 20

MABE 106 SEMINARS 50

TOTAL 550

SEMESTER-II

PAPER CODE


EXTERNAL

INTERNAL

MABE 201 MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS AND POLICY 80 20

MABE 202 FUNDAMENTALS OF ECONOMETRICS 80 20

MABE 203 ACCOUNTING FOR BUSINESS ECONOMICS 80 20

MABE 204 PUBLIC ECONOMICS 80 20

MABE 205 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 80 20

MABE 206 COMPREHENSIVE VIVA-VOCE 50

TOTAL

550

SUMMER TRAINING

10-A(578)

Each student is required to go on 6 weeks summer training in any business organisation

after 2nd semester examinations. He/she has to prepare a training report on the project

undertaken in the concerned business organisation and submit a copy of this report duly

certified by the authorised signatory from the same business organisation. This project

report is to be submitted latest by 30th november and will be externally evaluated in the

3rd semester and carries a weightage of 100 marks.

10-A(579)

SEMESTER-III

PAPER CODE


EXTERNAL

INTERNAL

MABE 301 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 80 20 MABE 302 ADVANCED MICROECONOMICS 80 20 MABE 303 SUMMER TRAINING REPORT 100 MABE 304 SEMINARS 50 CHOOSE ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING GROUPS

GROUP-I ECONOMICS OF MARKETING MABE 311 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 80 20 MABE 312 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING 80 20 MABE 313 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR AND

MARKETING RESEARCH 80 20

GROUP-II ECONOMICS OF FINANCE MABE 321 ECONOMICS OF CORPORATE

FINANCE 80 20

MABE 322 INVESTMENT AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

80 20

MABE 323 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 80 20 GROUP-III ECONOMICS OF HUMAN

RESOURCES

MABE 331 LABOUR ECONOMICS 80 20 MABE 332 ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCE

DEVELOPMENT 80 20

MABE 333 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT 80 20 GROUP-IV ECONOMICS OF AGRICULTURE

AND RESOURCES

MABE 341 AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS 80 20 MABE 342 DEMOGRAPHY 80 20 MABE 343 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 80 20 GROUP-V ECONOMICS OF TAXATION MABE 351 DIRECT TAXES-I 80 20 MABE 352 VAT AND SERVICE TAX 80 20 MABE 353 THEORY OF TAXATION 80 20 TOTAL

650

10-A(580)

SEMESTER-IV

PAPER CODE


EXTERNAL

INTERNAL

MABE 401 TIME SERIES AND BUSINESS FORECASTING 80 20 MABE 402 INDIA IN THE CONTEMPORARY WORLD

ECONOMY 80 20

MABE 403 ECONOMICS OF GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT 80 20 MABE 404 COMPREHENSIVE VIVA VOCE 50 CHOOSE ANY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING GROUPS

GROUP-I ECONOMICS OF MARKETING MABE 411 MARKETING OF SERVICES 80 20 MABE 412 INTEGRATED PROMOTIONAL MANAGEMENT 80 20 GROUP-II ECONOMICS OF FINANCE MABE 421 FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES AND RISK

MANAGEMENT 80 20

MABE 422 FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND MARKETS 80 20 GROUP-III ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCES MABE 431 CROSS CULTURAL AND GLOBAL HRD 80 20 MABE 432 ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE AND

DEVELOPMENT 80 20

GROUP-IV ECONOMICS OF AGRICULTURE AND RESOURCES

MABE 441 AGRIBUSINESS MANAGEMENT 80 20 MABE 442 AGRICULTURAL TRADE AND POLICY 80 20 GROUP-V ECONOMICS OF TAXATION MABE 451 DIRECT TAXES-II 80 20 MABE 452 CORPORATE TAX PLANNING 80 20

TOTAL

550 GRAND TOTAL = 2300

10-A(581)

MABE - 1st Semester Paper- MABE 101 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


MICRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS




Unit I

Consumer behaviour: Law of demand, Basic ideas of demand estimation and forecasting; Indifference curve approach to demand: Price, Income and Substitute effects (Hicks); Applications of Indifference Curve Analysis; The Consumer’s Surplus (Marshall and Hicks); Elasticity (Price, cross, income) of Demand and Supply and their applications

Unit II Objectives of the firm; Production functions; Law of Variable Proportions; capacity utilization; Estimation of Production and Cost functions, Break Even Analysis; Equilibrium of the firm-single and multi-product firm; Theories of costs – traditional and modern; Analysis of economies of scale.

Unit III Pricing and output decisions under different forms of market structure - Perfect Competition, Monopoly, Bilateral Monopoly, Price Discrimination and Monopolistic Competition (Chamberlin’s approach),

Unit IV Different models of Pricing- Mark up Pricing, Marginal Cost Pricing, factor Pricing, Peak-Load pricing, Transfer pricing; Oligopoly – Non-collusive Models- Cournot, Bertrand, Chamberlin, Kinked-demand curve and. Collusive models- Market sharing cartels, Price leadership models.

10-A(582)

Reading List

Jones, Trefor (2004): Business Economics and Managerial Decision Making, USA John

Keat,Paul G. and Young Philip K.Y.(1996) , Managerial Economics. : Economic Tools for Today’s Decision Makers, Prentice Hall.


Salvatore D(2006), Microeconomics-Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press

Varian, H. (2003), Intermediate Microeconomics, East-West Press. Wiley and Sons

Damodaran, Suma,( 2006:. Managerial Economics, U.K.Oxford University Press. Mansfied, Edwin (1997): Applied Microeconomics,USA, W.W. Norton and Co.

Pindyck and Rubinfeld (2002): Microeconomics, India, Prentice Hall, Archibald, G.C. (Ed.) (1971), Theory of the Firm, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Baumol, W.J. (1982), Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall of

India, New Delhi. Boyes.W and Melvin. M , Micro economics, Houghton Mifflin Company Boston

Newyork. Collel A.,Whinston and Green (2012), MicroEconomic Theory, Oxford University

Press. Da Costa, G. C. (1980), Production, Prices and Distribution, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi. Goodwin, Nelson,Ackerman and WeissKopf(2009), Micro Economics in context, PHI

Learning Private Limited. Gravelle,H.and Rees,R.(2008), Micro Economics, Dorling Kindersley. Green H.A.G. (1971), Consumer Theory, Penguin, Harmondsworth. Gupta K.R.(2009), Advanced MicroEconomics, Atlantic Publishers and Distributors

LTD Healthfields and Wibe (1987), An Introduction to Cost and Production Functions,

Macmillan, London. Henderson, J.M. and R.E. Quandt (1980), Microeconomic Theory: A Mathematical

Approach, McGraw Hill, New Delhi. Hirshleifer, J. and A. Glazer (1997), Price Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall of

India, New Delhi. Jehle Geoffrey A.and Reny Philip J (2008), Advanced Micro Economic Theory,

Dorling Kindersley (India) Kreps, David M. (1990), A Course in Microeconomic Theory, Princeton University

Press, Princeton. Krugman, Paul and Robin Wells, (2008): Microeconomics,USA, Worth Publishers Layard, P.R.G. and A.W. Walters (1978), Microeconomic Theory, McGraw Hill, New

York. Lipsey and Chrystal(2014), Economics, Oxford University Press Mankiw(2006),Principles of Microeconomics,Cengage Learning Mansfield Edwin, Applied MicroEconomics, W.W.Norton ,New York London. Sen, A. (1999), Microeconomics: Theory and Applications, Oxford University Press,

New Delhi. Sen,A.(2007), Micro Economics: Theory and applications. Oxford University Press. Varian, H. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W. Norton, New York.

10-A(583)

MABE - 1st Semester Paper- MABE 102 (Compulsory)


MATHEMATICAL AND STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES




Unit I

Arithmetic Progression (A.P.) and Geometric Progression (G.P.): Definition, sum of A.P. and G.P. series, Arithmetic and Geometric means, Application of A.P. and G.P. in solving business problems

Determinants and Matrices: Determinants of second and third order, properties of determinant, simple problems, solutions of simultaneous equations and solutions of business problems involving simultaneous equations by Cramer’s rule, Definition of Matrices over real numbers, Types of Matrices, matrix operations, Transpose of a square matrix, Inverse of a matrix through adjoint, Application of matrices in solving business problems.

Unit II

Differential Calculus: Concepts of function, Limit and Continuity, Definition of derivative, Rules for differentiation, , Derivative of a function of a function, Second order derivative, Maximum and Minimum of functions involving one variable only, Concept of partial derivative.

Integral Calculus: Rules for integration, Integration by substitution and by parts, concept of definite integral

Unit III

Correlation and Regression: Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of Correlation, Rank Correlation, Regression lines, Regression equations, Regression coefficients.

10-A(584)

Index Numbers: Uses and Types, Tests for consistency, Base shifting, Splicing and Deflating of index numbers. Probability Theory: Probability–Classical, Relative, and subjective probability; Addition and Multiplication Probability models. Probability Distributions: Binomial. Poisson, and Normal distributions; their characteristics and applications

Unit IV

Types of Data and Statistical Analysis Procedures: Univariate, Bivariate and Multivariate (only overview); Sampling:Basic concepts , Random and Non-Random sampling.

Hypothesis Testing: Procedure based on Z, t, x2 and F-test and one-way ANOVA

Reading List

Business Mathematics, and Statistics, R.K. Ghosh, S. Saha, New Central Book Agency

(Pvt.) Ltd.Mathematics for Economics –Dowling E.T. –Schawn Series, McGraw Hill, London.

Mathematics for Business studies –J.K. Thukural –Mayoor Paperbacks. Mathematics and Statistics –Goel, Ajoy and Aloka, Taxman Allied Servies

(P) Ltd.

Speigal, M. R. Theory and Prodblems of Statistics, McGraw Hill Book, London

Croxton, F. E., D. . Cowden and S. Kliein, Applied General Statistics, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.

Gupta S.C. and V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, S. Chand and Sons New Delhi.

Gupta S. C. Fundamentals of statistics, Himalaya Publishing house, New Dehlhi.

Gupta S.P. and Gupta M. P. Business statistics, Sultan chand and sons, New Delhi.

Quantitative Methods for Business and Economics by Adil H. Mouhammed, PHI, New Delhi,

2003. Taro Yamane, Mathematics for Economists, PHI, 1973.

Black, J. and J.F. Bradley (1973), Essential Mathematics for Economists, John Wiley and Sons

10-A(585)

MABE - 1st Semester Paper- MABE 103(Compulsory)


COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS ECONOMICS

Note: (i) Nine Questions will be set in all and students will be required to attempt 5

questions. (ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type questions of 2 marks spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks). (iii) For the remaining four questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2


Unit-I

Introduction to Computer Fundamentals: History and Evolution of Computers; Classification of Computers and their applications; Hardware, Software and Types of Software; Operating System- Meaning and Functions; Types of memory; Input-Output Devices.

Application Softwares: Windows based operating system; Word Processing – Document Management and Formatting; Main Features of MS Access and Presentation software.

Unit-II

Problem Solving with Spreadsheets; Spreadsheet as DBMS; Arithmetic & Geometric Progressions; Solution of Simultaneous Equation with Matrices; Mathematical, Statistical & Financial Functions; Graphical Analysis in Economics; Time-path of economic variables.

Unit - III

Statistical Processing Techniques and Methods: Summarizing and analysis of data, Descriptive Statistics; Calculation of Mean, Correlation and Regressing analysis, Estimation of Growth Rates, Trends Forecasting; Construction of Index numbers; Moving Averages.

Unit – IV

10-A(586)

E-commerce-meaning, basis, scope; Electronic Transactions and security issues; E- governance in India; Use of IT for development; Information System for a business organization; Information flow and requirements; information system design approaches; Decision Support Systems; Data mining and analytics.

Basic Reading List

Sinha, P.K. , Computer Fundamental, BPB Publications, New Delhi. Rajaraman, V. Fundamentals of Computers, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi. Parameswaranm R. Computer Applications in Business, S. Chand and

Company, New Delhi. Sudalaimuthu, S. and Anthony Raj S, Computer Applications in Business,

Himalays Publishing House, New Delhi. Goel, Sushil, Computer Application to Business & E-Commerce, Natraj

Publishing House, Karanl. Madan, Sushila, Information Technology, Taxman Allied Services, New

Delhi. P.T. Joseph, S.J. , E- Commerce : An Indian Perspective, PHI Learning ,

New Delhi. Lipschultz, M.M. and S. Lipschultz , Theory and Problems of Data

Processing, Schaum's Outline Series, McGraw Hill, New York. David Whiteley, E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies and Applications,

Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

10-A(587)

MABE Ist Semester Paper-MABE 104 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR


5 questions.

(ii) Question No. 1 will be compulsory and will consist of 8 short answer type question of 2

marks each spread over the entire syllabus (2*8=16 marks).

(iii) For the remaining four Questions, students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of

the four units (16 marks each).students will attempt 1 out of 2 questions from each of the

four units (16 marks each).

Unit I

Meaning, Nature and Importance of Management; Management Functions; Co-Ordination; Principles of Management; Major School of Management Thought: An Overview; Planning: Importance of Planning, Types of Plans, Planning and Decision Making Process.

Unit II

Process of Organizing and Control; Introduction to Organizational Behaviour in Management; Foundations of Individual Behaviour –Personality, Perception, Learning; Values; Attitudes

Unit III

Motivation; Job Design and Goal Setting; Group: Foundations of Group Behaviour; Communication and Group Decision Making; Interactive Conflict and Negotiation; Occupational Stress.

10-A(588)

Unit IV

Leadership: Power and Politics; Organizational Theory and Design; Organisational Culture: Meaning, Importance and Characteristics of Organization Culture; Organisation Change: Significance, Forces and Resistance.

Reading List:

Luthans, Fred, Organizational Behaviour, 7 th ed., McGraw-Hill, New York. Koontz, Harold, Cyril ‘O’ Donnell, And Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of

Management,Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore. Cook, Curtis, Phillip Hunsaker and Robert Coffey, Management and Organisation

Behaviour, McGraw Hill Co., New York, 2000. Griffin, Ricky W., Organisational Behaviour, Houghton Mifflin Co., Boston. Hellreigel, Don, John W. Slocum, Jr., and Richard W. Woodman, Organizational

Behaviour, South Western College Publishing, Ohio. Hersey and Blanchard, Management of Organisational Behaviour: Utilising Human

Resources, 7th ed., Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi. Ivancevich, John and Michael T. Matheson, Organisational Behaviour and

Management, Business Publication Inc., Texas. Koontz, Harold, Cyril ‘O’ Donnell, And Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of Management,

Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, Singapore. Luthans, Fred, Organizational Behaviour, 7 th ed., McGraw-Hill, New York. Nelson, Debra L. and James Campbell Quick, Organizational Behaviour, West

Publishing Company, St. Paul. Newman and Warren, The Process of Management: Concepts, Behaviour and

Practice, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi. Newstrom, John W. and Keith Davis, Organizational B ehaviour: Human Behaviour at

Work, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1997. Rendolph, Bobbitt, H., Organisational Behaviour, 7 th ed., Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Robbins, Stephen P., Organizational Behaviour, 7 th ed., Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Robbins, Stephen P. and Mary Coutler, Management, 5 th ed., Prentice Hall of India

Private Ltd., New Delhi. Sharma, R.A., Organizational Theory and Behaviour, Tata McGraw -Hill, New Delhi. Steers, Richard M. and J. Stewart Black, Organizational Behaviour, Harper Collins

College Publishers, New York. Stoner and Wankel, Management, 10 th Ed Prentice-Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi.

10-A(589)

MABE Ist Semester Paper-MABE 105(Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS


5 questions.





Unit I

Derivation of Consumer Equilibrium and Direct Demand functions with different types of utility functions (CD, CES, Quasi linear); Indirect utility functions; Duality theorems; Roy’s Identity; Shepherds Lemma; Slutsky equation; Linear expenditure system; Theory of revealed preference and index numbers; Elasticity of demand; Income elasticity & Engel curve.

Unit II

Production functions and their properties (CD, CES, Translog); Elasticity of factor substitution and curvature of iso-quants; Producers equilibrium; Duality in cost and production functions; Growth Accounting Equation; Methods for measuring productivity and efficiency.

Unit III

Price determination in perfect and imperfect competition; Baumol, Willamsons, Morris models of firm; Pricing of factors of production; Product exhaustion theorems.

Unit IV

Multi-market equilibrium Model; Partial Market Equilibrium- Static, Discrete and Continuous; National Income models (open & closed); Expected Inflation Augmented Phillips relation; Multiplier-Accelration interaction model; Growth models –Domar, Harrod, John Robinson’s Golden Age Model, Duesenberry’s Optimum Growth Model, Solow, Kaldor.

Reading List

10-A(590)

Baldani, Bradfield and Turner (2007), An Introduction to Mathematical Economics, South-Western, Cengage Learning, New Delhi.




Varian, H. (2000), Microeconomic Analysis, W.W. Norton, New York. Allen, R.G.D. (1976), Mathematical Economics, Macmillan, London. Arrow, K. J. and M. Intrilligator (Eds.)(1982), Handbook of Mathematical Economics,

Volumes I, II and III, North Holland, Amsterdam. Chung, J.W. (1993), Utility and Production: Theory and Applications, Basil

Blackwell, London. Ferguson, C.E. (1976), New-classical Theory of Production and Distribution.

Allen R.G.D. (1974), Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan Press and ELBS, London.


Jones, H.G. (1976), An Introduction to the Modern Theory of Economic Growth, McGraw Hill-Kogakusha, Tokyo.

10-A(591)

SEMESTER-II

PAPER CODE NOMENCLATURE

(Compulsory) EXTERNAL INTERNAL

MABE 201 MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS AND POLICY 80 20

MABE 202 FUNDAMENTALS OF ECONOMETRICS 80 20

MABE 203 ACCOUNTING FOR BUSINESS ECONOMICS 80 20

MABE 204 PUBLIC ECONOMICS 80 20

MABE 205 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 80 20

MABE 206 COMPREHENSIVE VIVA-VOCE 50

TOTAL

550

SUMMER TRAINING

Each student is required to go on 6 weeks summer training in any business organisation

after 2nd semester examinations. He/she has to prepare a training report on the project

undertaken in the concerned business organisation and submit a copy of this report duly

certified by the authorised signatory from the same business organisation. This project

report is to be submitted latest by 30th november and will be externally evaluated in the

3rd semester and carries a weightage of 100 marks.

10-A(592)

MABE 2nd Semester Paper- MABE 201(Compulsory)



MACRO ECONOMIC ANALYSES AND POLICY


5 questions.





Unit-I

National Income and Accounts

Circular Flow of Income in two, three and four-sector economy.

Consumption function

Keynes’ Psychological law of consumption and implications of the law; Empirical evidence on consumption function; Reconciliation of short run and long run consumption function – Absolute Income, Relative income, Permanent Income and Life Cycle Hypotheses.

Investment Theories

Investment Function; The Marginal Efficiency of Capital Approach.

Unit-II

Demand for Money

Classical and Keynesian approach (The Regressive Expectations model); Post Keynesian approaches to demand for money-Tobin (Portfolio balance approach), Baumol (Inventory approaches).

10-A(593)

Supply of Money

Measures of Money Supply; Instruments of Monetary control; Mechanism of Monetary Expansion and Contraction (Deterministic and Behavioural models).

Neo-classical and Keynesian Synthesis

The Basic IS-LM model, Extension of IS-LM model with government sector, Labour market and Variable price level.

Unit-III

Open Macro Economics

Mundell-Fleming Model under fixed and flexible exchange rates.

Theory of Inflation

Classical, Keynesian and Monetarist approaches; Structuralist theory of inflation; Philips curve analysis – Short run and long run Philips curve; Natural Rate of Unemployment hypothesis; Tobin’s modified Philips curve.

Unit-IV

Theory of Business Cycles

Business Cycle Theories of Schumpeter, Kaldor, Samuelson and Hicks; Control of business cycles – Relative efficacy of Monetary and Fiscal policies.

Macro Economic Policy

Monetary and Fiscal Policy- Targets and instruments; The Great Depression; Lags in the effects of policies; Expectations and Reactions; Uncertainty and Economic Policy; Economic Policy - Rules vs Discretion .

Reading List

Ackley, G. (1978), Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, Macmillan, New York. Blackhouse, R. and A. Salansi (Eds.) (2000), Macroeconomics and the Real World (2

Vols.), Oxford University Press, London. Branson, W.A. (1989), Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, (3rd Edition), Harper and

Row, New York. Dornbusch, R. and F. Stanley (1999), Macroeconomics, Irwrin McGraw Hill, Inc. New

York, 7th Edition. Heijdra, B.J. and V.P. Fredericck (2001), Foundations of Modern Macroeconomics,

Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Jha, R. (1991), Contemporary Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, Wiley Eastern Ltd.

New Delhi. Romer, D.L. (1996), Advanced Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New

York. Shapiro, E. (1996), Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications, New Delhi. Dernburg , T.F.and D. M.Mc Dougall, Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill International

Book Company. Frisch, H. (1983), Theories of Inflation, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.

John Wiley and Inc, USA.

10-A(594)





Ruggles R. and N. Ruggles (1956), National Income Accounts and Income Analysis Mc Graw Hill, Newyork.


Taylor, L. (1983), Structuralist Macroeconomics, Basic Books, New Longman. Turnovsky, S.J. (1977), Macroeconomic Analysis and Stabilization Policy, Cambridge

University Press, Cambridge. Veniers, Y.P. and F.D.Sebold, (1977) Macroeconomics; Models and Policy

10-A(595)

MABE 2nd Semester Paper- MABE 202 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


FUNDAMENTALS OF ECONOMETRICS


5 questions.





Unit I

Nature and scope of Econometrics; Types of Econometric Models; Nature of Regression Analysis; Classical Linear Regression Model; Test of significance of models; Functional forms of regression models.

Unit II

Nature, Tests, Consequences and Remedial Steps of problems of Heteroscedasticity; Multicollinearity and Auto-Correlation; Problems of Specification error; Errors of measurement.

Unit III

Dummy variable technique – Testing structural stability of regression models comparing two regressions, interaction effects, seasonal analysis, Piecewise linear regression, regression with dummy dependent variables; The LPM, Logit and Probit models – Applications.

Auto-regressive and distributed lag models – Koyak Model, Partial adjustment model, Adaptive Expectations; Almon’s Approach to distribute-lag models; Causality test, Granger test and Sim’s test.

10-A(596)

Unit IV

Stationarity, unit root, co-integration, spurious regression, Dickey-Fuller test, Engle-Granger test, Random walk model, Forecasting with ARIMA modelling; Box-Jenkins methodology; Panel data techniques – Random and fixed effects model.

Reading List

Gujarati, D.N. (2010), Essentials of Econometrics (4th Edition), McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.

Gujarati, D.N. (1995), Basic Econometrics (2nd Edition), McGraw-Hill, New Delhi. Pindyck, R.S. and D.L. Rubinfield (1976), Econometric Models and Economic

Forecasts, McGraw Hill Kogakusha, Tokyo. Amemiya, T. (1985), Advanced Econometrics, Harvard University Press, Cambridge,

Mass. Baltagi, B.H. (1988), Econometrics, Springer, New York. Dougherty, C. (1982), Introduction to Econometrics, Oxford University Press, New

York. Goldberger, A.S. (1998), Introductory Econometrics, Harvard University Press,

Cambridge. Hill R.C., E.G. William and G.G. Judge (1997), Undergraduate Econometrics, Willey,

New York. Kennedy. P. (1998), A Guide to Econometrics (4th Edition), MIT Press, New York. Kmenta, J. (1997), Elements of Econometrics (Reprint Edition), University of

Michigan Press, New York. Koutsoyiannis, A. (1977), Theory of Econometrics (2nd Edition), The Macmillan Press

Ltd., London. Krishna, K.L. (Ed.) (1997), Econometric Applications in India, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi. Maddala, G.S. (Ed.) (1993), Econometrics Methods and Application (2 Vols.),

Aldershot U.K. Theil, H. (1981), Introduction to Econometrics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. Croxton, F.E., D.J. Cowden and S.Klein (1973), Applied General Statistics, Prentice

Hall, New Delhi. Intrilligator, M.D. (1978), Econometric Methods, Techniques and Applications,

Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. Johnston, J. (1991), Econometric Methods, McGraw Hill Book Co., London. Chow, G.C. (1983), Econometrics, McGraw Hill, New York. Fanses, P.H. (1998), Time Series Models for Business and Economic Forecasting,

Cambridge University Press, New York. Hamonda, O.F. and J.C.R. Roley (1997), Time Series Model, Casuality and

Exogeneity, Cheltenham, U.K. Hansen, P.R. and S. Johanson, (1998), Workbook on Cointegration, Oxford University

Press, New York. Harvey, A.C. (1981), Econometric Analysis of Time Series, Phillip Allen, London. Dhrymes, P.J. (1970), Econometrics – Statistical Foundations and Applications,

Harper and Row Publishers, New York. Draper, N.R. and H. Smith (1966), Applied Regression Analysis, John Wiley, New

York.

10-A(597)

MABE 2nd Semester Paper-MABE 203 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


ACCOUNTING FOR BUSINESS ECONOMICS


5 questions.





Unit I

Basic Accounting Theory: Accounting Concept and Conventions, Double Entry System, Accounting Equation, Journal, Ledger, Trial Balance, Trading and Profit And Loss Account and Balance Sheet, Understanding the Financial Statements of an Organization with Special Reference to Companies (Requirements of Schedule VI of Companies Act.)

Unit II

Concept of Marginal Cost, Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing; Cost Volume Profit Analysis, Break-Even Analysis. Assumption and Practical Applications of Break-Even Analysis. Decisions Relating Sales Mix, Make or Buy Decisions and Discontinuation of a Product Line.

Unit III

Standard Costing and Variance Analysis : Standard Costing as a Control Technique, Setting of Standards and their Revision. Variance Analysis – Meaning and Importance, Kinds of Variances and Their Uses Computation of Material, Labour and Overhead Variances.

10-A(598)

Unit IV

Financial Statement Analysis: Tools for Financial Statement Analysis: Cash Flow Analysis, Ratio Analysis- Liquidity Ratios, Solvency Ratios, Activity Ratios, Profitability Ratios:

Reading list

I.M.Pandey, “Management Accounting”, Vikas Publications, , Noida R.L.Gupta, “Advanced Accountancy- Vol.1” , Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi Anthony A. Atkinson,Rajiv D. Banker,Robert S. Kaplan,S. Mark Young, “Management Accounting”, Prentice-Hall of India Ashok Banerjee, “Financial accounting- a Managerial emphasis”, Excel books Asish K. Bhattacharyya, “Financial accounting for Business Managers”, Prentice-Hall of India B.Lev, “Financial Statement Analysis : A New Approach”, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1978 B.M. Lall Nigam,I.C. Jain, “Cost Accounting: An Introduction”, Prentice-Hall of India B.M.Lall Nigam,I.C.Jain, “Cost Accounting: Principles and Practice”, Prentice-Hall of India C.F.Lee, “Financial Analysis and Planning: Theory and Application”, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mass, 1985 Charles T. Horngren,Srikant M. Datar,George Foster, “Cost Accounting: A managerial Emphasis”, Prentice-Hall of India Duncan Williamson, “Cost and management accounting”, Prentice-Hall of India Dutta, “Cost Accounting: Principles and Practice”, Pearson Education E.A.Helfert, “Techniques of Financial Analysis”, Richard d. Irwin Inc., Homewood, Ill. 1977 G.Foster, “Financial Statement Analysis”, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1990 H. Thomas Johnson, “Relevance Lost- The Rise and fall of Management accounting”, Harvard Business Hilton, Ronald W., “Management Accounting- Creating Value in a Dynamic Business environment” Tata McGraw-Hill Horngren, “Cost Accounting: A managerial Emphasis”, Pearson Education J Sizer, “Insights into Management accounting”, Penguin Books J.C.T.Mao, “Quantitative Analysis of Financial Decisions”, Macmillan, New York, 1971 Jawaharlal, “Cost Accounting”, Tata McGraw-Hill Kaplan, “Advanced Management Accounting”, Pearson Education Khan, M.Y., “Cost Accounting”, Tata McGraw-Hill Kulshrestha, N.K., “Management Accounting- Concepts and cases”, Tata McGraw-Hill Lynch, Richard M., “Accounting for Management Planning and control”, Tata McGraw-Hill M. Bendrey, R. Hussey, “Essentials of Management accounting in Business”, Ane Books

10-A(599)

Meigs, Robert F., “Accounting the basis for business decisions”, Tata McGraw- Hill Nitin Balwani, “Accounting and Finance for managers”, Excel Books Peter Atrill,Eddie Mclaney, “Accounting and Finance for non- specialists”, Prentice-Hall of India R. Narayanaswamy, “Financial accounting- a Managerial Perspective”, Prentice-Hall of India R.S.Kaplan, “Advanced Management Accounting”, Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1982 Robert S. Kaplan,Anthony A. Atkinson, “Advanced Management Accounting”, Prentice-Hall of India T.H.Naylor, “Corporate Planning Models”, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mass, 1979

10-A(600)

MABE 2nd Semester

Paper-MABE 204 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


PUBLIC ECONOMICS


5 questions.





Unit I

The Efficient Markets; The Problem of Externalities and their Internalisation; The Coase Theorem; Rent Seeking Costs and Political Process; Efficient Provision of Public Goods; Samuelson Model; Wagner Hypothesis; Thompson Mechanism; Clarke Mechanism; Lindahl- Wicksell Mechanism; Theory of Club Goods.

Unit II

Public Choice – Rational Voter Hypothesis; Characteristics of Majority Voting Rule; Buchanan and Tullock Model; Bowen-Black Model; Arrow’s Impossibility Theorem; Downs Model on Demand And Supply of Government Policy; Models of Bureaucratic Behaviour- Niskanen, Tullock, Breton- Brennan- Buchanan, Voting and the Leviathan Hypothesis.

10-A(601)

Unit III

Efficiency and Equity Principles of Taxation; Tax Incidence – Partial and General Equilibrium Analysis; Excess Burden of Tax And its Measurement; Burden Controversy of Public Debt; Fiscal Federalism- Tiebout Model; Theory of Intergovernmental Grants;

Unit IV

Public Enterprises –Pricing Policy of Public Enterprises; Theory of Second Best; Capacity Constraints and Peak Load Problem; Social Cost Benefit Analysis- Measuring Economic Benefits and Costs, Determining Shadow Prices, Decision Criteria, Problem of Risk and Uncertainty.

Reading list

Boadway, Robin, “Public Sector Economics”, Cambridge, Winthrop Publishers Bruce, Neil, “Public Finance”, Addison- Wesley Educational Publishers, Inc. Jones. Philip and Cullis, Jones, “Public Finance and Public Choice- Analytical

Perspectives”, Oxford University press Stiglitz, Joseph, “Economics of the Public Sector”, W.W.Norton and Company,

new York/London Rosen, H.S., “Public finance”, Tata McGraw Hill McNutt, P.A., “The economics of Public Choice”, Edward Elgar Publishing Inc. Mueller, D.C., “Public Choice- I,II,III” Cambridge university Press, Cambridge Downs, A., “An Economic Theory of Democracy”, Harper and Row, New York Musgrave R.A and Peacock A.T., “ Classics in the Theory of Public Finance”,

Mcmillan

10-A(602)

MABE. 2nd Semester Paper- MABE 205 (Compulsory) Time : 3 Hrs.


INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS


5 questions.





Unit I

Theory of International Trade

Classical Theory of International Trade – Theory of Absolute Advantage, Comparative Advantage and Opportunity Costs, Empirical testing of Theory of Comparative Advantage.

Heckscher-Ohlin Model, Factor Price Equalization Theorem, Intra Industry Trade: Emergence and Measurement; Trade under Imperfectly Competitive Markets.

Unit II

Measurement of Gains from International Trade

Measurement of gains from trade; Concepts of terms of Trade, their uses and limitations; Hypothesis of secular deterioration of Terms of trade and its policy implications for less developed countries; Effects of Tariffs, Quotas and Non-tariff Barriers (NTBs).

Trade and Growth- Trade as an engine of economic growth; Import substitution v/s Export Push; The effects of growth on small and large countries.

10-A(603)

Unit III

Foreign Exchange and Balance of Payments

Foreign Exchange Market: Meaning, Nature and Concepts; The Determination of Floating Exchange Rate; Expenditure-Switching Policies and Direct Controls; Determination of national income in an open economy.

Meaning and components of Balance of payments; Equilibrium and Disequilibrium in the Balance of payments; Process of adjustment of BOP under Gold Standard, Fixed Exchange Rates and Flexible Exchange Rates.

Unit IV

The International Monetary System and Trade Policies in India

WTO, UNCTAD, IMF, World Bank and Asian Development Bank: Functions, achievements and relevance to India.

Foreign Trade problems and Foreign Trade policies in India after liberalization; Working and Regulations of MNCs in India; FDI impact on Sectoral Growth in India; Recent Export and Import Policy of India.

Reading List

Chacholiades, M. (1990), International Trade: Theory and Policy, McGraw Hill,

Kogkusha, Japan.

Cherunilam, F. (2008): International Economics, The Tata McGraw-Hill Companies,

New Delhi. 5th Ed.

Dunn R.M. and J.H. Mutt (2000), International Economics, Routledge, London.

Kindlberger, C P (1991): International Economics, R D Irwin, Homewood.8th Ed.

Krugman, P.R. and Obstfeld, M. (1994), International Economics: Theory and Policy,

Glenview, Foresman.

Mishra, S.K. and Puri, V.K. (2012), Indian Economy- Its Development Experience,

Himalaya Publishing House. 30th Revised Ed.

Salvator, D L (2001): International Economics, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle Rover,

New York.

Soderston, Bo. (1999), International Economics, The Macmillan Press Ltd. London.

Yarbough, R.J. (1999), International Economics, International Thompson Publishing,

New York.

Bhagwati J. (1988), Protectionism, Cambridge University Press, Mass.

10-A(604)

Brahmananda, P.R. and V.R. Panchmukhi (Eds.) (1987), The Development Process of

the Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay.

Dana, M.S. (2000), International Economics: Study, Guide and Work Book, (5th

Edition), Routledge Publishers, London.

Goldsten, M. (1998), The Asian Financial crisis: causes cure and systematic

implications, Institute of International Economics, Washington D.C.

Hufbauer G.C. and K.A. Elliott (1994), Measuring the Costs of Protection in the

United States, Institute for International Economics.

Jackson, J. (1989),The World Trading System, Cambridge University Press, Mass.

Joshi, V. and I.M.D. Little (1998), India’s Economic Reforms, 1999-2000, Oxford

University Press, New Delhi.

King, P.G. (1995), International Economics and International Economic Policy: A

Reader, McGraw Hill International, Singapore.

Maggi, G. and A. Rodriguez-Clare (1998), “The Value of Trade Agreements in the

Presence of Political Pressures,” Journal of Political Economy, 106, 574-601.

Mishkin, S.F. (1998), The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, (5th

Edition), Harper Colins Publishers, New York.

Panagariya, A. (2000), “Preferential Trade Liberalization: the Traditional Theory and

new Developments,” Journal of Economic Literature, 38, 287-331.

Panchamukhi V.R. and R. Tandon (1987), Money and Finance in World Economic

Order (RIS), Indus Publishing Co. Delhi.

Panchmukhi, V.R. (1978), Trade Policies of India–A Quantitative Analysis, Concept

Publishing Company, New Delhi.

Patel, S. J. (1995), Indian Economy Towards the 21st Century, University Press Ltd.,

India.

Pomfert, R. (1988), Unequal Trade: The Economics of Discriminatory International

Trade Policies, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford.

10-A(605)

Satyanarayan, B. (1986), India’s Trade with Asia and the Far East Countries, B.R.

Publishing Corp., New Delhi.

Vanderbussche, H. and M. Zanardi (2006), “The Global Chilling Effects of

Antidumping Proliferation, “CEPR Discussion paper. 5597.

10-A(606)

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY KURUKSHETRA

(Established by the State Legislature Act XII of 1956)

(“A” Grade, NAAC Accredited)

SCHEME OF PAPERS

for

MASTER OF LIBRARY & INFORMATION SCIENCE

SESSION 2013 – 2014

Paper No.

Nomenclature Type I A Max Marks

Pass Marks

Total Marks

I Information Analysis, Consolidation and Repackaging

Th. 20 80 45 100

II Information Systems Management Th. 20 80 45 100

III Information Retrieval Th. 20 80 45 100

IV Research Methods and Statistical Techniques

Th. 20 80 45 100

V Social Science Information System Th. 20 80 45 100

VI Advanced ICT Applications in LIS (Theory)

Th. 20 80 45 100

VII Advanced ICT Applications in LIS (Practice)

Pr. --- 100 45 100

VIII – A Depth Classification (Practice) Pr. --- 50 23 50

VIII – B Advanced Cataloguing (Practice) Pr. --- 50 23 50

Total 800

10-A(607)

PAPER – I: INFORMATION ANALYSIS, CONSOLIDATION AND REPACKAGING Max. Marks: 80 + 20

Time: 3 Hours Objectives

(i) To impart to students thorough understanding of the conceptual framework of Information Consolidation and Repackaging.

(ii) To train the students with the practical skills for preparation of Information Products.

(iii) To introduce the concept of Marketing of Information Products and Services.

Note: The paper is divided into 4 Units. The examinees will be required to attempt Fivequestions in all, including Question 1, which is compulsory and selecting Onequestion from each Unit (I-IV). Question 1 will consist of 10 short Answer (2 marks each) questions (having no internal choice) spread over the whole syllabi. The Examiner will set Twoquestions from each Unit.

UNIT – I: Information Consolidation - Definitional Analysis, purpose, process and role of Information

Consolidation. - Value and benefits of Consolidation. - Packaging and Repackaging of Information. - Modes of presentation.

UNIT – II: Processing Methods and Techniques – I

- Information Products: Types and Methodology for Preparation. - Abstract and Abstracting: Types and Guidelines in preparing Abstract. - Technical Writing: Scaling to Audience.

UNIT – II: Processing Methods and Techniques – II

- Role of various specialists in Design and Development of Information Products.

- Methodology for preparation of House Journals, Newsletters, Technical Digests, Trend Reports, Reviews and related products.

UNIT – IV: Management of Information Consolidation Centres

- Management of an Information Consolidation Unit (ICU) - Concept of Marketing. - Marketing of Information Products and Services.

Books Recommended 1. SEETHARAMA (S). Information consolidation and repackaging. 1997. EssEss,

New Delhi. 2. ATHERTON (Pauline). Handbook for information Systems and Services. 1977.

Unesco, Paris. 3. DRTC Annual Seminar 18; 1981. 4. SARACEVIC (T) and WOOD (J S). Consolidation of information: A Handbook of

evaluation, restructuring and repackaging of scientific and technical information 1981. Unesco, Paris.

5. SEETHARAMA (S). Modes of presentation of information in information consolidation products. Library Science with a Slant to Document, 22; 1985; Paper E.

10-A(608)

* * * * * *

PAPER – II: INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT Max. Marks: 80 + 20

Time: 3 Hours

Objectives

(i) To develop an understanding of modern Principles of Management. (ii) To familiarise with the process of Planning and Various Types of Plans. (iii) To develop an understanding of various Organisational Positions and Techniques

of Managing Human Resources. (iv) To familiarise with the Systems Approach in Libraries and Quality in Library Functions

and Services.


UNIT – I: Management

- Concept, Definition and Scope. - Principles of Scientific Management. - Management Schools of Thought: Classical School, Human Behaviour and

Human Relation UNIT – II: Human Resource Management

- Meaning, Functions and Objectives of HRM. - Job Description, Job Analysis and Job Evaluation. - Recruitment and Selection Procedure. - Training and Development. - Motivational Patterns: Maslow’s Need Hierarchy. Herzberg’s Two Factor

Theory. McGregor’s Theory X and Y. - Performance Appraisal: Objectives, Problems in Rating, Methods of

Performance Appraisal.

UNIT – III:System Analysis and Control

- System Analysis and Design. - Work Flow and Organisational Routines. - Monitoring Techniques: OR, MIS, MBO, Network Analysis, Budgeting as a

Monitoring Techniques, Monitoring Team or Consultants. - Evaluation Techniques.

UNIT –IV:Library Planning and Total Quality Management (TQM)

- Library Planning: Types of Plans, Factors and Techniques of Library Planning

- TQM: Definition, Concept and Elements. - Quality Standards: ISO 9000 Series.

Books Recommended

10-A(609)

1. EVANS (G E). Management techniques for libraries. Ed.2. 1983. Academic Press, New York.

2. STEUART (Robert) and EASTLICK (John T). Library management Ed. 2. 1991. Libraries Unlimited, Cotorado.

3. BROPHY (Peter) and COULLING (Kate). Quality management for information and library managers. 1996. AslibGover, Hampshire.

4. JONES (Noragh) and JORDAN (Peter). Case studies in library management. 1988. Clive Bingley, London.

* * * * * *

10-A(610)

PAPER – III: INFORMATION RETRIEVAL Max. Marks: 80 + 20

Time: 3 Hours Objectives

(i) To introduce the Concept and Principles of Indexing; (ii) To acquaint with the Role and Types of Indexing Languages; and (iii) To familiarise with the Advanced Information Processing and Retrieval

Techniques.


UNIT – I:Cataloguing and Subject Indexing: Principles and Practices

- Principles of Subject Cataloguing. - Assigning Subject Headings using:

- Library of Congress Subject Headings (LCSH) - Sears List of Subject Headings. (SLSH) - Chain Procedure.

UNIT – II: Indexing Techniques

- Models: Assigned and Derived. - Pre and Post Coordinate indexing. - Trends in Automatic Indexing.

UNIT – III:Indexing Languages and Vocabulary Control

- Indexing Languages: Types and Characteristics. - Vocabulary Control. Tools of Vocabulary Control: Concept, Meaning and

Tools. - Structure and Construction of IR Thesauri.

UNIT – IV:Information Retrieval

- Search Strategies: Manual/ Machine, Feedback and Refining. - Evaluation of IR Systems. - IR Models. - Trends in IR Models. - Projects and Parameters.

Books Recommended

1. FOSKETT (A C). Subject approach to information. Ed.5. 1996. Bingley, London. 2. CHOUDHURY (G G). Introduction to modern information retrieval. 1999. Library

Association, London. 3. AUSTIN (Derek). PRECIS: A manual of concept analysis. 1984. British Library,

London. 4. RAJAN (T N). Indexing systems: Concepts methods and techniques. 1981. IASLIC,

Calcutta. 5. GILCHRIST (Alan). Thesaurus construction and design.

10-A(611)

* * * * * *

PAPER – IV: RESEARCH METHODS AND STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES Max. Marks: 80 + 20

Time: 3 Hours

Objectives:

(i) To introduce students to the concept of the Research. (ii) To provide an insight into the Research Methods in Library and Information Science. (iii) To provide an overall understanding of Statistical Techniques in Research

Operations.


UNIT – I: Research

- Concept, Meaning, Need and Process of Research. - Types of Research – Fundamental and Applied. - Types of Research Design. - Identification and Formulation of Problem. - Hypothesis: Definitions, Functions and Types - Designing Research Proposal. - Research Reporting: Structure Style and Contents. (Guidelines for Research

Reporting). UNIT – II: Research Methods

- Spiral of Scientific Method. (S. R. Ranganathan). - Historical Method. - Experimental Method. - Descriptive Method. - Survey Method and Case Study Method.

UNIT – III: Research Techniques and Tools

- Questionnaire; Interview; Observation; Library Records and Reports; Sampling Techniques

UNIT – IV: Descriptive Analysis and Interpretation

- Bibliometrics: Concept and Definition, Bibliometrics Laws: Bradford, Zipf. Lotka, Bibliographic Coupling and Citation Analysis.

- Descriptive Statistics – Measures of Central Tendency – Mean, Mode, Median.

- Tabulation and Generalisation - Graphical presentation of data Bar, Pie, Line graphs, Histograms - Sociometry.

Books Recommended

10-A(612)

1. CHARLES (H) and others. Research Methods in librarianship: Techniques and Interpretations. 1980.

2. KRISHAN KUMAR. Research Methods in Library and Information Science, New Delhi, Vikas Publishing House. 1992.

3. POWELL (Ronald R). Basic Research Methods for Librarians. 1985. 4. RAVI CHANDRA RAO (IK). Quantitative methods in Library and Information

Science. New Delhi. Wiley Eastern Limited, 1983. 5. SARAVANAVEL (P). Research and Report Writing. 1993.

* * * * * *

10-A(613)

PAPER – V: SOCIAL SCIENCE INFORMATION SYSTEM Max. Marks: 80 + 20

Time: 3 Hours

Objectives:

(i) To familiarise with the Concept, Scope, Landmarks and Research Trends in the disciplines of Social Sciences.

(ii) To develop an understanding of Social Science Information System and its Components.

(iii) To develop evaluative skills for Specialised Information Sources and Systems. Note: The paper is divided into 4 Units. The examinees will be required to attempt

Fivequestions in all, including Question 1, which is compulsory and selecting Onequestion from each Unit (I-IV). Question 1 will consist of 10 short Answer (2 marks each) questions (having no internal choice) spread over the whole syllabi. The Examiner will set Twoquestions from each Unit.

UNIT – I: Structure and Development of Social Sciences

- Growth and Development of Social Science. - Definition, Scope, Landmarks and Research Trends in the disciplines of:

- Political Science, - Public Administration, - Economics, - Management, - Sociology, - History, - Psychology, - Education.

UNIT – II: Documentary Sources

- Social Science Information System: Components. - Information Sources: Documentary and Non-documentary; Popular and

Scholarly Literature; Derived and Bibliographical Sources. - Web based Information Sources: E-journals, E-Reference Sources, Subject

Gateways, Institutional Repositories, Digital Libraries. - Study of International Encyclopaedia of Social Sciences, International

Encyclopaedia of Social and Behavioural Sciences, International Bibliography of the Social Sciences, Social Science Index, International Political Science Abstracts, Psychological Abstracts, Bibliography of Doctoral Dissertations (Social Sciences and Humanities), Statistical Abstracts India.

UNIT – III: Institutional Sources

- Institutions connected with Social Science Information Generation and Dissemination.

- Study of the activities of: ICSSR, ICWA, Indian Institute of Management - Ahmedabad, Indian Institute of Public Administration, National Council for Applied Economic Research, TISS, UNESCO, ICHR, London School of Economics and Political Science. Social Science Research Council,

UNIT – IV: Information Systems and Networks

- Planning of Social Science Research Libraries.

10-A(614)

- Evaluation of existing Information Systems and Networks in Social Sciences at National and International level: DELNET, INFLIBNET, NASSDOC, SENDOC, DEVSIS, DEVINSA, APINESS.

Books Recommended

1. WEBB (William H), Ed. Sources of information in social sciences. 2. HERRON (Nancy), Ed. Social Sciences: A Cross disciplinary guide to selected

sources. 1996. Libraries Unlimited. 3. HUNT (Elgin F) and COLANDER (David L). Social sciences: An Introduction to

the study of society. Ed. 9. 1995. Allyn. 4. LI (Tze Chung). Social science reference sources: A Practical guide. Rev and

enlarged ed 2. 1990. Greenwood. 5. VYAS (SD). Social science information in India: Efforts toward bibliographic

control. 1992. Concept, New Delhi.

* * * * * *

PAPER VI: ADVANCED ICT APPLICATIONS IN LIS (THEORY) Max. Marks: 80 + 20

Time: 3 Hours Objectives:

(i) To familiarise students with major Applications of ICT in Libraries and Information Centers and issues affecting their implementation.

(ii) To familiarise with the Networking concepts. (iii) To familiarise with the Internet, Digital Libraries and Digitisation.


UNIT – I: Library Automation

- Planning and Implementation of Library Automation. - Use of computers for In-house Operations: Acquisition, Cataloguing,

Circulation, Serials Control, OPAC and Information Storage and Retrieval. - Selection Criteria for Library Automation Software. - SOUL, LIBSYS, Alice for Windows, Open Source Software: KOHA

UNIT – II: INTERNET Basic Feature and Tools

- Genesis and Utility. - Connectivity:Dialup, Leased Line, ISDN and Cable Modem. - Protocols: TCP/IP, HTTP, FTP - Web Browsers: Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer - Services: World Wide Web (WWW), E-Mail, Search Engines, Remote Login

(Telnet), FTP, Bulletin Boards, Usenet, Social Networking Sites, Chatting and Instant Message. Internet Security.

UNIT – III: Communication Technology (Networking)

- Fundamentals of Telecommunication Technology. - What is Network? Network Media: Wires and Cables, Ethernet, Wireless

(Satellite), Hubs and Switches, Modems.

10-A(615)

- Network Types: LAN, MAN and WAN. - Topologies: Bus, Star, Ring, Token Ring, Tree and Mesh. - Network Protocols and Standards. OSI Architecture. - Network Based Services: Teleconferencing, Tele-facsimile. - Library Networks in India: ADINET and CALIBNET.

UNIT – IV: Digital Libraries

- Genesis, Definition, Objectives and Scope of Digital Libraries. - Digitisation and Tools: Techniques of Digitisation, Resolution, Imaging. - Files and Formats of documents, images, video, audio, etc. - Metadata: Role of Metadata and Metadata Types.

Recommended Books

1. ACKERMANN (Ernest). Learning to use the Internet: An introduction with examples and experiences. BPB.

2. ALBERTO LEON-GARCIA and WIDJAJA (Indra). Communication Networks: Fundamental concepts and key architectures.

3. BHARIHOKE (Deepak). Fundamentals of IT. 2nd ed. Excel Books. New Delhi. 2002.

4. CADY (Glee Harray) and McGregor (Pat). Mastering the INTERNET. BPB. New Delhi. 1996.

5. CHELLIS (James), PERKINS (Charles) and STREBE (Mathew). MCSE: Networking essential study guide. BPE. 1997.

6. COX (Ingemer J). Digital Watermarking. 2002. 7. Digital Libraries: Policy, planning and practice. Hants: Ashgate. 2004. 8. Digital Libraries and Multimedia. Boston: Kluwer, Academic Publishers. 2000. 9. Digital Libraries from technology to culture. New Delhi: Kanishka Publications.

2006. 10. Digital Libraries and use. Cambridge: MIT Press, 2003. 11. GOPAL KRISHNAN. Digital Libraries in electronic information era. Delhi:

Authors press. 2001. 12. FOROUZAN (Behrouz A), COOMBS (Catherine) and FEGAN (Sophia Chung).

Data Communication and Networking. 2nd ed. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000.

13. HUGHES (Loma M). Digitizing collection: strategic issues for the information manager. 2004.

14. JEEVAN (V K J). Digital Libraries. 2003. 15. LANCASTER (F W) and SANDORE (Beth). Technology and management in

library and information services. 1997. Library Association, London. 16. LEON(Alexis) and LEON (Mathews). Fundamentals of Information Technology.

2nd Ed. Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd New Delhi. 2009. 17. LEON (Garcia). Communication Networks. 18. PANTRY (Sheila), Ed. Building community information networks: Strategies and

experiences. 1999. Library Association, London. 19. Rajesh. Computer Networks: Fundamentals & Applications. Vikas Publishing

House. 2009. 20. TANENBAUM (Andrew S). Computer networks. 4th Ed. Prentice Hall of India

Pvt. Ltd. 2003. 21. TAX ALI (R K) PC software for Windows made simple. Tata Me Graw Hill. 22. VITTAL (N). Information technology: India’s tomorrow. 2001.

* * * * * * * * *

10-A(616)

PAPER VII: ADVANCED ICT APPLICATIONS IN LIS (PRACTICE) Max. Marks: 100

Time: 3 Hours

Objectives (i) To enable student to use various MS Office Applications; (ii) To enable student to understand the elements of Web Designing. (iii) To enable students to understand the features and use of Library Application

Software: Open Source: KOHA. (iv) To enable students to create Digital libraries.

Note:The paper is divided into 4 Units. The examinees will be required to attempt Fourquestions in all. The Examiner will set Twoquestions from each Unit. The candidates will be required to record the steps of database creation on the assigned area and steps in Digital Library creation.

UNIT – I: MS OFFICE

- MS EXCEL:Toolbars, Formatting Formulas, Database Management, Charts and Additional Functions.

UNIT – II: Web Designing with FRONT PAGE

Introduction to Front Page, Creating a Web and Web Pages, Lists and Headings, Formatting, Managing Web in the Explorer, Linking, Using Tables, Displaying Images, Getting images with image composer, Creating a consistent look for Web-using Wizards and Templates, Themes, Enhancing Design with Style Sheets, Forms, Publishing the Site.

UNIT – III: Library Automation Software Open Source Library Application Software: KOHA

- Overview of KOHA. - Installation and Configuration of KOHA. - Acquisition and Cataloguing. - Members Management and Circulation. - Reports and Backups.

UNIT – IV: Digital Library Software

- Installation, Configuration and working in Greenstone or DSpace.

Recommended Books

1. DSpace Manual, Release 1.6.2. http://www.dspace.org/1_6_2Documentation/DSpace-Manual. pdf

2. DSpace Release 1.6.2 Notes. https://wiki.duraspace.org/display/DSPACE/DSpace+Release +1.6.2+Notes

3. D'SOUZA. Web Publishing. 4. Excel Functions & formulas book. BPB Publications. 5. FALK (Bennett). The Internet basic reference from A to Z. 6. Greenstone Home page. http://www.greenstone.org/greenstone3-home 7. Greenstone Manual. http://www.greenstone.org/manuals/gsdl2/ 8. HUGHES (Loma M). Digitizing collection: strategic issues for the information

manager. 2004. 9. http://koha.org/ 10. KOHA Documentation. http://www.kohadocs.org/ 11. KOHA on Windows. http://cid-

10-A(617)

6ac4b4f2fe0a3144.office.live.com/self.aspx/Public/Koha%20 on%20Windows.pdf 12. KOHA on Windows. http://www.koha.rwjr.com/Koha_on_Windows.html 13. MANSFIELD (Ron). The compact guide to Microsoft Office professional. Tech

Publication, Singapore. 1995. 14. McCOY (John). Mastering Web design. LWB, New Delhi. 1996. 15. MS OFFICE complete references. BPB, New Delhi.

* * * * * *

10-A(618)

PAPER – VIII – A: DEPTH CLASSIFICATION (PRACTICE) Max. Marks: 50

Time: 2 Hours

Note: The question paper will be divided into Two Units: Unit – A: Colon Classification and Unit – B: UDC. Distribution of Marks and scheme of examination will be as follows:

UNIT – A: Colon Classification

Section - A

1. Four Titles will be given in this Section and the examinees will be required to attempt Two Titles.

2. Each Title will carry 8 Marks.

Section - B

1. Two Titles will be given in this Section and the examinees will be required to attempt One Title.


UNIT – B: Universal Decimal Classification

Section - A

1. Four Titles will be given in this Section and the examinees will be required to attempt Two Titles.


Section - B

1. Two Titles will be given in this Section and the examinees will be required to attempt One Title.

2. Each Title will carry 9 Marks. Syllabus: Classification of Complex Titles of Monographs and Articles by Colon

Classification and Universal Decimal Classification.

PAPER – VIII – B: ADVANCED CATALOGUING (PRACTICE) Max. Marks: 50

Time: 2 Hours

Note: 1. The paper will be divided into 3 Units.

2. All the Units will consist of TwoTitles each and the Examinees will be required to attempt OneTitle from every part.

Syllabus: Practical cataloguing of Complex Periodicals and of documents involving complicated Personal and Corporate Author Headings and Index Headings according to the 5th edition of the Classified Catalogue Code with Additional

10-A(619)

Rules for Dictionary Catalogue Code (CCC) of Dr. S. R. Ranganathan and AACR – II.

Distribution of Marks: UNIT – A: Classified Catalogue Code 17 Marks

UNIT – B: Anglo American Cataloguing Rules -2 17 Marks

UNIT – C: Cataloguing of Non-Book Material 16 Marks

- Atlas: Maps, Globe - Manuscript - Musical Works - Sound Recordings - Motion Picture and Video Recordings

Books Recommended:

1. ALA and others. Anglo American Cataloguing Rules. Revised ed. 2. 1998. 2. RANGANATHAN (S R). Classified Catalogue Code with additional Rules for

Dictionary Catalogue Code. Ed. 5. 1964.

* * * * * *

10-A(620)

DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY, KURUKSHETRA

(Established by the state Legislature Act –XII of 1956) (“A” Grade NAAC Accredited)

POST- GRADUATE SYLLABUS OF SOCIOLOGY

(Under Semester System)

Scheme of Examination (w.e.f.2013-2014 and onward)

Maximum Marks -100 Marks Theory -80 Marks Internal Assessment - 20 Marks (Division of Marks as given below)

One Test/ Seminar: 50% (For each Paper) One Class Test : 25% (One period duration) Attendance : 25% Marks of attendance will be given as under:

(1) 91 % onwards : 5 Marks (2) 81% to 90% : 4Marks (3) 75% to 80% : 3Marks (4) 70 % to 74% : 2Marks* (5) 65 % to 69% : 1Mark* * For students engaged in co-curricular activities of the University only/ authenticated medical grounds duly approved by the concerned Chairperson.

Time: - 3 Hrs.

Scheme of examination for M.A. Sociology Course

The M.A. Examination in Sociology has been divided into four Semesters spread

over two years. Every student has to pass 20 papers of 100 marks (80 Marks Theory +20

Marks Internal Assessment) each as necessary to earn the degree. The degree shall be

awarded on the basis of 2000 total marks under new scheme.

In all semesters, Three Compulsory and Two Optional papers shall be offered

to the students. However, the choice of optional paper is subjected to the availability of

teaching faculty in the Department. The paper scheme detail semester-wise is as follow:

10-A(621)

M.A. (Previous), 1st SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY

Paper No. Nomenclature Max. Marks Time Paper – I General Sociology 100 (80 Theory + 20

Int. Assessment) 3 Hours

Paper – II Classical Sociological Theory

100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper – III Research Methodology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper – IV Optional

Rural Sociology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper – V Optional

Urban Sociology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper-VI Optional

Social Anthropology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper –VII Optional

Social Psychology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper-VIII Optional

Sociology of Education 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

M.A. (Previous), 2nd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY

Paper No. Nomenclature Max. Marks time

Paper –IX Modern Sociological Theory


3 Hours

Paper – X Indian Society and Culture 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper –XI Qualitative and Quantitative Research


3 Hours

Paper–XII Optional

Sociology of Population Studies


3 Hours

Paper–XIII Optional

Sociology of Rural Development


3 Hours

Paper -XIV Optional

Political Sociology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper –XV Optional

Social Problems 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper –XVI Optional

Criminology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

10-A(622)

M.A. (Final), 3rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY (w.e.f.2014-2015)

Paper No. Nomenclature Max. Marks Time

Paper -XVII Advanced Social Theory Trends


3 Hours

Paper –XVIII Computer Applications in Social Research


3 Hours

Paper –XIX Gender and Society 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper –XX (Optional)

Industrial Sociology 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper –XXI (Optional)

Social Change and Social Movements in India


3 Hours

Paper –XXII (Optional)

Sociology of Marginalized Sections


3 Hours

Paper –XXIII (Optional)

Social Change and Development


3 Hours

Paper –XXIV (Optional)

Sociology of Religion 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper –XXV (Optional)

Practical- Practice of Computer Applications

100* ( 60 Practical note book + 20 Practical Exam and 20 Viva-voce)

1 Hours

Note: *Indicates that there is no internal assessment marks in practical paper.

M.A. (Final), 4th SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY

Paper No. Nomenclature Max. Marks Time

Paper – XXVI Sociological Concepts and Key Ideas


3 Hours

Paper – XXVII Sociology of Organizations and Human Resource Development

100 (80Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper – XVIII Perspectives on Indian Society 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper – XXIX (Optional)

Sociology of Mass Communication


3 Hours

Paper – XXX (Optional)

Cultural Studies 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper – XXXI (Optional)

Sociology of Development 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper – XXXII (Optional)

Sociology of Health 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper –XXXIII (Optional)

Environment and Society 100 (80 Theory + 20 Int. Assessment)

3 Hours

Paper –XXXIV (Optional)

Practical- Practice of Research Methodology

100* ( 60 Practical note book + 20 Project Report and 20 Viva-voce)

1 Hours

Note: * Indicates that there is no internal assessment marks in practical paper.

10-A(623)

KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY, KURUKSHETRA M.A. (Final), 3rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY

Syllabus and Courses of Reading (w.e.f.2014-2015 onward) Paper-XVII (Compulsory) ADVANCED SOCIAL THEORY TRENDS

Maximum Marks – 80+20

Time- 3 hours

Note: - The Paper setter shall set 8 questions from all four units of the syllabus giving internal choice. However, one compulsory question in addition is to be set under fifth unit based on entire syllabus. This compulsory question would comprise four questions, four marks each. Such way, the examinees have to attempt five questions in all.

Unit-I Integrative genre Social Theory-I: 1. Micro Foundation of Macro Sociology (Collins.) 2. Neo-functionalism (Jaffrey C. Alexander) 3. Social Construction of Reality (Berger & Luckman) 4. Integrative Paradigm (Ritzer)

Unit-II Integrative genre social Theory-II: 1. Duality of Agency and Structure (Giddens.) 2. Habitus and Field (Bourdieu, P.) 3. Life World and System (Habermas, J.)

Unit-III Synthesis in Sociological Theory: 1. Network Theory (Burt, others) 2. Rational Choice Theory (Coleman, J; Elster) 3. Feminist Theory (Dorothy, Patricia Collins)

Unit-IV Post Modern Scenario: 1. Decline of Grand Narrative (Lyotard) 2. Hyperreal World (Baudrillard) 3. Truth and Knowledge (Foucault) 4. Post –Feminist Theory (Judith Butler)

REFERENCES:

Adams Bert N.& Sydie, R.A. : Sociological Theory,: Vaster Publication, New Delhi; 2001), Aron Raymond : Main Currents in Sociological Thought, Vol.1 and 2, Penguin, Chapters on Marx, Durkheim and Weber. ;( 1967), De, Beauvoir, Simon : The Second Sex: Vintage, New York; (1957), Hughes, Jhon, A.Martin, Perer, W.W: Understanding Classical Sociology- Marx, J. and Sharrok, Durkheim and Weber, Sage Publication, London; (1995) Kivisto, P. : Key Ideas in Sociology (2nd ed.), 8Pine Forge Press, New

Delhi, (2004), Lash,S. : Sociology of Postmodernism; Routledge, London; (1990), Parsons Talcott : The Structure of Social Action, Vol.1 and 2. McGraw

Hill, New York. 1949 Ritzer, George, : Sociological Theory, : McGraw Hill, New York 1992. Ritzer, George, : Modern Sociological Theory, : McGraw Hill, New York; (2000), Swingewood, A. : A short history of Sociological thought; Palgrave; New

York; (2000), Seidman,S.& Alexander, J.C. : The New Social Theory Reader, Routledge, London; (2001),

10-A(624)

Taylor Steve (ed.) : Sociology: Issues and Debates; Palgrave. (1999), Turner, Jonathan H. : The Structure of Sociological Theory: Rawat

Publication, Jaipur (1995) (4th edition) Zeitlin, Irving M. : Rethinking Sociology: A Critique of Contemporary

Theory, Rawat Publication, New Delhi; (1998),

10-A(625)

KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY, KURUKSHETRA

M.A. (Final),3rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY

Syllabus and Courses of Reading (2014-15)

Paper- XVIII (Compulsory) COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN SOCIAL RESEARCH

Maximum Marks – 80+20 Time- 3 hours


Unit-I Computer Fundamentals: Introduction, Significance, Classification and Generations; Hardware and Software; Functional Components;

Virus, Printer & Scanner.

Unit-II Operating System :- Basics of MS Windows: Features, Getting started with Windows, Managing files and folders, Creating Short Cuts, Windows Customization; Basic Windows Accessories - Mouse Pointer, Control Panel Data Storage Devices- HDD, CD/DVD, USB/PEN Drive Printing.

Unit-III Basic of MS office: Creation of files, Editing of Document - Bold , Italics , Underline, Fonts type & size, Paragraph, line spacing, spelling & grammar, Insertion of Images, Tables.

MS Excel: Basics of MS-Excel, Data Entry, Graphs, Aggregate Formulas and Functions, Worksheet and Charts, Cell Editing.

MS PowerPoint: Creating & Editing of Power Point Presentation, Physical Aspects.

Unit IV Social Research Aspects & Computer:

Internet – Introduction & History, Computer Networks, Introduction of WWW & Net –Surfing, Emails. Attachments, EBooks & online Journal System.

SPSS: Introduction, Creating a Data File, Analysis- Univariate, Bivariate and Multivariate.

REFERENCES:

Balamurali, S. : An Introduction to Computer

Science: Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi; (1998)

10-A(626)

Babbie, Earl : The Practice of Social Research 10th edition, Thomson, Singapore; (2004),

Gaur, Ajay S. and Sanjay S. Gaur : Statistical Method for Practice and Research: a guide to Data analysis using SPSS, Response Books, Delhi;(2006)

Lean and Loen : Internet for Everyone: Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi: (1998),

Mattelart, Armond : The Information Society: Sage Publications, New Delhi; (2003),

Sarantakos, S. : Social Research: Palgrave, New York; (1988) Saxena, Sanjay : A First Course in Computer: Vikas

Publishing House, New Delhi; (1998),

Singhal, A. and E.M.Rogers : India’s Communication Revolution,

: Sage Publications, London; (2000),

Tesch, R. : ‘Computer Software and qualitative Analysis: A

Reassessment’, in Blank et al. (ed.), New Technology in Sociology: Practical Applications in Research and Work, Transaction Books, New Brunswick; (1989)

10-A(627)


M.A. (Final), 3rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY

Syllabus and Courses of Reading (w.e.f.2014-2015 onward)

Paper-XIX (Compulsory) GENDER AND SOCIETY


Time- 3 hours


Unit-I Sex and Gender: The Concepts; Equality and difference;

Gender as Social Construct-Socialization and Gender Role

Gender ideologies-Patriarchy and Matriarchy

Unit-II Gender Theories and Women’s Movements: Theories of Gender relations; Women’s Movements: Liberalist, Socialist, Radicalist; Eco-feminism

Unit-III Gender Issues: Women’s role in Production and Reproduction; Nature of Household work; Women’s Work and Technology; Empowerment Paradigm

Unit-IV Status of Women in India: Gender Gaps; Changing Identity; Strategies of Women’s Development- Empowerment, Welfare and Protections, Health and Education; Common Civil Code

REFERENCES:

Agarwal, B. : A Field of One’s Own: Gender and Land Rights in South Asia, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press; 1994.

Altekar, A.S. : The Position of Women in Hindu Civilization, Second Edition: P Fifth reprint. Motilal Banarasidass, Delhi; 1983

Chanana, Karuna. : Socialization, Women and Education: Explorations in Gender Identity: Orient Longman, New Delhi; 1988

De, Beauvoir, Simon : The Second Sex, Vintage, New York; 1957

Desai, Neera and : Women and Society in India. Ajanta Delhi; 1987 M. Krishnaraj. Dube, Leela et.al. (eds.) : Visibility and Power: Essays on Women in Society and

10-A(628)

Development. OUP New Delhi; 1986 Dube, Leela. : Women and Kinship: Comparative Perspectives on

Gender in South and South-East Asia.: United Nations University

Press, Tokyo; 1997 Forbes, G. : Women in Modern India. New Delhi, Cambridge

University Press; 1998 Government of India. : Towards Equality: Report of the Committee on the Status of

Women. 1974 Kapur, Promila (Ed.). : Empowering the Indian Women, Publications Division,

Ministry of Information and broadcasting, Government of India; 2001

Maccoby, Eleaner and : The Psychology of Sex Differences. Carol Jacklin. Stanford: Stanford University Press; 1975 Oakley, Ann., : Sex, Gender and Society: Harper and Row, New York; 1972 Ghadially, Rehana (ed.) : Women in Indian Society: Sage, New Delhi; 1988. Mies Maria. : Indian Women and Patriarchy: Conflicts and Dilemmas of

Students and Working Women: Concept, New Delhi; 1980 Omvedt, Gail. : Caste, Class and Women’s Liberation in India,’ Bulletin

of Concerned Asian Scholars.7 ;1975 Sharma, Ursula. (1983) : Women, Work and Property in North-West India: Tavistock, London; 1983 Shulamitz, Reinharz and : Feminist Research Methods: Oxford University Press, Lynn Davidman, New York; 1991 Srinivas, M.N. (Ed.) : Caste: Its Modern Avatar, Penguin, New Delhi:

(Leela Dube’s Article on Caste and Women). Tong, Rosemarie : Feminist Thought: A Comprehensive Introduction.

: Westview Press, Colarodo; 1989. Whelham, Imelda. : Modern Feminist Thought. Edinburgh: Edinburgh

University Press; 1997 Waters, Malcom : Modern Sociological Theory, Sage Publication, London;

1994

10-A(629)




PAPER (Optional) –XX: INDUSTRIAL SOCIOLOGY



Unit - I Definition and Perspectives: Nature and Scope of Industrial Sociology; Pace of Industrialization, De-Industrialization- Growth beyond Industrialization Major Perspectives – Marx, Weber, Ritzer (McDonaldisation)

Unit – II Politico-Economic Frame of Industry: Sectors of Economy; Factory as a System; Industrial Management Approaches – Scientific Management and Human Relation; Industrial Democracy, Growth of Slums, Environmental Degradation and Health Hazards

Unit – III Industrial Work-Force: Changing Character of Work-Force in India;

Motivation and Morale; Work Culture; Worker’s Welfare; From Collective Bargaining to Individual Negotiation

Unit - IV Industry-Society Interface: Impact of Social Structure on Industry i.e. Caste, Class, Joint Family, Kinship; Impact of Industry on Social Structure i.e. on Caste, Class, Joint Family, Kinship and on Socio-Cultural Values of Society.

Readings:- Daniel, Bell : The Coming of Post-Industrial Society, Basic Books, New York; 1973 Desai, A.R. : Rise and Development of Modern Indian Industries Perspective Chapter VII in Social Background of Indian Nationalism; Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 1978 Edwards, Paul : Industrial Relations: Blackwell Publishing; 2003 Faunce, William : Problem of Industrial Society, McGraw Hill Book Company; 1968 Giddens, A. : Sociology (4th Ed.) Polity; 2001 Gisbert, S.J. : Fundamental of Industrial Sociology: McGraw Hill; 1972 Hal.R.Arkese & : Psychological Theory of Motivation, Haralambos : Sociology: Themes and Perspectives, Bell and Hyman, London; 1985 John P. Garske : Brookes/Cole Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi; 1985 Hoselitz, B. & : Industrialization and Society, UNESCO; 1960

10-A(630)

Moore, W.E. Melvin & Jacks : New Foundations for Industrial Sociology, East-West Press Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi; 1965 Ramaswamy, E.S. : Industrial Relation in India: A Sociological Perspective, Thee Milan, India; 1978 Sheth, N.R. : Industrial Sociology in India: Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi; 1985 Vitalse, M. : Motivation and Morale in Industry, Allied Pub. Bombay; 1962 Watson, T.J. : Sociology, Work and Industry, Routledge; 1995

10-A(631)


M.A. (FINAL), 3rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY


Paper-XXI (Optional) SOCIAL CHANGE AND SOCIAL MOVEMENTS IN INDIA



Unit – I Social Change: Meaning, Dimensions, Types; Endogenic and Exogenic factors; Role of Innovation in Socio-Economic Change

Unit – II Contemporary Indian Social Changes: Modernization, Westernization, Sanskritization, Secularization, Globalization.

Unit – III Social Movements: Concept, Elements, Classification and Theories.

Unit – IV Traditional and New Social Movements in India:

Traditional Movements - Reform, Tribal and Peasant Movements

New Age Movements – Ecological, Women, Backward Class and Dalit

Movements; Identity Movements.

REFERENCES:

Albrow, Martin & Elizabeth King : Globalisation, Knowledge and Society, Sage: London; (Ed.),(1990),

Banks, J.A. : The Sociology of Social Movements: Macmillan, London; (1972)

Desai, A.R. Ed. : Peasant Struggles in India: Oxford University Press, Bombay; (1979),

Dhanagare, D.N., : Peasant Movements in Indian 1920-1950:O.U.P, Delhi;(1983), Gore, M.S., : The Social Context of an Ideology: Ambedkar’s Political

and Social Thoughts (New Delhi: Sage); (1993), Harlambos and Holborn : Sociology: Themes and Perspectives 5th Edition, Harper

Collins Pub. London ;( 2000), Nash, J.(ed.) : Social Movements: an anthropological reader, Blackwell

Publishing, Oxford ; (2005),

10-A(632)

Oomen, T.K., : Protest and Change: Studies in Social Movements: Sage Publication , Delhi; (1990), Rao, M.S.A., : Social Movements in India: Manohar; New Delhi; (1979) Rao, M.S.A., : Social Movements and Social Transformation:

Macmillan, Delhi; (1979),

Singh, K.S., : Tribal Movements in India: Manohar, New Delhi; (1982), Selliot, Eleanor, : From Untouchable to Dalit: Essays on the Ambedkar Movement: Manohar, New Delhi; (1995) Oommen, T.K., : (Charisma, Stability and Change: An Analysis of

Bhoodan Grandan Movement: Thomas Press, New Delhi; (1972),

Seidman,S.& Alexander, J.C. : The New Social Theory Reader, Routledge, London; (2001), Shah, Ghanshyam, : Protest Movements in two Indian States.: Ajanta, New

Delhi; (1977) Shah, Ghanshyam, : Social Movements in India; a review of the Literature:

Sage, Delhi; (1990), Shah, Nandita, : The Issues at Stake : Theory and Practice in the

Contemporary women’s movements in India, :Kali for Women, New Delhi; (1992),

Shiva, Vandana, : Ecology and the Politics of Survival : Sage, New Delhi; (1991),

10-A(633)




Paper- XXII (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF MARGINALIZED SECTIONS


Time- 3 hours


Unit – I Marginalization: Meaning, Exclusion-Inclusion Perspective; Marginalized Groups—Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes, Minorities, Women and other Social Isolates.

Unit – II Conditions and Characteristics of Marginalization: Ideology of Marginalization, Dependency; Caste, Class and Power Perspectives; Sustainment of Poverty.

Unit – III Reform and Protest Movements: Social Reform movements and

Underprivileged Classes; Dalit Movements, Tribal Movements, Women’s Movements; Subaltern Movements.

Unit –IV Affirmative Action: Inclusive Policies for Scheduled Caste, Scheduled Tribes, Other Backward Classes; Welfare of Religious Minorities and Women.

REFERENCES:

Ambedkar, B.R. : The Untouchable Who Were They and Why They Became Untouchable,: Amrit Book, Delhi: (1949),

Beteille Andre, : Social Inequality,: Penguin Book,. London; (1975), Gore, M.S. : The Social Context of an Ideology; The Social and Political

Thought of Babasahab Ambedkar: Sage Publication, Delhi; (1993),

Gupta, Dipankar : Social Stratification, Oxford University, Press. New Delhi,; (1991), Ghadially, Rehana : Women in Indian Society. Sage. New Delhi; (ed.) (1988), Issacs, Harold : Deprived Castes and their Strength for Equality: Ashish

Publishing House, Delhi; (1962). Jogdand, P.G. : New Economic Policy and Dalits, Rawat Publication. Jaipur; (2000),

10-A(634)

Lynch, Owen, M. : The Politics of Untouchability; Social Mobility and Social Change in a City of India: National Publishing House, Delhi; (1969).

Mathew Joseph : Ideology, Protest and Social Mobility: Case Study of Mahars and Pulayes.: Inter-India Publication, Delhi; (1986).

Omvedt, Gail. : ‘Caste, Class and Women’s Liberation in India,’ Bulletin of Concerned Asian Scholars.7; (1975),

Omvedt Gail : Dalits and the Democratic Revolution,: Sage Publications,Delhi; (1999), Oomen, T.K. : Protest and Change: Studies in Social Movement, Sage

Publication, Delhi; (1990), Pimpley, P.N.& : Struggle for Status,: B.R. Publishing House, Delhi;1985 Sharma, Satish Shah, Ghanshyam : Social Movement in India: A Review of Literature In India,: Sage Publication. Delhi; (1990) Upadhyaya, H.C. : Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe in India : Anmol Publication. Delhi; (Ed.) (1991). Zelliot, Eleanor : From Untouchable to Dalit: Essays on the Ambedkar Movement: Manohar Publication, New Delhi; (1995), Guha, Ranjit : Sub-altern Studies, Oxford, India Year Book : Yearly Publication, Govt. of India

10-A(635)




Paper-XXIII (Optional) SOCIAL CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT



Unit – I Social Change: Concept and Characteristics; Sources, Forms and Forces; Resistance to Change.

Unit – II Theories and Patterns of Change: Linear, Cyclical, Fluctuatory; Unpatterned Change; Conflict, Historical, and Cultural Lag Theory

Unit – III Development and Underdevelopment: Concepts, characteristics; Varieties of Development–Human Development; Social Development, Economic Development; Sustainable Development

Unit – IV Theories of Development and Underdevelopment: Modernization, Dependency and the World System; Globalization and Liberalization; Barriers and Breakdowns in Development,

REFERENCES:

Appadurai, Arjun. : Modernity at Large Cultural Dimensions of Globalization, OU P, New Delhi; 1997

Bernd, Hamns & : Sustainable Development and Future of Cities, Intermediate Pandurang K. Mutagi Technology Publication, UNSECO; 1998 Desai, A.R. : India’s Path of Development: A Marxist Approach Popular

Parkashan. Bombay; 1985(Chapter 2). Dube, S.C. : Modernization and Development: The Search for Alternative

Paradigm, Vistaar Publication, New Delhi; (1988), Dube, S.C. : Vikas Ka Samajshastra, Vani Parkashan, New Delhi; (2000), Harrison, D. : The Sociology of Modernization and Development. New

Delhi: Sage.; 1989. Magdoff, Harry : Imperialism and Globalization, Cornerstone Publications, Kharagpur; (2002), Moor, Wilbert and : Social Change: Prentice-Hall (India) New Delhi; (1967),

10-A(636)

Robert Cook Sharma, SL : “Criteria of Social Development”, Journal of Social Action. Jan-Mar; (1980). N. Long : An Introduction to the Sociology of Rural Development,

Tavistock Publications; London; (1977), Sharma, SL : Development: Socio-Cultural Dimensions. Rawat, Jaipur: (1986), Srinivas, M.N. : Social Change in Modern India: University of Berkley, Berkley; (1966), Symposium on Implications : Sociological Bulletin. Vol.44. (Articles by Mathew, of

Globalization. Panini & Pathy); UNDP. Sustainable Development. New York: OUP; (1995) World Bank. : World Development Report. New York; (1995) Kiely, Ray and Phil Marfleet : Globalization and the Third World.: Routledge, London. ;(eds).(1998), Wallerstein Immanue, : The Modern World System. OUP, New York, (1974), World Commission on : Our Common Future. . (Brundland Report). Environment and Development OUP, New Delhi; (1987),

10-A(637)


M.A. (Final), 3rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY Syllabus and Courses of Reading (w.e.f.2014-2015 onward)

Paper-XXIV (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION


Time- 3 hours


Unit-I Religion: Definition, Functions and Dysfunctions; Fission Tendencies- Sect and Cults; Religion and Science; Scientology

Unit-II Perspectives on Religion: Frazer, Durkheim, Marx and Weber; New Religious Movements;

Unit-III Conceptual Categories: Spiritualism, Divinity, Transcendentalism, Secularization; Clash of Civilizations

Unit-IV Religion of India: Orientalism v/s Occidentalism; Religious Demography; Religious Identity and Conflict; Religion and Politics

REFERENCES:

Baird, Robert D. (ed.) : Religion in modern India. Manohar, Delhi; (1995), (3rd edition).

Clarke, P.B., : New Religious Movement: An introduction in Ed. S. Sutherland, et al. The World’s Religion: Routledge pp. 907-11; (1988)

D’Souza, Lila, : The Sociology of Religion: A historical review, Rawat Publications, N. Delhi; (2005)

Dube, S.C. : India Society, National Book Trust, New Delhi; 1990

Durkheim, Emile : The Elementary Forms of Religious Life, Free Press, New York ;( 1965)

Giddens, A. : Sociology 4th Edition, Polity Press; (2001)

10-A(638)

Hadden, J.K. : “Challenging Secularization Theory” in A. Giddens,

Sociology, Polity Press; (1997)

Jones, Kenneth W. : Socio-religious reform movements in British India

(The new Cambridge history of India III-1). Hyderabad:

Orient Longman.

Johnson, H.M. : Sociology: a systematic introduction, Allied Publishers

Madan, T.N. (ed.). : (enlarged edition). Religion in India:

Oxford University Press, New Delhi.; (1992)

Majumdar, H.T. : India’s religious heritage,: Allied, New Delhi; (1986),

Roberts, Keith A. : Religion in sociological perspective,: Dorsey

Press, New York; (1984)

Shakir, Moin (ed.). : Religion, State and politics in India: Ajanta Publications,

Delhi; (1989)

Turner, Bryan S. : Religion and social theory. London: Sage: (1991), (2nd edition).

Ghurya, G.S. : Caste and Race in India, Popular Parkashan,1932

10-A(639)




Paper-XXV (Optional) PRACTICAL- PRACTICE OF COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

Maximum Marks – 100*

Time- 1 hours

Note: This practical paper consists of two parts A and B. Part A consists of ten practical

topics. The evaluation will be based on practical note book on six topics (ten marks each)

out of total ten topics. In Part B a practical will be allotted to a candidate during

examination and evaluated on the basis of performance in practical having 20 marks and

Viva-voce of 20 marks.

Part-A 60 marks (List of Practicals)

1. Introduction to Computer, its various components and its functions.

2. Operating Systems- Installation and its features.

3. Major Software Applications used in Social Research.

4. Anti Virus Utilities.

5. Microsoft Office and Practice of Typing.

6. MS Excel.

7. Preparation of Power Point Presentation.

8. Internet and E-mailing.

9. Downloading, Editing, Scanning and Printing.

10. E-books and Online Journals.

Part- B 40 marks

1. Practical Examination - 20 marks

2. Viva-voce - 20 mark

Note: * indicates that there is no internal assessment marks in practical paper.

10-A(640)




Paper – XXVI (Compulsory) SOCIOLOGICAL CONCEPTS AND KEY IDEAS


Time- 3 hours


Unit: I Globalization-Glocalization, Americanization, Easternization, World Capitalistic System

Unit: II Civil Society, Public Sphere, Multi-culturalism, Radical Modernity

Unit: III Global Society, Network Society, Knowledge Society, Risk Society.

Unit: IV Identity, Ideology, Simulacrum, Imagined Communities, New Citizenship

REFERENCES:

Anderson, B. : “Imagined Communities” in Theory Reader, Seidman, S. : Routledge, London; (2001), Barker, Chris &. : Cultural Studies and Discourse Analysis, Sage Galasinksi, D Publication, New Delhi; (2001), Bell, Daniel : The Coming of Post Industrial Society, Basic Books, New

York; (1973) Churton, Mell : Theory and Method, Macmillan, London; (2000), Derek, Layder Understanding Social Theory, IInd Edition, Sage Publication,

London; (2006), Harlambos, M. : Sociology: Themes and perspectives; OPU New Delhi; (1998), Houghes, Christina : Key Concepts in Feminist Theory and Research,Sage Pub.

London; (2002)

10-A(641)

Giddens, Anthony : Capitalism & Modern Social Theory ; Cambridge University Press, Cambridge; (1996),

Jones, Pip : Introducing Social Theory: Polity Press, Cambridge; (2003), Kivisto, P. : Key Ideas in Sociology (2nd ed.), 8Pine Forge Press, New

Delhi; (2004), Lash, S. : Sociology of Postmodernism: Routledge, London; (1990) Lemert, Charles : Social Theory: The Multicultural and Classic Readings: Rawat Publications. Jaipur; (2004), Lyotard, J.F. : Post Modern Condition in Ed. by Seidman,S.& Alexander, J.C., :The New Social Theory Reader: Routledge,London; (2001), Ritzer, George, : Modern Sociological Theory,New York: McGraw Hill.; (2000) Ritzer, George The McDonaldisation of Society 5, Pine Forge Press, New Delhi.; Rhoads, John K. : Critical Issues in Social Theory, Renn State Press; (1991), Seidman, S.& Alexander, J.C.:The New Social Theory Reader, Routledge, London; (2001), Slattery, M. : Key Ideas in Sociology Nelson Thornes Ltd.UK; (2003) :The Polity Reader in Social Theory; Polity Press; (1994) Toffler, Alwin : Future Shock, Bentum Books, New York; (1971), Turner, J.H. : The Structure of Sociological Theory: Rawat Pub , Jaipur; (1995)

10-A(642)




Paper- XXVII (Compulsory) Sociology of Organizations and Human Resource Development



Unit-I Industrial Revolution and Growth of Formal Organisations; Corporatization; Theories of Modern Organization-Rational Bureaucracy (Max Weber), Informal Process in Organization (Blau, P.M.); Power and Compliance (Etzioni); Fordism and Post-Fordism.

Unit-II Organizational Behaviour: Organization Man, Organizational Environment, Organizational Leadership, Goal Commitment and Goal Displacement; Role of incentive and Punishment

Unit-III Human Resource Development: Concept and Meaning; Importance of Human Resource; Component Concepts of Human Resource--Human Capital, Social Capital; Education and Human Resource Development

Unit-IV Human Resource Management and Practice in India: Recruitment Principles, Training, Human Resource Maintenance; Grievances Redressal

REFERENCES:

Abha & Anil Chaturvedi : The Sociology of Formal Organizations, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.; (1995), Agarwal, R.D : Dynamics of labour Relations in India, A book Readings:

Tata Mc Graw Hill; (1972) Denis, Pym : Industrial Society: Social Sciences in Management, Penguin Books, Paper Back; (1968) E.V.Schneider : Industrial Sociology, :Second Edition,: McGraw Hill,NewYork.; (1969), Etzioni, A. : Modern Organizations,:Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi;(1987), F. William : Readings in Industrial Sociology : Appleton Century Books;(1967) H.C.Gandhi : Industrial Productivity and Motivations: Asia Publishing. House, Bombay. (1961), Jean, Fleat and : Sociology of Works in Industry: Collier

10-A(643)

John F. Goldthrope Macmillan Ltd; (1971), K.K.Sen : Indian Labour Legislation and Industrial Laws : The World Press Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta; (1968), Karnik, VB : Indian Trade Union: A survey : Popular Parkashan, Mumbai;(1970), Laxamanna, C (et al) : Workers Participation and Industrial Democracy: Global

Perspective: Ajantha Publications, New Delhi; (1990) N.R. Sheth : The Social Framework of an Indian Factory, Oxford University Press; (1968), Philip Hancock and : Work Post Modernism and Organization : Sage Publication, Melissa Taylor New Delhi; (2001), Ramaswamy, E A, : Industry and labour: New Delhi: OUP; (1988) Ramaswamy, E A : Industry relation in India, New Delhi; (1978) Watson, K Tony, : Sociology, work and Industry, Routledge Kegan Paul;(1995) Weber, Max : Theory of Social and Economic Organization: The Free Press, New York; (1997)

10-A(644)

KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY KURUKSHETRA M.A. (Final), 3rd SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY


PAPER – XXVIII (Compulsory): PERSPECTIVES ON INDIAN SOCIETY



Unit - I Text View/Indological Approach -- G.S. Ghurye, Louis Dumont

Unit – II Structural-Functional View: -- M.N. Srinivas, S.C. Dube

Unit – III Marxian Perspective: -- D.P. Mukerjee, A.R. Desai

Unit – IV Subaltern Perspective: -- B.R. Ambedkar, David Hardiman

Readings:-

Atal, Yogesh : Indian Sociology from Where to Where Rawat Publication, New Delhi; 2003 Ambedkar, B.R. : The Untouchable Who Were They and Why They Became Untouchable: Amrit Book, Delhi: (1949), Desai, A.R. : Rural Sociology in India: Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1996 Desai, A.R. : Rural India in Transition: Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1979 Dube, S.C. : Indian Village, Routledge, London; 1967 Dhanagre, D.N. : Themes and Perspective in Indian Sociology, Rawat Publication,

Jaipur; 1993 Dumont, Louis : Homo Hierarchicus: The caste System and its Implications, Vikas Pub., New Delhi; 1970 Ghurye, G.S. : Caste and Race in India Popular Prakashan, Bombay; 1969 Hardiman, D. : Feeding the Bania: Peasants ans Usurers in Western India, Oxford University Press; 1996 Hardiman, D. : The Coming of the Devi: Adivasi Assertion in Western India,

10-A(645)

Oxford University Press; 1987 Marriot, M. : India Through Hindu categories, Sage Publication, New Delhi; 1990 Mendalbaum, G. : Society in India: (Vol.I & II), Popular Prakashan, Bombay. Momin, A.R. : The Legacy of G.S. Ghurye: A Centennial Festschrift, Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 1996 Mukerjee, D.P. : Indian Culture: A Sociological Study: Roopa & Sons, Delhi Oommen, T.K. & : Indian Sociology: Reflections and Introspections, Mukerjee, P.N. Popular Parkashan, Bombay; 1986 Singh, Y. : Modernization of Indian Tradition, Thomson press, Faridabad; 1973 Singh, Y. : Indian Sociology: Social Conditioning and Emerging Concerns, Vistaar Pub., Delhi; 1986 Srinivas, M.N. : India’s Village, Asia Publishing House, Bombay; 1960 Surinder S. Jodhka (ed.): Village Society, Orient Black Swan, Delhi, 2012

10-A(646)

KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY, KURUKSHETRA M.A. (Final), 4th SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY


Paper- XXIX (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF MASS COMMUNICATION



Unit – 1 Communication: Concept, Basic Model and Types; Varieties of Communication--Developmental, Corporate, and Political Communication

Media Studies Methods –Content Analysis, Surveys and Ethnographic Method

Unit – II Mass Communication: Meaning, Features and Functions; Means of Mass Communication; Media Audience; Mass Media effects on Youth and Children

Unit – III Mass Media and Media Criticism: Culture Industry (Adorno), Popular Culture (Braudrillard) vis-à-vis High/Elite Culture; Globalization of Culture and Media Imperialism

Unit – IV Communication and Development: Communication Infrastructure in India; Developmental Role of Communication; Innovation and Diffusion; Mass Communication Dysfunctions – Digital Divide; Cultural Hegemony

REFERENCES:

Adorno, T. : Culture Industry, Routledge, New Delhi; (2001), Appadurai, Arjun : Modernity at large: Cultural Dimension of Globalization,

New Delhi, Oxford University Press; (1997), Blumber, J.G. and E. Katz : Mass Communication: Sage Publications, London ;(1974), Bronsius, C. and M. Butcher : Image Journey – Audio Visual Media and Cultural Change in India,:

Sage Publications, Delhi; (1999),(ed.). Breckenridge, C. : Public Culture in Contemporary India. Consuming Modernity Curran, J and M. Gurvitch, : Mass Media and Society (London : Edward Arnold) ; eds

(1991),: Gunaratne, S. : Handbook of the Media in Asia: Sage, London); 2000, eds. Hall, Stuart. : Culture, Media, Language, Routledge, 1980 Johnson, Kirk : Television and Social Change in Rural India: Sage, London; (2000),

10-A(647)

Joshi, P.C. : Sanskriti, Vikas aur Sanchar Kranti, GranthShilpi, New.Delhi; (2001), Klaus Bruhn, J. : A Handbook of Media Research: Qualitative and Quantitative Methodologies, Routledge, N. Delhi; (2005), Kumar, Kewal : Mass Communication: Jaico, Bombay; (1991), Lerner, Daniel : The Passing of Traditional Society: Free Press,

New York; (1958) Manuel, P., : Cassette Culture: Popular Music and Technology in North India; (1998) Mcquail, Dennis : Mass Communication Theory: Sage PublicationsLtd, New Delhi; (2005) Mitra, A. : Television and Popular Culture: Sage Publications, Delhi; (1993) Melkote, Srinivas, R. : Communication for Development in the third and H. Leslie World, Sage Publication, New Delhi ; (2004) Robertson, R. : Globalization, Social Theory and Global Culture: Sage, London; (1992). Schramn, Wilbur : Mass Media and National Development, Harper and Raw, New York; 1973 Singh, Yogendera : Cultural Change in India, : Rawat Publications, Jaipur; (2000), Singhal, A. and E.M. Rogers: India’s Communication Revolution,: Sage Publications, London; 2000 Schiller, Herbert translated : Sanchar Madhyam aur Sanskritic by Singh, Ram Kavinder

Varchasav; Granth Shilpi, Delhi; (2002), Snow, R.P. : Crating Media Culture, : Sage Publications, London;

(1983). Tester, Keith : Media, Culure; (1994),

10-A(648)

KURUKSHETRA UNIVERSITY, KURUKSHETRA M.A. (FINAL), 4th SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY

Syllabus and Courses of Reading (w.e.f.2014-2015 onward) Paper XXX (Optional) Cultural Studies


Time- 3 hours


Unit – I Cultural Studies: Emergence; Meaning, Nature and Scope; Place of Cultural studies in social science and Humanities

Unit – II Cultural Studies Perspectives: Contribution of Symbolic Interactionism, Critical School, Structuralism, Post Structuralism/Postmodernism

Unit – III Key concepts and Methods in Cultural studies:

Identity, Representation, Ideology, Text; Sites of Cultural Studies Methods of Cultural Studies- Ethnographic, Anthropological, Discourse Analysis, Semiotics

Unit – IV Production and consumption of Culture: Production of meanings and signification; Production of popular culture, Post-Modern Culture.

Reference:

Rolland Barthes : Mythologies: Vintage, Jonarthan Cape; 2000/1972

Gillian Rose : Visual Methodologies: An Introduction to the interpretation of visual material (IInd Ed.)

Daniel Chandler Semiotics basics: Routledge, London; 2002

Gary Hall : New Cultural Studies. : Adventures in Theory

and Clare, Birchall

Jeremy Volentine : Cultural Studies and Post Marxism (Ch.3) in New Cultural Studies, Sage publication, New Delhi; 2007

Steve Taylor : Sociology: Issue and debates: Palgrave; 1999

Swingwood , Alan : A Short history of Sociological theory; Palgrave; (3rd Ed.) 2000.

10-A(649)

Barkar, Chris & : Cultural Studies and Discourse Analysis: A dialogue on

Dariusz, Golasinski Language and Identity: Sage Publication, New Delhi; 2001

Nayar, K, Pramod : Literary Theory Today: Asia Book Club, New Delhi.

Lemert , Charles (Ed.) : Social Theory : The Multicultural & Classic Readings;

Rawat Publication; (2nd Ed.)1999.

John Scott and : Dictionary of Sociology: Oxford University Press; Garder Merdull 2009(Revised Ed.)

10-A(650)




PAPER – XXXI: SOCIOLOGY OF DEVELOPMENT


Time- 3 hours


UNIT-I Development : Concept and indicators; Variants - Economic Development, Social Development, Human Development, Sustainable Development; Less Developed countries; Stages in Development

UNIT-II Theories of Development: Modernization, Dependency and World system, Globalization-Glocalization; Paths of Development-Capitalistic, Socialistic, Gandhian.

UNIT-III Social Structure and Development: Socio-Cultural impediments to Development; Idea of Equal Opportunity and inclusive Development; Break downs in Development--Environmental Crises, Inequalities in Development.

UNIT-IV Agencies, experiences in Development: Role of NGOs, Public Private

Participation, Foreign Direct Investment (FDI), Development Infrastructure; Experiences of Development- India, China, Bangladesh; GDP v/s Equality Approach; Human Happiness Index

Reference

Appadurai, Arjun. : Modernity at Large Cultural Dimensions of Globalization. Oxford University Press, New Delhi; 1997

Bernd, Hamns & : Sustainable Development and Future of Cities,

Pandurang K. Mutagi Intermediate Technology Publication, UNSECO; 1998

10-A(651)

Dereze, Jean and : India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity. OUP, New Delhi;

Amartya Sen. (1996),

Desai, A.R. : India’s Path of Development: A Marxist Approach Popular Parkashan.

Bombay; 1985(Chapter 2).

Dube, S.C. : Modernization and Development: The Search for Alternative Paradigm,

Vistaar Publication, New Delhi; (1988),

Dube, S.C. : Vikas Ka Samajshastra, Vani Parkashan, New Delhi; (2000),

Giddens, Anthony. : The Consequences of Modernity: Polity Press, Cambridge; (1990),

Harrison, D. : The Sociology of Modernization and Development. New Delhi: Sage.;

1989.

Myrdal, G. : In Shanin, Theodor (Ed.), Peasant and Peasant Societies, Penguin; 1966

Sharma, SL : Criteria of Social Development, Journal of Social Action. Jan-Mar; 1980

N. Long : An Introduction to the Sociology of Rural Development, Tavistock Publications; London; (1977),

Sharma, SL : Development: Socio-Cultural Dimensions. Rawat, Jaipur: 1986. Srinivas, M.N. : Social Change in Modern India. University of Berkley, Berkley; 1966.

Symposium on Implications : Sociological Bulletin. Vol.44; UNDP. Sustainable Development. New York: OUP; (1995)

World Bank. : World Development Report. New York; (1995)

Kiely, Ray and Phil Marfleet : Globalization and the Third World. Routledge, London. ; 1998.

Wallerstein Immanue, : The Modern World System. OUP, New York, (1974),

World Commission on : Our Common Future. . (Brundland Report).

Environment &Development OUP, New Delhi; (1987),

10-A(652)




Paper-XXXII (Optional) SOCIOLOGY OF HEALTH


Time- 3 hours


Unit-I Sociology of Health: Meaning and scope; Dimensions of Human Health; Social Perspective on Health and Illness; Self Concept and Health.

Unit-II Basic Concepts: Health, Disease, Sick role, Health Care, Health

Socialization, Health Social Movements; Medicalization of Society.

Unit-III Distributional aspects of Health and Disease: Caste, Class, Gender,

Occupational Groups, Rural and Urban variations; Life-styles and Diseases.

Unit-IV Health Care and Health Care System in India: Carrying Capacity of

Health Institutions; Health Programmes in India, Health Insurance Schemes; National Rural Health Mission; WHO activities

REFERENCES:

Albert, Gary L. and Fitzpatrick.R. : Quality of Life in Health Care: Advances in Medical Sociology: Jai Press, Mumbai; (1994)

Bloom, S.W. : The Doctor and His Patient: Free Press, New York ;( 1963)

10-A(653)

Conrad, Peter : The Medicalization of Society: On the Transformation of Human Conditions into Medical Disorders, John Hopkins University Press; (2007)

Dingwal, Robert : Aspects of Illness,: Martin Press, London; (1976)

Dutt, P.K. : Rural Health Services,: DGHS, New Delhi; (1965)

Freeman, Howard.E. : Handbook of Medical Sociology, Englewood

and Sol Levine Cliffs : Prentice-Hall, New-.Jersy ; (1989)

Hasan, K. :The Cultural Frontiers of Health in Village India: Manakatlas, Bombay; (1967)

Madan, T.N. : Doctors and Society: Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi; 1980

Mechanic, David : Medical Sociology: A Selective View: Free Press, New-York; (1968)

Government of India. : National Rural Health Mission, 2005

Oommen, T.K. : Doctors and Nurses: A Study in Occupational Role

Structure: Macmillan, Delhi; (1978)

Park, J.R. and K.Park : Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine:

Banarasidass and Company Jabalpur; (2000)

Parson, Talcott : The Social System,: Free Press, Illinois; (1951),

Tailor, S. Ch. : “Health, Illness and Medicine” pp253-276 in Sociology: Issues and Debates Ed. by Taylor Steve; Palgrave, 1999

Schawatz, H. : Dominant Issues in Medical Sociology, McGraw- Hill, New York; (1994)

Taylor Steve : Sociology: Issues and Debates; Palgrave ; (ed.) (1999),

10-A(654)


M.A. (FINAL), 4th SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY


Paper XXXIII (Optional) ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIETY


Time- 3 hours


Unit – I Environmental Sociology: Meaning, Sociological Thinking on Environment - Karl Marx; Max Weber; Luhman – Social System and Environment

Unit – II Developmental Issues and Environmental Factors: Technology

Choice; Factorization; Environmental Consciousness, Dimensions of Environmental Degradation, Health Hazards; Food Security-

Insecurity.

Unit – III Environmental Movements in India: International Organizations and Intervention; Green Movements, Chipco Movement, Narmada Bachao Andolan, Ganga Bachao Abhiyan

Unit –IV Green Policies and Programs: Remedial Strategies- Environmental Acts, Displacement and Rehabilitation Policy; Environmental education

REFERENCES:

Albrow, Martin & : Globalization, Knowledge and Society, Sage: London;

Elizabeth King (Ed.),(1990)

Agarwal, Anil : “Economy and Environment in India”, in Anil Aggarwal (ed) The Price of Forests.: Centre or Science and Environment, New Delhi; (1989).

10-A(655)

Baviskar. Amita : In the Valley of the River: Tribal Conflict over Development in the Narmada Valley,: OUP, Delhi; (1995),

Benton, Ted : Natural Relations,: Verso, London; (1993)

Bhatt, Anil : Development and Social Justice: Micro Action by Weaker Section, Sage: New Delhi; (1989)

Burman, B.K. Roy : Report of Committee on Forest and Tribals in India: Government. of India, Ministry of Home Affairs, New Delhi; (1982)

Chauhan, I.S : Environmental Degradation,: Rawat Publications, Delhi. (1998)

Desh Bandhu and Garg, R.K. : Social Forestry and Tribal Development, Defraud: Natraj Publishers, (eds) (1986)

Dickens, Peter : Society and Nature: Towards a Green Social Theory,

Hemel-Hemsteed: Hawester Wheatsheaf.; (1992)

Dobson. A : Green Political Thought,: Andre Dentsch, London; (1990)

Fernandes, Walter : Tribals and Forests, New Delhi: Indian Social Institute; (1989)

Ghai, Dharam : Development and Environment: Sustaining People and

Nature UNRISD: Blackwell Publication. (ed)(1994)

Giddens, Anthony : Global Problems and Ecological Crisis”, 2nd edition:

W.W. Norton and C, New York; (1996)

Guha, Ramechandra : The Unquiet Woods: Ecological Change and Peasant

Resistance in the Himalaya. OUP: Delhi; (1995)

Katyal, Jimmy and M.Satake : Environmental Pollution: Anmol Publications; (1989)

Krishna, Sumi : Environmental Politics: People’s lives and Development Choices, New Delhi: Sage Publications; (1996)

Mehta S.R. : Poverty, Population and Sustainable Development, Rawat Publications, New Delhi; (ed)(1997)

10-A(656)

Munshi, Indra : “Environment’ in Sociological Theory”, Sociological

Bulletin, Vol. 49 No. 2.; (2000),

Plumwood, Val : Gender and Ecology: Feminism and Making of Nature,:

Routledge. London; (1992)

Shiva, Vandana : Staying Alive: Women, Ecology and the Environment,

: Zed Books, London; (1988)

UNDP, Sustainable Development: World commission On

Environment and Development Our Common Future

Brutland Report, OUP: New Delhi. ; (1987)

Wilson, Des : The Environmental Crisis Heinemann, London; (ed) (1984)

10-A(657)


M.A. (FINAL), 4th SEMESTER, SOCIOLOGY


Paper XXXIV (Optional) PRACTICAL-PRACTICE OF RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

Maximum Marks – 100*

Time- 1 hours

Note: This practical paper consists of two parts A and B. Part A consists of ten practical

topics. The evaluation will be based on practical note book on six topics (ten marks each)

out of total ten topics. Part B consists of project report having 20 marks and Viva-voce of

20 marks. The evaluation will be based on project report and performance during Viva-

voce.

Part-A 60 marks (List of Practicals)

1. Formulation of Research Problem Sources of Research Problem Identification of Variables and their linkage Preparation of Synopsis.

2. Selection of Universe and Sampling. 3. Formulation of Tools of Data Collection

Questionnaire Schedule Interview

4. Collection of Data (Field Work). 5. Data Processing by using the SPSS.

Coding Data Entry Frequency Distribution

6. Tabulation- Various Types. 7. Graphic Presentation:

Polygon Pie Chart Histogram

8. Data Interpretation and Analysis. 9. Tests of Significance and Testing of Hypothesis. 10. Use of Library Sources-On line and Off line.

10-A(658)

Part-B 40 Marks

1. Project Report - 20 marks

2. Viva-voce - 20 marks

Note: * indicates that there is no internal assessment marks in practical paper.

10-A(659)

MBA PROGRAMME UNDER SELF FINANCING SCHEME

The Master of Business Administration (MBA) under self financing scheme is a Two Year Full Time Programme. The course structure of the programme is given hereunder: SEMESTER-I Code Course Title Division of Marks

Int. Ext. Total Time

MBA -101 Management Process & Practices 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -102 Business Statistics 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -103 Accounting for Managers 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -104 Business Communication 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -105 Economics for Mangers 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -106 Business Environment 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -107 Computer Application in Business 50 (P)

50 (T) 100 3 Hrs

MBA -108 Workshop on Soft Skills Enhancement 50 - 50 -

SEMESTER-II MBA -201 Marketing Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -202 Human Resources Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -203 Financial Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -204 Fundamentals of Retailing 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -205 Business Research Methods 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -206 Production and Operations Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -207 E-Commerce 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -208 Viva-Voce - 50 50 -

Note: 1. Summer Training:- At the end of second semester, all students will have to undergo summer training of 6—8 weeks with an industrial, business or service organization. Each student will be required to submit a training report consisting of 50-70 pages to the Department for the work undertaken during this period within one month of the commencement of the third semester for the purpose of evaluation in the third semester. The students will be required to attach a certificate in the training report which will be issued by the training supervisor from the concerned organization. Each student will make a presentation on his/her training report during the third semester for the purpose of internal evaluation (50 marks).

10-A(660)

SEMESTER-III Note: 2. The students of this MBA Programme will opt any one specialization area out of the four (Finance, Retailing & Logistics, Marketing, HRM) in 3rd & 4th Semesters. In the second year, the students will be required to study all the compulsory common papers and those related to their specialization area. Compulsory Papers MBA -301 Strategic Management 40 60 100

3 Hrs

MBA -302 Business Laws 40 60 100

3 Hrs

MBA -303 Summer Training 50 50 100

-

Semester-IV Compulsory Papers MBA -401 Entrepreneurship Development 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA -402 Research Project - 100 100 -

MBA -403 Comprehensive Viva-Voce - 50 50 -

PAPERS OF SPECIALIZATION AREAS 1. FINANCE Semester-III MBA-FM -301 Management of Financial Institutions 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-FM -302 Principles of Insurance & Banking 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-FM -303 Security Analysis and Investment Management

40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-FM -304 Project Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

Semester-IV MBA-FM -401 Management of Financial Services 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-FM -402 Portfolio Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-FM -403 Commodities and Financial Derivatives 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-FM -404 Foreign Exchange Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

10-A(661)

2. RETAILING & LOGISTICS Semester-III MBA-RM-301 Retail Brand Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-RM-302 Consumer Behaviour 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-RM-303 Retail Logistics and Supply Chain Management

40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-RM-304 Retail Marketing Communication 40 60 100 3 Hrs

Semester-IV MBA-RM-401 International Retailing 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-RM-402 Retail Service Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-RM-403 Retail Customer Relationship Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-RM-404 Retail Mall and Risk Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

3. MARKETING Semester-III MBA-MKT-301 Consumer Behaviour 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-MKT-302 Product and Brand Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-MKT-303 International Marketing 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-MKT-304 Rural Marketing 40 60 100 3 Hrs

Semester-IV MBA-MKT-401 Marketing of Services 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-MKT-402 Industrial Marketing 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-MKT-403 Supply Chain and Logistics Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-MKT-404 Strategic Marketing 40 60 100 3 Hrs

10-A(662)

4. HRM Semester-III MBA-HRM-301 Organization Behaviour 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-HRM-302 Industrial Relations and Labour Policy 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-HRM-303 Management of Interpersonal Group Processes

40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-HRM-304 Global Human Resource Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

Semester-IV MBA-HRM-401 Human Resource Development and

Strategies 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-HRM-402 Competency Mapping and Talent Management

40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-HRM-403 Compensation Management 40 60 100 3 Hrs

MBA-HRM-404 Labour Legislation and Industrial Jurisprudence

40 60 100 3 Hrs

10-A(663)

MBA-101 MANAGEMENT PROCESS AND PRACTICES

Max. Marks: 100 External : 60

Internal :40 Time: 3 Hours

Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The objectives of the paper are to familiarize the students with basic management concepts and behavioural processes in the organization. Course Contents: Historical Development: Definition of Management – Science or Art – Management and Administration – Development of Management Thought – Contribution of Taylor and Fayol – Functions of Management – Approaches to Management. Planning: Nature & Purpose – Steps involved in Planning – Objectives – Setting Objectives – Process of Managing by Objectives – Strategies, Policies & Planning Premises- Forecasting – Decision-making. Organising: Nature and Purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization Chart. Organization Structure and Design; Departmentation by difference strategies – Line and Staff authority – Benefits and Limitations – De-Centralization and Delegation of Authority. Staffing: Nature, Processes of Recruitment & Selection, Training & Development Directing: Scope – Human Factors, Leadership – Types of Leadership and theories; Motivation: Motivation theories, Motivational Techniques; Communication : Process of Communication, Barriers and Breakdown, Effective Communication, Organizational Communication, Electronic Media in Communication. Controlling & Coordination: System and Process of Controlling, Requirements for effective control, Control techniques. Coordinating Processes. Suggested Reading: 1. Koontz, H. arid Wechrich, H.: Management, 10th ed., New York, McGraw Hill, 1995. 2. Luthans, F. : Organizational Behaviour, 7th ed., New York, McGraw Hill, 1995. 3. Robbins, S.P, Management, 5th ed., New Jersey, Englewood Cliffs, Prentice Hall Inc. 4. Robbins, SP. : Organizational Behaviour, 7th ed., New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India, 1996. 5. Staw, B.M. Psychological Dimensions of Organizational Behaviour, hi ed., Englewood Cliffs,

New Jersey, Prentice Nail Inc., 1995. 6. Stoner, 3 etc. : Management, 6th ed., New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India, 1996. 7. Singh, Dalip: Emotional Intelligence at Work, Response Books, Sage Publications, Dclii,

2001.

10-A(664)

MBA-102 BUSINESS STATISTICS Max. Marks: 100

External : 60 Internal: 40

Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objective: The objective of this course is to make the students learn about the application of statistical tools and techniques for decision- making. Course Contents: Univariate Analysis : An overview of central tendency, dispersion, aid skewness. probability

Theory; Classical, relative and subjective probability, - Addition and multiplication probability

models; Conditional probability and Baye’s Theorem. Probability Distributions: Binomial,

Poisson, and normal distributions; Their characteristics and applications. Sampling and

sampling methods; Sampling and non-s Sampling erros’s; Law of Large Number and Central

Limit Theorem; Sampling distributions and their characteristics.

Statistical Estimation and Testing; Point and interval estimation of population mean,

proportion, and variance; Statistical testing of hypothesis and errors; Large and small sampling

tests—Z, t and F tests.

Non—Parametric Tests: Chi-square tests; Sign tests; Wilcoxon Signed— Rank tests; Kruskal—

Wallis test.

Correlation and Regression Analysis: Two variables case.

Index Numbers : Meaning and types; Weighted aggregative indices-Laspeyre’s and Paasch’s

indices; Laspeyre’s and Paasth’s indices compared, indices of weighted average of (price and

quantity) relatives; Tests of adequacy Special problems—shifting the base; splicing, overlapping

index series; Uses and problems of Index number; Time Series Analysis; Trend Analysis.

Statistical Quality Control : Causes of variations in quality characteristics, Quality control

charts, - purpose and. logic; Constructing a control chart computing the control limits (X and R

charts); Process under control and out of control, Warning limits; Control charts for attributes

-fraction defectives and number of defects Acceptance sampling.

10-A(665)

Suggested Readings: 1. Hooda, R.P. : Statistics for Business and Economics, Macmillan, New Delhi. 2. Heinz; Kohler : Statistics for Business & Economics,. Harper Collins; New York. 3. Heinz, LW : Quantitative Approach to Managerial Decisions, Prentice Hall, NJ. 4. Lawrence, B. Morse: Statistics for Business & Economics, Harper Collins, NY. 5. Levin, Richard I and David S Rubin : Statistics for Management Prentice Hail, Delhi. 6. Watsnam Terry J. and Keith Parramor: Quantitative Methods in Finance international, Thompson Business Press, London.

10-A(666)

MBA -103 ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERS



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions.

Course Objective: The Objective of this course is to develop the understanding of basic concepts of accounting and to equip the students with such methods and tools of accounting which will help them in managing and controlling the costs. Course Contents: Meaning, Nature and Role of Accounting. The Accounting equation. Accounting concepts and

conventions. Accounting records and system of Drafting of Profit and Loss Account and

Balance Sheet of non corporates entities. Financial Information Analysis: Tools of financial

analysis; Preparing of fund flow and cash flow statements, ratio analysis. Cost: Concept,

Nature, Elements and Classification, cost Control Decision Accounting. Marginal Costing;

Cost- Volume-Profit Analysis. Activity based costing. Budgetary Control: Concept and Types

of Budgets. Flexible Budgeting, Concept of Zero base Budgeting. Standard Costing and

Elementary variance analysis. Responsibility Accounting, corporate governance. Management

control: concept and nature; Behavioural implications of management control, Concept of

Management Audit.

Suggested Readings: I. Gupta, R.L. : Advanced Accountancy, Vol. -1 & II 2. Jawahar Lal And Seema Srivastava : Cost Accounting 3. M. Bendrey : Essentials of Management Accounting in Business, Ane Books 4. H.V. Jhamb : Fundamentals of Management Accounting 2ed, Ane Books

10-A(667)

MBA -104 BUSINESS COMMUNICATION Max. Marks: 100

External : 60 Internal :40

Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course objective: Basic objective of this course is to make students familiar with the basic fundamentals of business communication. Course Contents: Introduction to Business Communication: Definition, Classification, Purpose and Process of

Business Communication; Effective Communication Skills and Barriers to Effective

Communication. Emerging issues in Business Communication, Forms of Business

Communication: Style of Business Writing Business Letters, Memos and Applications, Report

Writing, Communication Skills: Negotiation Skills, Presentation Skills, Interview skills, Group

Discussion, Body Language. Language Skills: Listening, Speaking, Reading, Writing. Business

Etiquettes, Legal aspects of business communication. Organizational Communication:

Components of Organization Communication, Internal and External communication in

Organization, Importance of Communication Management, and Communication Structure in

an Organization. Ethics and business communication.

Suggested Readings:

1. Sinha,K.K :Business Communication , Galgotia Publishing company.

2. Pradhan,Homai, et al : Business Communication, Himalaya Publishing House

3. Paul, Rajendra and : Business Communication, Sultan Chand and Sons Korthalli, J.S.

4. Murphy and Hilderbranth: Business Communication

5. M.K. Sehgal, Vandana : Business Communication Khetarpal

10-A(668)

MBA- 105 ECONOMICS FOR MANAGERS Max. Marks: 100


Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The objectives of this course is to acquaint the students with concepts and techniques used in Micro—Economic Theory and to enable them to apply this knowledge in business decision- making. Emphasis is given to changes in the nature of business firms in the context of globalization.

Course Contents:

Nature and scope of managerial economics in business decision; Introduction to fundamental concepts

i.e.., incremental concepts; discounting principle, opportunity cost; equi-marginal principle; Demand

analysis; law elasticities of demand. Theory of consumer behaviour; consumer equilibrium- utility and

indifference curve approach; price, income and substitution effects. Production and cost analysis:

Production function, Law of variable proportion and returns to scale; cost curves and economies of

scale. Market structure and pricing; price and output determination in perfect competition, monopoly

monopolistic competition and oligopoly. Circular flow of economic activities; National Income concept

and measurement. Business cycles, causes, phases, Control of business cycles, Hicks and Keynes theory

of business cycles. Inflation: Theory of Inflation i.e. Demand pull and cost push inflation. Control of

inflation and deflation.

Suggested Readings:

1. P.L. Mehta : Managerial Economics: Analysis problems

2. D.N. Dwivedi : Managerial Economics

3. K.K. Dewett : Modern Economics theory

4. Peterson, Lewis : Managerial Economics Jain 5. Rangarajan, C & : Macro Economics

Dholokia, B.H.

10-A(669)

MBA- 106 BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT Max. Marks: 100


Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions.

Objectives: The primary objectives of this course are to acquaint the students emerging global trends in business environment. Course Contents Business Environment- Nature, components and determinants. Assessing business environment risk- country risk and political risk. Assessing current state of business environment in India: Economic Reforms, Liberalisation, Privatisation and globalization. Various Industrial Policies of India with special emphasis on new industrial policy with various amendments. Competition Act and its impact on Indian business. Public Sector Enterprises: Rationale and Role played by them since independence. Disinvestment- Meaning, Justification and various loopholes in and challenges to disinvestment programme. Small Scale Enterprises: Meaning, Significance to the Indian economy, problems and various incentives given to these. Multi National Enterprises and a critical evaluation of their role in India. Foreign Trade: Various Trade Reforms announced in India in recent times. Trends in goods and services trade and Balance of Trade position of India. Foreign Direct Investment- significance, policy and current position of India. EXIM Policy. World Trade Organisation and its impact on Indian industry and trade. Suggested reading: 1. Daniel, John D and Radebangh, Lee H : International Business, 5th ed., New York, Addison Weley, 1989. 2. Charles W. Hill, International Business, fourth edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publications Companies 3. AK. Sundaram J. Stemart Block : The International Business Environment PHI

10-A(670)

MBA -107 COMPUTERS APPLICATION IN BUSINESS Max. Marks: 50

External: 50 Time: 3 Hours

Note: - The examiner will set eight questions (of ten marks each) in all from Part-A Theory only. Question No.1, comprising of five short answer type questions (carrying 2 marks each) shall be compulsory. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. All Questions will carry equal marks. Objectives: The objectives of this course include developing an appreciation of different software and hardware systems available in the industry among the students and build up the experience of computer usage in business organizations with specific reference to commercial data processing systems.

Part-A Theory (50 Marks) Course Contents: Introduction to Computer: Introduction, Computer Organization and Functions. Computer Memory, Software and Hardware; Operating Systems-An Overview, Types, function; Troubleshooting of the system, Configuration the TCP/IP Addressing. Language:- Low level, Assembly Level, High Level Language; Language Processor: - Assembler, Compilers and Interpreters; Network:-LAN, WAN, MAN, Analog and Digital Transmission Network Topology. Introduction to Internet: Internet basic, benefit and limitation, application and scope, IP address, Browser, w.w.w., E-mail, video conferencing. Latest IT Trends and Role of IT: E-Commerce, M-Commerce; Role of IT in difference Area-Education, Industry, Banking, Marketing, Public Services etc.

Part-B Practical Max. Marks: 50

Internal: 50 Ms-Office: Introduction to Ms-Word, working with documents, formatting, macros recording, mail merge and printing the documents. Introduction to Ms-Excel: working with spreadsheet, Basic commands, Functions- sum, product, logical, look up, date, text and financial. Chart, diagram, picture, background, auto format, conditional formatting, style, filter, sort. Formulas and macros. What if analysis, pivot table, pivot chart, scenario, goal seek, advanced filter. Introduction to Ms-PowerPoint- creating, formatting a presentation adding Graphics to the presentation, Adding effects to the presentation, Printing Handouts. Suggested Readings: 1. P.K. Sinha. : Computer Fundamentals, BPB Publication 2. V.Raja Reman : Fundamentals of Computer, PHI, New Delhi. 3. Leon & Leon : Introduction to Computers, Vikas Publishing House,

New Delhi 3. D.M. Dhamdere : Introduction to System Software 4. Andrew S. Tanenbaum : Computer Network, Parson Education. 5. Leon and Leon : Fundamentals of IT, Leon Tee World.

10-A(671)

MBABIFS -108 WORKSHOP ON SOFT SKILLS ENHANCEMENT

Max. Marks: 50 Internal: 50

10-A(672)

Semester-II MBA-201 MARKETING MANAGEMENT



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Objective: The Objective of this course is to develop the student’s basic analytical skills, conceptual abilities and substantive knowledge in the field of marketing. Course Contents: Marketing: Meaning, Nature, Scope, Evolution and Importance. Modern concept of marketing. Ethics in marketing. Role of Information Technology in marketing. The dynamic marketing Environment. Marketing Mix and STP ( Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning) Marketing Information System: Concept and Components of a marketing information system. Marketing Research: meaning, scope and techniques. Consumer Behaviour: meaning and importance, buying motives, buying process, factors influencing consumer behaviour. Product decisions: concept, classification, product-line decisions. New product development process, product life cycle, Packaging and Branding decisions. Pricing Concepts: objectives, policies and procedures, factors affecting pricing, pricing strategy and product life cycle, price changes and organizational strategies, product line pricing. Integrated Marketing Communication: Promotion-Mix; Advertising, sales promotion, public relations, personal selling and direct marketing. Channels of distributions: Concept, types and factors affecting channel selection. Recent developments in marketing. Suggested Readings: 1 Michael J. Etzel : Marketing Concepts and Cases, Tata

Bruce J. Walker McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. William J. Stanton Ajay Pandit 2 Michael R.Czinkota :Marketing Management, Thomson, South

Masaaki Kotabe Western. 3 Philip Kotler : Marketing Management, Pearson Prentice-Hall. Kevin lane Keller 4 Dhru Greqal : Marketing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Michael Levy Company Limited. 5. V.S. Ramaswamy : Marketing Management, Macmillan Publisher

S. Nama Kumari India Ltd. 6. Rajan Sexena : Marketing Management, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company Limited.

10-A(673)

MBA-202 HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Objective: To provide an understanding of basic concepts techniques and practices of human resource management in organizations. Course Contents: Human Resource Management: The HRM definition, models, objectives, scope and

significance of HRM, Emerging HRM Practices in India.

HR Policies: Meaning, needs, HR policy areas, Formulation and Implementation of HR

policies.

HR Planning —Nature, process, techniques and guidelines for making HR planning effective.

Recruitment, Selection & Placement- Meaning, process, methods and techniques, Selection

and Placement Practices in India.

Training and Development: Training, definition and significance, principles, types, methods

and evaluation. Management Development—Nature, procedure, methods and evaluation.

Management development practices in India.

Performance Appraisal/ Management: Nature, issues and methods, performance appraisal

practices in India.

Compensation Management: Nature and significance, The Components of compensation

management, factors affecting pay levels, Job evaluation—concept, process, methods and equal

pay for work of equal value.

Ethical issues in HRM: Concept and ethics at work place.

Suggested Readings: 1. Saini. Debi, S. and : Human Resource Management Sami A. Khan (eds.) : Delhi, Response Books. 2. Cascio, W.F. : Managing Human Resources, New York, McGraw Hill, Inc. 3 Dwivedi R.S. : Managing Human Resources— Personal Management in Indian

Enterprise, New Delhi, Galgotia Publishing Ltd. 4. Dwivedi, R.S. : Managing Human Resources —Industrial Relations in Indian

Enterprises, New Delhi Galgotia Publishing Ltd. 5. Monappa, A : Managing Human Resource, Macmillan India Ltd.. Delhi. 6. Armstrong, M.A. : Handbook of Resource Management Practice, London Kogan

10-A(674)

MBA-203 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT




Objectives: The purpose of this course is to acquaint the students with the broad framework of

financial decision—making in a business unit

Course Contents

Introduction to financial management Objectives of financial management; Time value of

money, sources of finance, Investment decisions: Importance, Difficulties determining cash

flows, methods of capital budgeting Risk analysis : Cost of capital; Concept and importance,

Computations of cost of various sources of finance; Weighted Average Cost of Capital; Capital

Structure decisions; Theories of capital structure, Factors determining capital structure.

Optimum capital structure; Management of working capital - Cash, Receivables and Inventory

Management, Internal Financing and Dividend Policy; Financial Modelling.

Suggested Readings:

1. Hamton, John; Financial Decision-Making, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Prentice Hall Inc.,

1997.

2. Khan, M.Y. and Jam, P.K. : Financial Management, McGraw Hill, 2001.

3. Prasanna Chandra : Financial Management, McGraw Hill, 2002.

4. Pandey, IM. : Financial Management, Vikas Publication House, 2000.

5. Van Home, James C. : Financial Management and Policy,10th ed., New Delhi, Prentice Hall

of India, 1997.

6. Winger, Bemard and Mohan, Nancy: Principles of Financial Management, New York,

Macmillan Publishing Company, 1991.

7. Kishore, Ravi M. : Financial Management, Taxmann Publishers, New Delhi.

10-A(675)

MBA-204 FUNDAMENTALS OF RETAILING



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The objective of the course is to acquaint the students with basics of retailing and store operations. Course Contents: Retailing-Meaning, Scope, Importance and growth of retailing in the Indian Economy. Functions

and classification of retailers. The concept of Organised Retailing- Issues and challenges in

organized retailing. Retail market strategy, financial and HRM strategies. Retail site locations,

steps involved in choosing retail location, important factors for choosing a location. Store layout,

design & visual merchandising: store design objectives, concept & principles of store design,

elements of store design; exterior& interior store design, space management. Store layout: Types

of layouts, layout selection. Visual merchandising: Tools used for visual merchandising, methods

of display. Presentation techniques and atmospherics. Merchandise planning system. Pricing the

merchandise: methods and factors affecting the pricing decisions. Retail promotional strategies.

Recent developments in retailing-Customer relationship management in retailing, IT applications

in retailing, Non-store retailing, Multichannel retailing, Rural retailing.

Suggested Readings: 1. Roger Cox and Paul Brittain: Retailing- An Introduction, Pearson Education. 2. Barry Berman and Joel R. Evans: Retail Management- A Strategic Approach, Pearson

Education Asia. 3. Swapna Pradhan: Retailing Management- Text & Cases, The McGraw-Hill Companies. 4. Michael Levy, Barton A Weitz and Ajay Pandit: Retailing Management, The McGraw Hill

Companies. 5. Arif Sheikh and Kaneez Fatima: Retail Management, Himalaya Publishing House. 6. Chetan Bajaj, Rajnish Tuli and Nidhi V Srivastava: Retail Management, Oxford

University Press. 7. Ron Hasty and James Reardon: Retail Management, The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. 8. Abhijit Das,Mall Management,Taxmann. 9. Manish V Sidhpuria, Retail Franchising, The McGraw-Hill Companies. 10. C.S.G.Krishnamachryulu and Lalitha Ramkrishnan, Rural Marketing, Pearson

10-A(676)

MBA-205 BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS Max. Marks: 100



Objectives: To equip the students with the basic understanding of the research methodology and to provide an insight into the application of modern analytical tools and techniques for the purpose of management decision-making. Course Contents: Nature and scope of research in business, Research objectives and selection of problem area,

Business research process. Research Design: Nature and significance of research design, types

of research design: Exploratory, Descriptive and experimental. Formulation of hypothesis.

Inference process. Methods of data collection: Nature and types. Scaling and attitude

measurement techniques. Sampling techniques-Types, editing, coding, Classification and

tabulation. Advanced techniques for data analysis-ANOVA, factor analysis, Cluster analysis

and conjoint analysis. Report writing. Different formats of reports and criteria for judging good

research report.

Suggested Reference: 1. Cooper and Schindier : Business Research methods 2. C.R. Kothari : Research Methodology 3. S.P. Gupta : Statistical Methods 4. Goode and Halt : Methods in Social Research 5. Bemet Roger : Management Research.

10-A(677)

MBA-206: PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Max. Marks: 100 External: 60 Internal: 40

Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Outline:

Nature and Scope of Production and Operations Management; Facility Location; Types of

Manufacturing Systems and Layouts; Layout Planning and Analysis.

Material Handling: Principles & Equipments; Line Balancing; Production Planning and Control in Mass

Production, in Batch and Job Order manufacturing; Capacity Planning.

Product Planning and Selection, Process Planning, Aggregate Planning and Master Production

Scheduling; Maintenance Management, Work Study: Method Study and Work Measurement.

Material Management: An Overview of Material Management, Material Requirement Planning and

Inventory Control; JIT, Purchase Management; Stores Management.

Quality Assurance: Acceptance Sampling, Statistical Quality Control, Total Quality Management; ISO-

9000.

Suggested Readings:

1. Admn, E. E. & Ebert, RJ. : Production and Operations Management, 6th ed., New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India 1995.

2. Buffa, E. S. & Sareen : Modern Production Management, New York, John Wiley, 2002. 3. Chary, S.N. : Production and Operations Management, New Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd

Edition. 4. Dobler, Conald W and Lee, Lamar : Pruchasing and Materials Management, New York,

McGraw Hill, 1984. 5. Norman Gaither, Production and Operations Management Thomson learning, Bombay, 2002. 6. Change, Aquilano & Jacobs: Operations Management for Competitive Advantage, TMH, 9th

edition. 7. Chunawalla & Patel: Production and Operations Management, HPH. 8. Nair: Production and Operations Management, TMH.

10-A(678)

MBA-207 E – COMMERCE Max. Marks: 100


Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The objective of the course is to acquaint the students with the use of E—Commerce competing markets.

Course Contents:

Introduction to E-Commerce, Benefits, Impact of E-Commerce, Classification of E-Commerce, Application of E-Commerce Technology, Business Models, Framework of E-Commerce., Business to Business, Business to Customer, Customer to Customer. Electronic Payment Systems: Special features required in payment systems for E-Commerce, types of E-Payment systems; -E-Cash and currency servers, e-Cheques, credit cards, Smart cards, electronic purses and debit cards; Prepaid and Post Paid Electronic Payment Systems.. Security, advertising & marketing Business on the Internet. Site Security, Firewalls, Securing Web Service, Transaction Security

Introduction to HTML: - Basic HTML tags, elements, Headings, Paragraphs, formatting, styles, List. Difference between HTML and DHTML. An-Overview of Website and Web Page.

Suggested Readings:

I. Kienam : Managing Your E-Commerce Business, Prentice Hall of India, N. Delhi.

2. Kosiur: Understanding E—Ccmmerce, Prentice Hall of India, N. Delhi.

3. Kalakota, Whinston, Frontiers of Electronic Commerce, Addison Wesley.

4. Schneider P. Grey, Perry T. James : E—Commerce, Thomson Learning, Bombay.

5. Shurety : E-business with Net Commerce (with CD), Addison Wesley.

6. Napier: Creating a Winning E-business, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.

7. Didar Singh : E-Commerce for Manager, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.

8. Whitely David : Electronic Commerce, TMH, N Delhi.

9. Efraim Turban, Jay Lee, David King & Ft Michael Chang, Electronic Commerce;

A Managerial Perspective, Pearson Education, N. Delhi

10-A(679)

MBA-208 VIVA-VOCE Max. Marks: 50

External: 50

10-A(680)

SEMESTER-III MBA- 301 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The course aims at imparting knowledge of formulation. implementation and evaluation of Business Strategies. Course Contents: An Introduction to business policy — Nature, Objective and importance of business policy; An overview of strategic management; Strategic decision making; Process of strategic 4ecision making. Types of planning systems - corporate planning, strategic planning and long range planning; Strategy Formulation, Company’s mission, purpose and objectives; Corporate strategy - concept, significance and objectives; types of strategies; Environmental and organizational appraisal (Internal & external) techniques of business environment analysis. Strategic alternatives and choice; Business ethics and corporate strategy Concept of value chair and competitive advantage. Strategy implementation - Designing organisational structure and activating strategies; Matching structure and activating strategy, Structural, Behavioural and Functional implementation. concept of synergy. Strategy Evaluation - Strategic evaluation and Control, Strategic and Operational Control; techniques of evaluation and control, Role of organisational system in evaluation. Suggested Readings: 1. Jauch & Glueek : Business Policy and Strategic Management. 2. Thampson LA. and Stickland A.J.: Strategic Management - Concept and cases. 3. Michael Potter: Competitive Advantage of Nations. 4. Azhar Kazmi : Business Policy and Strategic Management. 5. Kennth, A. Andrews : Concepts of corporate Strategy. 6. Melvin J. Stanford: Management Policy 7. John A. Pearce Hand R.B. Robinson Strategic Management Strategy Formulation and Implementation.

10-A(681)

MBA-302 BUSINESS LAWS



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Contents: The Indian Contract Act, 1872: Essentials of a Valid Contract. The Negotiable

Instrument Act, 1881: Nature and Types, Negotiation and Assignment. Holder in Due

Course, Dishonor and Discharge an Negotiable Instruments. The Companies Act, 1956:

Types of Companies, Memorandum and Article of Association, Shareholders and

Debenture Holders, Minority Protection, Winding-up, Company Law Bill 2012.

Consumer Protection Act: Consumer Rights, Exploitation of Consumer, Consumer

Protection, Utility of Consumerism. Cyber Laws. Security Contract Regulation Act-1956,

(SCRA). Security Exchange Board of India-1992 (SEBI): An overview, latest FDI guidelines

pertaining to Retail Sector and Financial Markets.

Suggested Readings • Avtar Singh. Company Law. 11th ed. Lucknow, Eastern,1996. • Khergamwala, JS. The Negotiable InstrumentActs. Bombay, N.M.Tripathi,1980 • Ramaiya,A.Guide to the companies Act. Nagpur,Wadhwa,1992. • Shah. S.M. Lectures on Company Law. Bombay, N.M. Tripathi,1990. • Tuteja, SK Business Law For Managers, New Delhi, Sultan Chand, 1998. • Aswathappa, K., ’Legal Environment of Business’, Himalaya Publishers Ltd. -

2002. • Gogna, P.P.S., ’A Text book of Mercantile Law’, Sultan Chand and Company,

2007 • Gordon, K. Natarajan, ’Banking Theory, Law & Practice’, Himalaya Publishers

Ltd. -2002. • Kapoor, N.D., ’Mercantile law’, Sultan Chand and Co., 2000. • Pillai.R.S.N, Bagavathi.V., ‘Business Law’, Sultan Chand and Co, 2000. • Reddy, Appannaiah, & Prabhudev, ’Company Law and Secretarial Practice’ –

Himalaya Publishing House –2004. • Saravanavel P. & Sumathi S., ‘Legal Systems in Business’, Himalaya Publishing

House. -2002. • Shukla .M.C., ‘Mercantile Law’, Sultan Chand and Co., 2007

10-A(682)

MBA-303 SUMMER TRAINING

Max. Marks: 100 Internal: 50 External: 50

10-A(683)

SEMESTER-IV MBA-401 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objective: To provide theoretical foundations of entrepreneurship development and to give an overview of who the entrepreneurs are and what competences are needed to become an Entrepreneur. Course Outlines: The Entrepreneurial Perspective: concept, Nature and Importance of Entrepreneurs; the Individual Entrepreneur; the Entrepreneurial and Intrapreneurial Mind; Entrepreneurship development and Economic development; Entrepreneurial Success & Failure: reasons& remedies. Creating, Starting & Financing the venture: Creativity & the Business Idea; Legal issues for the Entrepreneur, drawing Functional Plans: Marketing Plan, the Organizational Plan, the financial Plan; Sources of capital for new business; Entrepreneurial Strategy. Institutional Support & Project Management: Institutional Support for Entrepreneurs; project Planning & Appraisal; International Entrepreneurship opportunities; women Entrepreneurship. Suggested Readings

1. Dynamics of Entrepreneurship Development; Vasant Desai 2. Entrepreneurship: New Venture Creation; David H. Holt 3. Entrepreneurship Development New Venture Creation; Satish Taneja, S.L.Gupta 4. Entrepreneurship: Strategies and Resources; Marc J. Dollinger 5. Culture of Entrepreneurship; Brigitte Berger. Innovation and Entrepreneurship; Peter

F. Drucker 6. Entrepreneurship; Robert D. Hisrich, Michael P. Peters, Dean A. Shepherd 7. Entrepreneurship as Strategy; G. Dale Meyer, Kurt A. Heppard 8. New Vistas of Entrepreneurship: Challenges & Opportunities; A. Sahay, M.S.Chhikara 9. Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management; Siropolis

684

MBA-402 RESEARCH PROJECT


MBA-403 COMPREHENSIVE VIVA-VOCE

Max. Marks: 50 External: 50

685

SEMESTER-III SPECALIZATION AREA 1. FINANCE MBA-FM-301 MANAGEMENT OF FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS




Objective: The objective of this course is to make the candidates aware about the financial systems prevalent in India and the role of Institution in the financial system.

Course Contents: Financial System: Nature, structure, role and functions of a financial system. Key elements of a well functioning financial system; Status and objectives, reforms and recent developments in Indian Financial System.

RBI- functions and working, functions of NABARD, structure of Indian banking system, objectives functions, performance of commercial banks. Regional Rural Banks and Cooperative Banks. Assets- liability Management in Banks. Operational policies and performance of Finance Companies, Development finance institutions: ICICI, IDBI, IFCI, IIBI, SFCs, SIDBI; Non-banking finance companies, Housing finance companies.

Indian Securities Market: Stock Exchanges, New Issue Market, Role of SEBI Recent Developments in Indian financial security market; Mutual Funds; Depository System.

An overview of Insurance Institutions in India. Money Market: Meaning, Significance, types; Call money market, Treasury Bills Market. Commercial Bills Market, Commercial Papers

Suggested Readings:

1. Meera Sharma, 'Management of Financial Institutions' Prentice Hall of India, 2008.

2. Bhole L. M 'Financial institutions and Markets' Tata McGraw Hills,2008.

3. Bharati V. Pathak, 'The Indian financial system- Markets, Institutions and Services' Pearson Education, 2008.

4. John C. Hull, 'Risk Management and Financial Institutions", Tata McGraw Hills. 2009.

5. S. Gurusamy, 'Financial Markets and Institutions' 3rd edition, Tata McGraw Hills.

6. Khan M. Y. ' Indian Financial System' Tata McGraw Hills

The list of cases and specific references including recent articles will be announced in the class.

686

MBA-FM-302 PRINCIPLES OF INSURANCE & BANKING




Objectives: The basic objective of this course is to apprise the students with the banking law and practice and develop and understanding of various laws affecting banks. Course Contents: Introduction to insurance: various types of insurance, principles of insurance, important insurance policies in life and non-life insurance; IRDA and its role in insurance sector in India; privatization of insurance industry in India; An overview of motor insurance and personal accident insurance. Insurance Environment : Internal, External, Legal and Commercial. Comparative Environment of Insurance business, Insurance procedure – Settlement of Claims under life and non life insurance. Main provisions of Banking Regulation Act, 1949; RBI Act, 1934; and Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881. Securities for Bank Advances: Forms of securities and precautions taken by Banks in accepting these securities. Guarantees: Contract of Guarantee and contract of indemnity, Guarantee as Banker’s Security. Writing Reports on Bank visits; Banker Customer Relationship; Banking Sector Reforms; BASEL norms; NPA and Capital Adequacy in Indian Banks; Retail Banking, E-Banking; and Risk management techniques for banks Suggested Reading:

1. Cox, David: Elements of Banking; John Murray, London. 2. Bodla, B.S. Garg, Mahesh and Karam Pal : Insurance Fundamentals, Procedures and

environment, Deep and Deep Publication, New Delhi. 3. Mehta, R.R.S. : Fundamental of Banking; Himalaya Publishing House Co., New

Delhi. 4. Nigam, B.M.L. : Banking Law and Practice , Konark Publishers, Delhi. 5. Mishra,M.N., Principles and Practices of Insurance, Sultan Chand &Co. 6. Periasamy,P., (2007), Principles and Practices of Insurance, Prentice Hall of India.

687

MBA-FM-303 SECURITY ANALYSIS AND INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT Max. Marks: 100


Time: 3 Hours Objectives: This course is designed to give the students a practical orientation towards the principles of investment, pricing, valuation and portfolio management. Objectives: The objective of this course is to impart knowledge to students regarding the theory and practice of Security Analysis and Portfolio Management. Course Contents: Investment Management: Capital Investment Process. Types of investment alternatives:

Security and Non – security forms of investment; real estate investment; investment

instruments of the money market. Valuation theories of fixed and variable income securities,

government securities. Operations of Indian Stock Market; SEBI’s Guidelines regarding stock

market. New Issue Market; Listing of Securities, OTCEI. Cost of investing in securities;

mechanics of investing in Securities.

Objectives of security analysis; Phases of Security Analysis: Fundamental Analysis, Technical

Analysis , Efficient Market Hypothesis Theory. Analysis of Risk and Return of Securities.

Recent developments in the Indian stock market

Suggested Readings: 1. Pandian : Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Vikas Publishing House, New

Delhi. 2. Raman Investment; Principles and Techniques, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 3. Fischer, Donald E. And Jordan, Ronald J. : Security Analysis and Portfolio

Management. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 4. Fuller, Russell J. and Farrell, James L: Modern Investment and Security Analysis.

New York, McGraw Hill. 5. Alexander, Gorden J. and Bailey, Jeffery V. : Investment Analysis and Portfolio

Management, Dryden Press, Thomson Learning, Bombay. 6. Kevin S. : Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, PHI, New Delhi. 7. Chandra Prasanna : Investment Management, Tata McGraw Hills

The list of cases and specific references including recent articles will be announced in the class.

688

MBA-FM-304 PROJECT MANAGEMENT



Objectives: The basic purpose of this course is to understand the framework for evaluating capital expenditure proposals, their planning and management in the review of the projects undertaken. Course Contents: Generation and Screening of Project Idea; Capital Expenditure; Importance and Difficulties;

Market and Demand Analysis; Technical Analysis; Financial Estimates and Projections;

Financing of Projects; Investment Criteria. Analysis of Project Risk : Firm Risk and Market

Risk; Social Cost and Benefit Analysis; Multiple Projects and Constraints; Network

Techniques for Project Management; Project Review and Administrative Aspects; Assessment

of the Tax Burden; Environment Appraisal of Projects; Human aspects of Project

Management. Project Financing: BOT, PPP and consortium financing.

Suggested Reading

1. W. Ahuja, G.K. & Gupta, Ravi : Systematic Approach to Income Tax, Allahabd, Bharat Law Hose, 1997.

2. Bhalla, V.K. : Financial Management and Policy, 2nd ed., New Delhi, Anmol, 1998. 3. Chandra, Prasanna : Projects : Preparation, Appraisal, Budgeting and Implementation,

3rd ed., New Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill, 1987. 4. Dhankar, Raj S.: Financial Management of Public Sector Undertakings. New Delhi,

Westville, 1995. The list of cases and specific references including recent articles will be announced in the class.

689

SEMESTER-IV MBA-FM-401 MANAGEMENT OF FINANCIAL SERVICES



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The objective of this course is to discuss the specific financial management problems of financial institutions including a detailed study of the working of the leading financial services in India. Course Contents: Financial Services : Meaning, Nature and Types; Leasing : Concept. Classification, Accounting, Legal and Tax Aspects of Leasing: Financial Evaluation of Leasing. Factoring: Meaning, Characteristics and Types of Factoring arrangements, Factoring in India, Factoring vs. Forfeiting. Hire Purchase Finance and Consumer Credit: Conceptual Frame Work; Legal Aspects; Taxation; Accounting and Reporting. Credit Rating: Meaning and Types; Benefits of Credit rating to investors and companies. Credit Rating Agencies; Objectives and Functions. Credit Cards: Concept and Significance; Types of credit Cards, Credit Card business in India. Book Building: Concept and Mechanism of Book Building; Significance and Benefits of Book Building. Bought Out Deals: Meaning and Nature; Mechanisms of Bought out Deals; advantages; The Present Scenario. Securitization: Concept, Mode, Mechanism and Beneficiaries of Securitization; Securitization in India. Depository: Concept, Depository participants; Functions of depository system; Benefits of depository. Venture Capital: Meaning, Modes of Financing, Role and Functions of Merchant Bankers. Suggested Readings 1. Khan, M. Y., Management of Financial Services, McGraw Hill, 2001. 2. Gordan, E and K. Natrajan, Emerging Scenario of Financial Services. Himalaya

Publishing House, 1997. 3. Meidan, Arthur Brennet, M. Option Pricing: Theory & Applications. Toronto,

Lexington Books, 1983. . 4. Kim, Suk and Kim, Seung, Global Corporate Finance. Text and Cases. 2nd ed.,

690

MBA-FM-402 PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objective: The objective of this course is to provide basic knowledge to students regarding the theory and practice of portfolio management. Course Contents: Introduction to portfolio management: measurement of portfolio return and risk, process of portfolio management, Modern portfolio theory, Asset allocation decision, Markowitz diversification model. Testing the efficient frontier: the relationship between the leveraged and unleveraged portfolios, constructing the efficient frontier, Sharpe Index model, determination of corner portfolio. Capital market theory: Testing the Capital Asset Pricing Model, Arbitrage Pricing Theory. Portfolio performance evaluation : Sharpe, Treynor & Jensen measure. Portfolio revision: Active and passive strategies & formula plans in portfolio revision. Managed Portfolios and Performance measurements: Classification of managed portfolios, Mutual funds- types, performance evaluation of mutual funds, functions of Asset Management Companies. Suggested Readings: 1. Investment Analysis and Portfolio management, Prasanna Chandra, TMH - 2nd Edition, 2005 2. Investments, Zvi Bodie & Mohanty, TMH -6th Edition, 2005 3. Investment Management, VK Bhalla ( S.Chand & Co) 4. Security Analysis & Portfolio Management, S.Bhat, Excel Books.

5. Investment Analysis & Portfolio Management, Reilly 8th Edition,

6. Security Analysis & Portfolio Management, Fisher and Jordan, 6th edition,

Pearson education. 7. Securities Analysis & Portfolio Mgmt, V.A. Avadhani, Himalaya Publishing House.

691

MBA-FM-403 COMMODITIES AND FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: This course is designed to help the students in understanding of commodities market, products, financial derivatives, pricing mechanism etc. Course Contents Introduction to Commodity Derivatives

Introduction to derivatives, products, participants and functions, derivatives markets, difference between commodity and financial derivatives. Evolution of commodity exchanges, global commodity derivatives exchanges, latest developments. The NCDEX platform – structure, exchange membership, risk management, clearing and settlement system and commodities traded on the NCDEX platform.

Application of Commodity Futures Instruments available for trading - forward contracts, introduction to futures and options, payoff for F&O, using futures versus options. Pricing commodity futures - investment assets versus consumption assets, the cost of carry model, the futures basis. Using commodity futures for hedging, speculation and arbitrage.

Trading, Clearing and Settlement Trading - futures trading system, entities in the trading system, commodity futures trading cycle, order types and trading, parameters, margins for trading in futures, charges, hedge limits. Clearing and settlement - clearing, settlement, risk management, margining at NCDEX and Standard Portfolio Analysis of Risk (SPAN).

Regulatory Framework of Commodity Derivatives Rules governing commodity derivatives exchanges, participants, investor grievances and arbitration. Electronic Spot Exchange - NCDEX Spot Exchange Ltd. (NSPOT). Financial Derivatives – An Introduction. Financial Future contracting: nature and types of

Future Contracts, History of future financial markets, traders in future markets, uses of

future contracts, growth of future markets. Future markets Trading: Trading Mechanism

in future and forward markets, Pricing of Future Contracts, Spreads, the clearing house,

regulation future markets.

Hedging Strategies Using Futures: Devising a hedging Strategy, short term interest rate futures, long term interest rate futures, Stock Index Futures.

Suggested Readings : 1. Chatnani, (2010), Commodity Markets, 1st edition, Tata McGraw Hill. 2. Kleinman, George, (2001), Commodity Futures & Options, 2nd (revised, illustrated

692

edition), Prentice Hall. 3. Stephens, John. (2001), Managing Commodity Risk, John Wiley & Sons. 4. Hirschey, (2010), Investments: Analysis and Behaviour, 1st edition, Tata McGraw Hill. 5. Indian Institute of Banking & Finance, (2007), Commodity Derivatives, Macmillan India Ltd. 6. Commodities Market Module, Workbook from NSE. 1.Hull, John C.: Options, Futures and Other Derivative Securities 2nd ed., New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India, 1996.

693

MBA-FM-404 FOREIGN EXCHANGE MANAGEMENT



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objective: The objective of this course is to impart knowledge to students regarding the theory and practice of Foreign Exchange management.

Course Outlines: Meaning of the term foreign exchange, foreign exchange market, nature, features, participants and structure, foreign exchange quotation; Trading in currency.

International monetary systems: historical background and structure, exchange rate determination, theories, parity conditions, Flexible vs fixed exchange rates

Forward Exchange Market: nature, participants, forward contracts, premiums & discounts, forward vs future contracts. Currency futures market, introduction, features & structure. Currency option market: determinants of market value of currency option.

Foreign Exchange exposure: introduction, nature , magnitude, types of exposure: transaction, translation & economic; their measurement & management

Convertibility of rupee & liberalized exchange rate mechanism(LERA) system. An overview of Indian Foreign Exchange Control, RBI Guidelines, important provisions of FEMA

Suggested Readings: 1. “Julian Walmsley”, Foreign Exchange & Money Markets Guide, John wiley, 2006. 2. “Bimitris and N.Shyrafos”, New Technology of Financial Management, John wiley, 2006. 3. “Surendra.s.Yadav, P.K.Jain and Max peyrard”, Foreign Exchange Markets understanding derivatives & other instrucments, Macmillan. 4. “B.P.Mathur”, Foreign Money in India, Macmillan 5. “Yarbrough”, The World Economy, Trade & Finance, 7th edition, Cengage learning . 6. “Alan C Shapir”, Multinational Financial Management 7. “Yadav”, Foreign Exchange Markets, Macmillan, 2007.

694

2. RETAILING & LOGISTICS MBA-RM-301 RETAIL BRAND MANAGEMENT




Objective: The objective of this course is to impart knowledge to students regarding the theory and practice of Brand Management and retail store.. Course Contents:

Brand–Definition, Evolution of Brands, Functions of Brand, Role of Brand, Brand management

and retailing, The concept of retail brand, Retail brand management –brand architecture,

Brand extension – Retail co-branding ,Private labels, Characteristics of good brand name.

Management of retail brand : Brand personality, Brand image and consumer concept of self

image, Brand loyalty, Brand equity, Brand Value: Definition, Core Brand values, Value

creation, Porter’s value chain, Brand Identity & Positioning: Meaning of Brand identity, Need

for Identity & Positioning, Dimensions of brand identity, Brand identity prism, Brand

positioning – Meaning, Point of parity & Point of difference, Positioning guidelines and re-

launch, Brand revitalization, Managing the brands over time- Functional brands, symbolic

brands, experiential brands, concept management, forces affecting brands, brands

revitalization and brand elimination

Branding strategies for retail business, Brand Valuation- Meaning, approaches of brand

valuation; cost based approach, market based approach, royalty approach, discounted cash flow

approach, interbrand approach, Choosing the valuation method,

Suggested Readings : 1. Harsh V Verma: Brand Management: text and cases, Excel Books, 2008. 2. S. A. Chunawalla: Compendium of Brand Management, Himalaya Publishing House,

2004. 3. Kapferer, J N. : Strategic Brand Management, New York, Free Press, 1992. 4. Up shaw, Lyhh B. : Building Brand Identity: A Strategy for Success in a Hostile Market

place, New York, John Wiley, 1995. 5. Keller, Kevin Lana : Strategic Brand Management, Prentice Hall, 1998. 6. A J Lamba , The art of Retailing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing, 2003.

695

MBA-RM-302 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR Max. Marks: 100



Objectives: The basic objective of this course is to develop an understanding about the consumer decision – making process and its applications in marketing function of firms.

Course Contents: Consumer Behaviour: Meaning, Nature, Scope and Significance of its Study for Retailers. Consumer Research: Role and Process. Consumer Decision Making Process: A Detailed Study of Various Stages and their Marketing Implications. Psychological Factors Influencing Consumer Behaviour- A Detailed Study of the Concepts, Theories and Principles of Perception, Learning, Motivation, Personality & Self Concept and Attitude and their Marketing Implications.

Group Influences on Consumer Behaviour- A Detailed Study of the Influences of Family and Reference Groups and their Marketing Implications. Impact of Culture, Subculture and Social Class on Consumer Behaviour

Communicating with Consumers- A Study of the Concepts of Opinion Leadership and Diffusion of Innovation along with their Marketing Implications. Industrial Buying Behaviour, Consumer Behaviour Audit.

Suggested Readings:

Schiffman, LG and LL Kanuk, Consumer Behaviour, Pearson Education Blackwell, RD, PW Miniard and JF Angel, Consumer Behaviour, Cengage

Learning India Pvt. Ltd. Peter, JP and JC Olson, Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy, McGraw

Hill. Handerson, S, Consumer Behaviour in Theory and Action, John Wiley and Sons. Assel,H: Consumer Behaviour- A Strategic Approach, Houghton Miffin. Loudon and A Della, Consumer Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill. Hawkins, DL, DL Mothersbaugh and Amit Mookerjee, Consumer Behaviour:

Building Marketing Strategy, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 11th Edition. Solomon, Michael R, Consumer Behaviour, Prentice Hall, 10th Edition, 2012.

696

MBA-RM-303 RETAIL LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The objective of this course is to enable students understand the importance and dynamics of a firm’s physical distribution functions and management of its supply chain. Course Contents: Introduction to Supply Chain Management. Supply Chain Management in Retailing Context. Benefits of Efficient Supply Chain Management to Retailers. Pull and Push Supply Chains. Information Flows in Supply Chain. The Physical Flow of Merchandise within Supply Chain. The Distribution Centre and its Activities. Reverse Logistics, Logistics for Fulfilling Catalog and Internet Orders, Outsourcing Logistics. Retailers- Vendors Collaboration in SCM- EDI, Sharing Information, VMI (Vendor-Managed Inventory) and CPFR (Collaborative Planning, Forecasting an Replenishment). RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) and its Functions. Supply Chain Inventory Management- EOQ Models, Reorder Point Models and Multichelon Inventory Systems. Role of Information Technology and Electronic Commerce in SCM. Mathematical Foundations of Supply Chain Solutions- A Brief Introduction. Suggested Readings

Handfield, RD and EL Nochols, Introduction to Supply Chain Management,

Prentice Hall.

Chopra, S and Peter Meindel, Supply Chain management: Strategy, Planning and

Operations, PHI.

Levy, M, BA Weitz and A Pandit, Retailing Management, Tata McGraw Hill.

David, SL, P Kamnisky and ES Levi, Designing and Managing the Supply Chain:

Concept, Strategies and Case Studies, Tata McGraw Hill

Stock, J and D Lambert, Strategic Logistics Management, Tata Mcgraw Hill.

697

MBA-RM-304 RETAIL MARKETING COMMUNICATION



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The course will focus on manufactures, perspective on retailers and understanding of the retail business. Course Contents: Communication: Definition, process and objectives of communication, Communication strategy and communication effects, Marketing communication planning Retail communication mix- Advertising: Significance of advertising in retail sector, Benefits of retail advertising, Types of advertising, Objectives, Retail advertisement campaign process, Push and pull strategy for retailers, Media planning, selection and scheduling in retailing, Media vehicles used in Indian retail sector Sales Promotion: Objectives, types and advantages of sales promotion in retailing, Steps in designing retail sales promotions Relationship Marketing and Loyalty Schemes, The growth of retail relationship marketing scheme, Life-time value analysis, Design and implementation of relationship marketing scheme, Defining loyalty for retailers, Loyalty cards Personal Selling: Objectives and types of personal selling, Identifying and overcoming objections during selling process, Retail selling process Public Relations: Importance of PR activities, Micro marketing in retailing,Visual merchandising and point of sale, IMC, Retail strategies, Measuring merchandising effectiveness Suggested Readings:

1.David Gilbert- Retail Marketing Management 2. L. Percy- Strategic integrated marketing communication: theory and Practice 3. P.R. Smith and Ze Zook- Marketing Communications: Intergarting offline and online with social media 4. Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management 5. Chetan Bajaj, Rajnish Tuli and Nidhi Srivastava-Retail Management 6. Gibson G. Vedamani- Retail Management

698

SEMESTER-IV MBA-RM-401 INTERNATIONAL RETAILING



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The basic objective of this course is to acquaint the students with environmental, procedural, institutional and decisional aspects of international retailing. Course Contents: International Marketing- Concept, Importance, International Marketing Research and Information System, Future of International Marketing, India’s Presence in International Marketing, Process of internationalization International Retailing: Trends in International Retailing, Motives of International Retailing, International Retail Environment, Global retail strategy- Role of retailing, Retail strategy, Wheel of retailing, Retail institutions by ownership, Retail institutions by store-based strategy mix, Global retailers Selection of Retail Market, Market entry methods- Flagship stores, Organic growth, Mergers and acquisition, Joint ventures, Franchising, Concessions, Exporting and wholesaling and Internet. Segmentation, Targeting and positioning, Retail-mix: Trading area analysis, site evaluation, site selection, Development of merchandise plans, implementation of merchandise plans, category management, Retail pricing, Financial aspects of retailing, Retail strategy and execution, Development of global retail strategy in food and non- food business, Retail communication mix strategy, Contemporary trends in retailing, Future of retailing Suggested Readings: 1. Swapana Pradhan- Retailing Management 2. Barry Berman, Joel R Evans- Retail Management; A Strategic Approach 3. George H, Lucas Jr., Robert P. Bush, Larry G Greshan- Retailing 4. A. J. Lamba- The Art of Retailing 5 Nicholas Alexander and Anne Marie Doherty: International Retailing

699

MBA-RM-402 RETAIL SERVICES MANAGEMENT



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: This course aims to abreast the students with various principles and models of retails service marketing Course Contents: Retail Service Management- Meaning, Nature and Scope. Characteristics and Classification of Retail Services. Problems Associated with Retail Services Marketing and ways to overcome the said problems. Retail Marketing Mix- A Study of 8 Ps. Retail Marketing Environment. Retail Service Quality- Concept and Prominent Models viz. SERVQUAL Model, GAP Model etc. The Concept and Approaches to Retail Service Recovery. Retail Relationship Marketing- Issues and Challenges. The Concept of Retail Service Management Trinity- An Introduction to Internal Marketing, External Marketing, internal Marketing and Interactive Marketing. Managing Demand and Capacity in Retail Service Operations. Differentiating and Positioning Retail Services. Measuring and Managing Retail Service Productivity. Role of Physical Evidence and Atmospherics in Enhancing Store Appeal. SUGGESTED READINGS: 1. Zeithaml V A and Bitner, M J. Services Marketing; McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012. 2. Lovelock, Christopher H. Service Marketing: People, Technology Strategy; 4th edition Pearson Education, New Delhi. 3. Hoffman & Bateson, Essentials of Service Marketing; Thomson Learning; Mumbai. 4. Shankar, Ravi, Service Marketing, Excel, 2002. 5. Rampal M.K. & Gupta SC; Service Marketing; Galgotia Publishing Company, New Delhi. 6. Rust, Zahorik and Kenningham, Services Marketing. 7. Medonald, Malcom and Payne, A Marketing Planning for services. Butterworth Heinemann, 1996. 10. Sarinivasan R., “Service Marketing” PHI. 11. Chaudhary Nimit & Monika Chaudhary, “A text book of Marketing & Services” McMillan. 12. Rama K., Rao Mohana, “Service Marketing” Pearson.

700

MBA-RM-403 RETAIL CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT Max. Marks: 100



Objectives: The objective of this course is to develop insights into emerging trends in the service in a developing economy and tackle issues involved in the retail customer relationship management of services on national basis.

Course Contents:

Customer Relationship Management- Meaning and Reasons for Growth. Reasons for

Adopting CRM in Retail Sector. Transaction Marketing V/S Relationship Marketing.

Economics of CRM.

CRM Process- Collecting Customer Database, Analysing Customer Data and Identifying

Target Customers, Developing and Implementing CRM Programmes.

The Ladder of Loyalty and Bonding for Customer Relationship.

Technological Tools for CRM- Components for e-CRM Solutions, Product Offering in

CRM Market Space, Contact Centres for CRM.

Implementing CRM- Devising Roadmap for CRM Implementation, Developing

Relationship Orientation and Building Organisational Capabilities, Implementing a

Technology Solution for CRM, Budgeting for Attraction V/S Retention.

Formulation and Evaluation of Customer Relationship Programmes.

Suggested Readings

Levy, M, BA Weitz and A Pandit, Retailing Management, Tata McGraw Hill.

Shainesh, G and JN Sheth, Customer Relationship Management- A Strategic

Perspective, Macmillan India Ltd.

Kristin, L, Customer Relationship Management, Tata McGraw Hill.

Buttle, F, Customer Relationship Management, Butterworth-Heinemann

701

MBA-RM-404 RETAIL MALL AND RISK MANAGEMENT



Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Contents:

Global Overview of Retail and Mall Management, Introduction to Malls, Site Selection

Process, Understanding and Review of Commercial Lease, Tenant Mix, Marketing

Planning and Branding of Malls.

Maintenance Management, Shopping Entertainment, Shopping Centers, HRM planning

and Organization Structure.

Mall Atmospherics Management: Meaning, Role, Components;

Risk assessment techniques and reducing personal/safety risks, Techniques of preventing

violence against staff, Improve Cash Security, Major causes of Retail Crime, Prevention

and deterrence of Retail Crime, Security and Loss Control Techniques, Identifying and

Dealing with Potential Shoplifters.

Suggested Readings

* Levy, M, BA Weitz and A Pandit, Retailing Management, Tata McGraw Hill.

* Swapana Pradhan, Retailing Management, Tata McGraw Hill * Mall Management- Operating in Indian Retail Space, Tata McGraw Hill * Gilbert, D, Retail Marketing, Pearson Education. * Sheikh, Arif, mall Management, Himalya Publishing House. * Das, A, Mall Management with case studies, Taxman Allied Services (p) Ltd.

702

MARKETING MBA-MKT-301: CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR

Total Marks:100 External:60 Internal:40


Course Outlines: Consumer Behaviour- Meaning, Nature, Scope and Significance of its study. Consumer Research: Role of Consumer Research, The Consumer Research Process. Consumer Decision Making Process- A detailed study of various stages and their marketing implications. Psychological Factors Influencing Consumer Behaviour- A detailed study of the concepts, theories and principles of Perception, Learning, Motivation, Personality, self concept and Attitude and their marketing implications. Group influences on consumer behaviour- A detailed study of the influences of Family and Reference Groups and their marketing implications.

Impact of Culture, Sub-Culture and Social Class on the consumer behaviour.

Communicating with consumers. A study of the concepts of Opinion Leadership and Diffusion of Innovation along with their marketing implications.

Suggested Readings: 1 Fred, D. Reynolds & : Consumer Behaviour

Willaim D. Wells 2. Schiffman, Kanuk : Consumer Behaviour 3. Rogerm D. Blackwell, : Cases in Consumer Engel F. and Behaviour

James David T. Kollat 4. Wilhelms and Henimeri : Consumer Economics. Principles and

Problems 5. Flemming, Hanson : Consumer Choice 6. Stuart Henderson, Britt : Consumeer Behaviour in Theory and in

Action 7. Ptrer, D. Beneet and Harold, : Consumer Behaviour

H. Kassarijian 8. Rom, J Markin : The Psychology of Consumer Behaviour 9. Assael, H. : Consumer Behaviour & Marketing Action,

Ohia, South Western, 1995 10. Engle J.F. etc. : Consumer behaviour, Chicago, Dryden

Press, 1993 11. Howard, John A. etc. : Consumer Behaviour in Marketing

Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Prentice HallInc.., 1989.

703

MBA-MKT-302: PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Total Marks: 100 External: 60 Internal: 40


Course Outlines: Product Management: Product concepts and levels, Product life cycle and marketing

strategy implications, New Product Development Process. Product mix and line

decision, Understanding Brands: Strategic relevance of branding, brand hierarchy and

brand name decision, Brand value and value creation, Brand Personality, Brand image,

Brand identity, Brand positioning and Brand equity. Managing line and brand extensions,

Brand portfolio, Managing brands and brand revitalization. Financial aspects of branding,

Branding in different sectors: Customer, Industrial, retail and service brands.

Suggested Readings: 1. Keller, Kevin lane: Strategic Brand Management, Prentice Hall.

2. Kepferer, J.N.: Strategic Brand Management, New York, Free Press.

3. Mathur , U.C. : Product and Brand Management, Excel Books.

4. Verma, H.V.: Brand Management.

704

MBA-MKT-303: INTERNATIONAL MARKETING

Total Marks:100

External:60 Internal:40


Course Outlines: International Marketing: Definitions, nature, scope and benefits of international

marketing, Domestic marketing versus international marketing. EPRG framework,

Process of international marketing and emerging opportunities in international marketing,

International Marketing Environment: Political, economic, cultural and legal. International

Marketing planning and selection, International Markets Segmentation and target

markets, Basic modes for entry. International marketing mix: planning the product

strategy, branding, packaging, product warranties and services; pricing strategies, methods

of financing and means of payment, International communication strategy, international

distribution channels and selecting distribution channels. Suggested Readings:

1. Sak Onkvisit and John Shaw : International Marketing (Analysis and strategy),

PHI, N.Delhi.

2. Vern Terpestra and Ravi Sarathy: International Marketing, Thomson.

3. Philip R. Cateora, John L Graham and Prashant Salwan: International Marketing,

Tata McGraw Hill.

4. Rakesh Mohan Joshi: International Marketing, Oxford.

5. P.K. Vasudeva: International Marketing, Excel Books.

705

MBA-MKT-304: RURAL MARKETING

Max. Marks- 100 Internal- 40

External- 60 Time: 3 Hours


Course Objective: Course objective is to acquaint students with the complexities of Marketing in Rural Areas.

Course Outline:

Rural Marketing-Definition, Nature and Scope. Rural Markets-characteristics, importance

and challenges & potential in rural markets. Rural Marketing Environment. Understanding

rural consumers- buying behaviour models , factors affecting consumer behavoiour ,

buying process. Rural Market Research- meaning, sources for conducting rural marketing

research, rural market research process, limitations and challenges in rural marketing

research. Rural Markets and STP(segmenting ,targeting and positioning). Rural Marketing

Mix: Product strategy- product concepts and classification, new product development,

product life cycle, packaging and branding in rural India. Pricing strategy- objectives,

factors affecting pricing, methods of pricing. Communication strategy- objectives, methods

and challenges in rural communication. Rural Distribution strategy- distribution channels

and organizing personal selling in rural markets. Role of IT in rural marketing(e-Choupals

etc.).

Suggested Readings:

1 Balram Dogra and Karminder Ghuman: Rural Marketing-Concepts& Practices, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd.

2 Awadhesh Kumar Singh and Satyaprakash Pandey: Rural Marketing-Indian Perspective, New Age International (P) limited Publishers.

3 Pradeep Kashyap and Siddhartha Raut: The Rural Marketing, Biztantra. 4 C.S.G Krishnamacharyulu and Lalitha Ramkrishnan: Rural Marketing- Text &

Cases, Pearson Education Asia. 5 K.S.Habeeb-Ur-Rahman: Rural Marketing In India, Himalaya Publishing House. 6 Ramkishen. Y: New Perspectives In Rural and Agricultural Marketing, Jaico

Publishing House. 7 T.P.Gopalaswamy: Rural Marketing, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

706

MBA-MKT-401: MARKETING OF SERVICES


Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Outline Growth of Service Sector in a developing country like India- Trends and Reasons. Services- Meaning, Nature and Characteristics. Goods- Service Categorization. Problems Associated with Marketing of Services on account of unique characteristics of Services. Overcoming problems associated with services marketing. Service Marketing Environment. Service Marketing Mix- A brief introduction to the concepts of product, price, place, promotion, people, physical evidence, process and productivity. Service Management Triangle- a study of the concepts of internal marketing, external marketing and interactive marketing. Service Quality- concept and prominent models. Service Recovery- concept and principles. Relationship Marketing in services. Service differentiation and positioning. Controlling the service marketing efforts. Application of services marketing- Banking Services, Insurance Services, Tourism Services and Health Services. Suggested Readings

1. Zeithmal, Services Marketing, TMH 2. Cristopher Lovelock, Services Marketing, Pearson Education 3. Harsh Vardhan Verma, Services Marketing

707

MBA-MKT-402: INDUSTRIAL MARKETING



Objectives The objective of this course is to lay a foundation for an understanding of the complex dimension of the Industrial Marketing Course contents Nature and scope of International Marketing: Differences between Industrial Marketing

and consumer marketing; understanding Industrial Markets; Organizational Customers;

Classifying Industrial products; nature of demand in Industrial Markets; Industrial Buyer

Behavior; Industrial Purchasing System: Industrial Marketing Research: Industrial

Marketing Strategy: Strategic planning. Assessing Marketing Opportunities,

segmentation of Industrial Markets, Product Positioning: Product Decision and

Strategies; Industrial Services; Industrial Pricing: Price Determinants, Pricing Policies,

Pricing Decisions, Formulating Channel Strategy; Logistics Management; Industrial

Marketing Communication: Sales force Management, Advertising and sales promotion.

Value and vendor analysis.

Suggested readings

1. Reader Robert R. Industrial Marketing Analysis, Planning and control Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Prentice Hal Inc. 1991.

2. Vitale; Business to Business Marketing; Thomson Learning, Mumbai. 3. Havalder Krishna K, Industrial Marketing, TMH, New Delhi. 4. Corey E Raymond, Industrial Marketing: Cases and concepts, 3rd ed.

Englewood cliffs, New Jersey Prentice Hall Inc. 1983. 5. Gross AC Business Marketing Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1993. 6. Hill, Richard etc. Industrial Marketing. Homewood Illinois, Richard D. Irwin,

1975. 7. Webster, FE. Industrial Marketing Strategy, 2nd ed. New York John Wiley,

1979. 8. Alexender S. Ralph cross – Industrial Marketing. 9. Reeder Robert R., “Industrial Marketing” PHI.

708

MBA-MKT-403: SUPPLY CHAIN AND LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT


Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Outline Distribution Channels- Role, Functions, Flows and Levels. Channel Design- Meaning

and detailed process. Distribution Network Planning. Channel Management Decisions.

Channel Integration and Systems.

Logistics- Concept and Significance. Integrated Logistics Management. Market Logistics

Planning. Market Logistics Decisions- Order Processing, Warehousing, Inventory and

Transportation.

Transportation Alternatives- Pros and Cons. Economics of Transportation. Transportation

Models.

Stocking Policies. Introduction to Central Warehouse Acts.

Packaging- Principles, Functions and Types. An introduction to Containerisation.

Role of Freight and Insurance in Logistics.

Concept of Supply Chain and its Strategic Role in the Organisation.

Role of IT in Logistics and Supply Chain.

Suggested Readings.

• Purchasing and Supply Management- Dobler and Burt

• Strategic Logistics Management- Lambert.

• Logistical Management- Bowersox.

• Logistics and Supply Chain Management- Christopher

• Marketing Management- Kotler.

709

MBA-MKT-404: STRATEGIC MARKETING


Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Outline Strategic Marketing Management- Meaning, Nature and Scope. Difference between

strategic marketing and marketing management. Tasks and principles of strategic

marketing. Business Strategy- Meaning and Components.

External Analysis- Customer Analysis, Competitor Analysis, Market Analysis and

overall environmental analysis.

Internal Analysis- A detailed study of various financial and non-financial techniques.

Choice of a strategic option using prominent portfolio analysis techniques such as BCG,

GE, Shell Matrix etc.

An analysis of prominent strategies: Differentiation Strategy, Low Cost Strategies, Focus

Strategies, Preemptive Move, Growth and Diversification Strategies and Global

Strategies. Obtaining Sustainable Competitive Advantage.

Implementation and Control of Marketing Strategies- Various Issues and Techniques. Suggested Readings

1. Aaker, D, Strategic Market Management, Wiley Publications.

2. Cravens and Piercy, Strategic Marketing, New Age Publications

3. Graeme Drummond, John Ensor, Strategic Marketing-Planning and

Implementation, Butterworth-Heinemann.

710

4. HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT MBA-HRM-301: Organizational Behaviour


Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Outlines: Organizational Behaviour: Meaning, nature, Historical Background of Organizational Behaviour, Approaches and Challenges of Organizational Behaviour; Organizational Culture, Socialization and Mentoring. Individual Behaviour- personality, learning , emotional intelligence, social perception and imprison management . Foundation of group behaviour- group- meaning, development, types, group decision making, work team and team effectiveness. Leadership-meaning, leadership styles, behavioural theories. Contingency theory, charismatic leadership, transformation leadership and transactional leadership. Helping, Cooperative and Conflicts in Organizations:- Prosocial Behaviour: Helping others at work places, Organizational Citizenship Behaviour and whistle- blowing; Cooperation: Individual factors and cooperation, organizational factors and cooperation; Conflict: meaning and nature, causes and effects. Modern perspectives of Conflict, Conflict Management Techniques. Organizational Change : Nature and meaning, forces for organizational change, types of change, models of OC, Lewins Model, System Model of change, Registance to change, Building support for change. Organizational Development: Meaning, Characteristics of O.D. steps in Organization Development Process, V a l u e s , Assumptions and beliefs in O.D. Ethics fo r O.D. Professionals. O.D. Interventions; an overview; T- Groups (sensitivity Training Group), Life and career Planning; Transactional Analysis, Behaviour Modeling. Suggested Readings: 1. Robbins, S.P. : Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi. 2. Luthans, F. : Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill Book Company. 3. Daft, R.L. : Organizational theory and Design, Thompson Publication. 4. Kreitner and : Organizational Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Kinicki Co., New Delhi. 5. Greenbug, J. & : Behaviour in Organizations, Prentice Hall of India, New Baron, R.A. Delhi. 6. VSP Rao : Organization Behaviour, Excel Books.

711

MBA-HRM-302 : INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR POLICY

Max. Marks- 100 Internal- 40

External- 60 Time: 3 Hours

Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: Organizational Efficiency and performance are intricately interlinked with industrial relations. This course is an attempt to appreciate the conceptual and practical aspects of industrial relations. Course Outlines: Industrial Rela tions : Evaluation and Growth, Scope, Features, Approaches to IR, Functions. Industrial Relations in India: Forces shipping, The IR in India, Basic Characteristics of IR in India, Role of Government, Management, Labor. Trade Unions: Definition, Objectives, Features, Functions. History of Trade Unionism in India. Factors Affecting growth of Trade Unions, Major problems faced by Trade Unions. Trade Unions Act 1926. Participative Management : Definition, Scope, Nature, Works Committees, Joint Management Councils, Shop Councils. Collective Bargaining. Industrial Disputes: An Introduction. Forms, Causes and Remedies, Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, Grievance Management. Industrial Relations and the Government National Commission on Labor. ILO: Objectives, Structure and Procedure for admission as member. Suggested Readings: 1 P.C. Tripathi, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2002 2 C.B. Mamoria, Satish Mamoria, S.V. Gankar, Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalaya Publishing House,2008 3 Jayashree Kulkarni, Hiremathi, Participative Management and Industrial Performance, Anmol Publications Pvt Ltd , 2007 4 B.D. Singh , Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2008 5 B.D. Singh , Industrial Relations, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2008 6 B.D.Singh, Labour laws for manager, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2007 7 L. Mishra, Case Laws on Industrial Relations, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2008. 8 Sen – ‘Industrial Relations in India’, Macmillan India Ltd., New Delhi, 2008. 9 P.Subba Rao- Industrial Relations , Himalaya Publishing House ,New Delhi.

712

MBA-HRM-303: MANAGEMENT OF INTERPERSONAL GROUP PROCESSES Max. Marks- 100

Internal- 40 External- 60

Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Objectives: The purpose of this course is to advance understanding regarding interpersonal and group processes and help the students to examine and develop process facilitation skills mainly through laboratory and other experience based methods of learning. Course Contents Groups:- nature and meaning, types of group, group dynamics; Group as a Medium of Learning; Group Development and norms; Interpersonal Influence Processes: Group Cohesiveness; Group Conformity, Group Norms; Group Obedience; Group Think, Group Shift; Group Discipline; Social Loafing and Social Facilitation; Social Interaction Processes: Accommodation, Assimilation, Cooperation, Competitive and Group Conflicts. FIRB- Fundamentals of Interpersonal Relation Orientation Behaviour. Interpersonal Communication; Interpersonal Awareness and Feedback Process; Interpersonal Trust; Group Decision Making; Group Synergy; Team Building. Group Performance; Teams and Teams Effectiveness . Power and Influence in Organizations. Suggested Readings

• Bennis, WG. Essay in Interpersonal Dynamics. U.S.A., Dorsey Press, 1979. • Kolb, D. etc. Organizational Behaviour: An Experiential Approach. 5th ed.

Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Prentice Hall Inc., 1991. • Kolb, D. etc. Organizational Behaviour: Practical Readings for Management 5th

ed. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Prentice Hall Inc., 1991. • Mainiero, LA & Tromley CL. Developing Managerial Skills in OB. New Delhi,

Prentice Hall of India, 1985. • Moore, MD. etc. Inside Organizations: Understanding the Human Dimensions

London, Sage, 1988.

713

MBA-HRM-304 GLOBAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT Max. Marks- 100

Internal- 40 External- 60 Time: 3 Hrs

Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Outlines: Core concepts in managing human resources in the global business environment; Understanding and managing the ‘culture’ factor in GHRM; Approaches to understanding of cultural diversity; managing cultural diversity; The Contingency Matrix approach to GHRM; Global staffing and staff flow practices; Global organisation design; Learning, training & development of global employees; Performance management in MNCs; Global compensation and benefits; MNCs and industrial relations trends; Emerging global HRM practices. Industrial Relations in a Comparative Perspective. Emerging Trends in Employee Relations and Employee Involvement .International Labour Standards. HR/IR issues in MNCs and Corporate Social Responsibility. Suggested Readings:

• Adler,NJ. International Dimensions of Organizational Behaviour. Boston, Kent Publishing, 1991. • Bartlett,Cand Ghoshal, S.Transnational Management:Text, Cases and Readings in Cross Border Management. Chicago, Irwin, 1995. • Dowling. P J. etc. International Dimensions of Human Resource Management 2nd ed. California,Wadsworth, 1994. • Hofstede,G. Cultures Consequence: International Differences inWork Related Values. London, Sage, 1984. • Marcic, D and Puffer, S M. Management International: Cases, Exercise and Readings. St. Paul,West Publishing, 1994. • Mead, R. International Management: Cross Cultural dimensions. BlackWell, Camb., Mass., 1994. • Mendenhall, M. etc., Global Management. Cambridge assachusetts.,Blackwell, 1995. • The Global Challenge- framework for international human resource management, Evans, Pucik, Barsoux, Tata McGraw-Hill Irwin. • International Human Resource Management-Peter J Dowling,Denice E Welch, Cengage Learning • International Human Resorce Management, K Aswathappa, Sadhna Das, Mc Graw Hill Companies • International Human Resource Management - Monir H Tayeb –Oxford University Press - 2005.

714

SEMESTER-IV MBA-HRM-401: HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT AND STRATEGIES



COURSE CONTENTS: HRD Introduction: Introduction of HRD Methods, Changing paradigm of HRD -

Concepts, Scope, Objectives, Principles, Framework, Subsystems. Contribution of

its subsystems to HRD goals. Planning and organizing HRD system-principles in

designing HRD system – Linkage between HRD and organizational growth –

Simultaneous Vs Sequential introduction of HRDS – HRD models-HRD in Indian

industries- Challenges of Future HRD Professionals, Roles and Competency,

requirements of HRD Professionals. Framework of HR-The strategic HR Framework

Approach, The integrative framework, Human Capital Appraisal Approach, HRD Score

Card Approach, P-CMM Approach. HRD for Workers; HRD Intervention; HRD

Approaches for coping with Organisational Changes. Future of HRD in India. Case

Study of HRD Implementation in Indian Organisations.

Suggested Readings

1. Dayal, Ishwar. Successful Applications of HRD. New Delhi, New Concepts,1996.

2. Dayal, Ishwar. Designing HRD Systems. New Delhi, Concept. 1993.

3. Kohli, Uddesh & Sinha, Dharni P. HRD - Global Challenges & Strategies in 2000

A. D. New Delhi, ISTD, 1995.

4. Maheshwari, B L.& Sinha, Dharni P. Management of Change Through HRD.New

Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991. 5. Pareek, U. etc. Managing Transitions: The HRD Response. New Delhi, Tata

McGraw Hill, 1992.

6. Udai Halder, Human Resource Development,Oxford Publications.

7. Rao. T.V. Future of HRD. McMillan India Ltd. (2003).

715

MBA-HRM -402 COMPETENCY MAPPING AND TALENT MANAGEMENT Max. Marks: 100

External: 60 Internal: 40

Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Content: Introduction: History & Origin of Competency, KSA v/s Competency, Reasons for Popularity of Competency, Views Against Competency, Definitions, Components of competency, Skill, Knowledge & Motive, Trait & Self-Concept, Iceberg Model of Competency, Competency Categories: Threshold Competencies, Differentiating Competencies, Generic or Key Competencies, Functional or Technical Competencies, Leadership or Managerial Competencies; Competency Mapping: Definition, Important Aspects, Process of Competency Mapping; Steps in Developing Competency Model; Competency models: Leadership and managerial competency models,5 level Competency Based Model, HR Generic & Specific Competency Model, Technical and Behavioural Competency Model, Supervisory Generic Competency Model, Job Based Competency Model ; Competencies Assessment and uses : Strategies to address the gaps, Applications of Competency Mapping: Competency based Recruitment and Selection, Competency Based Performance Appraisal, Competency Based Succession & Career Planning, Competency Based Compensation and Benefits, Competency based Training & Development.

Key Concepts of Talent Management - Capability, talent, potential, competency, performance, performance attributes, Foundation of Talent: Will to Create, Will to plan, will to do and will to lead, Four Components of Talent Management: Procurement, Performance Differentiation, Performance & Potential Categorisation - Defining , Sustaining, Nurturing & Developing talents, Managing gender and diversity in Talent Management, International practices in Talent Management. References

1. Competency Mapping by Seema Sanghi , Sage Publications 2. Competency Mapping by R K Sahu, Excel Publications. 3. Competence at Work, by Spencer and Spencer, American Society of Training and

Development. 4. Organizational Behaviour - Human Behavior at work – by John.W.Newstrom and

Keith Davis Tata McGraw Hill, l1/e, 2003. 5. Human Relations in organizations. Robert N. Lussier, 6th edition, Mc-Graw Hill

Education. 6. Development Management Skills, Whetten & Cameron, 7th Ed. Pearson, PHI. 7. Understanding OB – Udai Parek, Oxford University Press. 8. Theories of Personality – Calvin S Hall Et Al, Wiley Publication 9. Seven Habits of Highly Effective People, Stephen R Covey, Simon & Schuster 10. Training in Interpersonal Skills – tips for managing People at work, Stephen Robbins,Et al, Pearson, PHI

716

MBA-HRM-403 COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT


Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Contents: Compensation Definition, Goals of Compensation System, Compensation Strategy Monetary & Non-Monetary Rewards, Understanding the theory related to reward management, Understanding of wage differentials, internal alignment: defining internal alignment, Job Analysis, Job Evaluation, Person based Structure, Skill based structure, competency based structure. Determining External competitiveness: Defining competitiveness, Labour market factors, product market factors, organisation factors, Pay for performance plans: short term incentive plans, team incentive plan, long term incentive plans. Benefits options: legally required benefits, retirement and saving plans payment, life insurance, medical and medically related payment and miscellaneous benefits. Understanding compensation packages: compensation of chief executives, senior managers, R & D Staff, etc. Major Statutory provisions governing different components of reward systems: The Minimum Wages Act, 1948, The Payment of Wages Act, 1936, The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965. Working of different institutions related to reward system Like Wage Boards, Pay Commissions. Suggested Readings

1. Armstrong, Michel and Murlis, Helen. Reward Management: A Handbook of

Salary Administration. London, Kegan Paul, 1988. 2. Henderson, Richard I. (2004). Compensation Management: Rewarding

Performa nce. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd 3. Milkovich & Newman (2005). Compensation: Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi, Eighth Edition. 4. Henderson I.Richard, Compensation management in a knowledge based

world, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 9th edition.

717

MBA-HRM-404: LABOUR LEGISLATION AND INDUSTRIAL JURISPRUDENCE Max. Marks- 100

Internal- 40 External- 60

Time: 3 Hours Note: - The examiner will set eight questions in all. Question No. 1, comprising of five short answer type questions of 4 marks each, shall be compulsory and remaining questions will be of 10 marks each. In all, the students would be required to attempt five questions. Course Outlines: Introduction to law and the Indian legal system; Legal environment of business; Introduction to labour legislation; Labour Laws to regulate terms and conditions of work; Wage and social security; Trade and labour union laws. Globalisation and its impact on the world of Work; Employers’ Rights, Workers’ Rights and the State in the global economy as realised by the Domestic Labour Laws; Labour Law beyond borders; Labour Rights, Property Rights, and International Human Rights Trade Theory, Trade Policy and Development strategies as they relate to Worker interests; Labour standards in Indian Trade Law; Corporate Codes of Conduct; United Nations Organisation, and its functions in the context of the United Nations Charter.

General idea of jurisprudence, jurisprudence and industrial jurisprudence, supreme and subordinate labour enactments, industrial jurisprudence and the Indian Constitution; Vicarious liability; Rights and duties of both disciplinary proceedings - case study; Industrial justice and its various forms, jurisprudence and its limitations; Functions of judiciary and quasi-judiciary, interpretation of law; Principles of case laws; Procedural aspects; Civil procedure and criminal procedure. Suggested Readings:

• P.C. Tripathi, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations , Sultan Chand & Sons,2002

• C.B. Mamoria, Satish Mamoria, S.V. Gankar, Dynamics of Industrial

Relations,Himalaya Publishing House,2008 • Jayashree Kulkarni, Hiremathi ,Participative Management and Industrial

Performance,Anmol Publications Pvt Ltd , 2007 • B.D. Singh , Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Excel Books, New Delhi,

2008 • B.D. Singh , Industrial Relations, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2008 • B.D.Singh, Labour laws for manager, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2007 • L. Mishra, Case Laws on Industrial Relations, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2008. • Sen – ‘Industrial Relations in India’, Macmillan India Ltd., New Delhi, 2008. • Industrial Jurisprudence by A M Sarma, Himalaya Publication House, New Delhi.

10-A(718)

Scheme of Examination for Health and Physical Education From Session 2014-15 (B.A. 1st to 6th Semester)

SemesterTheory Marks

Internal Assessment

Time Practical Marks Total W.E. From

Session

Exa m t o be Con du cted

1st 60 15 3 hours -- 75 2014-15 Dec. 2014

2nd 60 15 3 hours 50 125 2014-15 May 2015

3rd 60 15 3 hours -- 75 2015-16 Dec. 2015

4th 60 15 3 hours 50 125 2015-16 May 2016

5th 60 15 3 hours -- 75 2016-17 Dec. 2016

6th 60 15 3 hours 50 125 2016-17 May 2017

Total 360 90 150 600

The above New Scheme of examination was approved and will be implemented for Health and Physical Education in B.A. in the following sessions:

1s t and 2nd Semester w.e.f. Session 2014-15

3rd and 4 th Semester w.e.f Session 2015-16

5 th and 6 th Semester w.e.f. Session 2016-17

Note: The students appearing in the 3 rd Semester Exams in Dec. 2014, 4 th Semester exams

in April/May 2015, 5 th Semester Exams in Dec. 2015 and 6 th Semester exams in April/May

2016 will follow the old scheme approved in 2013-14. The practical examination of these

students will be conducted with following pattern:

3rd and 4 th Semester Practical will be conducted together in 4th semester (April/May2015) 5 th

and 6 th Semester Practical will be conducted together in 6th semester (April/May 2016)

Work Load for teaching the Physical Education as an optional subject in B.A. will be as under:

x Six Periods per Week for each class (Four theories and two practical).

x Strength of students in practical class shall not exceed 25 students per group in any case.

x Keeping the view nature of practical and climatic conditions, it is recommended that all the practicals must be conducted before the theory exams in all even semesters.

Instructions for Paper- Setter:

The question paper will consist of five Units I, II, III, IV and V. Units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective Units of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Unit Vt h will consists of 10 short answer type questions, which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks for each question.

Instructions for Candidates

Candidates are required to attempt one question each from Unit I, II, III and IV. Unit - V is compulsory for all.

B.A. -1st Semester (Health & Physical Education) (From Session 2014-15)

Time- 3 hours Theory- 60 Marks (Internal Assessment- 15 Marks)

Unit - 1: Introduction to Physical Education- 1. Meaning, definition and scope of Physical Education. 2. Relationship of Physical Education with General Education 3. Aim, Objectives and Importance of Physical Education in modern society. 4. Misconceptions regarding Physical Education

Unit- II: Health & Hygiene 1. Meaning, definition and importance of Health. 2. Factors influencing Health. 3. Meaning and importance of Personal Hygiene 4. Hygiene of various body parts and Factors influencing Personal Hygiene

Unit- III: Introduction to Yoga 1. Yoga - Meaning, Concept and Historical development 2. Types of Yoga 3. Importance of yoga in healthy living 4. Pranayam - Meaning, types and their benefits.

Unit- IV: Introduction to Human Anatomy and Physiology 1. Meaning and definition of Human Anatomy and Physiology 2. Importance of Human Anatomy and Physiology in Physical Education 3. Definition of Cell, Tissue, Organ and System 4. Structure and Properties of Cell

10-A(720)


Singh Ajmer et.al. “Modern Text Book of Physical Education, Health and Sports”, Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana,(20 10).

Sharma, V.K, “Health & Physical Education” Saraswati House Pvt. Ltd . Daryagani, New Delhi. (2013).

Kang G.S. Deol N.S. “An introduction to Health and Physical Education 21 st century” Patiala (2008).

Singh Ajmer et. al. “Olympic Movement” Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana, (2000).

Sharma, V.K., ‘’ Yog Shiksha’’ Saraswati House Pvt.Ltd. Daryaganj, New Delhi (2011)

Kamlesh & Sangral, “Principles & History of Physical Education”, Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana.(2000)

Avelin C. Pearce., “Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses”Oxford University Press.New Delhi, (2003). .

Iyengar, B.K.S. “Light on life” Oxford, Pan Macmillan Ltd. (2005). Iyengar, B.K.S. “The Tree of Yoga” New Delhi, Harper Collins. (2009). Verma, K.K., “Health & Physical Education” Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana.(2005).

721

Text Books and References The question paper will consist of five Units I, II, III, IV and V. Units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective Units of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Unit Vt h will consists of 10 short answer type questions, which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks for each question.



B.A. -2nd Semester (Health & Physical Education) (From Session 2014-15)

Time- 3 hours Theory- 60 Marks (Internal Assessment- 15 Marks)

Unit – I Introduction to Health Education 1. Definition, Aim, Objectives and Scope of Health Education. 2. Importance of Health Education in modern society 3. First Aid: Meaning, Aim, Objectives and General Principles of First Aid. 4. First Aid for Common injuries - Bleeding, Burns, Electric Shock, Drowning and Snake Bite

Unit –II Historical Prospects of Physical Education 1. Pre-independence and Post – independence historical development of Physical Education in

India. 2. Role of IOA, SAI, NSNIS and YMCA in the development of Physical Education and Sports in

India. 3. Sports Policy of Haryana State 4. National Sports Policy

Unit II Introduction to Physical Fitness 1. Meaning, definition and importance Physical Fitness 2. Components and Principles of Physical Fitness 3. Factors influencing of Physical Fitness. 4. Meaning of Isometric, Isotonic and Isokinetic exercises

Unit IV Introduction to Human Anatomy and Physiology 1. Anatomy of Human Bone 2. Types and Function of bones in Human Body 3. Meaning and types of joints in Human Body. 4. Types of synovial joints in Human Body

Text Books and References

Sharma, V.K, “Health & Physical Education” Saraswati House Pvt. Ltd . Daryagani, New Delhi.(2013).

Kamlesh & Sangral,’’ Methods in Physical Education” Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana(2000).

Bucher Olsen and Willgoose; “The Foundation of Health” Prentice Hall inc.Englewood Fliffs,New Jersey,(1 976).

Turner S and Smith “School Health and Health Education” The C.V. Mos by Company St.Loius (1961).

Singh Ajmer et.al. “Modern Text Book of Physical Education, Health and Sports”, Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana,(20 10).



Kamlesh & Sangral, “Principles & History of Physical Education”, Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana.(2000)

Avelin C. Pearce., “Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses”Oxford University Press.New Delhi, (2003). .

Verma, K.K., “Health & Physical Education” Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana.(2005).

723

B.A. – 1st and 2nd Semester (Practical) (Health & Physical Education) (From

Session 2014-15)

Maximum Marks- 50

1. Any one game (With ground specifications, general rules and general skills) 1. kho

- kho 2. Badminton 3. Cricket

2. Name and identification of bones in Human Body

3. Athletics: Shot Put (Measurements & Basic Techniques)

Types of Starts - Crouch Start and standing starts (Basic Technique)

4. Viva – Voce and Practical File

10 Marks

10 Marks

(10+10) Marks

10 Marks





B.A. -3rd Semester (Health & Physical Education) (From Session 2015-16)

Time- 3 hours Theory- 60 Marks (Internal Assessment- 15 marks)

Concept of Safety Education Meaning, need and importance of Safety Education Sports Injuries: Types and causes Principles for prevention of sports Injuries. General treatment for common sports injuries i.e Abrasion, Contusion, Sprain , Strain, Fracture and Dislocation of joints

Unit –II Common Diseases 1. Meaning of Communicable and Non – Communicable diseases 2. Modes of transmission, prevention and control of communicable diseases. 3. Common diseases: HIV/ AIDS, Hepatitis, Dengue, Typhoid, Malaria and Influenza. 4. Allergy related diseases: Asthma and Sinuses

Unit – III Concept of Balanced Diet 1. Balanced Diet: Meaning and importance 2. Components of balanced diet and their sources 3. Factors affecting balanced diet 4. Harmful effects of Junk Food

Unit –IV Anatomy and Physiology of Body System 1. Circulatory System: Structure of Heart 2. Functioning of Heart 3. Types of Circulation: Systemic and Pulmonary 4. Effects of exercise on Circulatory System.

725


Mathews D.K.& Fox D.K “The Physiological basis of Physical Education and Sprots,2nd .Philadelphia.K.B . Sanuders & Co.,(1 996).

Sharma, V.K, “Health & Physical Education” Saraswati House Pvt. Ltd . Daryagani, New Delhi.(2013).



Kamlesh & Sangral, “Principles & History of Physical Education”, Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana.(2000).

Bucher Olsen and Willgoose “The Foundation of Health” Prentice Hall inc.Englewood Fliffs,New Jersey,(1 976).


Singh Ajmer et.al. “Modern Text Book of Physical Education, Health and Sports”, Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana (2010).

Avelin C. Pearce., “Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses”Oxford University Press. New Delhi (2003). .

Verma K.K., “Health & Physical Education” Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana (2005).

10-A(726)

Text Books and References:

The question paper will consist of five Units I, II, III, IV and V. Units I, II, III & IV will have two questions from their respective Units of the Syllabus and will carry 10 marks each. Unit V t h will consists of 10 short answer type questions, which will cover the entire syllabus and will carry 2 marks for each question.



B.A. - 4th Semester (Health & Physical Education) (From Session 2015-16)


Unit-1 Warming Up and Cooling Down:

1. Meaning, types and significance of warming up 2. Meaning, types and significance of cooling down. 3. Methods of warming up and cooling down. 4. Physiological aspects of warming up and cooling down

Unit –II Psychological aspects of Physical Education: 1. Meaning of Psychology and sports Psychology 2. Need and importance of sports psychology 3. Learning: meaning and laws 4. Learning curve

Unit –III Major Sports Events 1. Ancient Olympic Games 2. Modern Olympic Games 3. Asian Games 4. Common Wealth Games

Unit - IV Anatomy and Physiology of Human Body System 1. Structure of Respiratory Organs. 2. Physiology of respiratory System. 3. Effect of exercise on respiratory System 4. Terminology of respiration: Tidal Volume, Residual Volume and Total Lung Capacity.


H.H. Clark & D.H. Clark: Development and adopted physical education, Englewood cliffs, New Jersey, Prentice Hall, 1987.

Mathews D.K. & Fox D.K “The Physiological basis of Physical Education and Sprots, 2nd .Philadelphia. K .B. Sanuders & Co., (1996).

Sharma, V.K, “Health & Physical Education” Saraswati House Pvt. Ltd. Daryagani, New Delhi. (2013).


Singh, Ajmer et. Al.’’ Olympic Movement”Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana, (2000).

Kamlesh & Sangral, “Principles & History of Physical Education”, Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana (2000).

Mangal, S.K.,”Psychology for Physical Education” Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana (2008).

Kamlesh & Sangral,’’ Methods in Physical Education” Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana (2007).

Jensen Fisher:9 “Scientific Basis of Athletic Conditioning” Philadelphia, Lee and Febiger (1975).

10-A(728)

B.A. – 3rd and 4th Semester (Practical) (Health & Physical Education)

(From Session 2015-16)

1. Measurement of Body Mass Index

(Normal Range of B.M.I for Children, Women and Men)

2. Any one Game of the following:

(With ground specifications, general rules and general skills)

1. Basketball 2. Foot ball 3. Kabaddi

3. Athletics: Discus throw and Long Jump (Specifications, general rules and general skills)

4. Viva – Voce and Practical File

Maximum Marks- 50

10 Marks

10 Marks

(10 + 10) Marks

10 Marks





B.A. -5th Semester (Health & Physical Education) (From Session 2016-17)


Unit -I Growth & Development 1. Meaning and definition of Growth and Development 2. Stages of Growth and Development. 3. Principles and factors influencing growth and development 4. Age and sex difference in relation to physical activities and sports

Unit – II Concept of Sports Organization and Administration 1. Meaning and importance of organization and administration in Physical Education and Sports 2. Principles of sports organization and administration 3. Organization and administration of Intramural and Extramural activities 4. Tournaments and their types (League and Knock out )

Unit – III Concept of Posture 1. Meaning of posture and importance of good posture 2. Causes of poor posture 3. Symptoms and causes of Postural Deformities: Lordosis, Kyphosis, Scoliosis, Flat Feet, Knock

Knee and Blow Legs. 4. Precautions and Remedies for postural deformities

Unit-IV Anatomy and Physiology 1. Gross Anatomy of muscle, Types of Muscles in human body 2. Effects of exercise on Muscular System 3. Composition of Human Blood 4. Functions of Blood

10-A(730)


Kamlesh & Sangral, “Principles & History of Physical Education”, Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana. (2000).

Bucher Olsen and Willgoose “The Foundation of Health” Prentice Hall inc.Englewood Fliffs,New Jersey,(1 976).


Singh Ajmer et.al. “Modern Text Book of Physical Education, Health and Sports”, Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana (2010).

Avelin C. Pearce., “Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses”Oxford University Press. New Delhi (2003). .

Verma K.K., “Health & Physical Education” Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana (2005).

Mathews D.K. & Fox D.K “The Physiological basis of Physical Education and Sprots, 2nd .Philadelphia.K.B.Sanuders & Co., (1996).

Sharma, V.K, “Health & Physical Education” Saraswati House Pvt. Ltd. Daryagani, New Delhi. (2013).

Kang G.S. Deol N.S. “An introduction to Health and Physical Education 21st century” Patiala (2008).


731





B.A. -6th Semester (Health & Physical Education) (From Session 2016-17)


Unit-1 Concept of Motivation and Socialization 1. Meaning and definition of motivation. 2. Types of motivation and importance of motivation in sports. 3. Meaning of Socialization and Socialization through sports. 4. Effect of social behavior on performance of sports person.

Unit- II Concept of Sports Training and Doping 1. Meaning and definition of sports training 2. Factors affecting sports training 3. Types of sports training: Circuit training, Interval Training and Continuous Training 4. Doping: Meaning, types and its effects on health.

Unit – III Concept of Sports Biomechanics 1. Meaning and definition of sports biomechanics 2. Importance of Biomechanics in Sports 3. Newton’s Laws of motion and their application in sports 4. Levers: Meaning, types and their application in Sports

Unit – IV Anatomy and Physiology 1. Organs of Digestive System 2. Structure of Digestive System 3. Mechanism of food digestion 4. Effects of exercise on Digestive System.

x Kamlesh & Sangral, “Principles & History of Physical Education”, Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana. (2000).

x Dick F “Sports Training Principles” .London Lepus Book, (1980). x Desch and Burk “knesiology and applied Anatomy”, 2nd ed.lee and Febiger, (1963). x Show D, “Kinesiology’ Friends Publications, New Delhi, (2001). x Singh Ajmer et.al. “Modern Text Book of Physical Education, Health and Sports”, Kalyani

Publishers, Ludhiana (2010). x Avelin C. Pearce., “Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses”Oxford University Press. New

Delhi (2003). . x Verma K.K., “Health & Physical Education” Parkash Brothers, Ludhiana (2005).

x Mathews D.K. & Fox D.K “The Physiological basis of Physical Education and Sprots, 2nd .Philadelphia.K.B.Sanuders & Co., (1996).

x Sharma, V.K, “Health & Physical Education” Saraswati House Pvt. Ltd. Daryagani, New Delhi. (2013).

x Kang G.S. Deol N.S. “An introduction to Health and Physical Education 21st century” Patiala (2008).

x Singh Ajmer et. al. “Olympic Movement” Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana, (2000).

733

B.A. – 5th and 6th Semester (Practical) (Health & Physical Education)

(From Session 2016-17)

Maximum Marks- 50

1. Pranayam: 10 Marks

a) Bhramari b) Anulom Vilom c) Kapal Bhati

2. Any one Game of the following 10 Marks

(Ground Specifications, General rules and General Skill)

a) Volleyball b) Hockey c) Judo/Boxing/Wrestling/Self-defense tactics

3. Tying of different types of Bandages and Arm Slings. 10 Marks

4. First Aid 10 Marks

(First aid for different injuries and circumstances, items of First aid box and their uses)

5. Viva – Voce and Practical file 10 Marks

10-A(734)

Bachelor in Tourism Management (BTM) – Course Structure-2014-15

SEMESTER – I

SEMESTER – II

FIELD TRIP

SEMESTER – III

*BTM-English and Hindi in all semester is same as B.A. General (English & Hindi Compulsory)

Marks Duration Paper No.

Paper title Internal External 3Hrs.

*BTM 101 English (Compulsory) 20 80 3Hrs. *BTM 102 Hindi (compulsory) 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 103 Business Environment for Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 104 Introduction to Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 105 Tourism Product of India (Natural) 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 106 Tourism Product of India (Cultural) 20 80 3Hrs. TOTAL MARKS 600


Paper title Internal External

*BTM 201 English (Compulsory) 20 80 3Hrs. *BTM 202 Hindi (compulsory) 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 203 Geography of Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 204 Transport Management 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 205 Tourism Documentation 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 206 Haryana Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. TOTAL MARKS 600


Paper title Internal External

*BTM 301 English (Compulsory) 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 302 Tourism in India 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 303 Hotel Business 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 304 HRM in Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 305 Computer Applications in Tourism 20+30 50 3Hrs. BTM 306 Communication Skills &

Personality Development 20+30 50 3Hrs.

FIELD – TRIP REPORT & VIVA-VOCE 100 TOTAL MARKS 700

10-A(735)

SEMESTER – IV

ON – THE- JOB – TRAINING

SEMESTER – V

SEMESTER – VI

Marks Paper No.

Paper title Internal External Duration

*BTM 401 English 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 402 Pilgrimage Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 403 Principles of Management 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 404 Tourism Marketing 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 405 An Introduction to Travel Agency

& Tour Operation Business in India 20 80 3Hrs.

BTM 406 Communicative English 20 80 3Hrs. TOTAL MARKS 600

Marks Paper No.


*BTM 501 English 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 502 Impacts of Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 503 Accounting for Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 504 Sustainable Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 505 Entrepreneurship in Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 506 International Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. On – the – job training Report & Viva – Voce 100 3Hrs. TOTAL MARKS 700

Marks Paper No.


*BTM 601 English 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 602 Tourism Administration in India 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 603 Economics of Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 604 Adventure Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 605 Tourist Guiding 20 80 3Hrs. BTM 606 Salesmanship in Tourism 20 80 3Hrs. TOTAL MARKS 600

10-A(736)

BTM-101

English (Compulsory)

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20

External (Theory): 80

Time: 3 Hours

Section A:

Poetry

Text Prescribed:

Chronicles of Time edited by Asha Kadyan, with the following deletions.

(i)"Leisure" by W.H. Davies

(ii)"The Flute Player of Brindaban" by Sarojini Naidu

(iii)"The Soldier" by Rupert Brooke

Section B

Grammar

Text Prescribed:

A Remedial English Grammar for Foreign Students by F.T.Wood, with the following deletions:

1. Tag Questions

2. Transformation

3. Confusion of Adjectives and Adverbs

4. Adverbial use of no, not and none

5. The Prop-Word one

6. Redundant Pronouns and Prepositions

7. The use of correlatives

8. Errors in the use of individual words: please and thank you, Dates and Times, Greetings and Salutations.

Note: The question paper will carry a maximum of 80 marks.

The paper will have seven questions as per details given below

Q. 1. Explanation with reference to the context. The students will be required to attempt one passage

(with internal choice) from the book of poems. (8 marks)

10-A(737)

Q.2 One comprehension question (with internal choice) based on a stanza from the book of poems.

(8 marks)

Q.3. Short-answer type questions on the book of poems (four questions to be attempted out of the given

seven). (8 marks)

Q.4. One essay type question (with internal choice) will be set on the book of poems. (8 marks)

Q.5. Students will be required to attempt twenty out of thirty items, based on the examples/exercises given

in the prescribed book of grammar. (30 marks)

Q.6. Vocabulary (from the prescribed book of poems).

To use ten words out of given fifteen in sentences of their own. (10 marks)

Q.7. Literary Terms: Metaphor, Sonnet, Personification, Simile, Conceit, Ballad, Alliteration, Allusion, Ode, Satire,

Oxymoron, Epigram, Lyric, Dramatic, Monologue, Myth. (Attempt any four out of the given six in about 50-70

words each). (8 marks)

10-A(738)

lkewfgd ikB~;Øe egf"kZ n;kuUn fo'ofo|ky; jksgrd vkSj dq#{ks= fo'ofo|ky; dq#{ks=

ds fy,

tqykbZ 2011 ls izHkkoh

ch-,- % izFke lsesLVj

fgUnh vfuok;Z

le; % 3 ?k.Vs BTM&102 dqy vad&100

fyf[kr ijh{kk % 80 vad

vkUrfjd ewY;kadu % 20 vad

fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Ø; ,oa vad&foHkktu

fu/kkZfjr ikB~;iqLrd&e/;dkyhu dkO; dqat % MkW- jkeltu ik.Ms; izdk'kd % [kkVw ';ke izdk'ku] 1276@5 ihj th eksgYyk] izrki Vkdht] jksgrdA

fgUnh lkfgR; dk vkfndky dkO;'kkL= oLrqfu"B iz'u

[k.M&d % e/;dkyhu dkO;&dqat

ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr dfo dchj lwjnkl] rqylhnkl] ehjkckbZ] fcgkjh] ?kukuan] jl[kku

fu/kkZfjr vkykspukRed iz'u

ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr dfo;ksa ij muds lkfgfR;d ifjp;] vuqHkwfrxr oSf'k"V~; rFkk vfHkO;fDrxr lkS"Bo ij gh iz'u iwNs tk;saxsA dfo;ksa dh fof'k’V jpukRed izofRr ij iz'u ugha iwNs tk;saxsA

[k.M &[k % fgUnh lkfgR; dk vkfndky

ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr vkykspukRed iz'u

1- fgUnh lkfgR;ksfrgkl ys[ku dh ijEijk 2- vkfndky dk ukedj.k 3- vkfndky dh ifjfLFkfr;k¡ 4- vkfndkyhu lkfgR; dh lkekU; izofÙk;k¡ 5- jklksdkO; ijEijk % laf{kIr ifjp;

[k.M&x% dkO;'kkL= ij vk/kkZfjr fo"k;

1- dkO; ds rRRo 2- jl % Lo:i vkSj vax 3- jl ds Hksn 4- vyadkj & vuqizkl] 'ys’k] ;ed] miek] #id] mRis{kk] vfr'k;ksfDr] ekuohdj.k] vU;ksfDr] lekKksfDrA 5- Nan&nksgk] pkSikbZ] lksjBk] cjoS] dq.Mfy;k¡] NIi;] dfoÙk] ?kuk{kjhA 6- 'kCn'kfDr;k¡ % vfHk?kk] y{k.kk] O;atukA 7- dkO;&xq.k & izlkn] ek/kq;Z vkSj vkstA

10-A(739)

[k.M&?k% oLrqfu"B iz'u

funsZ'k%&

1- [k.M d esa fu/kkZfjr ikB~;&iqLrd esa ls O;k[;k ds fy, pkj vorj.k iwNs tk,axsA ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks fdUgh nks dh

lizlax O;k[;k djuh gksxhA izR;sd O;k[;k 6 vad ds gksxsaA iwjk iz'u 12 vad dk gksxkA

2- [k.M d esa fu/kkZfjr vkykspukRed iz'uksa esa ls nks iz'u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks ,d iz'u dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA ;g

iz'u 8 vad dk gksxkA

3- [k.M d esa fu/kkZfjr ikB~;iqLrd ,oa vkykspukRed iz'uksa esa ls N% y?kwRrjh iz'u iwNs tk,axsA ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks yxHkx

150&150 'kCnksa esa fdUgh pkj iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA izzR;sd iz”u ds pkj vad fu/kkZfjr gSaA iwjk iz”u 16 vad dk gskxkA

4- [k.M [k esa fu/kkZfjr vkykspukRed iz'uksa esa ls pkj iz'u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA

izR;sd iz'u 8&8 vad dk gksxkA bl izdkj ;g iz'u 16 vad dk gksxkA

5- [k.M [k esa fu/kkZfjr iz'uksa esa ls pkj y?kwRrjh iz'u iwNs tk,axs ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa yxHkx 150&150 'kCnksa esa fdUgh nks iz'uksa

dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA izR;sd iz'u ds fy, ikap vad fu/kkZfjr gSA iwjk iz'u 10 vad dk gksxkA

6- [k.M x esa fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe esa ls pkj y?kwRrjh iz'u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks fdUgh nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA

izR;sd mi&iz'u 5 vad dk rFkk iwjk iz'u 10 vad dk gksxkA

7- [k.M ?k esa iwjs ikB~;Øe esa ls 8 oLrqfu"B iz'u iwNs tk,axsA izR;sd iz'u 1 vad dk rFkk iwjk iz'u 8 vad dk gksxkA

10-A(740)

Business Environment for Tourism

BTM -103:

Max. Marks: 100

External: 80

Internal: 20

Time: 3 Hours

Objectives: The primary objectives of this course are to acquaint the students emerging global trends in

tourism business environment.

PAPER SETTING: Paper setter should set 9 questions. The examinee should be required to attempt five

questions. Question no.1 is compulsory and comprising whole syllabus consisting 7 short answers each

carries 2 marks. The remaining 4 questions are to be attempted from the 4 units selecting one question

from each unit of 14 marks each.

TEACHING PRACTICES: Class room lectures, Assignments, Cases, Discussions and Seminars.

Course Contents

Unit-I

Tourism Business Environment- Nature, components and determinants. Assessing business environment

risk- country risk and political risk.

Unit-II

Assessing current state of tourism business environment in India: Economic Reforms, Liberalization,

Privatization and globalization. Small Scale tourism Enterprises: Meaning, Significance to the Indian

economy, problems and various incentives given to these.

Unit-III

Various Industrial Policies of India with special emphasis on new industrial policy with various

amendments related with tourism business, Competition Act and its impact on Indian tourism business.

Unit –IV

Various tourism & travel Trade Reforms announced in India in recent times. Trends in tourism business

inIndia; Foreign Direct Investment in tourism - significance, policy and current position of India.

Suggested reading:

1. Daniel, John D and Radebangh, Lee H : International Business, 5th ed., New York, Addison Weley, 2007

2. Charles W. Hill, International Business, fourth edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publications Companies.2010.

3. AK. Sundaram J. StemartBlock : The International Business Environment PHI,2008

10-A(741)

INTRODUCTION TO TOURISM

BTM-104

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Objectives:

The primary purpose of the paper is to acquaint the students about the basic and preliminary knowledge of the terms, concepts, systems and trends in tourism. It will form the first step to move forward to interact with the advanced knowledge pertaining to tourism.






UNIT – I

Meaning and Nature of Tourism

Concept and terminology in Tourism –

Tourism; Tourist; Tourism Market;

Tourism Resources; Tourism Product; Destination;

Recreation; Pleasure and relaxation

UNIT – II

Types and Characteristics of Tourism

Motivations in Tourism - Push and Pull factors

UNIT – III

Transportation: Types and their significance for tourism

Accommodation: Types and their significance for tourism

Travel Agencies & Tour Operators: Types and their significance for tourism

UNIT – IV

Tangible and intangible services in tourism sector

Tangible and Intangible services in Hotel sector

Tourism Chain: Vertical and Horizontal Integration

10-A(742)

TOURISM PRODUCTS OF INDIA (NATURAL)

BTM-105

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Objectives:

Tourism begins with the motivation to visit attractions at destinations. The attractions may be natural or

manmade (cultural). The natural attraction such as mountains, hills, forests with wild animals, coastal

areas and islands are attracting all. India is seventh largest country with rich diversity of natural tourist

resources. It is very necessary for the students of tourism to know about these tourist products. This

course will help the students to give an insight about the rich natural tourist products of India.

Unit-I

India: General introduction, physiographic units. The Northern Mountains: General introduction of the

Himalayas & other ranges, their importance for religious, hill station & adventure tourism. A case study of

Sri Nagar, Shimla, Nainital, Darjeeling &Gangtok.

Unit-II

The Central Plains: General introduction of deserts & central plains. Their importance for cultural,

religious & adventure tourism. A case study of Amritsar, Jaipur, Delhi, Lucknow, Kolkata.

Unit-III

The Peninsula: General features of Indian peninsula with their tourism significance. A case study of

Bhopal, Khajuraho, Hyderabad, Banglore, Ooty

Unit-IV

The coastal plains and islands: General features of coastal regions, their importance for religious, cultural

& beach tourism. A case study of Mumbai, Goa, Cochin, Chennai, Andaman & Nicobar.

REFERENCES:

- Ahmad, Aizaz: General Geography of India, NCERT, New Delhi

- Goh Cheong Long: An Economics Atlas of India, Oxford University.

- National Atlas of India, Govt. of India Publication, Calcutta 1997.

- Atlas of World Oxford Press, New Delhi.

10-A(743)

- Singh, R.L.(ed) India: A Regional Geography National Geographical Society of India, Varanasi,

1989.

- Manorama Year Book 2009

- India Year Book 2009, Publication Division. Govt. of India, New Delhi

- Tourism Planner

- Tour Brochures etc.

- Lonely Planet – India

- Kumar, Ravi Bhushan: Coastal Tourism & Environment, AOH Publishing Corporation, New Delhi

- Pilgrimage in India, R.N.Pillai

- Kohli, M.S.: Mountaineering in India, Vikas Publishing House, and New Delhi.

10-A(744)

TOURISM PRODUCT OF INDIA (CULTURAL) BTM – 106

Maximum Marks: 100 Internal: 20 External (Theory): 80 Time: 3 Hours

Objective: Since there exist a strong relationship between tourism and culture and more so in case of India, it becomes essential for the student of tourism to have first-hand information of Indian culture and to understand its significance for tourism. The paper gives a basic understanding of the concept of culture and that too in the Indian context.

Mode of Paper Setting: The examiner shall set ten questions selecting two questions from each unit. The student shall be required to attempt five questions in all selecting one question from each unit.

Unit – I Introduction to Culture ● Culture: Concept and its essen al Features ● Indian Culture: Fundamentals of Indian Culture; Indian culture through the ages ● Culture and tourism rela onship with special reference to India

Unit – II Indian Architecture – I ●Buddhist Architecture: Ajanta, Ellora and Sanchi

●Hindu Architecture: Khajuraho temples, Sun temple of Konark, Shore temple of Mamallpuram and Brihadisvara temple at Thanjavur

Unit – III Indian Architecture – II

● Medieval Architecture: TajMahal, Red Fort of Delhi, FatehpurSikri and QutubMinar ● Modern Architecture: Gate Way of India, parliament house,New Delhi. Bahai’s Lotus temple

in Delhi Unit – IV

Classical Dances and Music of India. Major Fairs and festivals of India and their significance for tourism Holi, Dussehra, Diwali, Baisakhi, Pongal, Bihu, Desert festival – Jaisalmer, Surajkund Craft fair, International Trade Fair - New Delhi,

10-A(745)

REFERENCES:

- Gupta, S.P.et.al 2002, Cultural Toursim in India, D.K. Printworld, New Delhi

- Upadhyaya, B.S. 1989, (reprint), Feeders of Indian Culture People,s Publishing House.

- Sharma, Chandradhar, 1991 (reprint), A Critical Survey of Indian Philosophy MotiLalBanarasi Das

Publishers, Delhi

- Basham, A.L. 1985 (reprint) The Wonder That was India Rupa& Co., Delhi

- Sivaramamurti, C.2002 (reprint) Indian Painting, National Book Trust, Delhi

- Krishana Deva, 2002 (reprint) Temples of North India. National Book Trust, Delhi

- Pande, G.C. 1990 (2nd ed.) Foundations of Indian Culture, 2 vols. MotiLalBanarasi Das Publishers,

Delhi

- Radhakrishnan, S. 1999 (Oxford India Paperbacks), Indian Philosophy, 2 vols. Oxford university

press, New Delhi

- Hay,Stephen (Ed.) 1992, Sources of Indian Tradition, 2 vols, Penguin Books, Delhi

- Deshpande, Satish 2003, Contemporary India : A Sociological View, Penguin Books, Delhi

- Raju, P.T. 1985 Structural Depths of Indian Thought. South Asian Publishers, New Delhi

- Malik, S.C. Understanding Indian Civilization. Indian Institute of Advanced Study, Shimla

- Yogendra Singh, 1997. Social Stratification and Change in India. Manohar New Delhi. The

observation made in the Human Development Report provides lose linkage regarding

establishment of relationship between economic development and cultural growth.

- Banerji, S.C. 1993. Society in Ancient India, D.K. Printword (P) Ltd., New Delhi AbidHussain, S.

2003 (reprint) The National Cultural of India. National Book Trust, Delhi.

- Dube, Dina Nath, 1993, Bharat KeDurg, Publication Division, Ministry of Information & Broad

Casting, Govt. of India, New Delhi

- Samson, Leela, 2002. The joy of Classical Dances of India, National Book Trust, India, New Delhi

- Thomas, P. 1990, Chruches in India, Publication Division, May IPB, GOI, New Delhi

- Desai, Ziyud- din, 1986, Indo-Islamic Architecture, Publication Division, GOI

- Aspects of Indian Music, 2006, Publication Division GOI, New Delhi.

10-A(746)

SEMESTER II

B.T.M- 201

ENGLISH (COMPULSARY)

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Section A

Text Prescribed:

The Pointed Vision: An Anthology of Short Stories by UshaBande and KrishanGopal.

Section B

Text Prescribed:

Ideas Aglow edited by Dinesh Kumar and V.B.Abrol with the following deletions:

i. It's Question Time' by JayantV.Narlikar

ii. 'An Interview with Christian Barnard' by N.Ram

iii. Inhumanisation of War' by Huck Gutman.

Section C

Grammar and Composition

Note: The question paper will carry a maximum of 80 marks.

The paper will have ten questions as per details given below

Q.1. Explanation with reference to the context (with internal choice). The students will be required to

attempt one passage from the prescribed book of essays. (8 marks)

Q.2. One comprehension question (with internal choice) based on a passage from theprescribed book

of short stories. (8 marks)

Q.3. Short-answer type questions on the prescribed books of short stories and essays.

Four short-answer type questions will be set on the prescribed short-stories and

four short -answer type questions will be set on the prescribed essays.

The students will be required to attempt any five out of the given eight questions.

(10 marks)

10-A(747)

Q.4. This question will be an essay-type question (with internal choice) based on thetwo prescribed text

books. (10marks)

Q.5. Paragraph

The students will be required to write a paragraph on any one of the four giventopics.

(8marks)

Q.6 Letter/Application (6 marks)

Q.7. Translation (from Hindi to English) of a passage consisting of 12 to 15 sentences.

(Non-Hindi speaking/foreign students will attempt a question of comprehensionbased on an unseen

passage in lieu of this question) (6 marks)

Q. 8 Translation (from English to Hindi) of a passage consisting of 12 to 15sentences.

(Non-Hindi speaking/foreign students will attempt a question on précisof a paragraph of 200 to 250

words in lieu of this question. (6 marks)

Q.9. Idioms and Phrases (four to be attempted out of the given eight) (6 marks)

Q.10. Common Errors (Twelve sentences to be corrected out of the given fifteen).

(12 marks)

10-A(748)

lkewfgd ikB~;Øe egf"kZ n;kuUn fo'ofo|ky; jksgrd vkSj dq#{ks= fo'ofo|ky; dq#{ks= ds fy,

tuojh 2012 ls izHkkoh

ch-,- % f}rh; lsesLVj

fgUnh vfuok;Z

le; % 3 ?k.Vs BTM&202 dqy vad&100

fyf[kr ijh{kk % 80 vad

vkUrfjd ewY;kadu % 20 vad

fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Ø; ,oa vad&foHkktu

/kqzoLokfeuh ¼ukVd½ % t;'kadj izlkn fgUnh lkfgR; dk HkfDrdky O;kogkfjd fgUnh oLrqfu"B iz'u

[k.M&d % /kzqoLokfeuh


1- ^/kqzoLokfeuh* ukVd dk izfrik| 2- ^/kqzoLokfeuh* ukVd dh ik=k&;kstuk 3- ^/kqzoLokfeuh* ukVd dh vfHkus;rk 4- izlkn dh ukV~;dyk

[k.M&[k % fgUnh lkfgR; dk HkfDrdky


1- HkfDrdky dh ifjfLFkfr;k¡ 2- lar dkO; dh izofÙk;k¡ 3- lwQh dkO; dh izofÙk;k¡ 4- jke dkO; dh izofÙk;k¡ 5- d".k dkO; dh izofÙk;k¡ 6- HkfDrdky % Lo.kZ;qx

[k.M&x% O;kogkfjd fgUnh

ikB~;Øe esa fu/kkZfjr fo"k;

1- Hkk"kk dh ifjHkk"kk 2- Hkk"kk ds fofo/k :i % cksyh] ekudHkk"kk] jktHkk"kk] jk"VªHkk"kk] ek/;eHkk"kk] ekrHkk"kk 3- ekud&Hkk"kk dh izeq[k izofÙk;k¡ 4- fgUnh o.kZekyk % Loj ,oa O;atu 5- fgUnh orZuh % leL;k vkSj lek/kku 6- eqgkojs ,oa yksdksfDr;k¡

10-A(749)

[k.M&?k% oLrqfu"B iz'u

funsZ'k%&

1- [k.M d esa fu/kkZfjr ikB~;iqLrd esa ls O;k[;k ds fy, pkj vorj.k iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks fdUgh nks

dh lizlax O;k[;k djuh gksxhA izR;sd O;k[;k 6 vad dh gksxhA iwjk iz'u 12 vad dk gksxkA

2- [k.M d esa fu/kkZfjr vkykspukRed iz'uksa esa ls nks iz'u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks ,d iz'u dk mÙkj nsuk

gksxkA ;g iz'u 8 vad dk gksxkA

3- [k.M d esa fu/kkZfjr ikB~;iqLrd ,oa vkykspukRed iz'uksa esa ls N% y?kwRrjh iz'u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa

dks yxHkx 150&150 'kCnksa esa fdUgh pkj iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA izR;sd iz'u ds fy, pkj vad fu/kkZfjr gSA iwjk

iz'u 16 vad dk gksxkA

4- [k.M [k esa fu/kkZfjr vkykspukRed iz'uksa esa ls pkj iz'u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk

gksxkA izR;sd iz'u 8&8 vad dk gksxkA bl izdkj ;g iz'u 16 vad dk gksxkA

5- [k.M [k esa fu/kkZfjr iz'uksa esa ls pkj y?kwRrjh iz'u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa yxHkx 150&150 'kCnksa esa

fdUgh nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj nsuk gksxkA izR;sd iz'u ds fy, ikap vad fu/kkZfjr gSA iwjk iz'u 10 vad dk gksxkA

6- [k.M x eas fu/kkZfjr ikB~;Øe esa ls pkj y?kwrjh iz'u iwNs tk,axs] ftuesa ls ijh{kkfFkZ;ksa dks fdUgh nks iz'uksa dk mÙkj

nsuk gksxkA izR;sd mi&iz'u ds fy, 5 vad fu/kkZfjr gSA iwjk 10 vad dk gksxkA

7- [k.M x esa iwjs ikB~;Øe esa ls 8 oLrqfu"B iz'u iwNs tk,axsA izR;sd iz'u 1 vad dk rFkk iwjk iz'u 8 vad dk

gksxkA

10-A(750)

GEOGRAPHY OF TOURISM

BTM-203

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Objectives:

Geography of Tourism studies the phenomena of tourism over the global space with ‘spatial’ attention on the place of origin, place of destination & routes through which the travel & tourism takes place. It provides a thorough knowledge about the characteristics of tourist markets, attractions of destinations & the accessibility of the world with a focus on a few selected countries of world. This course has been simplified with very few case studies & broad information about the continents, so that in next semesters the BTM students can know more specific countries & destinations.

Unit-I

Brief introduction of continents & oceans. Map reading. Greenwich Mean Time. International Date Line.

Elements of weather & climate. Climatic zones of the world. Natural vegetation of the world. Main

tourist activities in different climatic zones.

Unit-II

Asia: General geographical features; physiography, climate, vegetation main countries, capitals & their

tourist attractions. A Case study of Japan, Singapore, Sri Lanka, Saudi Arabia.

Unit-III

Europe: General geographical features; physiography, climate, vegetation. Main countries, capitals & their

tourist attractions. A Case study of France, United Kingdom, Switzerland, Spain

Unit-IV

Other countries: General geographical features of given countries with information about physiography,

climate, vegetation & tourist attractions of USA (only 5 Places) South Africa, Australia

REFERENCES:

- Badawi, Cherine: Footprint Egypt, Footprint Travel Guides, 2004.

- Bickersteth, Jane & Eliot, Joshua: Singapore handbook: the travel guide, Footprint Travel

Guides, 2001.

- Blore, Shawn; Davidson, Hilary; Karr, Paul; Livesey, Herbert Bailey & McRae, Bill: Frommer's

Canada, John Wiley and Sons, 2004.

10-A(751)

- Boniface, Brian G. & Cooper, Chris: Worldwide destinations casebook: the geography of travel

and tourism, Butterworth-Heinemann, London, 2005.

- Campbell , Jeff ; Chilcoat, Loretta; Derby, Susan ; Greenfield, Beth; Heller, Carolyn B. ; Martin,

Sam ; Miller, Debra ; Morris, Bob; Peevers , Andrea Schultze ; Wolff, Kurt & Zimmerman, Karla

: USA , Lonely Planet, 2004 .

- Williams, Stephen: Tourism geography, Routledge, 1998.

- Taylor, Chris; Rowthorn, Chris; Ashburne, John; Benson, Sara & Florence, Mason: Japan,

Lonely Planet, University of California, 2000.

- Mente, Boye De: Passport's Japan Almanac, Passport Books, University of Michigan,1987.

- Lewis, Mark: Singapore, Rough Guides, 2003.

- Ellis, Royston: Sri Lanka: The Bradt Travel Guide, Bradt Travel Guides, 2005.

- Plunkett, Richard; Ellemor, Brigitte & Campbell, Verity: Sri Lanka, Lonely Planet, 2003.

- Else, David: England, Lonely Planet, 2007.

- Europe on a Shoestring, Lonely Planet, 2003.

- Prosser, Robert: France, Evans Brothers, 2005.

- Williams, Nicola; Berry, Oliver; Fallon, Steve &Nevez, Catherine Le: France, Lonely Planet,

2007.

- Simonis, Damien; Johnstone, Sarah & Williams, Nicola: Switzerland, Lonely Planet, 2006.

- Steves, Rick: Rick Steves' Switzerland, Avalon Travel Publishing, 2006.

- Louis, Regis St.; Chandler, Gary Prado &Draffen, Andrew: Brazil, Lonely Planet, 2005.

- Peevers, Andrea Schulte & Burgess, Kerryn: Canada, Lonely Planet, 2005.

- Lonely Planet Staff: USA and Canada on a Shoestring 2, Lonely Planet, 1900.

- Fitzpatrick, Mary; Blond, Becca; Pitcher, Gemma; Richmond, Simon; & Warren, Matt: South

Africa, Lesotho & Swaziland, Lonely Planet, 2004.

- O’Hagan, Tim: Travel South Africa, Southern Book Publishers, 2000.

- Firestone, Matthew D.; O'Neill, Zora; Sattin, Anthony &Wlodarski, Rafael: Egypt, Lonely

Planet, 2008.

- McPhee, Margaret: Australia's Top Tourist Destinations, Universal Publishers, 2003.

- Smitz, Paul; Bain, Carolyn; Bao, Sandra &Farfor, Susannah: Australia, Lonely Planet, 2005.

10-A(752)

TRANSPORT MANAGEMENT

BTM-204

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Objective: Transport is most important element of travel & tourism business. One cannot think of

tourism industry without any mode of transportation. There are several modes of transportation which

are relevant in different conditions. The course focuses on different modes of transport and their role in

tourism.

Mode of paper setting:

The number of questions to be set will be ten in a manner that there are two questions from each unit.

The students shall be required to attempt five questions in all, selecting one question from each unit.

Teaching Practices: Class room lectures, Assignments, Cases, Discussions and Seminars.

Course Contents

Unit-I

Transportation as important element of tourism industry. History of different modes of transportation.

The physiographic & socioeconomic factors affecting development of different modes of transportation

with special reference to India.

Unit-II

Airlines & Tourism, History of Airlines in India. IATA, DGCA: Organizational structures and functions. Air

India and Private Airlines. Role of airlines in tourism promotion.

Water transport- Limitation & scope of water transport in India. Cruise ships. The role of water transport

in tourism.

Unit-III

Surface transport & Tourism: Importance of surface transportation. Coaches, Car rental system in India.

Roads system in India: National and State Highways, Role of surface transport in tourism.

Unit-IV

Railway & tourism- History & present status of Indian railway, Special trains for tourists. Different

packages & facilities given by Railway. Problems of Indian Railway. Role of Railway in tourism.

References

- Aggarwal Surinder: ‘Travel Agency Management’, Communication India, New Delhi

10-A(753)

- Hannel Christine, Robert Harshman&Grahan Draper- ‘Travel & Tourism: A world Regional

geography, John Wiley & Sons, New York

- Hurst, Elist, ‘Transporation Geography’ McGraw Hill, New York

- Mohinder Chand, Travel Agency Management – An Introductory Text. Anmol Publications, New

Delhi. 2006

- OAG, Airlines time table

- OAG, Cruise lines time table

- Indian Railway Time table

- Other references as in BTM 104, 203 and 302

10-A(754)

TOURISM DOCUMENTATION

BTM-205

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Course Objectives

Tourism industry is growing at very fast pace. In India the outbound tourism and inbound tourism are also

growing. International tourism involves several types of formalities. The students of tourism should know

about such formalities, which are needed in the form of several documents. In this course the students

will learn about required documents in foreign travels.

Teaching Practice

Class room teaching, assignment writing, case discussion, glossary of terms students should be familiar

with the glossary pertaining to above mentioned topics.

Mode of Paper-Setting

There will be five questions in all and candidates will have to attempt all the five questions. First question

will be of 14 marks and shall contain 7 short answer type questions. These questions shall be spread over

the whole syllabus. Remaining four questions shall be of 14 marks each and will be set unit wise, where

internal option among 2 questions will be given. These questions shall judge both theoretical and applied

knowledge of students. Case studies may also be given as questions.

Internal Evaluation

The performance of the students will be evaluated on the basis of class participation, class test, regularity

and assignment writing carries 20% of the credit.

Unit- I

General history of passport, visa and other formalities in different parts of world and India. Documents

needed for foreign travels. Immigration formalities at airport for outbound and inbound tourists.

Unit- II

Passport; Definition. How to get the passport form. The essential documents, photographs and fee for

passport. Types of passports. Alternatives of passport.

10-A(755)

Unit-III

Visa- Meaning. Types of Visa issued by India. How to obtain Visa. Necessary documents to get Visa, Visa

on Arrival, Online Visa Registration, ETA, Schengen Visa, U.S. Visa, U.K. Visa

Unit-I V

Other formalities; Travel and baggage insurance, Disembarkation card, Baggage rules, Currency

regulation. Foreign regional registration office. Health regulations; Yellow fever, Malaria, H.I.V.

certificates,

References;

-Tourist information by Department of tourism, Government of India

-Visa formalities of different countries. (See websites of countries)

10-A(756)

HARYANA TOURISM BTM-206

External 80 Internal 20 Time: 3 Hours

Course Objectives:

The course aims at providing a comprehensive overview on Haryana Tourism: elucidating State’ tourist resource potential, Tourism infrastructure and tourist trends over the years. It critically examiners exiting tourism planning and policy, framework and reviews the performance of Haryana in the context of both domestic and international.

Mode of paper setting: There will be five questions in all and candidates will have to attempt all the five questions. First question will be of 14 marks and shall contain 7 short answer type questions. These questions shall be spread over the whole syllabus. Remaining four questions shall be of 14 marks each and will be set unit wise, where internal option among 2 questions will be given. These questions shall judge both theoretical and applied knowledge of students. Case studies may also be given as questions.

Unit – I Geographical and historical background of Haryana and their importance for tourism Religious & cultural tourism potential in Haryana including dance, music, fair & festivals

UNIT – II Tourist Resources of Haryana:

- Monuments of touristic significance and museums - Religious & pilgrimage centres of Haryana - Music, dance, fairs & festivals in Haryana

UNIT – III Tourism Infrastructure in Haryana

- Transportation and accommodation sector in Haryana - Recreational and entertainment facilities at the tourism complexes/resorts in Haryana - Tourism organization in Haryana - Haryana Tourism Policy - 2008

UNIT – IV Tourism Trends in Haryana Major types of tourism in Haryana Major tourist destinations of Haryana

10-A(757)

SEMESTER III

B.T.M - 301

ENGLISH (COMPULSORY)

Scheme of Examination

Max.Marks 100

End Semester Exam 80

Internal Assessment 20

Time 3 Hours

1. Sounds in Stillness An Anthology of Poems.ed.by S.S. Sangwan . Delhi: OUP,

2. Selected episodes from theMahabharta by C.RajaGopalachari, Mumbai 7

:BharatiyaVidyaBhavan .

The episode "Ganapti, the Scribe" and first 24 Chapters from "Devarata" to "The

Wager"are prescribed for study.

3. Grammar, Pronunciation/Transcription

From A Text book of Grammar by Inderjit Kumar and Sanjay Kumar,

Kurukshetra : K U K.

Instructions to the Paper-Setter and Students:

Q.1 Explanation with reference to the context : Candidates will be required to attempttwo

extracts one each from the book of poems i.e.Sounds in Stillness Mahabharta. The

passages will have internal choice. 6 x2=12 marks

Q.2 Short-answer type questions

Four short-answer type questions will be set on the prescribed poems and fourshort-

answer type questions will be set on theMahabharta. Students will berequired to

attempt five questions out of given eight questions selecting at leasttwo from each

text (i.e.Sounds in Stillness and theMahabharta)

5x4=20 marks

Q.3 One essay type question (with internal choice) will be set on the prescribed book of

poems. 10 marks

Q.4 One essay type question (with internal choice) will be set on theMahabharta .

10 marks

10-A(758)

Q5 Fifteen words / phrases from the book of poems and theMahabharta. Studentswill be

required to use any twelve in sentences of their own 12x1=12 marks

Q6 Questions on Grammar on the prescribed items(use of Tenses in communicative situations,

subject-verb concord, active and passive voice, narration, common errors, word power,

vocabulary, idioms and phrases ) and transcription based on prescribed text-book of

Grammar but not necessarily the same as those given in the text book. The candidate will

be required to attempt sixteen items out of given twenty. 16 marks

10-A(759)

TOURISM IN INDIA BTM – 302


Course Objectives India is one of the emerging economic powers of India. In tourism too India is one of few choicest destinations of the world. India has a great variety of natural and cultural tourist attractions, that’s why it is said that India is for all reasons and all seasons. In this course few important and popular tourist destinations are mentioned, so that the students can know about main tourist attractions of given places. Mode of paper setting:

There will be five questions in all and candidates will have to attempt all the five questions. First

question will be of 14 marks and shall contain 7 short answer type questions. These questions

shall be spread over the whole syllabus. Remaining four questions shall be of 14 marks each and

will be set unit wise, where internal option among 2 questions will be given. These questions

shall judge both theoretical and applied knowledge of students. Case studies may also be given

as questions.

UNIT – I

Trends in inbound and outbound tourism in India

Trends in domestic tourism in India

Major types of tourism in India mainly cultural, pilgrimage, Wildlife and MICE tourism

UNIT – II

Tourism Policy and Planning in India: A historical view

Tourism in the current Five-Year Plan

National Tourism Policy – 2002

UNIT – III

Administration of Tourism in India:

- Role of Ministry of Tourism, Government of India

- Role of State Tourism Corporations

- Role of India Tourism Development Corporation (ITDC)

UNIT – IV

Tourism Infrastructure in India

- Transportation sector : Airlines and Railways

10-A(760)

- Accommodation sector: Major hotel groups & Chains; Challenges before Indian

Hotel Industry

- Tourism Marketing in India mainly the ‘Incredible India’ Marketing Campaign

REFERENCES

Amitabh Kant Branding India: An Incredible Story; 2009, Harper Collins (India), Delhi

10-A(761)

HOTEL BUSINESS

BTM-303

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

OBJECTIVES: - Main objective of this paper is to introduce accommodation sector to the

students of Tourism. Being a major component of tourism accommodation sector has expanded

a lot in itself. This paper will touch upon various aspects of accommodation, hotel and

hospitality sector.

PAPER SETTING: There will be five questions in all and candidates will have to attempt all the six

questions. First question will be of 14 marks and shall contain 7 short answer type questions.

These questions shall be spread over the whole syllabus. Remaining four questions shall be of

14 marks each and will be set unit wise, where internal option among 2 questions will be given.

These questions shall judge both theoretical and applied knowledge of students. Case studies

may also be given as questions.


COURSE CONTENTS

Unit-I

Introduction – Tourism and Hotel, their relationship, Tourism Accommodation sector, Types of

Tourist Accommodation: Different basis of categorization of accommodation sector. Main

features of different basis of categorization of accommodation sector.

Unit-II

Growth and development of Hotel Industry. Growth of hotel industry in India. Major

personalities associated with hotel growth in India and their contribution. Study of major hotel

chains in India.

Unit-III

10-A(762)

Hotel Accommodation and its various activities. Organisation structure and role of various

departments of hotels : Front Office, Housekeeping, Food & Beverage (Service & Production),

Engineering & Maintenance, Security, Human Resource, Sales & Marketing, Purchase, Stores

and Accounts.

Unit-IV

Ownership and forms of hotel ownership. Sole – Proprietorship, Partnership. Joint stock

companies. Referral Organizations, hotel chain, Lease Agreements, Management contracts,

Franchise Organizations. Role of government in developing hotel Industry. Recent developments

and challenges in hotel industry. Future of hotel industry in India.

References:-

1. Negi, Jagmohan: Hotels for Tourism Development (2nd Edition); Metropolitan, New

Delhi, 2000.

2. Gee, Chuck Y.: International Hotel Management. Educational Institute, America, 1998

3. Kaul, R.N.: Dynamics of Tourism: a trilogy. Vol. 2: Accommodation. Sterling Publishers

Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi,2001.

4. Mohinder , Chand , Managing Hospitality Operations , Anmol publications , New Delhi,

2009.

5. Anand M.M. – Tourism and Hotel Industry in India: Sterling Publishers, New Delhi

6. Madlik, S. – Hotel Business, Heinemann, London

7. Brymer, Robert A. –Introduction of Hotel and Restaurant Management: HUB

Publication, Co., Lowa, 1984

8. John R. Walker : Introduction to Hospitality

9. Tiwari, J. R. : Hotel Front Office: Operation and Management, Oxford University Press

10-A(763)

HRM IN TOURISM

BTM -304

Max. Marks: 100

External: 80

Internal: 20

Time: 3 Hours

Objectives: The primary objectives of this course are to acquaint the students emerging global

trends in tourism business environment.

PAPER SETTING: Paper setter should set 9 questions. The examinee should be required to

attempt five questions. Question no.1 is compulsory and comprising whole syllabus consisting 7

short answers each carries 2 marks. The remaining 4 questions are to be attempted from the 4

units selecting one question from each unit of 14 marks each.


COURSE CONTENTS

Unit-I

Introduction of Human Resource:

Human Resource- Concept, meaning and definition; Importance of HR in tourism industry;

Concept of employee life cycle; approaches to managing HRs in hotels: emerging role of HR

manager in tourism sector.

Unit-II

Human Resources planning:

Human Resource planning- meaning, process, factors and need for HRs planning;

Job analysis- meaning, types, proposes and uses; job description of major positions in a travel

agency and tour operation.

Unit-III

Acquisition of Human Resources

Recruitment -meaning, process, methods of Recruitment in tourism industry;

Selection procedure-essentials and steps in selection process; Interview- meaning,

and types.

Employee promotion, transfer and separation- meaning, purpose, and types

10-A(764)

Unit-IV

Maintenance of Human Resources:

Employee Training and development- need, importance, and methods of in tourism

industry.

Performance appraisal- need & importance and techniques.

References:

1. Aswathappa, K,(2008) Human resource Management, The McGraw-hill publications,

New Delhi.

2. Ian Beardwell and len Holden, (2000) Human Resource Management, Macmillan.

3. Robbins. (2000), the Management of Human resources, Prentic-hall,new Delhi.

4. Indian journal of industrial relations.

5. Employee Relation-International Journal (special issue on people management in India

and sub- continents), 2007.

6. Subramanian,K.N. (2000)Wages in India, Tata McGraw –Hill Publication New Delhi.

7. C.bMamoria (1999), Management of Human Resources, Himalaya publication, New

Delhi.

8. Mohinder C. (2006) Travel Agency Management-An Introductory Text, 2006 2nd revised

edition.Anmol Publication Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,

9. Tripathi, P.C.(2006), Human Resources Management, Vikas Publications, Delhi.

10. Hoque, K. (2000b), ‘Human Resource management in Hotel Industry: Strategy,

Innovations and Performance’, London: Routledge.

11. Woods, R.H. (1992). Managing Hospitality Human Resources, Michigan: Educational

Institute of the American Hotel and Motel Association.

12. Boella, M.J (1992), Human Resource Management in the Hospitality Industry, 5th ed,

Stanley Thornes Publishers, Avon.

13. Lee-Ross, D (1999), HRM in Tourism and Hospitality: International Perspectives on Small

to Medium-sized Enterprises, Cassell Publications, London,

10-A(765)

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN TOURISM

BTM – 305

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20+30


Time: 3 Hours

OBJECTIVE: Computer skills are essential in every modern framework of studies including

tourism due to the need to manage fast multiplying information and data. The course requires

consistent efforts on the part of the students to practice methods and mechanism of computing

and analysis. The course focuses on the basic software(s) and new terms and technologies while

providing an insight in Computing and related concepts.

PAPER SETTING: There will be five questions in all and candidates will have to attempt all the

five questions. First question will be of 14 marks and shall contain 7 short answer type

questions. These questions shall be spread over the whole syllabus. Remaining four questions

shall be of 14 marks each and will be set unit wise, where internal option among 2 questions will

be given. These questions shall judge both theoretical and applied knowledge of students. Case

studies may also be given as questions.

TEACHING PRACTICES: Class room lectures, Assignments, Cases, Discussions, Seminars and

Practical.

COURSE CONTENTS:

UNIT- I

COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS and OFFICE OPERATIONS

Components and Units of a computer system, Characteristics, Features and Uses of computers,

data entry devices, data output devices and storage devices.

Introduction to Windows

Basics of MS Office and Uses in Travel Agency

UNIT-II

ICT AND TOURISM

Introduction to Information and communication Technologies (ICT), Web Portal and Websites

Definition, Meaning, Role and Importance of ICT in Tourism sector, Future of ICT in Tourism

Industry.

10-A(766)

UNIT-III

E-COMMERCE

E-Commerce Meaning, Definition, Features, Functions of E-Commerce, Limitations of E-

Commerce, Introduction to E-Tourism, Meaning and Definition, Case study of online Travel

Agencies Selling E-Tourism: Yatra.com and Makemytrip.com.

UNIT-IV

AUTOMATION AND RESERVATION

Introduction to Internet; Its uses and applications of Internet in Tourism and Searching on

internet using various search engines. Introduction to CRS; Need and history of CRS systems,

Benefits and importance of the CRS system to the Travel trade.

References:

1. V. Ragaraman, Fundamental of computers, PHI, New Delhi

2. P.K. Sinha, Fundamentals of Computers

3. D.Buhalis, E-Tourism: Information Technology for strategic Tourism Management,

Pearson Education Ltd, Essex, UK

4. C.S.V Murthy, E-Commerce Concepts, Models and Strategies, Himalaya Publications

5. Mathew Rergnolds, E-Commerce, Worx Publications

6. K. Bajaj and D. Nagm, E-Commerce: The Cutting Edge of the Business, Tata McGraw Hill

7. S. Bansundra, Computers Today

8. V. Raja Raman, Introduction to Computer Science

9. Leon Alexis and Mathews Leon, Fundamentals of Information Technology, Vikas

Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi

10. Leon Alexis and Mathews Leon, Internet for everyone, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd,

New Delhi

11. V.P. Jaggi and S. Jain, Computers for Everyone, Academic India Publishers, New Delhi

12. S. Saxena, MS Office 2000 for everyone, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi

13. S. Shajahan and R. Priyadharshini, Management Information Systems, New Age

International Publishers, New Delhi

14. S.C. Bhatnagar and K.V. Ramani, Computers and Information Management: A premier

for Practicing Managers, PHI, New Delhi

15. Curtin, Foley, Sen,Morin: Information Technology- The Breaking Wave

16. Jerome Kanter: Managing with Information

17. Internet Sites and other Theory taught during lectures

10-A(767)

COMMUNICATION SKILLS AND PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT

BTM 306

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20+30


Time: 3 Hours

Course Objectives

The course introduces learners to the basic communication skills and personality traits requisite

in tourism and hospitality industry jobs. The theoretical inputs are designed to be used with

practical exercises in the class rooms and daily behavioral corrections.


The examiner shall set nine questions. Question no. 1 comprising of 7 short questions of 2 marks

each will be compulsory. The remaining 4 questions are to be attempted from 4 units selecting 1

question from each unit. Each question shall be of 14 marks.

Teaching Practices

Lectures, Assignments, Cases, Discussions, Presentations

Course contents

Unit I

Understanding Communication- Concept, Process and Barriers to Communication. Qualities of

Effective Communication. Ways of making communication effective and overcoming barriers.

Types of Communication-Verbal & Non-verbal communication – its importance, types & use in

business communication; Upward, Downward, Internal and External.

Unit II

Written – various principles of effective writing; Letter - Types, Format and features of a good

letter; Email writing, Curriculum Vitae & covering letter; General Guidelines for Preparing

Personal Profile.

Oral communication - Group Discussions -Effective Conduct in Group Discussions, Group

Discussion in Induction, Group Discussion Process, Topics in Group Discussion, Tips for Group

Discussion, Clarity of Thoughts and Expression; Interviews-Purpose, Types & Preparation; Public

10-A(768)

Speaking- Need,, Planning Presentation, Delivering Presentation, Basic Qualities in a Public

Speaker

Unit III

Personality Development- Concept of Personality, Elements of Personality, Determinants of

Personality, Personality Analysis-Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI) Assessment.

UNIT IV

Personality(Grooming and Social Skills)-Grooming and Personal Hygiene, Basic Concepts

ofGrooming, Personal Grooming and Corporate Grooming, Dining Etiquettes, Corporate

Etiquettesfor Dining, Cross-Cultural Dining Etiquettes, Interpersonal Skills: Developing

Interpersonal Skills, ole Playing for Interpersonal Relations, Importance of Role Playing, Process

of Role Playing.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Asher Mark (1999). Body Language, Carlton Books Limited.

Barker Alan (2007). Improve Your Communication Skills, Kogan Page, New Delhi.

Chaturvedi, P. C. and Chaturvedi, M.(2005). Business Communication, Pearson Education.

Colman. J. C. (1988). Abnormal Psychology & Modern Life, Scott Foresman& Company.

Covey Stephen R. (1990). The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People, NY: Fireside/ Simon &

Schuster.

George. B. & Chatterjee S. (2008). Food & Beverage Service & Management, Jaico Publishing

House, Mumbai, India.

Fry Ron (2003). Your First Resume, Pearson Education.

Fuller J. and Currie. A. J. (2002). The Waiter, Sterling Book House. Mumbai, India.

Marden Orison Swett (2003). The Power of Personality, Kessinger Publishing.

Michael A. (2007). Best Impression in Hospitality, Delmar. Thomson Learning.

Morris Desmond(2002). People Watching, Vintage.

Pease Allan(2000). Body Language, Sudha Publications.

Sharma VinayMohan(2000). Body Language, PustakMahal.

Thorpe Edger and Thorpe Showick (2004). Winning at Interviews, Pearson Education.

Taylor Shirley (2008). Communication for Business, Pearson Education.

Websites: www.myersbriggs.org

10-A(769)

SEMESTER IV

B.T.M.-401

ENGLISH (COMPULSORY)

Max.Marks 100

End Semester Exam 80

Internal Assessment 20

1.

2.

3.

Time

Snapshots: An Anthology of One-Act Plays. ed. S.K.Sharma.

New Delhi: OUP

The Mahabharta chapter 25 to 49 i.e. "Draupadi's Grief" to "Arjuna's

Charioteer."

Precis, Translation, Comprehension, email and Resume writing

From A Text book of Grammar by Inderjit Kumar and Sanjay Kumar,

Kurukshetra : K U K.

3 Hours


Q.1 Explanation with reference to the context. Candidates will be requiredto attempt

twoassages (with internal choice) from the prescribed book of one act plays i.e. Snapshots.

4x2=8 marks

Q.2 Short answer type questions will be set on the prescribed book of one act plays.

Students will be required to attempt any four out of the given six questions.

4x3=12 marks

Q.3 Short answer type questions will be set on the Mahabharata will be required to

attempt any four out of the given six questions.

3x4 = 12 marks

Q.4 Two essay type questions (a) and (b) (with internal choice) will be set on theprescribed

book of one act plays and The Mahabharta. Part (a) and (b) will beset respectively on each

prescribed book. 2x5= 10 marks

10-A(770)

Q.5 The break up of Question No.5 is as under:-

a) Precis : 8 marks A passage of about 350 words will be given. b) Translation : 7 marks Translation from English to Hindi of a passage consisting of 9 to 10 sentences on a general topic. (In lieu of translation, foreign students will be required to write a

paragraph of about 150 words on any one of the three given topics)

c) Comprehension:

Comprehension passage of about 300 words followed by six questions at the end. 8 marks

d) Drafting email: 7 marks

expressing views about any current topic

e) Resume writing : 8 marks

The examiner will give specific details to the students about the purpose and the kind of the

resume.

Suggested Reading:

Communication Skills in English by S.D.Sharma

Essentials of Communication by D.G.Saxena, KuntalTamang

10-A(771)

PILGRIMAGE TOURISM

BTM – 402

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours


The examiner shall set nine questions. Question no. 1 comprising of 7 short questions of 2 marks each

will be compulsory. The remaining 4 questions are to be attempted from 4 units selecting 1 question

from each unit. Each question shall be of 14 marks.

UNIT – I

Major religions in India:

- Hinduism: Salient features

- Buddhism & Jainism : Main Teachings and Philosophy

- Islam and Sikhism: Basic features

UNIT – II

Major pilgrimage centres of India – I:

- Hinduism: Four Dham – Badrinath, Rameshwaram, Puri and Dwaraka

- Varanasi, Mathura-Vrindavan, Haridwar, Vaishno Devi, Allahabad, Kurukshetra &Tirupati

UNIT – III

Major pilgrimage Centres of India – II:

- Buddhism and Jainism: Bodh Gaya, Sarnath, Mount Abu, Palitana

- Islam, Christianity and Sikhism: Ajmer, Goa and Amritsar

UNIT – IV

Trends and Patterns in pilgrimage tourism in India

Strategies to promote pilgrimage tourism in India

Problems and prospects of pilgrimage tourism in India

10-A(772)

BTM-403

Principles of Management-

Max Marks (lnternal) 20

Max Marks (External) 80

Time: 3 Hours

Objectives: To prepare the budding managers in tourism and to provide the students basic knowledge of management and managerial skills. Approach: Lecture, group discussion, presentation, case studies etc. Evaluation: As per the KUK norms for this course/ other papers. Mode of Paper setting: same as that of the other papers of this course. Unit 1 Concept of management, definition, nature, purpose, management as an art, science, and a profession, functions of management, systems approach to management. Unit 2 Planning meaning, steps in planning process, purpose, type of plans, management by objectives, Decision making- meaning, definition, importance, ration, process of decision making, limitations. Unit 3 Organising- meaning process of organising, levels of organising, span of management, forms -line, functional, line & Staff and Committee form of organisations. Delegation of Authority, Decentralisation & Centralisation. Unit 4 Motivation and theories of motivation, Leadership traits and styles, Communication process and barriers, Controlling process, need, feedback and feed forward control. Books:

1. Wei[riah. Helnt; N4tiL V-eannlce& Harold Koontz: Management: A Global and Entrepreneurial Perspective. Tata McGraw -Hill, New Delhi.

2. Ghuman, Karminder& K. Aswathappa: Management: Concept, Practice & Case, Tata McGraw -Hill, New Delhi.

3. Kase , F. L. and Rasonu, J.E. 1985, Organization and Management -A System and Contingency Approach, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York'

4. Becker, P.E, The Practices of Management, London, 1955. 5. May, D., The Evolution of Management Thought. Ronald Press, New York, 1972. 6. Singh. A.N., The Skills of Management, GoverEarnborough, I980. 7. Ricks. S., Management of Organization. Macmillan publication. Honkong, 1981. 8. Y.A., Management, of Organization. McGraw Hill. 1958. 9. Crompton. Summer and Webber, 1973. Organizational Behavior and The

Practices of Management, Scoft, Poresman, Cleneve' 10. K.-c., .lae, 1982. l"'lanagemenl, Prentice i{aii. }'Jerv Deihi.

10-A(773)

TOURISM MARKETING

BTM-404

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Course Objectives

The course familiarizes students with the basic concepts of tourism marketing. The objective is to enable

students to develop an understanding of application of these concepts. The themes covered are

approaches towards marketing and marketing mix.



question will be of 14 marks and shall contain 7 short answer type questions. These questions shall be

spread over the whole syllabus. Remaining four questions shall be of 14 marks each and will be set unit

wise, where internal option among 2 questions will be given. These questions shall judge both

theoretical and applied knowledge of students. Case studies may also be given as questions.

Teaching Practices

Lectures, Assignments, Cases, Discussions, Presentations

Course Contents

Unit I

Introduction to Tourism Marketing- Tourism Marketing: Nature, Process and Growth. Services and

their Marketing, Tourism Marketing and Development: Socially Responsible Marketing, Social Marketing,

Participants in Socially Responsible Marketing and their Roles. Government Bodies- National Tourism

Offices, State Tourism Offices and Local Bodies, Private Organizations, Non-Governmental Organizations

in Tourism

Unit II

Challenges of Tourism Marketing- Nature and Characteristics of Tourism Offers: Tangibility and

Intangibility, Non-perishability and Perishability, Homogeneity and Heterogeneity, Separability and

Inseparability, Ownership and Non-ownership. Issues and Challenges in Tourism Marketing, Marketing

Strategies to overcome limitations of Tourism

Unit III

10-A(774)

Tourism Marketing Environment- Concept of Marketing Mix, Developing Marketing Mix, Tourism

Markets, Types of Tourism Markets, Tourist Behavior, Tourist Buying Process, Factors Influencing

Tourists’ Buying Process, Tourism Product and Distribution- Concept of Tourism Product, Tourism as a

packaged Product, Destination as a Product, Managing Products, New Product Development, Product

Life Cycle

Unit IV

Tourism Pricing and Promotion- Concept, Importance and Process of Pricing,

Factors influencing Tourism Pricing, Methods of Price Fixation, Pricing Strategies, Price Fixation. Tourism

Promotion and Communication: Objectives of Promotion, Promotion Mix, Factors affecting Promotion

Mix, Components of Promotion Mix, Important Promotional Tools in Tourism- Brochures, Events, Movies

and Cinema

References

Burkart, A.J., Medlik, S.(1981). Tourism, Past, Present and Future, Heinemann, London.

Chris Cooper, Fletcher John, Gilbert David, Wanhill Stephen (1993). Tourism Principles and Practice,

Pitman Publishing London.

Christopher Lovelock and JochenWirtz.( 2004), Services Marketing-People, Technology, Strategy, Pearson

Education, India.

Holloway, J.C., Plant, R.V. (1988). Marketing for Tourism, Pitman, London.

Kotler, Philip, Bowen John, Makens James (2004). Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism, Pearson

Education, India.

Kotler Phlip (1995). Marketing Management-Analysis ,Planning, Implementation and Control, Prentice

Hall of India.

Kotler Philip (2003). Marketing Insights from A to Z: 80 concepts every manager needs to know. John

Wiley and sons, USA.

Kotler Philip and Armstrong Gary (1991). Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall of India.

Majaro, Simon (1995). The Essence of Marketing, Prentice Hall of India.

Middleton, V.T.C.(1988). Marketing in Travel and Tourism, Heinemann, Oxford.

Schiffman G. Leon, KanukLazer Leslie (1992). Consumer Behaviour, Prentice Hall of India.

Witt F Stephen, MoutinhoLuiz (1989). Tourism Marketing and Management Handbook, Prentice Hall

International UK.

Zeithaml, V.A. &Bitner, M.J.(1996).Services Marketing: Integrating Customer Focus Across

theFirm,US:McCraw-Hill Higher Education.

Zeithaml A. Valarie, Bitner Jo Mary (1996). Services Marketing, The Tata Mcgraw Hill Companies, Inc.

10-A(775)

AN INTRODUCTION TO TRAVEL AGENCY & TOUR OPERATIONS BUSINESS IN INDIA BTM-405


Time: 3 Hours OBJECTIVES: The study includes the functions, Regulations for Recognition of Travel Agents, Tour

Operators and Excursion Agents. The Role of Sectors like Airline, different Railways Transports is also

covered. The learner will also be familiarized with the contribution of important Association in these

sectors.






COURSE CONTENTS

Unit-I

Travel Agency/Tour Operations – meaning, definition, types, significance and growth over the years.

Unit-II

Functions of Travel Agencies and tour operators. Linkages and integrations in tour operation business.

Unit-III

Travel Agency Organization Structure – Meaning and significance, Procedure for recognitions of Travel

Agency and tour operations from Ministry of tourism, Govt. of India.

Unit-IV

Tour Packaging – Concept, meaning, types. Role and contribution of Air Couriers in India and Indian

Railways in promotion of tour package business.

References

1. Foster, D., the Business of Travel Agency, Pitman, 1990.

3. Aggarwal, Surrender, Travel Agency Management (Communication India, 1983).

4. Geo, Chack, Professional Travel Agency Management: (Prentice Hall, London, 1990).

5. Mohinder Chand , Travel Agency Management – An Introductory Text, Anmol Publications, New

Delhi, 2006

6. IATA, IATO, TAAI manual./

7. Jag Mohan, Negi, Travel Agency and tour operation, Kanishka Publication New Delhi, 1990.

10-A(776)

Communicative English

BTM 406

Note: The Examiners will set eight questions, taking two from each unit. The students are

required to attempt five questions in all selecting at least one from each unit. All questions will

carry equal marks.

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

UNIT -I

English Language

Growth and Development of English in India

Main features of British, American and Indian English

Introduction to Formal and Informal English

UNIT -II

Vocabulary and Grammar

Word meanings and their usage, Usage of Dictionary and Thesaurus

One word substitutes, Synonyms& Antonyms

Common errors in spellings and sentences

Subject-Verb agreement, Idioms& phrases

Active Voice and Passive Voice, Tag Questions

UNIT -III

English in Tourism Sector

Need of English language in promoting Tourism

List of terms and vocabulary commonly used in field of tourism

Role and Importance of English language for tourist guides

UNIT -IV

Composition

10-A(777)

Resume Writing

Letter writing (Formal and Informal Letters)

Paragraph Writing

Dialogue Writing

Essentials of different types of conversation (telephonic, e-mail, public speech, group discussion)

REFERENCES:

1. Communicative English, Jimmy Sharma, ArihantPublishers,New Delhi

2. English for Occupational Purposes: One Language, Kim. D. London: Continuum. 2008.

3. Strengthen Your English, Bhaskaran and Horsburgh, Oxford University Press

4. Murphy's English Grammar with CD, Murphy, Cambridge University Press

6. Everyday Dialogues in English by Robert J. Dixson, Prentice-Hall of India Ltd., 2006.

10-A(778)

SEMESTER – V

B.T.M.- 501

English

Theory : 80

Internal Assessment: 20

Time : 3 hours

Prescribed Books:

1. The Eternal Muse edited by BrajeshSawhney and Neena Malhotra

2. The Spectrum of Life : A Selection of Modern Essays edited by M.K.Bhatnagar

3. A Text Book of English Grammar and Composition edited by S.C.Sharma, Shiv Narain, Gulab

Singh and Pankaj Sharma


Q. 1 : This question will have one stanza (with internal choice) for explanation with reference to thecontext

from The Eternal Muse. 8 marks

Q.2 : There will be six short answer type questions based on the first two text books. Students will be

required to attempt four questions (in about 100 words each) choosing two from each text.

4x3 = 12 marks

Q.3 : One essay type question (with internal choice) on the book of poems, requiring first

handunderstanding of the poems. 10 marks

Q.4 : One essay type question (with internal choice) from The Spectrum of Life : A Selection of Modern Essays,

requiring first hand understanding of the text. 10 marks

Q.5 : A paragraph of about 300 words will be given. The candidates will be required to attempt a précis and give

it a suitable title. 15 marks

Q.6: This question will consist of one letter/ application (Personal/Business Correspondence).

Students will be required to attempt either of the given two. 10 marks

Q.7 (a) Common errors (10 sentences to be corrected out of the given fifteen sentences) 10 marks

(b) Clauses (students will be required to attempt five out of seven) 5 marks

10-A(779)

IMPACTSOF TOURISM BTM – 502


Course objectives:

The development has its own impacts and so in case of tourism. The students shall be given exposure of

the patterns of development in tourism mainly in reference to the developed and developing countries.

The study of the positive as well as the negative impacts of tourism becomes essential to understand the

benefits and lose of tourism development.

APPROACHES

Lectures, Group Discussion, Presentation, Case studies.

MODE OF PAPER SETTING


question will be of 14 marks and shall contain 7 short answer type questions. These questions shall be

spread over the whole syllabus. Remaining four questions shall be of 14 marks each and will be set unit

wise, where internal option among 2 questions will be given. These questions shall judge both

theoretical and applied knowledge of students. Case studies may also be given as questions.

UNIT – I

Patterns of tourism development in the developed and the developing countries – a comparative

analysis in terms of volume of tourist arrivals and earnings from tourism

Tourism Development in the regions – Europe, Americas, Asia-Pacific region, Middle East and Africa in

terms of volume of tourist arrivals and earnings from tourism

Characteristics of mass tourism

UNIT – II

Economic significance of tourism

Direct, Indirect and Induced Economic Impacts of tourism

Negative Economic Impacts of Tourism

Economic Impact Analysis

UNIT – III

Socio-cultural dimensions of tourism

10-A(780)

Positive Social & cultural Impacts of Tourism

Negative Social &Cultural Impacts of Tourism

Social Change and growth of tourism

UNIT – IV

Environmental significance of tourism

Major Impact Areas – Natural Resources, Pollution and Physical Impacts

Tourism development in relation to global warming, Climate Change, natural resource exploitation&

Biodiversity loss

Environmental Impact Assessment

REFERENCES

Bartelmus, P. (1994). Environment, Growth and Development: TheConcepts and Strategies of

Sustainability. London, Routledge.

Burns, P. and Holden, A. (1995).Tourism: A New Perspective.London, Prentice Hall.

Butler, R. W. (1991). Tourism, environment and sustainabledevelopment.Environmental Conservation,

18, 201–9.

Cater, E. (1994). Introduction. In Ecotourism: A Sustainable Option?(E. Cater and G. Lowman, eds).

London, John Wiley and Sons.

Cooper, C., Fletcher, J., Gilbert, D. and Wanhill, S. (1998). Tourism:Principles and Practice. London,

Longman.

Davison, R. (1996). The impacts of tourism. In Tourism Destinations(R. Davison and Maitland, eds), pp.

18–45. London, Hodder andStoughton

Peter Mason,2009, Tourism Impacts, Planning and Management, Butterworth Publication, NEW YORK

10-A(781)

ACCOUNTING FOR TOURISM

BTM-503

Max. Marks: 100

External: 80

Internal: 20

Time: 3 Hours

COURSE OBJECTIVES: - The enormous changes during the past ten years in ‘Tourism Industry” and the

technology of information accessing have dramatically affected the environment accounting. Tourism

Management, to service in this labile business environment, needs reliable, timely, complete and

understandable accounting formation. This course equips the students with counting techniques,

Methods and tools for preparation, understanding, analysis and interpretation of financial statements

hotel companies.





TEACHING PRACTICES: Class room lectures, Assignments, Cases, Discussions.

COURSE CONTENTS

Unit-I

Introduction to accounting:

Nature; Definition; accounting cycle uses; functions and types of accounting. Accounting principles

conventions and concepts.

Unit-II

Double entry system of accounting

Cardinal rules of debit and credit; preparation of journals and other subsidiary books; preparation of

ledger accounts and trail balance.

10-A(782)

Unit-III

Final accounts: need and importance in tourism business, Preparation of Business Income Statement

and Balance sheet.

Unit-IV

Interpretation of Business Income Statement and Balance Sheet of Travel Agencies with the help of ratio

Analysis.

REFERENCES

1. Financial Management – Iqbal Mathur

2. Financial accounting – R.L.Gupta

3. Basic Accounting – Meig&Meig

4. Leslie Chadwick, 1995 : The Essance of Financial Accounting, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd.,ND

5. Donald F.Sutton, 1986 : Financial Management in Hotel and Catering, Heinemann, London

6. G. Boni and F.F. Shartes, 1988 : Hotel Organisation Management and Accountancy, Sir ISAAR.

Pitman, London

7. Horwarth and Toth, 1979 : Hotel Accouting, Ronald Press, New York

8. Horwarth Earnest, 1986 : Hotel Accounting, Ronald Press, New York

9. Horwarth, E.B.andToth, 1986 : Hotel Accounting, Ronald Press, New York

10. Robert and Anthony, 1995: Management Accounting, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi

11. L.S.Porwal, 1993 : Accounting Theory, An Introduction, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., Pvt Ltd.,

New Delhi

12. R.D.Boardman, 1980 : Hotel and Catering Costing and Budgets, Heinemann, London.

10-A(783)

BTM-504 Sustainable Tourism

Max Marks (lnternal) 20 Max Marks (External) 80 Time: 3 Hours

Objectives: To prepare the budding tourism professionals by providing basic knowledge about sustainable tourism related skills. Approach: Lecture, group discussion, presentation, case studies etc. Evaluation: As per the KUK norms for this course/ other papers. Mode of Paper setting: same as that of the other papers of this course. Unit 1 Sustainable Tourism- meaning, definition, scope, sustainable development cemponents, major issues in understanding sustainable development, principles of sustainable tourism management, aspects of ethics and social responsibility Key Stake holders. Unit 2 Key issues of sustainable tourism development such as Ecotourism, carrying Capacity, de-marketing, fair.pricing, transportation, education, role of lndustry, Role of public and private sector, community involvement and local control and linkages therein. Unit 3

Three dimensions of Sustainable tourism i.e. environment, economic life, social aspects. Environment-scope of the concept of environment, major potential impacts of tourism on environment, Economic Dimension-scope of the concept, and major impacts of tourism on it, Social Dimension-scope of the concept of socio -cultural environment and impacts of tourism on socio cultural issues. Unit 4 .Key actor in sustainable tourism- r,ole of public sector, government bodies, local authorities, tourism industry, voluntary organisations host community, media, and tourists. Books:

1. swarbooke, J-sustainable Tourism Management-Rawat publication, Jaipur 2. William Theobald-Global Tourism: The Next Decade-Butterworth Heinemann. 3. http://www.environment.gov.au/heritage/publications/strategy/pubs/steps.pdf. 4. http://sanctuaries.noaa.gov/management/international/pdfs/day1_concepts_manual.p

df. 5. http://www.unep.frlsharedlpublications/pdflDTtx0592xpA-TourismpolicyEfv.pAf. 6. http://www.nwhf.no/files/File/culture_fulltext.pdf 7. http://www.rainforest-alliance.org/tourism/documents/tourism_practices_guide.pdf 8. http://uncta d.or g/ en / Docs/d itctncd2 0065_e n. pdf 9. http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/sectors/tourism/files/docs/tsg/tsg_final_report_en.pdf 10. http://www.visitcalifornia.com/media/uploads/files/edito

rlcTTC%ZosustainableTo20Tourism%20Handbook.pdf

10-A(784)

BTM-505 Entrepreneurship in Tourism

Max Marks (lnternal) 20 Max Marks (External) 8O Time: 3 Hours

Objectives: To prepare the budding entrepreneurs in tourism and to provide the students basic Knowledge of entrepreneurship and entrepreneurial skills. Approach: Lecture, group discussion, presentation, case studies etc. Evaluation: As per the KUK norms for this course/ other papers Mode of Paper setting: same as that of the other papers of this course.

Unit 1 Concept of Entrepreneur and entrepreneurship- its evolution, characteristics, role of enti'epreneurship on economic development, Entrepreneurship in lndia- Factors and lnstitutional framework. Theories of entrepreneurship Unit 2 Relationship between small and large business, problems of small scale industries in lndian context, growth of SSI's and Entrepreneurial motivation, policy support to small scale industries and entrepreneurship. Unit 3 Forms of ownership- structural patterns, entrepreneurial development and training, aspects involved in the growth of entrepreneurial environment. Unit 4 lssues relating to small business, financial, marketing channels, technological challenges in small business. Problems and remedies of entrepreneurship in lndia. Books: Rajeev Roy- Entrepreneurship: 2"d Edition - Oxford University press Madhurima Lall & Shikha Sahai- Entrepreneurship- EB Excel Books David H Holt- Entrepreneurship: New Venture Creation- Prentice Hall of lndia pvt Ltd Methew J Manimala- Entrepreneurship Theory at the cross road: Paradigms & praxis- Biztantra, NewDelhi Robert D Hisrich : Entrepreneurship- Mc Graw HillCompanies Kanishika Bedi- Management & Entrepreneurshi p-oxford U niversity press. Vasant Desai-The Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development and Management-Himalaya publishing House

10-A(785)

INTERNATIONAL TOURISM

BTM – 506

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Objectives:

The paper provides a comprehensive view of the tourism trends and patterns at the international level. The trends are to be studied through volume of tourists’ arrivals in different regions and their contribution in tourism earnings. The knowledge of the forces and factors responsible for tourism growth is other area of discussion in the paper. Since tourism growth is not uniform in all the regions, the issues like tourism gap or disparities form another key area of knowledge for the students. The paper is primarily based on the statistics available at various websites.





UNIT – I

Tourism trends at international level: Tourist arrivals and tourism receipts

Factors affecting growth of international tourism

UNIT – II

Regional distribution of International tourism – I:

- Europe: Inbound tourism with special reference to France, Spain, United Kingdom and Italy and their major destinations i.e. Paris, Madrid, London and Rome

- Americas: Inbound tourism with special reference to USA, Canada and Mexico and their major destinations i.e. New York, Washington DC, Niagara Falls, Toronto and Mexico City

UNIT – III

Regional distribution of international tourism – II:

- Africa: Inbound tourism with special reference to Egypt, South Africa and Kenya and their

major destinations i.e. Giza, Johannesburg and Nairobi

- East-Asia & Pacific: Inbound tourism with special reference to Australia, China, Japan and

Thailand and their main destinations i.e. Sydney, Beijing, Tokyo and Bangkok

UNIT – IV

Role of International organization like UNWTO, PATA, IATA in the development of tourism

Challenges before international tourism

10-A(786)

SEMESTER VI

B.T.M.- 601 English Compulsory

Scheme of Examination: Max.Marks : 100

Theory : 80 Internal Assessment : 20

Time : 3 hours Prescribed Books.

1. Macbeth by William Shakespeare

2. A Text Book of English Grammar and Composition edited by S.C.Sharma, Shiv Narain, GulabSingh and

Pankaj Sharma.


Q.1 : This question will have one extract (with internal choice) for explanation with reference to thecontext

from Macbeth. 8 marks

Q.2 : Six short answer type questions will be set on Macbeth. Students will be required to attempt any four

(in about 150 words each) out of the given six questions. 4x5=20 marks

Q. 3: One essay type question (with internal choice) on the play requiring first hand understanding of the text,

theme, character and plot. 10 marks

Q.4: The students will be required to attempt one essay out of the given four topics in about 400 words.

The topics may be descriptive, reflective or of general nature. 15 marks

Q.5: Translation from Hindi to English of a passage consisting of 12 to 15 sentences on a general topic (In lieu

of translation, foreign students will be required to write a paragraph of about 250words on any one of the

three given topics). 10 marks

Q.6: (a) One word substitution (students will be required to attempt five out of seven)

5 marks

10-A(787)

(b) English in Situations: Students will be required to develop one dialogue-based paragraph consisting of

about 20 exchanges (with internal choice) on the situations given below: 12 marks

i) Facing an interview for a job

ii) Making enquiries

iii) At a railway platform

iv) Helping the victims of road accident

v) Greetings

vi) At a wedding party

vii) Opening a bank account

viii) Inside the examination hall

ix) Calling the fire brigade

x) Trying to save a drowning child

xi) At the time of admission

xii) Consulting a doctor

xiii) Dealing with a broker

xiv) Escorting the chief guest

xv) At the police station

Suggested Reading:

English in Situations by R.O. Neill (O.U.P.)

Success with English: The Penguin Course Book I by Geoffry Bronghton (Penguin Books).

What To Say When Ed. Viola Huggins (BBC London)

Fifty Ways to Improve Your Presentation Skills in English by Bob Dignen (Orient Black Swan)

10-A(788)

TOURISM ADMINISTRATION IN INDIA

BTM- 602

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

PAPER SETTING: Paper setter should set 9 questions. The examinee should be required to attempt

five questions. Question no.1 is compulsory and comprising whole syllabus consisting 7 short

answers each carries 2 marks. The remaining 4 questions are to be attempted from the 4 units

selecting one question from each unit of 14 marks each.

Unit – I

Role of Government in tourism Regulation and Management

Role of Ministry of Tourism, Government of India in terms of its Organization, Role and

Functions

Unit – II

State Tourism Development Corporations and their organization and role in tourism

development and promotion with special reference to:

Haryana Tourism Corporation

Rajasthan Tourism Development Corporation

Kerala Tourism Development Corporation

Goa Tourism Development Corporation

Unit – III

India Tourism Development Corporation (ITDC): organization, role and functions: Divisions of

ITDC

Hospitality Development and Promotion Board (HDPB): Role and Functions

Role of Tourism Finance Corporation of India in tourism growth

Unit – IV

Tourism Planning in India: Growth and Performance

National Tourism Policy – 2002: Objectives and main features

Problems and challenges of Tourism Administration in India

10-A(789)

ECONOMICS OF TOURISM

BTM-603

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Objectives: Tourism is now recognized as an economic activity of global significance. This complex

and multi-faceted industry plays an important role in the economics of many

developed and less developed countries. The main aim of this course is to give the

macroeconomic picture of tourism’s role within national economies using the

fundamental concepts learned in introductory economics course.

Paper setting: There will be five questions in all and candidates will have to attempt all the five

questions. First question will be of 14 marks and shall contain 7 short answer type questions. These

questions shall be spread over the whole syllabus. Remaining four questions shall be of 14 marks

each and will be set unit wise, where internal option among 2 questions will be given. These

questions shall judge both theoretical and applied knowledge of students. Case studies may also be

given as questions.

Teaching practices: Class Room lectures, Assignment. Cases, Discussions and Seminars

Unit-I

Introduction to Tourism Economics:

Concepts of economics and their relevance to tourism, Tourism development and national economy-

contribution to GDP, Globalization, Liberalization, Privatization and their impacts on Tourism, FDI in

Tourism-Trends and Implications

Unit-II

Economics of Tourism Demand:

Nature of demand, Factor influencing tourism demand, economic determinants of Tourism demand,

price and income elasticity of tourism demand, trends in tourism demand.

Unit-III

Economics of Tourism supply:

Market Structure and Tourism supply, elasticity of supply, Integration in tourism supply, supply

trends

Unit-IV

10-A(790)

Economic impacts of Tourism:

Employment and income creation, Tourism Multiplier, Balance of payment, Foreign exchange.

Visible and invisible trade, Cost concept, types of costs, Tourism Taxation

REFERENCES:

- Vanhove, N. (2005), The Economics of Tourism Destinations, Oxford: Elsevier Butter

worth- Heinemann.

- Bull. A. (1995), The Economics of Travel and Tourism, Australia: Longman.

- Ahuja. H.L.,(2006) Business Economics, S. Chand & Co. New Delhi.

- T.R.Jain,(2008) Business Economics, V.K. Publication, New Delhi.

- Nellis and Parker,(2005), The essence of Business Economics, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.

10-A(791)

Adventure tourism

BTM 604

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Course Objective; Adventure tourism is a new but popular type of tourism in India. It is very

popular among the youth. India has immense potential for most diverse type of adventure

activities. Adventure tourisms are basically nature based activities. India has a large variety of

geomorphologic and climatic conditions, so India can be a heaven for those tourists who

want risk, excitement and thrill. For BTM students Adventure tourism provides a large scope

of employment opportunity.

This course helps in understanding the resources potential for adventure tourism in India, existing

popular destinations and activities.

Unit –I

Definition, nature and scope of Adventure tourism. Geographical diversities and opportunities for

adventure tourism in India.

Unit –II

Land based Adventure activities; Mountaineering, trekking in Himalayan states. Necessary

equipment, techniques and problems.

Unit-III

Water based activities- water resources of India; river- lakes and sea water. Rafting, kayaking

boating, SCUBA diving and coastal activities.

Unit- IV

Air based activities, hang gliding, ballooning and sky diving. Places, organizations and equipments

associated with above activities.

References

1. Ahmad Aizaz : ‘General Geography of India, NCERT, New Delhi

2. Goh Cheong long : An Economic Atlas of India, Oxford University

3. National Atlas of India, Govt. of India Publication, Calcutta

4. Atlas of World Oxford

10-A(792)

5. Singh, R.L.(ed) India : A Regional Geography National Geographical Society of India (Varansi

1989)

6. Manorama Year Book

7. Indian Year book, Publication Division, Govt. of India, New Delhi

8. Aluwalia H.P.S. and Manfred Garner : Himalayas: A Practical Guide, Himalayan Books ( Delhi,

1985)

9. Bedi, Ramesh and Rajesh : Indian Wildlife, Brijbasi Printers ( New Delhi, 1989)

10. Bose, S.C. Geography of the Himalayas, National Book trust, India ( New Delhi, 1976)

11. Chand Gian and ManoharPuri ‘Trekking’ International publisher India ( new Delhi,1989)

12. Gamma, Karl ‘The Handbook of Skiing Pelham Books (London, 1985)

13. Lozawa, Tomoya : Trekking in the Himalayas, Allied published Pvt. Ltd., ( New Delhi, 1980)

14. Law, B.C. (ed) : Mountains and Rivers of India, Calcutta, 1968

15. Rowe, Ray ‘White in Water Kayaking’, Salamander Books (London, 1987)

16. Saharia, V.B. “Wildlife in India’ Natraj Publisher (Dehradun, 1982)

10-A(793)

TOURIST GUIDING

BTM-605

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Course objective; Tourist escort or guide is one of the essential linkages between tourists and the

destination. He is the image maker of the destination/ country. A good escort or guide can make a

permanent imprint on the visitors about the place. The students of BTM should know the

personality, functions and basic qualifications of a tourist guide and escort so that they can

contribute to tourism industry as a tourist escort or a guide if they like. It is a very challenging and

interesting job where he meets and interacts with new persons from different parts of the world

every day.

Unit-I

Basic requirement of an escort or a guide;

I-Personal grooming, smartness, proper dress sense, hygiene, pleasing personality, hard working.

Ii-Etiquettes- how to welcome a visitor, the traditional style of welcoming in north India.

Iii- Knowledge of geography, history, art & culture of the place, latest information about frontier

formalities, e.g. passport, VISA, foreign exchange etc.

Unit-II

Communication Skills;

i- Principles of communications, Verbal and non-verbal, personal and

organizational, effective communications, communication gaps and barriers.

Audio- visual aids.

ii- Body language

Unit- III

Pre tour preparation; Pre tour research about place, monuments and itinerary, timings of flights& railways.

Bus and cars arrangement at hotels, airports and railway stations. Reconfirmation of ground

arrangement. Group arrival and departure. Welcome at airports/ railway station or hotels.

Unit- IV

Role and responsibility; Escort/ guide is the first and last contact with destination. Image maker, His

responsibilities. Ethics, helpful attitude. Knowledge of tourism related laws and acts such as passport

act, foreigners act, currency regulations, Immigration checks etc.

References; See the references of paper 105, 106, 203, 204,205,402, 403, 405,

10-A(794)

Salesmanship in Tourism

BTM-606

Maximum Marks: 100

Internal: 20


Time: 3 Hours

Course Objective The main objective of this course is to acquaint students with the nature of

Salesmanship and its application in tourism Industry.

PAPER SETTING: There will be five questions in all and candidates will have to attempt all the five

questions. First question will be of 14 marks and shall contain 7 short answer type questions. These

questions shall be spread over the whole syllabus. Remaining four questions shall be of 14 marks

each and will be set unit wise, where internal option among 2 questions will be given. These

questions shall judge both theoretical and applied knowledge of students. Case studies may also be

given as questions.

Teaching practices: Class Room lectures, Assignment. Cases, Discussions and Seminars

Unit- I

Sales Management: Concept, Objectives and Functions; Personal Selling: Concept &

Importance, Personal Selling process; Theories of selling. Sales Management challenges in

tourism.

Unit – II

Sales Planning: Importance, Approaches and Process of Sales Planning; Sales Forecasting; Sales

Budgeting, Sales Organization: Purpose, Principles and Process of setting up a Sales

Organization; Sales Organization Structures; Organizing for Global Sales, Determining Size of

Sales Force.

Unit- III

Managing the Sales Force: Recruitment, Selection, Training, Compensation, Motivation,

Territory and Quota Management: Need, Procedure for setting up Sales Territories; Time

Management; Sales Quotas: Purpose, Types of Quotas, Administration of Sales Quota.

Unit -IV

10-A(795)

Control process: Analysis of Sales Volume, Cost and Profitability; Management of Sales Expenses,

Evaluating Sale-Force Performance; Ethical Issues in Sales Management. Role of IT in Sales

Management.

Suggested Readings:

1. Spiro, Stanton &Rich (2003), Management of a Sales Force11th edition. Tata McGraw-Hill:

2. Still, Cundiff&Govoni(2007), Sales Management, 5th edition ,Sage publications New Delhi.

3. Tapan k. Panda, Sunil Sahadev (2008), Sales and Distribution Management, Oxford University

Press, New Delhi.

4. Tanner, Honeycutt, Erffmeyer (2009), Sales Management, Pearson Education India, New Delhi.

5. S.A.Chunawala (2008), Sales and Distribution Management, Himalaya Publishing House, New

Delhi.

6. Gupta, S. L.(2005), Sales and Distribution Management , Excel Books, 1st Edition, New Delhi.

7. David Jobber, Geoff Lancaster (2003), Selling and Sales Management, Pearson Education India,

New Delhi.

10-A(796)

Five year Integrated Course in Graphics and Animation Scheme of Examination

w.e.f. 2011-2012 B.Sc. (I-VI Sem) & M.Sc. (VII-X Sem)

First Semester TT T P PP I IA

IA T T

BGA-101 Communicative Hindi 80 - 20 100 BGA-102 History of Art 80 - 20 100 BGA-103 Fundamentals, Principle and Aesthetic 80 - 20 100 BGA-104 Fundamentals of Computer 50 30 20 100 BGA-105 Drawing - 80 20 100

Second Semester

BGA-201 Communicative English 80 - 20 100 BGA-202 Science of Communication 80 - 20 100 BGA-203 Videography 50 30 20 100 BGA-204 Basics of Graphics Designing 50 30 20 100 BGA-205 Clay Modeling - 80 20 100 Environment Studies* 75 25 - 100

Third Semester BGA-301 History and Principle of Animation 80 - 20 100 BGA-302 Basics of Script writing 50 30 20 100 BGA-303 Animation Production Process 50 30 20 100 BGA-304 Basics of 2D Animation and 50 30 20 100 BGA-305 Character Designing - 80 20 100

Forth Semester

BGA-401 Animation Technology 80 - 20 100 BGA-402 Basics of Television Graphics 50 30 20 100 BGA-403 Basics of Visual Effects 50 30 20 100 BGA-404 Basics of Editing(Audio -Video) 50 30 20 100 BGA-405 Project-I : 2D Film Production** - 80 20 100

Fifth Semester BGA-501 Basics of Sound 50 30 20 100 BGA-502 Basics of Web Designing 50 30 20 100 BGA-503 Basics of 3D MAX 50 30 20 100 BGA-504 Basics of VFX- SFX 50 30 20 100 BGA-505 Project-II:Mix Media Production** - 80 20 100

Sixth Semester BGA-601 Business Management and Budgeting 80 - 20 100 BGA-602 Communication Skills and Personality 50 30 20 100 BGA-603 Basics of MAYA 50 30 20 100 BGA-604 Any one of the following:

(i) Gaming (ii) Art Direction (iii) Add Film (iv) Script Writing (v) Television Production

50 30 20 100

BGA-605 Project-III: 3D Film Production** - 80 20 100

10-A(797)

BGA 601 (Sixth Semester) Business Management and Budgeting

Total Marks: 100, Theory Marks: 80, Internal Assessment: 20 Time: 3 Hrs. (for theory paper)

Question paper for each theory paper will have two questions from each of the four units. Students will be required to answer any one Question from each unit. Unit V of the Question paper will have six questions out of which the student will require to answer any four Questions. Each unit will carry equal marks. Students have the option to attempt questions either in Hindi or English but within an answer to a question the language should be pure and correct. .

Unit-I Business Concepts and Characteristics, Business Ownership: Sole Proprietorship, Partnership, Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) and Joint Stock Company. Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises: Meaning, Characteristics and Significance. Business Risk: Meaning, Nature and Methods of Risk Handling. Emerging Trends in Business: Outsourcing, e-business and Corporate social corporibility.

Unit-II

Management: Concept, nature and importance. Management principles, Management process and functions. Decision making Concept, Process and Techniques of decision making Planning: Nature, importance and steps in planning. Management by objectives (MBO). Organizing : Concept, types and importance. Delegation of Authority, Staffing and factors affecting staffing. Unit-III

Directing: Concept, importance and principles Leadership: Concept and importance. Motivation : meaning, nature & importance. Controlling: essentials of effective external system.

Unit-IV Budgeting: Concept of budgeting and budgetary control. Budget: Nature, purpose and classification of budgets. Cash Budgeting, Flexible Budgeting, Zero base budgeting and performance budgeting. ---------------------------------- References Books : Basu, C.R. Business Organization and Management: Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. Gupta, C.B., Business Organization and Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi. Koonty, H. and Waibrich, I. Essential of Management, McGraw Hill International,Singapore. Khan, M.Y. and Jain, P.K. , Management Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi

10-A(798)

BGA 602 (Sixth Semester)

Communication Skill and Personality Development Total Marks: 100, Theory Marks: 50, Practical Marks: 30, Internal Assessment: 20 Time: 3 Hrs. (for theory paper)

Question paper for each theory paper will have two questions from each of the four units. Students will be required to answer any one Question from each unit. Unit V of Question paper will have six questions our of which the student will require to answer any four Questions. Each unit will carry equal marks. Students have the option to answer some questions in Hindi and others in English but within an answer to a question the language should be pure (not bilingual) and correct.

Unit

Introduction to Communication Meaning of Communication Scope of Communication Definition of Communication Process of Communication Communication Barriers

Unit

Kind of Communication

Oral Communication Meaning, Nature and Scope of Communication Principle of effective Oral Communication Written Communication

Traditional Media Fine Arts, Three stages in arts, Fine arts. and Realism The Cultural, Physical, intellectual, emotional, Moral, Spiritual Value of Music, Drama, Folk Dance, Radio

Unit 3

Skills

Presentation Skill Writing Skill Reading Skill Speaking Skill Listing Skill Planning and writing doc Unit 4

Personality Development

Personal Grooming Etiquettes Manners Role Play Related to Animation Industry and Company Individual Presentation on currant development Animation development Presentation on any 2 Animated Film

___________________

10-A(799)

Books Recommended: Rayudu, Dr. C.S, Media & Communication Management, Himalya Publishing House,

Delhi, Reprint 2005 Rao, Dr.Nagaeshwer, Dr, Rajendra P.Das, Communication Skill V, Reprint 2005 Rai, Urmila, S.M., Rai, Business Communication, Himalaya Publishing House, New

Delhi, 2010. Baran, Stanley J., Dennis K. Davis, Mass Communication Theory Foundations,

Ferment and Future, Thomson, United States, Reprint 2007, ISBN: 81-315-0192-2. Onkar, R.M., Personality Development and Career Management (A Pragmatic

Perspective), S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2008, ISBN: 81-219-2903-2. Sabharwal, D.P., Personality Development Hand Book, Parkash Books India Pvt., Ltd.,

New Delhi-110002, 2009, ISBN: 978-817234-3170.

10-A(800)

BGA 603 (Sixth Semester) Basics of MAYA

Total Marks: 100, Theory Marks: 50, Practical Marks: 30, Internal Assessment: 20 Time: 3 Hrs. (for theory paper)

Time: 3 Hrs. (for theory paper)Question paper for each theory paper will have two questions from each of the four units. Students will be required to answer any one Question from each unit. Unit V of the Question paper will have six questions out of which the student will require to answer any four Questions. Each unit will carry equal marks. Students have the option to attempt questions either in Hindi or English but within an answer to a question the language should be pure and correct.

Unit 1

Concept of 3D Animation Introduction to Maya Basics of Maya user Interface

Modeling Intro to tools and techniques of Modeling Modeling of Props and Environment Modeling of vehicle Theory and Technique of High and Low Poly Modeling Detail Anatomy Study of Human Creature / Four leg character mesh flow study

Unit 2 Texturing

Materials and Shaders Basics of Photoshop Basics of UVs.and layout technique

Props Texturing Using Photoshop Realistic Texturing Using Photoshop

Lighting Theory of Light Different types of Light in Maya Lighting Menus and Windows

Mental Ray for Maya Lighting Exterior and Interior Lighting Render Settings for Lighting

Unit 3 Rigging

Concept of Rigging Techniques of Rigging Deformation of Objects

Concept of Inverse and Forward Kinematics

Organic Rigging Non Organic Rigging

Unit 4 Animation

Concept of Animation Technique of Animation Principles of Animation Props Animation Concept of Acting

Character Animation Facial Animation Lip Sync Animation Reference Books

Reference Books: Gibbs, John Kundert & Peter Lee, Mastering Maya 3, BPB Publications, B-14, Connaught Place, New Delhi-110001, 2001, Original ISBN: 0-7821-2835-1

10-A(801)

BGA-604(i) (Sixth Semester) Gaming



Unit I Gaming: meaning and defining Origin and growth of gaming Classification of gaming Generating innovative ideas for gaming Preparing proposal for the new game

Unit II

Pre production – concept and idea Production requirements and planning Creating game characters & background Designing various levels of game

Unit III

Production – plan implementation, Tracking progress and plan testing Voice over: planning, choosing studio, casting actors, Recording voice over Music composition & selection for background Working on a gaming project

Unit IV Post production- mixing and mastering Quality assurance testing Structure and functioning of gaming company: Game production team members and responsibilities

10-A(802)

BGA-604(ii) (Sixth Semester) Art Direction



Unit-I

What is Art Direction

History of Art Direction

Importance of art direction in Animation

Unit-IIs

Basics of Direction

Role and Responsibility of Art Director

Unit-III

Assessment of Needs and Wishes Resource Gathering and Understanding What Ingredients Will Be Required

Design Creation and the Prototype

Unit-IV

Production and Testing

Final Delivery

Maintenance (optional, yet recommended)

10-A(803)

BGA-604(iii) (Sixth Semester) Add Film



Unit-I

Introduction Meaning and Definition of advertising, Scope of advertising, Add film meaning and scope Story development / treatment / scriptment / plot points / structure Writing the screenplay Re-writing the screenplay Financing the movie

Unit-II

Pre-production Casting Locations Shot list Script breakdown Tech scout Scheduling by the 1st AD Production design

Unit-III

Production Principal photography – setting up Rehearsal Setting up shots Checking the take

Unit-IV Post-production

Editing Sound mixing Music Test screenings Movie distribution

10-A(804)

BGA-604(iv) (Sixth Semester) Script Writing



Unit I

Script: concept, forms and utility Basic principles of writing a script Importance of script writing

Unit II Writer and Producer Researching the script Story Development Plots in script

Unit III

Descriptive writing Analytical writing Writing fiction Writing script for video programmes Concept of Shooting Script

Unit IV Script writing for theatre Script writing for Advertising Script writing for planetarium

10-A(805)

BGA-604(v) (Sixth Semester)

Television Production Total Marks: 100, Theory Marks: 50, Practical Marks: 30, Internal Assessment: 20 Time: 3 Hrs. (for theory paper)


Unit – I

Concept and idea generation Writing proposal or synopsis for production Various stages of production: pre production, production, post production

Unit-II Television program formats – fictional and non fictional programs Production team members and their responsibilities Production equipment: camera, mixer, lights, recorders

Unit-III Make up for television: materials and application Scenic design and props Television graphics Concept of virtual studio

Unit-IV

Planning and production of programs in studio Single and multi-camera shooting Editing process

10-A(806)

BGA 605 (Sixth Semester) 3D Film Production

Project

Total Marks: 100, Practical Marks: 80, Internal Assessment: 20 Time: 3 Hrs.

Students have to prepare 3D Animation Film Project in campus under the supervision of concerned teacher and submit the project report 20 days prior to theory examination of the semester. Students will have to follow the following steps while preparing the project:

Script Writing

Story board

Voice Recording

Final Animation